• 当前位置:卡耐基范文网 > 创业常识 > 开店手续 > 最新高考英语阅读理解练习题
  • 最新高考英语阅读理解练习题

  • 来源:卡耐基范文网
  • 时间:2020-06-28
  • 移动端:最新高考英语阅读理解练习题
  • 最新高考英语阅读理解练习题 本文简介:

    最新高考英语阅读理解练习题高考英语阅读练习(052)Youwouldliketotakegoodphotographsofreal-lifesituationsbutyouhavefewideasforpictures.Isuggestyoulookaroundyou.Theeverydayworl

    最新高考英语阅读理解练习题 本文内容:

    最新高考英语阅读理解练习题
    高考英语阅读练习(052)
    You
    would
    like
    to
    take
    good
    photographs
    of
    real-life
    situations
    but
    you
    have
    few
    ideas
    for
    pictures.
    I
    suggest
    you
    look
    around
    you.
    The
    everyday
    world
    is
    full
    of
    scenes
    being
    played
    by
    an
    ever-changing
    group
    of
    actors.
    You
    probably
    passed
    a
    dozen
    picture
    situations
    without
    noticing
    on
    your
    way
    to
    work
    this
    morning.
    The
    realistic
    approach
    to
    photograph
    has
    been
    perfected
    in
    the
    past
    by
    such
    maters
    as
    Henri
    Cartier-Bresson
    and
    Bill
    Brandt.
    But
    while
    you
    can
    learn
    a
    great
    deal
    from
    looking
    at
    the
    work
    of
    others,
    any
    success
    you
    can
    hope
    to
    achieve
    in
    this
    field
    has
    to
    come
    from
    developing
    an
    individual
    approach.
    The
    main
    requirement
    for
    any
    photographer
    has
    little
    to
    do
    with
    technical
    matters.
    You
    must
    develop
    an
    awareness
    of
    the
    world
    around
    you
    and
    the
    people
    who
    live
    in
    it,
    and
    you
    should
    learn
    to
    notice
    when
    a
    situation
    may
    develop
    to
    a
    point
    where
    you
    will
    be
    able
    to
    take
    a
    good
    picture.
    Those
    who
    have
    reached
    this
    happy
    state
    will
    be
    prepared
    when
    that
    moment
    comes,
    and
    will
    simply
    raise
    their
    camera
    quickly
    and
    shoot.
    Others
    who
    are
    not
    so
    aware
    will
    be
    struggling
    with
    camera
    cases
    and
    lens
    caps.
    Film
    manufactures
    must
    be
    delighted
    at
    the
    thought
    of
    the
    inexperienced
    photographer
    setting
    out
    in
    search
    of
    the
    right
    situation
    and
    the
    right
    moment.
    Many
    miles
    of
    costly
    material
    have
    passed
    through
    thousands
    of
    cameras
    as
    this
    endless
    search
    continues.
    But
    although
    a
    lot
    of
    this
    waste
    must
    be
    put
    down
    to
    inexperience,
    you"ll
    find
    that
    even
    the
    professionals
    have
    to
    use
    a
    lot
    of
    film
    when
    they
    are
    out
    shooting.
    Not
    every
    shot
    is
    going
    to
    be
    a
    winner.
    If
    you
    look
    at
    the
    work
    of
    even
    the
    best
    photographers,
    you"ll
    notice
    dozens
    of
    pictures
    have
    had
    to
    be
    taken
    only
    because
    they
    lead
    up
    to
    the
    successful
    shot
    of
    a
    situation
    that
    the
    photographer
    has
    obviously
    been
    observing
    through
    the
    lens.
    You
    may
    find
    that
    you
    have
    taken
    one
    or
    two
    pictures
    after
    the
    right
    moment
    has
    passed
    as
    well.
    There
    is
    seldom
    more
    than
    one
    shot
    which
    stands
    out.
    There
    is
    just
    one
    point
    where
    it
    all
    comes
    together,
    and
    you
    often
    have
    to
    waste
    film
    to
    catch
    that
    precious
    moment.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    one
    can
    become
    a
    better
    real-life
    photographer
    by
    _____.
    A.
    watching
    other
    photographers
    at
    work
    B.
    learning
    about
    famous
    photographers
    C.
    just
    taking
    a
    great
    many
    photographs
    D.
    developing
    skills
    and
    ideas
    for
    yourself
    2.
    The
    writer
    thinks
    that
    a
    photographer
    is
    required
    to
    _____.
    A.
    go
    out
    and
    search
    for
    unusual
    situations
    B.
    be
    highly
    skilled
    in
    camera
    techniques
    C.
    be
    able
    to
    tell
    when
    a
    good
    situation
    might
    come
    D.
    have
    a
    camera
    which
    is
    easy
    and
    quick
    to
    use
    3.
    Most
    likely,
    to
    catch
    the
    right
    moment,
    one
    must
    _____.
    A.
    take
    pictures
    without
    too
    much
    preparation
    B.
    take
    a
    whole
    series
    of
    similar
    pictures
    C.
    take
    great
    care
    to
    set
    up
    the
    situation
    D.
    take
    one
    picture
    just
    at
    the
    right
    moment
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    The
    waste
    of
    film
    in
    photography
    is
    essential
    to
    the
    production
    of
    good
    pictures.
    B.
    Film
    manufacturers
    usually
    enjoy
    pictures
    by
    inexperienced
    photographers.
    C.
    Only
    amateur
    photographers
    waste
    film
    in
    taking
    pictures.
    D.
    The
    waste
    of
    film,
    which
    is
    the
    result
    of
    poor
    choice
    of
    subject,
    is
    expensive
    and
    unnecessary.
    5.
    The
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    part
    of
    a
    book
    of
    camera
    instruction
    B.
    an
    advertisement
    for
    film
    C.
    a
    history
    of
    photography
    D.
    an
    introduction
    to
    photography
    KEY:
    1.
    D
    2.
    C
    3.
    B
    4.
    A
    5.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(053)
    The
    Komodo
    lizard
    is
    the
    world"s
    largest
    lizard(蜥蜴).
    It
    was
    not
    discovered
    until
    this
    century
    and
    was
    named
    only
    in
    1921.
    It
    was
    formerly
    found
    on
    three
    Indonesian
    islands:
    Komodo,
    Rintja
    and
    Flores.
    By
    the
    1930"s,
    in
    spite
    of
    government
    protection,
    the
    population
    of
    this
    great
    lizard
    had
    been
    reduced
    to
    a
    few
    hundred.
    It
    was,
    however,
    still
    found
    on
    the
    three
    main
    islands
    and
    there
    were
    still
    lizards
    of
    over
    4
    metres
    in
    length.
    By
    1963,
    after
    a
    period
    of
    only
    fifty
    years
    since
    its
    discovery,
    the
    entire
    population
    was
    based
    on
    Komodo.
    It
    is
    now
    unusual
    to
    see
    one
    as
    long
    as
    3
    metres.
    The
    lizard"s
    normal
    food
    consists
    mainly
    of
    wild
    goats
    and
    pigs,
    animals
    which
    the
    islanders
    also
    hunt.
    This,
    of
    course,
    means
    that
    the
    lizard
    often
    gets
    too
    little
    to
    eat.
    It
    will
    certainly
    die
    out
    soon
    its
    hunting
    and
    breeding(繁殖)
    grounds
    are
    protected
    more
    effectively.
    1.
    The
    Indonesian
    government
    _____
    Komodo
    lizards.
    A.
    thought
    it
    necessary
    to
    protect
    B.
    didn"t
    think
    it
    necessary
    to
    protect
    C.
    reduced
    the
    number
    of
    D.
    killed
    a
    few
    hundred
    of
    2.
    By
    1963,
    the
    Komodo
    lizard
    could
    be
    found
    _____.
    A.
    on
    three
    islands
    B.
    only
    on
    Komodo
    Island
    C.
    only
    on
    Rintja
    Island
    D.
    only
    on
    Flores
    Island
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    FALSE?
    A.
    There
    were
    only
    a
    few
    hundred
    Komodo
    lizards
    living
    by
    the
    1930s.
    B.
    Nobody
    knew
    the
    present
    name
    of
    the
    animal
    before
    1921.
    C.
    The
    islanders
    hunt
    too
    many
    Komodo
    lizards.
    D.
    The
    writer
    worries
    about
    the
    Komodo
    lizards. 
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    B
    3.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(054)
    In
    the
    United
    States,
    it
    is
    not
    customary
    to
    telephone
    someone
    very
    early
    in
    the
    morning.
    If
    you
    telephone
    him
    early
    in
    the
    day,
    while
    he
    is
    shaving
    or
    having
    breakfast,
    the
    time
    of
    the
    call
    shows
    that
    the
    matter
    is
    very
    important
    and
    requires
    immediate
    attention.
    The
    same
    meaning
    is
    attached
    to
    telephone
    calls
    made
    after
    11:00
    p.m.
    If
    someone
    receives
    a
    call
    during
    sleeping
    hours,
    he
    assumes(想当然地认为)it"s
    a
    matter
    of
    life
    and
    death.
    The
    time
    chosen
    for
    the
    call
    communicates
    its
    importance.
    In
    social
    life,
    time
    plays
    a
    very
    important
    part.
    In
    the
    U.S.A.
    guests
    tend
    to
    feel
    they
    are
    not
    highly
    regarded
    if
    the
    attention
    to
    a
    dinner
    party
    is
    extended
    only
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    the
    party
    date.
    But
    it
    is
    not
    true
    in
    all
    countries.
    In
    other
    areas
    of
    the
    world,
    it
    may
    be
    considered
    foolish
    to
    make
    an
    appointment
    too
    far
    in
    advance
    because
    plans
    which
    are
    made
    for
    a
    date
    more
    than
    a
    week
    away
    tend
    to
    be
    forgotten.
    The
    meaning
    of
    time
    differs
    in
    different
    parts
    of
    the
    world.
    Thus,
    misunderstandings
    arise(产生)
    between
    people
    from
    cultures
    that
    treat
    time
    differently.
    Promptness
    is
    valued
    highly
    in
    American
    life,
    for
    example.
    If
    people
    are
    not
    prompt,
    they
    may
    be
    regarded
    as
    impolite
    or
    not
    fully
    responsible.
    In
    the
    U.S.
    no
    one
    would
    think
    if
    keeping
    a
    business
    associate
    waiting
    for
    an
    hour.
    It
    would
    be
    too
    impolite.
    A
    person
    who
    is
    5
    minutes
    late
    is
    expected
    to
    make
    a
    short
    apology.
    If
    he
    is
    less
    than
    5
    minutes
    late,
    he
    will
    say
    a
    few
    words
    of
    explanation,
    though
    perhaps
    he
    will
    not
    complete
    the
    sentence.
    1.
    "The
    same
    meaning
    is
    attached
    to
    telephone
    calls
    after
    11:00p.m."
    Here
    "attached"
    means
    _____.
    A.
    taken
    B.
    drawn
    C.
    given
    D.
    shown
    2.
    According
    to
    this
    passage,
    time
    plays
    an
    important
    role
    in
    _____.
    A.
    everyday
    life
    B.
    school
    life
    C.
    communication
    D.
    private
    life
    3.
    The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    The
    Voice
    of
    Time
    B.
    The
    Importance
    of
    Time
    C.
    The
    Importance
    of
    an
    Announcement
    D.
    Time
    and
    Tide
    Wait
    for
    No
    Man
    4.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    the
    author
    of
    the
    article
    may
    agree
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following
    statements?
    A.
    It
    is
    appropriate
    to
    send
    your
    invitation
    cards
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    a
    dinner
    party
    date
    in
    U.S.A..
    B.
    It
    may
    be
    appropriate
    to
    send
    your
    invitation
    cards
    to
    your
    guests
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    a
    dinner
    party
    date
    in
    some
    countries.
    C.
    It
    is
    best
    for
    one
    to
    make
    telephone
    calls
    at
    eight
    because
    it
    costs
    much
    less.
    D.
    If
    one
    is
    less
    than
    5
    minutes
    late,
    he
    has
    to
    make
    a
    short
    apology.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    C
    3.
    A
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(055)
    Trees
    should
    only
    be
    pruned(修剪)
    when
    there
    is
    a
    good
    and
    clear
    reason
    fordoing
    so
    and,
    fortunately,
    the
    number
    of
    such
    reasons
    is
    small.
    Pruning
    involves
    the
    cutting
    away
    of
    overgrown
    and
    unwanted
    branches,
    and
    the
    inexperienced
    gardener
    can
    be
    encouraged
    by
    the
    thought
    that
    more
    damage
    results
    from
    doing
    it
    unnecessarily
    than
    from
    leaving
    the
    tree
    to
    grow
    in
    its
    own
    way.
    First,
    pruning
    may
    be
    done
    to
    make
    sure
    that
    trees
    have
    a
    desired
    shape
    or
    size.
    The
    object
    may
    be
    to
    get
    a
    tree
    of
    the
    right
    height,
    and
    at
    the
    same
    time
    to
    help
    the
    growth
    of
    small
    side
    branches
    which
    will
    thicken
    its
    appearance
    or
    give
    it
    a
    special
    shape.
    Secondly,
    pruning
    may
    be
    done
    to
    make
    the
    tree
    healthier.
    You
    may
    cur
    out
    diseased
    or
    dead
    wood,
    or
    branches
    that
    are
    rubbing
    against
    each
    other
    and
    thus
    causing
    wounds.
    The
    health
    of
    a
    tree
    may
    be
    encouraged
    by
    removing
    the
    branches
    that
    are
    locking
    up
    the
    centre
    and
    so
    preventing
    the
    free
    movement
    of
    air.
    One
    result
    of
    pruning
    is
    that
    an
    open
    would
    is
    left
    on
    the
    tree
    and
    this
    provides
    an
    easy
    entry(进入)for
    diseases,
    but
    it
    is
    a
    wound
    that
    will
    heal.
    Often
    there
    is
    a
    race
    between
    the
    healing
    and
    the
    disease
    as
    to
    whether
    the
    tree
    will
    live
    or
    die,
    or
    that
    there
    is
    a
    period
    when
    the
    tree
    is
    at
    risk.
    It
    should
    be
    the
    aim
    of
    every
    gardener
    to
    reduce
    the
    risk
    as
    far
    as
    possible.
    It
    is
    essential
    to
    make
    the
    area
    which
    has
    been
    pruned
    smooth
    and
    clean,
    for
    healing
    will
    be
    slowed
    down
    by
    roughness.
    You
    should
    allow
    the
    cut
    surface
    to
    dry
    for
    a
    few
    hours
    and
    then
    paint
    it
    with
    one
    of
    the
    substances
    available
    from
    garden
    shops
    produced
    especially
    for
    this
    purpose.
    Pruning
    is
    usually
    done
    in
    winter,
    for
    then
    you
    can
    see
    the
    shape
    of
    the
    tree
    clearly
    without
    the
    interference(干扰)
    from
    the
    leaves
    and
    it
    is,
    too,
    very
    unlikely
    that
    the
    cuts
    you
    make
    will
    bleed.
    If
    this
    does
    happen,
    it
    is,
    of
    course,
    impossible
    to
    paint
    them
    properly.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    article,_____.
    A.
    damage
    is
    done
    to
    a
    tree
    if
    it
    is
    left
    to
    grow
    in
    its
    own
    way
    B.
    pruning
    is
    necessary
    when
    a
    tree
    has
    grown
    into
    a
    definite
    shape
    or
    size
    C.
    diseased
    or
    dead
    branches
    should
    be
    cut
    away
    if
    they
    are
    found
    to
    rub
    against
    each
    other
    D.
    growing
    side
    branches
    often
    prevent
    air
    from
    moving
    freely
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    usually
    causes
    a
    tree
    to
    grow
    unhealthy?
    A.
    Giving
    a
    tree
    a
    special
    shape
    and
    a
    definite
    height
    B.
    Removing
    small
    side
    branches
    and
    making
    a
    tree
    look
    less
    thick
    C.
    Allowing
    too
    many
    branches
    to
    grow
    in
    the
    middle
    D.
    Having
    a
    tree
    surrounded
    by
    many
    other
    trees
    3.
    The
    writer
    suggests
    that
    pruning
    should
    be
    done
    in
    winter
    because
    _____.
    A.
    the
    cut
    surface
    gets
    dry
    more
    quickly
    B.
    open
    wounds
    on
    the
    tree
    run
    the
    less
    risk
    of
    getting
    diseased
    C.
    a
    gardener
    can
    do
    pruning
    more
    easily
    D.
    wounds
    painted
    with
    a
    special
    substance
    heal
    quickly
    4.
    The
    writer"s
    purpose
    when
    writing
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    to
    describe
    how
    pruning
    a
    tree
    is
    done
    B.
    to
    discuss
    different
    ways
    of
    pruning
    trees
    C.
    to
    give
    practical
    instructions
    for
    pruning
    a
    tree
    D.
    to
    explain
    how
    a
    tree
    wound
    gets
    diseased
    and
    heals
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(056)
    They
    think
    they"re
    lucky
    that
    they"re
    living
    and
    it"s
    Christmas
    again.
    They
    can"t
    see
    that
    we
    live
    on
    a
    dirty
    street
    in
    a
    shabby
    house
    among
    people
    who
    aren"t
    much
    good.
    Johnny
    and
    the
    children
    can"t
    see
    how
    pitiful
    it
    is
    that
    our
    neighbors
    have
    to
    make
    happiness
    out
    of
    this
    filth
    and
    dirt.
    My
    children
    must
    get
    out
    of
    this.
    But
    how?
    The
    money
    that
    we"ve
    saved
    isn"t
    nearly
    enough.
    The
    McGaritys
    have
    money,
    but
    they
    are
    show-offs
    with
    it.
    The
    McGarity
    girl
    just
    yesterday
    stood
    out
    there
    in
    the
    street
    eating
    from
    a
    bag
    of
    cookies
    while
    a
    ring
    of
    hungry
    children
    watched
    her.
    I
    saw
    those
    children
    looking
    at
    her
    and
    crying
    in
    their
    hearts,
    and
    when
    she
    couldn"t
    eat
    any
    more,
    she
    shrew
    the
    rest
    down
    the
    sewer(阴沟).
    Miss
    Jackson
    who
    teaches
    at
    the
    Settlement
    House
    isn"t
    rich,
    but
    she
    knows
    things.
    She
    understands
    people.
    Her
    eyes
    look
    straight
    into
    yours
    when
    she
    talks
    with
    you.
    Everybody
    else
    here
    looks
    away
    because
    they"re
    ashamed(羞愧)of
    their
    lives.
    I"d
    like
    to
    see
    the
    children
    be
    like
    Miss
    Jackson
    when
    they
    grew
    up.
    1.
    The
    writer
    suggests
    that
    her
    family
    _____.
    A.
    is
    extremely
    rich
    B.
    is
    an
    unhappy
    one
    C.
    are
    accustomed
    to
    their
    life
    D.
    long
    for
    a
    change
    in
    their
    life
    2.
    The
    McGarity
    girl
    is
    characterized
    as
    _____.
    A.
    selfish
    and
    cruel
    B.
    friendly
    and
    kind
    C.
    beautiful
    and
    proud
    D.
    rich
    and
    nice
    3.
    The
    writer
    thinks
    Miss
    Jackson
    is
    _____.
    A.
    poor
    but
    brave
    B.
    friendly
    and
    talkative
    C.
    a
    teacher
    liked
    by
    all
    her
    pupils
    D.
    an
    example
    her
    children
    should
    follow
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    The
    writer"s
    family
    is
    the
    poorest
    one
    on
    that
    street.
    B.
    Watching
    the
    rich
    girl
    eating
    cookies,
    those
    hungry
    children
    cried.
    C.
    The
    writer
    wants
    to
    move
    out
    of
    that
    district.
    D.
    The
    writer
    hopes
    that
    her
    children
    will
    become
    teachers.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    A
    3.
    D
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(057)
    The
    Komodo
    lizard
    is
    the
    world"s
    largest
    lizard(蜥蜴).
    It
    was
    not
    discovered
    until
    this
    century
    and
    was
    named
    only
    in
    1921.
    It
    was
    formerly
    found
    on
    three
    Indonesian
    islands:
    Komodo,
    Rintja
    and
    Flores.
    By
    the
    1930"s,
    in
    spite
    of
    government
    protection,
    the
    population
    of
    this
    great
    lizard
    had
    been
    reduced
    to
    a
    few
    hundred.
    It
    was,
    however,
    still
    found
    on
    the
    three
    main
    islands
    and
    there
    were
    still
    lizards
    of
    over
    4
    metres
    in
    length.
    By
    1963,
    after
    a
    period
    of
    only
    fifty
    years
    since
    its
    discovery,
    the
    entire
    population
    was
    based
    on
    Komodo.
    It
    is
    now
    unusual
    to
    see
    one
    as
    long
    as
    3
    metres.
    The
    lizard"s
    normal
    food
    consists
    mainly
    of
    wild
    goats
    and
    pigs,
    animals
    which
    the
    islanders
    also
    hunt.
    This,
    of
    course,
    means
    that
    the
    lizard
    often
    gets
    too
    little
    to
    eat.
    It
    will
    certainly
    die
    out
    soon
    its
    hunting
    and
    breeding(繁殖)
    grounds
    are
    protected
    more
    effectively.
    1.
    The
    Indonesian
    government
    _____
    Komodo
    lizards.
    A.
    thought
    it
    necessary
    to
    protect
    B.
    didn"t
    think
    it
    necessary
    to
    protect
    C.
    reduced
    the
    number
    of
    D.
    killed
    a
    few
    hundred
    of
    2.
    By
    1963,
    the
    Komodo
    lizard
    could
    be
    found
    _____.
    A.
    on
    three
    islands
    B.
    only
    on
    Komodo
    Island
    C.
    only
    on
    Rintja
    Island
    D.
    only
    on
    Flores
    Island
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    FALSE?
    A.
    There
    were
    only
    a
    few
    hundred
    Komodo
    lizards
    living
    by
    the
    1930s.
    B.
    Nobody
    knew
    the
    present
    name
    of
    the
    animal
    before
    1921.
    C.
    The
    islanders
    hunt
    too
    many
    Komodo
    lizards.
    D.
    The
    writer
    worries
    about
    the
    Komodo
    lizards. 
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    B
    3.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(058)
    In
    the
    United
    States,
    it
    is
    not
    customary
    to
    telephone
    someone
    very
    early
    in
    the
    morning.
    If
    you
    telephone
    him
    early
    in
    the
    day,
    while
    he
    is
    shaving
    or
    having
    breakfast,
    the
    time
    of
    the
    call
    shows
    that
    the
    matter
    is
    very
    important
    and
    requires
    immediate
    attention.
    The
    same
    meaning
    is
    attached
    to
    telephone
    calls
    made
    after
    11:00
    p.m.
    If
    someone
    receives
    a
    call
    during
    sleeping
    hours,
    he
    assumes(想当然地认为)it"s
    a
    matter
    of
    life
    and
    death.
    The
    time
    chosen
    for
    the
    call
    communicates
    its
    importance.
    In
    social
    life,
    time
    plays
    a
    very
    important
    part.
    In
    the
    U.S.A.
    guests
    tend
    to
    feel
    they
    are
    not
    highly
    regarded
    if
    the
    attention
    to
    a
    dinner
    party
    is
    extended
    only
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    the
    party
    date.
    But
    it
    is
    not
    true
    in
    all
    countries.
    In
    other
    areas
    of
    the
    world,
    it
    may
    be
    considered
    foolish
    to
    make
    an
    appointment
    too
    far
    in
    advance
    because
    plans
    which
    are
    made
    for
    a
    date
    more
    than
    a
    week
    away
    tend
    to
    be
    forgotten.
    The
    meaning
    of
    time
    differs
    in
    different
    parts
    of
    the
    world.
    Thus,
    misunderstandings
    arise(产生)
    between
    people
    from
    cultures
    that
    treat
    time
    differently.
    Promptness
    is
    valued
    highly
    in
    American
    life,
    for
    example.
    If
    people
    are
    not
    prompt,
    they
    may
    be
    regarded
    as
    impolite
    or
    not
    fully
    responsible.
    In
    the
    U.S.
    no
    one
    would
    think
    if
    keeping
    a
    business
    associate
    waiting
    for
    an
    hour.
    It
    would
    be
    too
    impolite.
    A
    person
    who
    is
    5
    minutes
    late
    is
    expected
    to
    make
    a
    short
    apology.
    If
    he
    is
    less
    than
    5
    minutes
    late,
    he
    will
    say
    a
    few
    words
    of
    explanation,
    though
    perhaps
    he
    will
    not
    complete
    the
    sentence.
    1.
    "The
    same
    meaning
    is
    attached
    to
    telephone
    calls
    after
    11:00p.m."
    Here
    "attached"
    means
    _____.
    A.
    taken
    B.
    drawn
    C.
    given
    D.
    shown
    2.
    According
    to
    this
    passage,
    time
    plays
    an
    important
    role
    in
    _____.
    A.
    everyday
    life
    B.
    school
    life
    C.
    communication
    D.
    private
    life
    3.
    The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    The
    Voice
    of
    Time
    B.
    The
    Importance
    of
    Time
    C.
    The
    Importance
    of
    an
    Announcement
    D.
    Time
    and
    Tide
    Wait
    for
    No
    Man
    4.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    the
    author
    of
    the
    article
    may
    agree
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following
    statements?
    A.
    It
    is
    appropriate
    to
    send
    your
    invitation
    cards
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    a
    dinner
    party
    date
    in
    U.S.A..
    B.
    It
    may
    be
    appropriate
    to
    send
    your
    invitation
    cards
    to
    your
    guests
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    a
    dinner
    party
    date
    in
    some
    countries.
    C.
    It
    is
    best
    for
    one
    to
    make
    telephone
    calls
    at
    eight
    because
    it
    costs
    much
    less.
    D.
    If
    one
    is
    less
    than
    5
    minutes
    late,
    he
    has
    to
    make
    a
    short
    apology.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    C
    3.
    A
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(059)
    Trees
    should
    only
    be
    pruned(修剪)
    when
    there
    is
    a
    good
    and
    clear
    reason
    fordoing
    so
    and,
    fortunately,
    the
    number
    of
    such
    reasons
    is
    small.
    Pruning
    involves
    the
    cutting
    away
    of
    overgrown
    and
    unwanted
    branches,
    and
    the
    inexperienced
    gardener
    can
    be
    encouraged
    by
    the
    thought
    that
    more
    damage
    results
    from
    doing
    it
    unnecessarily
    than
    from
    leaving
    the
    tree
    to
    grow
    in
    its
    own
    way.
    First,
    pruning
    may
    be
    done
    to
    make
    sure
    that
    trees
    have
    a
    desired
    shape
    or
    size.
    The
    object
    may
    be
    to
    get
    a
    tree
    of
    the
    right
    height,
    and
    at
    the
    same
    time
    to
    help
    the
    growth
    of
    small
    side
    branches
    which
    will
    thicken
    its
    appearance
    or
    give
    it
    a
    special
    shape.
    Secondly,
    pruning
    may
    be
    done
    to
    make
    the
    tree
    healthier.
    You
    may
    cur
    out
    diseased
    or
    dead
    wood,
    or
    branches
    that
    are
    rubbing
    against
    each
    other
    and
    thus
    causing
    wounds.
    The
    health
    of
    a
    tree
    may
    be
    encouraged
    by
    removing
    the
    branches
    that
    are
    locking
    up
    the
    centre
    and
    so
    preventing
    the
    free
    movement
    of
    air.
    One
    result
    of
    pruning
    is
    that
    an
    open
    would
    is
    left
    on
    the
    tree
    and
    this
    provides
    an
    easy
    entry(进入)for
    diseases,
    but
    it
    is
    a
    wound
    that
    will
    heal.
    Often
    there
    is
    a
    race
    between
    the
    healing
    and
    the
    disease
    as
    to
    whether
    the
    tree
    will
    live
    or
    die,
    or
    that
    there
    is
    a
    period
    when
    the
    tree
    is
    at
    risk.
    It
    should
    be
    the
    aim
    of
    every
    gardener
    to
    reduce
    the
    risk
    as
    far
    as
    possible.
    It
    is
    essential
    to
    make
    the
    area
    which
    has
    been
    pruned
    smooth
    and
    clean,
    for
    healing
    will
    be
    slowed
    down
    by
    roughness.
    You
    should
    allow
    the
    cut
    surface
    to
    dry
    for
    a
    few
    hours
    and
    then
    paint
    it
    with
    one
    of
    the
    substances
    available
    from
    garden
    shops
    produced
    especially
    for
    this
    purpose.
    Pruning
    is
    usually
    done
    in
    winter,
    for
    then
    you
    can
    see
    the
    shape
    of
    the
    tree
    clearly
    without
    the
    interference(干扰)
    from
    the
    leaves
    and
    it
    is,
    too,
    very
    unlikely
    that
    the
    cuts
    you
    make
    will
    bleed.
    If
    this
    does
    happen,
    it
    is,
    of
    course,
    impossible
    to
    paint
    them
    properly.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    article,_____.
    A.
    damage
    is
    done
    to
    a
    tree
    if
    it
    is
    left
    to
    grow
    in
    its
    own
    way
    B.
    pruning
    is
    necessary
    when
    a
    tree
    has
    grown
    into
    a
    definite
    shape
    or
    size
    C.
    diseased
    or
    dead
    branches
    should
    be
    cut
    away
    if
    they
    are
    found
    to
    rub
    against
    each
    other
    D.
    growing
    side
    branches
    often
    prevent
    air
    from
    moving
    freely
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    usually
    causes
    a
    tree
    to
    grow
    unhealthy?
    A.
    Giving
    a
    tree
    a
    special
    shape
    and
    a
    definite
    height
    B.
    Removing
    small
    side
    branches
    and
    making
    a
    tree
    look
    less
    thick
    C.
    Allowing
    too
    many
    branches
    to
    grow
    in
    the
    middle
    D.
    Having
    a
    tree
    surrounded
    by
    many
    other
    trees
    3.
    The
    writer
    suggests
    that
    pruning
    should
    be
    done
    in
    winter
    because
    _____.
    A.
    the
    cut
    surface
    gets
    dry
    more
    quickly
    B.
    open
    wounds
    on
    the
    tree
    run
    the
    less
    risk
    of
    getting
    diseased
    C.
    a
    gardener
    can
    do
    pruning
    more
    easily
    D.
    wounds
    painted
    with
    a
    special
    substance
    heal
    quickly
    4.
    The
    writer"s
    purpose
    when
    writing
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    to
    describe
    how
    pruning
    a
    tree
    is
    done
    B.
    to
    discuss
    different
    ways
    of
    pruning
    trees
    C.
    to
    give
    practical
    instructions
    for
    pruning
    a
    tree
    D.
    to
    explain
    how
    a
    tree
    wound
    gets
    diseased
    and
    heals
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(060)
    They
    think
    they"re
    lucky
    that
    they"re
    living
    and
    it"s
    Christmas
    again.
    They
    can"t
    see
    that
    we
    live
    on
    a
    dirty
    street
    in
    a
    shabby
    house
    among
    people
    who
    aren"t
    much
    good.
    Johnny
    and
    the
    children
    can"t
    see
    how
    pitiful
    it
    is
    that
    our
    neighbors
    have
    to
    make
    happiness
    out
    of
    this
    filth
    and
    dirt.
    My
    children
    must
    get
    out
    of
    this.
    But
    how?
    The
    money
    that
    we"ve
    saved
    isn"t
    nearly
    enough.
    The
    McGaritys
    have
    money,
    but
    they
    are
    show-offs
    with
    it.
    The
    McGarity
    girl
    just
    yesterday
    stood
    out
    there
    in
    the
    street
    eating
    from
    a
    bag
    of
    cookies
    while
    a
    ring
    of
    hungry
    children
    watched
    her.
    I
    saw
    those
    children
    looking
    at
    her
    and
    crying
    in
    their
    hearts,
    and
    when
    she
    couldn"t
    eat
    any
    more,
    she
    shrew
    the
    rest
    down
    the
    sewer(阴沟).
    Miss
    Jackson
    who
    teaches
    at
    the
    Settlement
    House
    isn"t
    rich,
    but
    she
    knows
    things.
    She
    understands
    people.
    Her
    eyes
    look
    straight
    into
    yours
    when
    she
    talks
    with
    you.
    Everybody
    else
    here
    looks
    away
    because
    they"re
    ashamed(羞愧)of
    their
    lives.
    I"d
    like
    to
    see
    the
    children
    be
    like
    Miss
    Jackson
    when
    they
    grew
    up.
    1.
    The
    writer
    suggests
    that
    her
    family
    _____.
    A.
    is
    extremely
    rich
    B.
    is
    an
    unhappy
    one
    C.
    are
    accustomed
    to
    their
    life
    D.
    long
    for
    a
    change
    in
    their
    life
    2.
    The
    McGarity
    girl
    is
    characterized
    as
    _____.
    A.
    selfish
    and
    cruel
    B.
    friendly
    and
    kind
    C.
    beautiful
    and
    proud
    D.
    rich
    and
    nice
    3.
    The
    writer
    thinks
    Miss
    Jackson
    is
    _____.
    A.
    poor
    but
    brave
    B.
    friendly
    and
    talkative
    C.
    a
    teacher
    liked
    by
    all
    her
    pupils
    D.
    an
    example
    her
    children
    should
    follow
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    The
    writer"s
    family
    is
    the
    poorest
    one
    on
    that
    street.
    B.
    Watching
    the
    rich
    girl
    eating
    cookies,
    those
    hungry
    children
    cried.
    C.
    The
    writer
    wants
    to
    move
    out
    of
    that
    district.
    D.
    The
    writer
    hopes
    that
    her
    children
    will
    become
    teachers.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    A
    3.
    D
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(061)
    For
    those
    of
    you
    who
    where
    born
    in
    the
    year
    of
    the
    pig,
    good
    luck
    and
    much
    success!
    This
    is
    your
    year.
    When
    talking
    to
    a
    Westerner,
    however,
    you’ve
    got
    to
    be
    a
    little
    careful
    when
    you
    talk
    about
    pigs.
    Chinese
    people
    view
    the
    pig
    as
    a
    smart
    (聪明)
    and
    prosperous
    (rich,
    lucky)
    animal.
    Western
    ideas
    tend
    to
    be
    a
    little
    more
    negative(否定的).
    A
    pig
    in
    the
    West
    is
    seen
    as
    a
    dirty,
    lazy,
    and
    fat
    animal.
    If
    anyone
    ever
    called
    you
    a
    pig,
    you
    wouldn’t
    be
    smiling.
    When
    a
    person
    doesn’t
    like
    someone,
    sometimes
    he
    will
    call
    that
    person
    a
    pig.
    If
    you
    ever
    meet
    a
    Westerner
    who
    was
    born
    in
    the
    year
    of
    the
    pig,
    don’t
    say,
    “Oh,
    you’re
    a
    pig!”
    Most
    Westerners
    will
    be
    understanding.
    They
    will
    be
    sure
    that
    you
    made
    some
    kind
    of
    a
    mistake.
    However,
    don’t
    take
    any
    chances.
    You
    might
    just
    offend(触怒)someone
    who
    does
    not
    share
    your
    positive(积极)ideas
    about
    pigs.
    1.
    You
    gave
    to
    be
    careful
    when
    you
    talk
    to
    a
    Westerner
    about
    pigs
    because______.
    A.
    they
    worship
    pigs
    best
    of
    all
    B.
    they
    consider
    pigs
    as
    bad
    animals
    C.
    they
    aren’t
    used
    to
    talking
    about
    pigs.
    D.
    they
    don’t
    like
    the
    topic
    about
    pigs
    at
    all
    2.
    According
    to
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    see
    that
    Chinese
    people
    think
    of
    the
    pig
    as
    a
    _______
    animal.
    A.
    clever
    B.
    rich
    C.
    good
    D.
    all
    the
    above
    3.
    A
    Westerner
    will
    call
    someone
    a
    pig
    if
    he
    _______
    that
    man.
    A.
    dislikes
    B.
    is
    afraid
    of
    C.
    looks
    up
    to
    D.
    makes
    fun
    of
    4.
    When
    you
    call
    a
    Westerner
    a
    pig,
    who
    was
    born
    in
    the
    year
    of
    the
    pig,
    most
    of
    them
    ___________.
    A.
    will
    be
    angry
    B.
    will
    be
    very
    surprised
    C.
    can
    forgive(原谅)
    D.
    may
    quarrel
    with
    you
    5.From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    conclude
    that
    _________.
    A.
    different
    people
    have
    different
    ideas
    about
    the
    same
    thing
    B.
    Westerners
    do
    not
    like
    pigs
    as
    much
    as
    the
    Chinese
    C.
    in
    general,
    Westerners
    and
    the
    Chinese
    don’t
    like
    pigs
    D.
    all
    of
    the
    Chinese
    like
    pigs
    better
    than
    Westerners
    Keys:
    1-5
    BDACA
    高考英语阅读练习(062)
    My
    elder
    brother
    Steve,
    in
    the
    absence
    of
    my
    father
    who
    died
    when
    I
    was
    six,
    gave
    me
    important
    lessons
    in
    values
    that
    helped
    me
    grow
    into
    an
    adult.
    For
    instance,
    Steve
    taught
    me
    to
    face
    the
    results
    of
    my
    behavior.
    Once
    when
    I
    returned
    in
    tears
    from
    a
    Saturday
    baseball
    game,
    it
    was
    Steve
    who
    took
    the
    time
    to
    ask
    me
    what
    happened.
    When
    I
    explained
    that
    my
    baseball
    had
    soared
    through
    Mrs.
    Holt’s
    basement
    window,
    breaking
    the
    glass
    with
    a
    crash,
    Steve
    encouraged
    me
    to
    confess
    to
    her.
    After
    all,
    I
    should
    have
    been
    playing
    in
    the
    park
    down
    Fifth
    Street
    and
    not
    in
    the
    path
    between
    buildings.
    Although
    my
    knees
    knocked
    as
    I
    explained
    to
    Mrs.
    Holt,
    I
    offered
    to
    pay
    for
    the
    window
    from
    my
    pocket
    money
    if
    she
    would
    return
    my
    ball.
    I
    also
    learned
    from
    Steve
    that
    personal
    property
    is
    a
    sacred
    thing.
    After
    I
    found
    a
    shiny
    silver
    pen
    in
    my
    fifth-grade
    classroom,
    I
    wanted
    to
    keep
    it,
    but
    Steve
    explained
    that
    it
    might
    be
    important
    to
    someone
    else
    in
    spite
    of
    the
    fact
    that
    it
    had
    little
    value.
    He
    reminded
    me
    of
    how
    much
    I’d
    hate
    to
    lose
    to
    someone
    else
    the
    small
    dog
    my
    father
    carved
    from
    a
    piece
    of
    cheap
    wood.
    I
    returned
    the
    pen
    to
    my
    teacher,
    Mrs.
    Davids,
    and
    still
    remembered
    the
    smell
    of
    her
    perfume
    as
    she
    patted
    me
    on
    my
    shoulder.
    Yet
    of
    all
    the
    instructions
    Steve
    gave
    me,
    his
    respect
    for
    life
    is
    the
    most
    vivid
    in
    my
    mind.
    When
    I
    was
    twelve
    I
    killed
    and
    old
    brown
    sparrow
    in
    the
    yard
    with
    a
    BB
    gun.
    Excited
    with
    my
    accuracy,
    I
    screamed
    to
    Steve
    to
    come
    from
    the
    house
    to
    take
    a
    look.
    I
    shall
    never
    forget
    the
    way
    he
    stood
    for
    a
    long
    moment
    and
    stared
    at
    the
    bird
    on
    the
    ground.
    Then
    in
    a
    dead,
    quiet
    voice,
    he
    asked,
    “Did
    it
    hurt
    you
    first,
    Mark?”
    I
    didn’t
    know
    what
    to
    answer.
    He
    continued
    with
    his
    eyes
    firm,
    “The
    only
    time
    you
    should
    even
    think
    of
    hurting
    a
    living
    thing
    is
    if
    it
    hurts
    you
    first.
    And
    then
    you
    think
    a
    long,
    long
    time.

    I
    really
    felt
    terrible
    then,
    but
    that
    moment
    stands
    out
    as
    the
    most
    important
    lesson
    my
    brother
    taught
    me.
    1.
    What
    is
    the
    main
    subject
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.
    The
    relationship
    between
    mark
    and
    Steve.
    B.
    The
    important
    lesson
    Mark
    learned
    in
    school
    C.
    Steve’s
    important
    role
    in
    mark’s
    growing
    process.
    D.
    Mark
    and
    Steve’s
    respect
    for
    living
    things.
    2.
    It
    can
    be
    inferred
    from
    the
    passage
    that
    when
    mark
    confessed
    to
    Mrs.
    Holt,
    __________.
    A.
    he
    felt
    surprised
    B.
    he
    was
    light-hearted
    C.
    he
    felt
    frightened
    D.
    he
    knelt
    before
    her
    3.
    In
    the
    story
    about
    the
    pen,
    which
    of
    the
    following
    lessons
    did
    Steve
    teach
    his
    brother?
    A.
    Respect
    for
    personal
    property.
    B.
    Respect
    for
    life.
    C.
    Sympathy
    for
    people
    with
    problems.
    D.
    The
    value
    of
    honesty.
    4.
    According
    to
    the
    writer,
    which
    was
    the
    most
    important
    lesson
    Steve
    taught
    his
    young
    brother?
    A.
    Respect
    for
    living
    things.
    B.
    Responsibility
    for
    one’s
    actions.
    C.
    The
    value
    of
    the
    honesty.
    D.
    Care
    for
    the
    property
    of
    others.
    5.
    Which
    of
    the
    follow
    is
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Mark
    was
    still
    a
    boy
    when
    he
    wrote
    this
    passage.
    B.
    Mark
    lost
    the
    small
    dog
    his
    father
    carved.
    C.
    When
    a
    living
    thing
    hurts
    you,
    you
    should
    kill
    it.
    D.
    Even
    if
    a
    living
    thing
    hurts
    you,
    you
    should
    not
    kill
    it
    without
    hesitation.
    Keys:
    1-5
    CCAAD
    高考英语阅读练习(063)
    The
    Man
    of
    Many
    Secretsharry
    Houdini
    was
    one
    of
    the
    greatest
    American
    entertainers
    in
    the
    theater
    this
    century.
    He
    was
    a
    man
    famous
    for
    his
    escapes
    form
    prison
    cells,
    from
    wooden
    boxes
    floating
    in
    rivers,
    from
    locked
    tanks
    full
    of
    water.
    He
    appeared
    in
    theaters
    all
    over
    Europe
    and
    America.
    Crowds
    came
    to
    see
    the
    great
    Houdini
    and
    his
    “magic”
    tricks.
    Of
    course,
    his
    secret
    was
    not
    magic,
    or
    supernatural
    powers.
    It
    was
    simply
    strength.
    He
    had
    the
    ability
    to
    move
    his
    toes
    as
    well
    as
    he
    moved
    his
    fingers.
    He
    could
    move
    his
    body
    into
    almost
    any
    position
    he
    wanted.
    Houdini
    started
    working
    in
    the
    entertainment
    world
    when
    he
    was
    17,
    in
    1891.
    He
    and
    his
    brother
    Theo
    performed
    card
    tricks
    in
    a
    club
    in
    New
    York.
    they
    called
    themselves
    the
    Houdini
    Brothers.
    When
    Harry
    married
    in
    1894,
    he
    and
    his
    wife
    Bess
    worked
    together
    as
    magician
    and
    assistant.
    But
    for
    a
    long
    time
    they
    were
    not
    very
    successful.
    Then
    Harry
    performed
    his
    first
    prison
    escape,
    in
    Chicago
    in
    1898.
    harry
    persuaded
    a
    detective
    to
    let
    him
    try
    to
    escape
    from
    the
    prison,
    and
    he
    invited
    the
    local
    newspapermen
    to
    watch.
    It
    was
    the
    publicity
    that
    came
    from
    this
    the
    started
    Hayyr
    Houdini’s
    success.
    Harry
    had
    fingers
    trained
    to
    escape
    from
    handcuffs
    and
    toes
    trained
    to
    escape
    from
    ankle
    chains.
    But
    his
    biggest
    secret
    was
    how
    he
    unlocked
    the
    prison
    doors.
    Every
    time
    he
    went
    into
    the
    prison
    cell,
    Bess
    gave
    him
    a
    kiss
    for
    good
    luckand
    a
    small
    skeleton
    key,
    which
    is
    a
    key
    that
    fits
    many
    locks,
    passed
    quickly
    from
    her
    mouth
    to
    his.
    Harry
    used
    these
    prison
    escapes
    to
    build
    his
    fame.
    he
    arranged
    to
    escape
    from
    the
    local
    jail
    of
    every
    town
    he
    visited.
    In
    the
    afternoon,
    the
    people
    of
    the
    town
    would
    read
    about
    it
    in
    their
    local
    newspapers,
    and
    in
    the
    evening
    every
    seat
    in
    the
    local
    theater
    would
    be
    full.
    What
    was
    the
    result?
    World-wide
    fame,
    and
    a
    name
    remembered
    today.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    houdini’s
    success
    in
    prison
    escapes
    depends
    on
    ________.
    A.
    his
    magic
    tricks
    and
    unhuman
    powers
    B.
    his
    special
    tricks
    and
    a
    skeleton
    key
    C.
    his
    unusual
    ability
    and
    a
    skeleton
    key
    D.
    his
    unhuman
    talents
    and
    magic
    tricks
    2.
    In
    the
    fourth
    paragraph,
    the
    world
    “this”
    refers
    to
    ________.
    A.
    the
    previous
    sentence
    B.
    “the
    publicity”
    C.
    the
    place,
    Chicago
    D.
    the
    time,
    1898
    3.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    how
    did
    Houdini
    get
    the
    key
    which
    helped
    him
    unlock
    prison
    doors?
    A.
    He
    took
    the
    key
    from
    his
    wife’s
    mouth.
    B.
    His
    wife
    passed
    it
    to
    his
    hand
    while
    kissing
    him.
    C.
    His
    wife
    gave
    it
    to
    him
    by
    a
    magic
    trick.
    D.
    He
    got
    it
    in
    his
    mouth
    through
    a
    kiss
    by
    the
    wife.
    4.
    It
    can
    be
    inferred
    from
    the
    passage
    that
    Houdini
    became
    famous
    _________.
    A.
    when
    he
    was
    about
    24
    B.
    when
    he
    was
    about
    17
    C.
    after
    the
    year
    1894
    D.
    before
    the
    year
    1898
    5.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    true?
    A.
    Houdini
    used
    to
    be
    a
    famous
    magician
    in
    the
    USA.
    B.
    Houdini
    was
    first
    recognized
    widely
    in
    Chicago.
    C.
    Houdini
    entered
    the
    entertainment
    world
    together
    with
    his
    wife.
    D.
    Houdini
    owed
    his
    great
    success
    to
    his
    small
    skeleton
    key.
    Keys:
    1-5
    CADAB
    高考英语阅读练习(064)
    How
    often
    one
    hears
    children
    wishing
    they
    were
    grown
    up,
    and
    old
    people
    wishing
    they
    were
    young
    again.
    Each
    age
    has
    its
    pleasures
    and
    its
    pains,
    and
    the
    happiest
    person
    is
    the
    one
    who
    enjoys
    what
    each
    age
    gives
    him
    without
    wasting
    his
    time
    in
    useless
    regrets.
    Childhood
    is
    a
    time
    when
    there
    are
    few
    responsibilities
    to
    make
    life
    difficult.
    If
    a
    child
    has
    good
    parents,
    he
    is
    fed,
    looked
    after
    and
    loved,
    whatever
    he
    may
    do.
    It
    is
    impossible
    that
    he
    will
    ever
    again
    in
    his
    life
    be
    given
    so
    much
    without
    having
    to
    do
    anything
    in
    return.
    in
    addition,
    life
    is
    always
    presenting
    new
    things
    to
    the
    child-things
    that
    have
    lost
    their
    interest
    for
    older
    people
    because
    they
    are
    too
    well-known.
    But
    a
    child
    has
    his
    parents,
    he
    is
    not
    so
    free
    to
    do
    what
    he
    wishes
    to
    do;
    he
    is
    continually
    being
    told
    not
    to
    do
    things
    or
    being
    punished
    for
    what
    he
    has
    done
    wrong.
    When
    the
    young
    man
    starts
    to
    earn
    his
    own
    living,
    he
    can
    no
    longer
    expect
    others
    to
    pay
    for
    his
    food,
    his
    clothes,
    and
    his
    room,
    but
    has
    to
    work
    if
    he
    wants
    to
    live
    comfortably.
    If
    he
    spends
    most
    of
    his
    time
    playing
    about
    in
    the
    way
    that
    he
    used
    to
    as
    a
    child,
    he
    will
    go
    hungry.
    And
    if
    he
    breaks
    the
    laws
    of
    society
    as
    he
    used
    to
    break
    the
    laws
    of
    his
    parents,
    he
    may
    go
    to
    prison.
    If,
    however,
    he
    works
    hard,
    keeps
    out
    of
    trouble
    and
    has
    good
    health,
    he
    can
    have
    the
    great
    happiness
    of
    building
    up
    for
    himself
    his
    own
    position
    in
    society.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    second
    paragraph,
    the
    writer
    thinks
    that
    _______.
    A.
    life
    for
    a
    child
    is
    comparatively
    easy
    B.
    a
    child
    is
    always
    loved
    whatever
    he
    does
    C.
    if
    much
    is
    given
    to
    a
    child,
    he
    must
    do
    something
    in
    return
    D.
    only
    children
    are
    interested
    in
    life
    2.
    After
    a
    child
    grows
    up,
    he
    ________.
    A.
    will
    have
    little
    time
    playing
    B.
    has
    to
    be
    successful
    in
    finding
    a
    job
    C.
    can
    still
    ask
    for
    help
    in
    time
    of
    trouble
    D.
    should
    be
    able
    to
    take
    care
    of
    himself
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    NOT
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    People
    are
    often
    satisfied
    with
    their
    life.
    B.
    Life
    is
    less
    interesting
    for
    old
    people.
    C.
    Adults
    are
    freer
    to
    do
    what
    they
    want
    to
    do.
    D.
    Adults
    should
    no
    longer
    rely
    on
    others.
    4.
    The
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    passage
    is
    _________.
    A.
    life
    is
    not
    enjoyable
    since
    each
    age
    has
    some
    pains
    B.
    young
    men
    can
    have
    the
    greatest
    happiness
    if
    they
    work
    hard
    C.
    childhood
    is
    the
    move
    enjoyable
    time
    in
    one’s
    life
    D.
    one
    is
    the
    happiest
    if
    he
    can
    make
    good
    use
    of
    each
    age
    in
    his
    life
    5.
    The
    paragraph
    following
    this
    passage
    will
    most
    probably
    discuss
    _________.
    A.
    examples
    of
    successful
    young
    men
    B.
    how
    to
    build
    up
    one’s
    position
    in
    society
    C.
    joys
    and
    pains
    of
    old
    people
    D.
    what
    to
    do
    when
    one
    has
    problems
    in
    life
    Keys:
    1-5
    ADADC
    高考英语阅读练习(065)
    There
    is
    a
    definite
    possibility
    that
    the
    climate
    of
    the
    world
    may
    be
    changing.
    Some
    scientists
    imagine
    that
    this
    could
    even
    mean
    the
    beginning
    of
    another
    ice
    age.
    The
    effects
    of
    such
    a
    change
    in
    climate
    on
    the
    human
    population
    of
    the
    world
    would
    be
    startling(惊人的).
    Recent
    research
    suggests
    that
    the
    general
    warming
    tend
    of
    the
    past
    hundred
    years
    or
    so
    may
    be
    coming
    to
    an
    end.
    During
    the
    past
    ten
    years,
    meteorologists
    tell
    us
    the
    average
    temperature
    of
    the
    earth
    has
    dropped
    about
    one
    degree
    Fahrenheit.
    This
    does
    not
    seem
    like
    much,
    but
    it
    could
    have
    effects
    on
    wind
    and
    rain
    patterns
    which
    influence
    the
    overall
    weather
    picture.
    If
    these
    patterns
    change
    a
    lot,
    it
    could
    mean
    that
    certain
    regions
    of
    the
    world
    may
    continue
    to
    have
    long
    droughts
    while
    others
    will
    possibly
    suffer
    from
    widespread
    flooding.
    What
    regulates(调节)the
    climate
    is
    not
    exactly
    known.
    Meteorologists
    believe
    that
    clouds
    may
    be
    an
    important
    factor
    in
    regulating
    the
    amount
    of
    solar(太阳的)heat
    held
    by
    the
    earth,
    which
    in
    turn
    determines
    he
    temperature
    of
    the
    planet.
    Another
    possibility
    is
    that
    man’s
    industrial
    and
    agricultural
    methods
    may
    be
    affecting
    the
    natural
    weather
    patterns.
    However,
    the
    weather
    is
    not
    understood
    well
    enough
    for
    scientists
    to
    say
    for
    certain
    what
    is
    happening
    to
    the
    climate
    and
    what
    side
    effects
    this
    will
    actually
    have
    on
    the
    word’s
    population.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    text,
    the
    climate
    of
    the
    world
    seems
    to
    ______.
    A.
    be
    getting
    colder
    B.
    be
    getting
    warmer
    C.
    remain
    the
    same
    in
    the
    past
    ten
    years
    D.
    have
    good
    effects
    on
    the
    world’s
    population
    2.
    According
    to
    what
    you
    have
    read,
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    turn?
    A.
    Man’s
    activities
    have
    no
    effect
    on
    the
    climate.
    B.
    Another
    ice
    age
    will
    come
    soon.
    C.
    People
    don’t
    care
    about
    the
    changing
    climate.
    D.
    Scientists
    are
    not
    yet
    sure
    about
    the
    reason
    for
    the
    changing
    climate.
    3.
    A
    meteorologist
    is
    a
    person
    who
    ______.
    A.
    reads
    weather
    forecasts
    on
    radio
    or
    television
    B.
    thinks
    there
    will
    be
    another
    ice
    age
    C.
    studies
    and
    knows
    about
    the
    weather
    D.
    believes
    there
    will
    be
    widespread
    flooding
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    may
    be
    factors
    that
    affect
    the
    natural
    weather
    patterns?
    A.
    Clouds
    B.
    The
    amount
    of
    heat
    the
    earth
    receives
    C.
    Man’s
    industrial
    and
    agricultural
    methods
    D.
    All
    of
    the
    above
    5.
    A
    best
    title
    for
    the
    text
    would
    be
    ______.
    A.
    Droughts
    and
    Floods
    B.
    Meteorologists
    C.
    Changing
    Climate
    D.
    Solar
    Heat
    Keys:
    1-5
    ADCDC
    高考英语阅读练习(066)
    Ternang,
    Mon,
    More
    than
    10,000
    people
    were
    made
    homeless
    in
    Ternang
    after
    six
    days
    of
    continuous
    heavy
    rain.
    The
    wooden
    bridge
    across
    the
    river
    has
    been
    swept
    away.
    The
    town
    is
    cut
    by
    flood
    eaters.
    At
    the
    fifth
    mile
    Jalan
    Tengku,
    the
    water
    is
    now
    two
    metres
    deep.
    It
    is
    closed
    to
    all
    traffic.
    Motorists
    going
    south
    are
    advised
    to
    use
    Jalan
    Hisamuddin.
    Flooding
    first
    appeared
    at
    mid-afternoon
    yesterday
    along
    the
    river
    banks.
    People
    moving
    to
    higher
    ground
    were
    just
    in
    time
    to
    escape
    from
    the
    flood.
    Most
    of
    the
    people
    had
    to
    leave
    their
    possessions
    behind.
    Helped
    by
    the
    army,
    police,
    Red
    Cross
    Society,
    the
    whole
    town
    was
    moved
    out
    of
    danger.
    They
    are
    now
    housed
    near
    the
    town
    of
    Tulang.
    “Everything
    possible
    is
    being
    done
    to
    help
    the
    unfortunate
    people,”
    a
    government
    official
    said,
    “In
    fact,
    money,
    food
    and
    clothing
    have
    begun
    to
    come
    in
    from
    organizations
    and
    people.

    According
    to
    the
    latest
    reports
    it
    is
    still
    raining
    heavily
    at
    Ternang.
    The
    whole
    town
    is
    expected
    to
    be
    totally
    covered.
    So
    far
    nobody
    has
    been
    reported
    dead.
    1.
    Jalan
    Tengku
    was
    closed
    because
    ______.
    A.
    it
    had
    broken
    up
    B.
    the
    bridge
    over
    it
    had
    been
    washed
    away
    C.
    it
    was
    deeply
    flooded
    D.
    it
    was
    damaged
    2.
    Motorists
    to
    the
    south
    were
    advised
    to
    ______.
    A.
    return
    home
    B.
    avoid
    all
    roads
    C.
    move
    the
    higher
    ground
    D.
    travel
    by
    Jalan
    Hisamuddin
    3.
    The
    flood
    victims
    first
    escaped
    to
    ______.
    A.
    the
    nearby
    town
    B.
    Jalan
    Hisamuddin
    C.
    higher
    ground
    D.
    Tulang
    4.
    The
    people
    are
    staying
    ______.
    A.
    at
    a
    newspaper
    office
    B.
    at
    a
    police
    station
    C.
    in
    Tulang
    D.
    on
    their
    roof
    tops
    5.
    The
    flood
    is
    expected
    to
    ______.
    A.
    go
    down
    B.
    cause
    more
    rain
    C.
    become
    worse
    D.
    kill
    more
    people
    Keys:
    1-5
    CDCCC
    高考英语阅读练习(067)
    A
    bar
    owner
    locked
    up
    the
    door
    of
    his
    bar
    at
    2
    a.
    m.
    and
    went
    home
    to
    sleep.
    He
    had
    been
    in
    bed
    only
    a
    few
    minutes
    when
    the
    phone
    rang.
    “What
    time
    do
    you
    open
    up
    in
    the
    morning?”
    he
    heard
    an
    obviously
    drunken
    man
    ask.
    The
    owner
    was
    so
    angry
    that
    he
    slammed
    down(砰地放下)the
    receiver
    and
    went
    back
    to
    bed.
    A
    few
    minutes
    later
    there
    was
    another
    call
    and
    he
    heard
    the
    same
    voice
    ask
    the
    same
    question.
    “Listen,”
    the
    owner
    shouted,
    “there
    is
    no
    sense
    in
    asking
    me
    what
    time
    I
    open
    because
    I
    wouldn’t
    let
    a
    person
    in
    your
    condition
    in.
    “I
    don’t
    want
    to
    get
    in,”
    the
    caller
    interrupted,
    “I
    want
    to
    get
    out.

    1.
    The
    business
    ended
    ______.
    A.
    at
    two
    o’clock
    before
    midnight
    B.
    at
    two
    o’clock
    after
    noon
    C.
    at
    two
    o’clock
    after
    midnight
    D.
    at
    two
    o’clock
    in
    the
    afternoon
    2.
    It’s
    clear
    that
    the
    caller
    ______.
    A.
    enjoyed
    himself
    very
    much
    B.
    had
    eaten
    a
    lot
    of
    rice
    C.
    drank
    a
    lot
    of
    wine
    D.
    wanted
    to
    drink
    more
    3.
    At
    first
    the
    owner
    thought
    ______.
    A.
    the
    caller
    wanted
    to
    drink
    in
    his
    bar
    B.
    it
    too
    late
    to
    enter
    his
    bar
    C.
    it
    impolite
    to
    phone
    him
    at
    that
    time
    D.
    it
    of
    no
    sense
    to
    ask
    him
    such
    a
    question
    4.
    “What
    time
    do
    you
    open
    up?”
    shows
    that
    ______.
    A.
    the
    caller
    didn’t
    know
    the
    exact
    time
    when
    that
    bar
    opened
    B.
    the
    caller
    was
    anxious
    to
    go
    to
    his
    bar
    to
    drink
    C.
    the
    caller
    left
    something
    in
    the
    bar
    and
    he
    wanted
    to
    find
    it
    D.
    the
    caller
    wanted
    to
    get
    out
    5.
    The
    drunken
    man
    made
    two
    phone
    calls
    to
    the
    bar
    owner
    ______.
    A.
    at
    a
    phone
    booth(公用电话间)
    B.
    inside
    the
    bar
    C.
    at
    home
    D.
    in
    a
    hotel
    Keys:
    1-5
    CCADB
    高考英语阅读练习(068)
    The
    human
    nose
    has
    given
    to
    the
    language
    of
    the
    world
    many
    interesting
    expressions.
    Of
    course,
    this
    is
    not
    surprising.
    Without
    the
    nose,
    we
    could
    not
    breathe
    or
    smell.
    It
    is
    the
    part
    of
    the
    face
    that
    gives
    a
    person
    special
    character.
    Cyrano
    de
    Bergerac
    said
    that
    a
    large
    nose
    showed
    a
    great
    man
    courageous,
    manly
    and
    wise.
    A
    famous
    woman
    poet
    wished
    that
    she
    had
    two
    noses
    to
    smell
    a
    rose!
    Blaise
    Pascal
    made
    an
    interesting
    remark
    about
    Cleopatra’s(古埃及王后)nose.
    If
    it
    had
    been
    shorter,
    he
    said,
    it
    would
    have
    changed
    the
    whole
    face
    of
    the
    world!
    Man’s
    nose
    has
    had
    an
    important
    role
    in
    his
    imagination.
    Man
    has
    referred
    to
    the
    nose
    in
    many
    ways
    to
    express
    his
    emotions.
    Expressions
    dealing
    with
    the
    nose
    refer
    to
    human
    weakness:
    anger,
    pride,
    jealousy(嫉妒)and
    revenge(报复).
    In
    English
    there
    are
    a
    number
    of
    phrases
    about
    the
    nose.
    For
    example,
    to
    hold
    up
    one’s
    nose
    expressed
    a
    basic
    human
    feelingpride.
    People
    can
    hold
    up
    their
    hoses
    at
    people,
    things
    and
    places.
    The
    phrase,
    to
    be
    led
    around
    by
    the
    nose,
    shows
    man’s
    weakness.
    A
    person
    who
    is
    led
    around
    by
    the
    nose
    lets
    other
    people
    control
    him.
    On
    the
    other
    hand,
    a
    person
    who
    follows
    his
    nose
    lets
    his
    instinct(本能)guide
    him.
    There
    are
    a
    number
    of
    others.
    However,
    it
    should
    be
    as
    plain
    as
    the
    nose
    on
    your
    face
    that
    the
    nose
    in
    more
    than
    an
    organ
    for
    breathing
    and
    smelling.
    1.
    The
    passage
    is
    about
    ______.
    A.
    an
    organ,
    with
    which
    people
    can
    breathe
    and
    smell
    B.
    the
    nose,
    which
    gives
    different
    and
    useful
    expressions
    C.
    the
    nose
    giving
    a
    person
    special
    character
    D.
    interesting
    remarks
    about
    the
    nose
    made
    by
    some
    people
    2.
    From
    the
    passage
    we
    know
    ______.
    A.
    “Cleopatra’s
    nose”
    changed
    the
    whole
    face
    of
    the
    world
    indeed.
    B.
    Cleopatra
    had
    a
    strong
    will
    to
    change
    the
    whole
    look
    of
    the
    world
    C.
    Cleopatra’s
    nose
    was
    not
    short
    D.
    Cleopatra
    hoped
    that
    people
    would
    change
    the
    whole
    face
    of
    the
    world
    3.
    The
    nose
    expressed
    ______.
    A.
    some
    human
    weakness
    or
    other
    B.
    people’s
    shortcomings
    C.
    people’s
    different
    emotions
    D.
    human
    feeling
    in
    bad
    sense
    4.
    A
    person
    who
    follows
    his
    nose
    ______.
    A.
    won’t
    take
    others’
    advice
    B.
    is
    easily
    controlled
    by
    others
    C.
    is
    weak-minded
    D.
    has
    will
    of
    his
    own
    5.
    How
    many
    expressions
    about
    the
    nose
    are
    mentioned
    in
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Two
    B.
    Three
    C.
    Four
    D.
    Five
    Keys:
    1-5
    BCCDC
    高考英语阅读练习(069)
    A
    thief
    entered
    the
    bedroom
    of
    the
    30th
    President
    of
    the
    United
    States,
    who
    met
    him
    and
    helped
    him
    escape
    punishment.
    The
    event
    happened
    in
    the
    early
    morning
    hours
    in
    one
    of
    the
    first
    days
    when
    Calvin
    Coolidge
    came
    into
    power,
    late
    in
    August,
    1923.He
    and
    his
    family
    were
    living
    in
    the
    same
    third-floor
    suite
    (套房)
    at
    the
    Willard
    Hotel
    in
    Washington
    that
    they
    had
    occupied
    several
    years
    before.The
    former
    President’s
    wife
    was
    still
    living
    in
    the
    White
    House.
    Coolidge
    awoke
    to
    see
    a
    stranger
    go
    through
    his
    clothes,
    remove
    a
    wallet
    and
    a
    watch
    chain.
    Coolidge
    spoke,
    “I
    wish
    you
    wouldn’t
    take
    that.”
    The
    thief,
    gaining
    his
    voice,
    said,
    “Why?”
    “I
    don’t
    mean
    the
    watch
    and
    chain,
    only
    the
    charm
    (表坠).Take
    it
    near
    the
    window
    and
    read
    what
    is
    impressed
    on
    its
    back,

    the
    President
    said.
    The
    thief
    read,
    “Presented
    to
    Calvin
    Coolidge.”
    “Are
    you
    President
    Coolidge
    ?

    he
    asked.
    The
    President
    answered,
    “Yes,
    and
    the
    House
    of
    Representatives
    (众议院)
    gave
    me
    that
    watch
    charm.I’m
    fond
    of
    it.It
    would
    do
    you
    no
    good.You
    want
    money.Let’s
    talk
    this
    over.”
    Holding
    up
    the
    wallet,
    the
    young
    man
    said
    in
    a
    low
    vioce,
    “I’ll
    take
    this
    and
    leave
    everything
    else.”
    Coolidge,
    knowing
    there
    was
    $80
    in
    it,
    persuaded
    the
    young
    man
    to
    sit
    down
    and
    talk.He
    told
    the
    President
    he
    and
    his
    college
    roommate
    had
    overspent
    during
    their
    holiday
    and
    did
    not
    have
    enough
    money
    to
    pay
    their
    hotel
    bill.
    Coolidge
    added
    up
    the
    roommate
    and
    two
    rail
    tickets
    back
    to
    the
    college.Then
    he
    counted
    out
    $32
    said
    it
    was
    a
    loan
    (借款).
    He
    then
    told
    the
    young
    man,
    “There
    is
    a
    guard
    in
    the
    corridor.”
    The
    young
    man
    nodded
    and
    left
    through
    the
    same
    window
    as
    he
    had
    entered.
    1.What
    caused
    the
    thief
    to
    meet
    the
    President?
    A.He
    knew
    the
    President
    had
    lots
    of
    money.
    B.He
    knew
    the
    President
    lived
    in
    the
    suite.
    C.He
    wanted
    to
    be
    a
    rich
    businessman.
    D.He
    wanted
    to
    steal
    some
    money.
    2.Why
    did
    Calvin
    Coolidge
    live
    at
    the
    Willard
    Hotel
    in
    those
    days?
    A.Because
    the
    former
    President
    was
    still
    living
    in
    the
    White
    House.
    B.Because
    the
    former
    First
    Lady
    hadn’t
    left
    the
    White
    House.
    C.Because
    the
    First
    Lady
    liked
    to
    live
    there.
    D.Because
    he
    liked
    there.
    3.Coolidge
    counted
    out
    $32
    ______.
    A.in
    order
    not
    to
    be
    killed
    by
    the
    thief
    B.in
    order
    to
    be
    out
    of
    danger
    C.so
    as
    to
    help
    the
    young
    student
    overcome
    his
    difficulty
    D.because
    he
    had
    no
    more
    money
    4.The
    young
    man’s
    roommate
    went
    back
    to
    the
    college
    ______.
    A.by
    air
    B.by
    water
    C.by
    bus
    D.by
    train
    5.Which
    of
    the
    following
    might
    happen
    afterwards?
    A.The
    young
    student
    repaid
    the$32.
    B.The
    thief
    was
    put
    into
    prison.
    C.The
    President
    told
    many
    reporters
    the
    thief’s
    name.
    D.The
    President
    ordered
    the
    young
    man
    to
    repay
    the
    money.
    Keys:
    1-5
    DBCDA
    高考英语阅读练习(070)
    Homing
    pigeons
    are
    placed
    in
    a
    training
    program
    from
    about
    the
    time
    they
    are
    twenty-eight
    days
    of
    age.They
    are
    taught
    to
    enter
    the
    loft
    through
    a
    trap
    and
    to
    exercise
    above
    and
    around
    the
    loft
    and
    gradually
    they
    are
    taken
    away
    for
    short
    distance
    in
    wicker
    baskets
    and
    released.They
    are
    then
    expected
    to
    find
    their
    way
    home
    in
    the
    shortest
    possible
    time.
    In
    their
    training
    flights
    or
    in
    actual
    races,
    the
    birds
    are
    taken
    to
    prearranged
    distant
    points
    and
    released
    to
    find
    their
    way
    back
    to
    their
    own
    lofts.Once
    the
    birds
    are
    liberated,
    their
    owners,
    who
    are
    standing
    by
    at
    the
    home
    lofts,
    anxiously
    watch
    the
    sky
    for
    the
    return
    of
    their
    entries.Since
    time
    is
    of
    the
    essence
    (本质)
    the
    speed
    with
    which
    the
    birds
    can
    be
    induced
    to
    enter
    the
    loft
    trap
    may
    make
    the
    difference
    between
    gaining
    a
    win
    or
    a
    second
    place.
    The
    head
    of
    a
    homing
    pigeon
    is
    comparatively
    small,
    but
    its
    brain
    is
    one
    quarter
    larger
    than
    that
    of
    the
    ordinary
    pigeon.The
    homing
    pigeon
    is
    very
    intelligent
    and
    will
    persevere
    to
    the
    point
    of
    stubbornness
    (顽强)
    ;some
    have
    been
    known
    to
    fly
    a
    hundred
    miles
    off
    course
    to
    avoid
    a
    storm.
    Some
    homing
    pigeon
    experts
    claim
    that
    this
    bird
    is
    gifted
    with
    a
    form
    of
    built-in
    radar
    that
    helps
    it
    find
    its
    own
    loft
    after
    hours
    of
    flight,
    for
    hidden
    under
    the
    headfeathers
    are
    two
    very
    sensitive
    ears,
    while
    the
    sharp
    prominent
    (突出的)
    eyes
    can
    see
    great
    distances
    in
    daytime.
    Why
    do
    homing
    pigeons
    fly
    home?
    They
    are
    not
    unique
    in
    this
    inherent
    skill;
    it
    is
    found
    in
    most
    migratory
    birds,
    in
    bees,
    ants,
    toads
    and
    even
    turtles,
    which
    have
    been
    known
    to
    travel
    hundreds
    of
    miles
    to
    return
    to
    their
    homes.But
    in
    the
    animal
    world,
    the
    homing
    pigeon
    alone
    can
    be
    trusted
    with
    its
    freedom
    and
    trained
    to
    carry
    out
    the
    missions
    that
    people
    demand.
    1.What
    is
    the
    purpose
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.To
    convince
    the
    reader
    to
    buy
    a
    homing
    pigeon.
    B.To
    inform
    the
    reader
    about
    homing
    pigeons
    and
    their
    training.
    C.To
    protect
    homing
    pigeons
    against
    the
    threat
    of
    extinction.
    D.To
    encourage
    the
    owners
    of
    homing
    pigeons
    to
    set
    the
    birds
    free.
    2.According
    to
    the
    passage,
    what
    happens
    to
    homing
    pigeons
    when
    they
    are
    about
    a
    month
    old?
    A.They
    are
    kept
    in
    a
    trap.
    B.They
    enter
    their
    first
    race.
    C.They
    begin
    a
    training
    program.
    D.They
    get
    their
    wings
    clipped
    and
    marked.
    3.According
    to
    the
    passage,
    what
    is
    the
    difference
    between
    a
    homing
    pigeon
    and
    an
    ordinary
    one?
    A.The
    span
    of
    the
    wings.
    B.The
    shape
    of
    the
    eyes.
    C.The
    texture
    of
    the
    feathers.
    D.The
    size
    of
    the
    brain.
    4.The
    underlined
    word
    “it”
    refers
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following?
    A.radar
    B.bird
    C.loft
    D.form
    5.Why
    does
    the
    author
    mention
    bees,
    ants,
    toads
    and
    turtles
    in
    the
    last
    paragraph?
    A.To
    describe
    some
    unusual
    kinds
    of
    pets.
    B.To
    measure
    distances
    traveled
    by
    various
    animals.
    C.To
    compare
    their
    home-finding
    abilities
    with
    those
    of
    homing
    pigeons.
    D.To
    interest
    the
    reader
    in
    learning
    about
    other
    animals.
    Keys:
    1-5BCDBC
    高考英语阅读练习(071)
    The
    temperature
    of
    the
    sun
    is
    over
    5000
    degrees
    Fahrenheit
    at
    the
    surface,
    but
    it
    rises
    to
    perhaps
    more
    than
    16
    million
    degrees
    at
    the
    center.The
    sun
    is
    so
    much
    hotter
    than
    the
    earth
    that
    matter
    can
    exist
    only
    as
    a
    gas,
    except
    at
    the
    core.In
    the
    core
    of
    the
    sun,
    the
    pressures
    are
    so
    great
    against
    the
    gases
    that,
    despite
    the
    high
    temperature,
    there
    may
    be
    a
    small
    solid
    core.However,
    no
    one
    really
    knows,
    since
    the
    center
    of
    the
    sun
    can
    never
    be
    directly
    observed.
    Solar
    astronomers
    do
    know
    that
    the
    sun
    is
    divided
    into
    five
    layers
    or
    zones.Starting
    at
    the
    outside
    and
    going
    down
    into
    the
    sun,
    the
    zones
    are
    the
    corona,
    chromosphere,
    photosphere,
    convection
    zone
    and
    finally
    the
    core.The
    first
    three
    zones
    are
    regarded
    as
    the
    sun’s
    atmosphere.But
    since
    the
    sun
    has
    no
    solid
    surface,
    it
    is
    hard
    to
    tell
    where
    the
    atmosphere
    ends
    and
    the
    main
    body
    of
    the
    sun
    begins.
    The
    sun’s
    outermost
    layer
    begins
    about
    10000
    miles
    above
    the
    visible(可见的)
    surface
    and
    goes
    outward
    for
    millions
    of
    miles.This
    is
    the
    only
    part
    of
    the
    sun
    that
    can
    be
    seen
    during
    an
    eclipse
    (食)
    such
    as
    the
    one
    in
    February
    1979.At
    any
    other
    time,
    the
    corona
    can
    be
    seen
    only
    when
    special
    instruments
    are
    used
    on
    cameras
    and
    telescopes
    to
    shut
    out
    the
    glare
    of
    the
    sun’s
    rays.
    The
    corona
    is
    a
    brilliant,
    pearly
    white,
    filmy
    light,
    about
    as
    bright
    as
    the
    full
    moon.Its
    beautiful
    rays
    are
    a
    sensational
    sight
    during
    an
    eclipse.The
    corona’s
    rays
    flash
    out
    in
    a
    brilliant
    fan
    that
    has
    wispy
    spikelike
    (一束束穗状)
    rays
    near
    the
    sun’s
    north
    and
    south
    poles.The
    corona
    is
    thickest
    at
    the
    sun’s
    equator.
    The
    corona
    rays
    are
    made
    up
    of
    gases
    streaming
    outward
    at
    tremendous
    speeds
    and
    reaching
    a
    temperature
    of
    more
    than
    2
    million
    degrees
    Fahrenheit.The
    rays
    of
    gas
    thin
    out
    as
    they
    reach
    the
    space
    around
    the
    planets.By
    the
    time
    the
    sun’s
    corona
    rays
    reach
    the
    Earth,
    they
    are
    weak
    and
    invisible.
    1.Matter
    on
    the
    sun
    can
    exist
    only
    in
    the
    form
    of
    gas
    because
    of
    the
    sun’s
    ______.
    A.size
    B.age
    C.location
    D.temperature
    2.With
    what
    topic
    is
    the
    second
    paragraph
    mainly
    concerned?
    A.How
    the
    Sun
    evolved.
    B.The
    structure
    of
    the
    Sun.
    C.Why
    scientists
    study
    the
    Sun.
    D.The
    distance
    of
    the
    Sun
    from
    the
    planets
    3.All
    of
    the
    following
    are
    parts
    of
    the
    sun’s
    atmosphere
    EXCEPT
    the
    ______.
    A.corona
    B.chromosphere
    C.photosphere
    D.core
    4.According
    to
    the
    passage,
    as
    the
    corona
    rays
    reach
    the
    planets,
    they
    become
    ______.
    A.hotter
    B.clearer
    C.thinner
    D.stronger
    5.The
    paragraphs
    following
    the
    passage
    most
    likely
    discuss
    which
    of
    the
    following?
    A.The
    remaining
    layers
    of
    the
    sun.
    B.The
    evolution
    of
    the
    sun
    to
    its
    present
    form.
    C.The
    eclipse
    of
    February
    1979.
    Keys:
    1-5
    DBDCA
    高考英语阅读练习(072)
    Having
    no
    language,
    infants
    cannot
    be
    told
    what
    they
    need
    to
    learn.Yet
    by
    the
    age
    of
    three
    they
    will
    have
    mastered
    the
    basic
    structure
    of
    their
    native
    language
    and
    will
    be
    well
    on
    their
    way
    to
    communicative
    competence
    (能力).Acquiring
    (取得)
    their
    language
    is
    a
    most
    impressive
    intellectual
    feat.Students
    of
    how
    children
    learn
    language
    generally
    agree
    that
    the
    most
    remarkable
    aspect
    (方面)
    of
    this
    feat
    is
    the
    rapid
    acquisition
    of
    grammar.Nevertheless,
    the
    ability
    of
    children
    to
    conform
    to
    grammatical
    rules
    is
    only
    slightly
    more
    wonderful
    than
    their
    ability
    to
    learn
    words.It
    has
    been
    reckoned
    that
    the
    average
    high
    school
    graduate
    in
    the
    United
    States
    has
    a
    reading
    vocabulary
    of
    80000
    words,
    which
    includes
    idiomatic
    expressions
    and
    proper
    names
    of
    people
    and
    places.This
    vocabulary
    must
    have
    been
    learned
    over
    a
    period
    of
    16
    years.From
    the
    figures,
    it
    can
    be
    calculated
    that
    the
    average
    child
    learns
    at
    a
    rate
    of
    about
    13
    new
    words
    per
    day.Clearly
    a
    learning
    process
    of
    great
    complexity
    goes
    on
    at
    a
    rapid
    rate
    in
    children.
    1.What
    is
    the
    main
    subject
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.Language
    acquisition
    in
    children.
    B.Teaching
    languages
    to
    children.
    C.How
    to
    memorize
    words.
    D.Communicating
    with
    infants.
    2.The
    underlined
    word
    “feat”
    is
    closest
    in
    meaning
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following?
    A.experiment
    B.idea
    C.activity
    D.accomplishment
    3.The
    underlined
    word
    “reckoned”
    is
    closest
    in
    meaning
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following?
    A.suspected
    B.estimated
    C.proved
    D.said
    4.The
    underlined
    word
    “which”
    refers
    to
    ______

    A.their
    ability
    B.reading
    vocabulary
    C.idiomatic
    expression
    D.learning
    process
    5.According
    to
    the
    passage,
    what
    is
    impressive
    about
    the
    way
    children
    learn
    vocabulary?
    A.They
    learn
    words
    before
    they
    learn
    grammar.
    B.They
    learn
    even
    very
    long
    words.
    C.They
    learn
    words
    very
    quickly.
    D.They
    learn
    the
    most
    words
    in
    high
    school.
    Keys:
    1-5
    ADBBC
    高考英语阅读练习(073)
    Two
    American
    scientists
    told
    the
    people
    in
    industrial
    nations
    that
    they
    would
    be
    much
    healthier
    if
    they
    ate
    more
    of
    the
    same
    kind
    of
    foods
    eaten
    by
    humans
    living
    more
    than
    10,000
    years
    ago.
    The
    scientists
    say
    that
    the
    human
    body
    has
    changed
    very
    little
    since
    human
    first
    appeared
    on
    earth,
    but
    the
    way
    we
    live
    has
    changed
    greatly.Our
    body
    has
    not
    been
    able
    to
    deal
    with
    these
    changes
    in
    life
    style
    and
    this
    has
    led
    to
    new
    kinds
    of
    sicknesses.These
    new
    sicknesses
    were
    not
    known
    in
    ancient
    times.So
    they
    are
    called
    “diseases
    of
    civilization(文明)”.Many
    cancers(癌)
    and
    diseases
    of
    the
    blood
    system,
    including
    heart
    attacks
    and
    strokes(中风)
    are
    examples
    of
    such
    diseases.
    Scientists
    noted
    that
    early
    stone-age
    people
    used
    very
    little
    alcohol(酒精)or
    tabacco,
    probably
    none.Ancient
    people
    also
    got
    a
    great
    deal
    of
    physical
    exercise,
    but
    a
    change
    in
    food
    is
    one
    of
    the
    main
    differences
    between
    life
    in
    ancient
    times
    and
    life
    today.
    Stone-age
    people
    hunted
    wild
    animals
    for
    their
    meat,
    which
    had
    much
    less
    fat
    than
    farm
    animals.They
    also
    ate
    a
    lot
    of
    fresh
    wild
    vegetables,
    and
    fruits.They
    did
    not
    use
    milk
    and
    other
    dairy
    products(乳制品),
    and
    they
    made
    very
    little
    use
    of
    grains.But
    today,
    we
    eat
    a
    large
    amount
    of
    dairy
    products
    and
    grain
    foods.We
    eat
    six
    times
    more
    salt
    than
    stone-age
    people.We
    eat
    more
    sugar.We
    eat
    twice
    as
    much
    fat
    but
    only
    one
    third
    as
    much
    protein(蛋白质)and
    much
    less
    vitamin(维生素)C.
    People
    today
    probably
    do
    not
    want
    to
    live
    as
    people
    thousands
    of
    years
    ago
    did,
    but
    scientists
    say
    that
    we
    would
    be
    much
    healthier
    if
    we
    ate
    as
    those
    ancient
    people
    did,
    cutting
    the
    amount
    of
    fatty,
    salty
    and
    sweet
    foods.
    1.The
    people
    in
    industrial
    nations
    would
    be
    much
    healthier
    if
    they
    ate
    ______.
    A.more
    foods
    as
    humans
    living
    10,000
    years
    ago
    did
    B.as
    humans
    living
    10,000
    years
    ago
    ate
    C.more
    kinds
    of
    food
    eaten
    by
    people
    living
    over
    10,000
    years
    ago
    D.more
    of
    the
    same
    kinds
    of
    foods
    eaten
    by
    people
    over
    10,000
    years
    ago
    2.New
    kinds
    of
    sicknesses
    have
    been
    found
    because
    ______
    A.the
    human
    body
    has
    changed
    compared
    with
    human
    first
    appeared
    on
    earth
    B.the
    way
    we
    live
    has
    changed
    a
    little
    C.our
    body
    can’t
    deal
    with
    the
    changes
    in
    life
    style
    D.the
    way
    we
    live
    today
    are
    proper
    for
    the
    human
    body
    3.What
    is
    the
    main
    cause
    mentioned
    in
    the
    article
    why
    people
    suffer
    from
    a
    lot
    of
    new
    sicknesses?
    A.Ancient
    people
    did
    a
    great
    deal
    of
    physical
    exercise.
    B.People
    today
    have
    a
    lot
    of
    alcohol.
    C.People
    today
    have
    more
    tobacco.
    D.Food
    is
    quite
    different
    between
    life
    today
    and
    life
    in
    ancient
    times.
    4.Stone-age
    people
    were
    much
    healthier
    than
    people
    today
    because
    they
    ate
    a
    lot
    of
    ______.
    A.milk
    and
    other
    dairy
    products
    B.grain
    foods
    and
    farm
    animals
    C.salt
    and
    sugar
    D.wild
    animals,
    fresh
    wild
    vegetables
    and
    fruits
    5.From
    this
    article,
    we
    know
    that
    ______
    are
    not
    good
    to
    our
    health.
    A.protein
    and
    vitamin
    C
    B.milk
    and
    grain
    foods
    C.wild
    animals,
    vegetables
    and
    fruits
    D.a
    huge
    amount
    of
    fatty,
    salty
    and
    sweet
    foods
    Keys:
    1-5
    DCDDD
    高考英语阅读练习(074)
    Shanghai
    is
    the
    largest
    city
    in
    China.About
    eleven
    million
    people
    make
    their
    homes
    in
    Shanghai
    and
    its
    suburbs(郊区).This
    enormous(巨大的)city
    spreads
    out
    along
    the
    banks
    of
    the
    Huang
    Pu
    River,
    which
    flows
    into
    the
    mouth
    of
    the
    Yangtze
    River
    about
    fourteen
    miles
    north
    of
    here.Large
    oceangoing
    ships
    travel
    to
    Shanghai
    by
    way
    of
    the
    Yanggze
    and
    the
    Huang
    Pu.
    Shanghai
    was
    a
    small,
    unimportant
    city
    until
    1842
    when
    China
    lost
    a
    war
    with
    Great
    Britain.The
    British
    realized
    that
    Shanghai
    was
    in
    an
    excellent
    location(位置)
    to
    serve
    as
    a
    seaport
    for
    the
    densely(密集)
    populated
    Yangtze
    River
    Plain.They
    forced
    the
    Chinese
    to
    allow
    English
    traders
    to
    settle
    on
    the
    wastelands
    outside
    the
    city
    walls.Later,
    French,
    American,
    and
    Japanese
    traders
    also
    came
    to
    Shanghai.The
    foreigners
    built
    whole
    new
    sections
    of
    Shanghai,
    including
    homes,
    stores,
    factories,
    and
    office
    buildings.Thousands
    of
    Chinese
    poured
    into
    Shanghai
    in
    search
    of
    jobs.Most
    of
    them
    settled
    in
    the
    old
    part
    of
    the
    city.As
    time
    passed,
    shanghai
    became
    one
    of
    the
    busiest
    seaports
    in
    the
    world.
    1.According
    to
    the
    article,
    the
    population
    inside
    the
    city
    of
    Shanghai
    is
    ______
    A.eleven
    million
    B.less
    than
    eleven
    million
    C.more
    than
    eleven
    million
    D.about
    eleven
    million
    2.The
    Huang
    Pu
    River
    is
    connected
    with
    ______
    at
    a
    spot
    about
    fourteen
    miles
    ______
    of
    the
    city.
    A.the
    Yangtze……north
    B.the
    city…north
    C.the
    mouth
    of
    Huang
    Pu
    River…north
    D.Yangtze
    River…south
    3.Before
    1842,
    the
    Yangtze
    River
    Plain
    was
    ______.
    A.very
    developed
    B.densely
    populated
    C.at
    a
    war
    with
    Great
    Britain
    D.a
    small,
    unimportant
    city
    4.The
    British
    first
    settled
    on
    the
    land
    because
    ______.
    A.they
    wanted
    to
    build
    stores
    here
    B.they
    thought
    the
    place
    was
    beautiful
    C.they
    realized
    that
    it
    was
    a
    very
    good
    location
    for
    a
    seaport
    D.they
    wanted
    to
    have
    a
    war
    here
    5.A
    lot
    of
    Chinese
    came
    into
    Shanghai
    to
    ______.
    A.visit
    the
    city
    B.trade
    with
    foreigners
    C.build
    one
    of
    the
    busiest
    seaports
    D.look
    for
    jobs
    Keys:
    1-5
    BABCD
    高考英语阅读练习(075)
    In
    1986,
    Willie
    Mays
    was
    paid
    $
    125,000
    to
    play
    baseball,
    but
    the
    $
    80,000
    a
    year
    earned
    by
    Babe
    Ruth,
    the
    homerun
    king
    of
    the
    early
    1930’s,
    went
    a
    great
    deal
    farther.The
    two
    men
    paid
    greatly
    different
    amounts
    for
    federal
    taxes
    and
    consumer
    goods.read
    what
    Dr
    Lawrence
    Ritter
    had
    to
    say
    on
    this
    matter.Dr
    Ritter
    is
    chairman
    of
    the
    department
    of
    finance(财政)at
    New
    York
    University’s
    graduate
    school
    of
    business.
    “On
    his
    $
    80,000
    Ruth
    paid
    $
    11,500
    in
    federal
    income
    taxes,
    giving
    him
    a
    takehome
    pay
    of
    $
    68,500.On
    his
    $
    125,000
    Mays
    paid
    a
    federal
    income
    tax
    of
    $
    73,000,
    leaving
    $
    52,000
    in
    take-home
    pay.In
    addition,
    consumer
    prices
    today
    are
    about
    2.2
    times
    as
    high
    as
    they
    were
    in
    1931.At
    today’s
    prices,
    Mays’
    $
    52,000
    takehome
    bay
    would
    buy
    what
    $
    23,000
    would
    have
    bought
    in
    1931.In
    terms
    of
    purchasing(购买)
    power,
    Mays’
    Salary(薪水)
    was
    worth
    only
    about
    one-third
    of
    Ruth’s.”
    1.The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    is
    ______.
    A.Poor
    Willie
    B.Rich
    Babe
    C.Rising
    Price
    D.Too
    Much
    Tax
    2.The
    passage
    seems
    truthful
    because
    ______.
    A.it
    is
    about
    real
    people
    B.Dr
    Ritter
    is
    a
    famous
    professor
    C.it
    gives
    exact
    figures(数字)
    D.it
    is
    well
    written
    3.Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    true?
    A.Ruth
    had
    bigger
    salary.
    B.Mays
    got
    more
    take-home
    pay.
    C.Ruth
    had
    bigger
    purchasing
    power.
    D.Mays
    could
    spend
    less
    money
    on
    consumer
    goods.
    4.Mays’
    federal
    income
    tax
    is
    ______
    higher
    than
    Ruth’s.
    A.14.4%
    B.58.4%
    C.44%
    D.16.8%
    5.From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    conclude
    that
    ______.
    A.the
    United
    States
    is
    getting
    richer
    and
    richer
    B.the
    dollar
    today
    is
    worth
    less
    than
    it
    was
    in
    the
    thirties
    C.American
    people
    are
    paid
    today
    less
    than
    in
    1931
    D.Amercian
    sportsmen
    become
    poorer
    and
    poorer
    Keys:
    1-5
    ACCCB
    高考英语阅读练习(076)
    The
    Antarctic(南极地区)is
    actually
    a
    desert.It
    is
    the
    only
    continent
    on
    the
    earth
    without
    a
    river
    or
    a
    lake.
    The
    Antarctic
    is
    all
    ice
    all
    year
    round.The
    warmest
    temperature
    ever
    recorded
    there
    is
    zero,
    at
    the
    south
    Pole.Explorers
    used
    to
    think
    that
    a
    place
    so
    cold
    would
    have
    a
    heavy
    snowfall.But
    less
    than
    ten
    inches
    of
    snow
    falls
    each
    year.That
    is
    less
    than
    half
    an
    inch
    of
    water.Ten
    times
    that
    much
    moisture(水分)
    falls
    in
    parts
    of
    the
    Sahara.
    The
    little
    snow
    that
    falls
    in
    Antarctica(南极)never
    melts.It
    continues
    to
    pile
    up
    deeper
    and
    deeper
    year
    after
    year
    and
    century
    after
    century.When
    the
    snow
    gets
    to
    be
    about
    eighty
    feet
    deep,
    it
    is
    turned
    to
    ice
    by
    the
    weight
    of
    the
    snow
    above
    it.
    1.Antarctica
    is
    called
    a
    desert
    because
    it
    ______.
    A.is
    sandy
    B.has
    the
    same
    temperature
    as
    desert
    C.has
    little
    moisture
    and
    no
    lakes
    or
    rivers
    D.all
    of
    the
    above
    2.The
    Antarctic
    has
    ______.
    A.ten
    times
    as
    much
    moisture
    as
    the
    Sahara
    B.the
    same
    amount
    of
    moisture
    as
    the
    Sahara
    C.about
    one-tenth
    the
    moisture
    of
    the
    Sahara
    D.none
    of
    these
    3.The
    snow
    in
    Antarctica
    is
    very
    deep
    because
    it
    ______.
    A.never
    stops
    falling
    B.piles
    up
    year
    after
    year
    C.never
    melts
    D.both
    B
    and
    C
    4.The
    snow
    turns
    to
    ice
    when
    ______.
    A.it
    gets
    wet
    B.the
    temperature
    gets
    colder
    C.the
    next
    snowfall
    comes
    D.the
    snow
    above
    it
    is
    heavy
    enough
    5.The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    is
    ______.
    A.A
    Strange
    Continent
    B.the
    AntarcticAn
    Ice
    C.Snowfall
    at
    the
    South
    Pole
    D.the
    World’s
    Greatest
    Desert
    Keys:
    1-5
    CCDDB
    高考英语阅读练习(077)
    By
    following
    the
    footsteps
    on
    the
    muddy
    road,
    the
    dog
    guided
    us
    to
    a
    small
    house.I
    waved
    to
    my
    comrades
    and
    we
    came
    near
    to
    a
    window.Looking
    in
    we
    found
    a
    man
    turning
    his
    radio
    set
    or
    operating
    some
    other
    instruments,
    possibly
    trying
    to
    get
    in
    touch
    with
    someone.He
    suddenly
    turned
    round.He
    must
    have
    sensed
    that
    there
    was
    something
    wrong.The
    danger
    he
    was
    in
    hit
    him.He
    picked
    up
    his
    gun,
    opened
    the
    door
    as
    quickly
    as
    possible,
    and
    rushed
    out,
    trying
    to
    flee.He
    was
    out
    of
    breath
    when
    he
    saw
    us
    closing
    in
    and
    let
    out
    a
    cry
    in
    despair(绝望).
    1.What
    does
    the
    phrase
    “closing
    in”
    in
    this
    passage
    mean?
    A.“Shooting
    at”
    B.“Coming
    nearer
    in
    order
    to
    attack”
    C.“Making
    a
    quick
    attack”
    D.“Asking
    someone
    to
    give
    in”
    2.From
    the
    story
    we
    can
    infer
    that
    ______
    A.the
    police
    searched
    for
    a
    spy
    and
    caught
    him
    in
    the
    end
    B.a
    group
    of
    children
    were
    playing
    the
    game
    of
    hide
    and
    seek
    C.the
    police
    found
    the
    man
    by
    chance
    D.the
    man
    was
    brave
    enough
    to
    face
    those
    people
    3.From
    the
    passage,
    we
    can
    imagine
    that
    in
    the
    end
    ______.
    A.
    the
    man
    was
    caught
    easily
    B.the
    man
    was
    caught
    after
    a
    good
    fighting
    C.the
    man
    was
    shot
    dead
    D.the
    man
    would
    rather
    die
    than
    give
    in
    Key:
    1─3
    BAA
    高考英语阅读练习(078)
    When
    my
    first
    wartime
    Christmas
    came,
    I
    was
    in
    basic
    training
    in
    New
    Jersey
    and
    not
    sure
    if
    I
    could
    make
    it
    home
    for
    the
    holidays.Only
    on
    the
    afternoon
    of
    December
    23
    was
    the
    list
    of
    men
    who
    would
    have
    three-day
    passes
    posted.I
    was
    one
    of
    the
    lucky
    soldiers.It
    was
    Christmas
    Eve
    when
    I
    arrived
    home,
    and
    a
    light
    snow
    had
    fallen.Mother
    opened
    the
    front
    door.I
    could
    see
    beyond
    her,
    into
    the
    corner
    of
    the
    living
    room
    where
    the
    tree
    had
    always
    stood.There
    were
    lights,
    all
    colors,
    and
    ornaments(装饰物)shining
    against
    the
    green
    of
    a
    pine.
    “Where
    did
    it
    come
    from?”
    I
    asked.
    “I
    asked
    the
    Gates
    boy
    to
    cut
    it,”
    my
    mother
    said.“I
    wouldn’t
    have
    had
    one
    just
    for
    myself,
    but
    when
    called-oh,
    such
    a
    rush!
    He
    just
    brought
    it
    in
    this
    afternoon…”
    The
    pine
    reached
    to
    the
    proper
    height,
    almost
    to
    the
    ceiling,
    and
    the
    Tree
    Top
    Krystal
    Star
    was
    its
    place.A
    few
    green
    branches
    reached
    about
    a
    little
    awkwardly(不够美观地)at
    the
    side,
    I
    thought,
    and
    there
    was
    a
    bit
    of
    bare
    trunk
    showing
    in
    the
    middle.But
    the
    tree
    filled
    the
    room
    with
    warm
    light
    and
    the
    whole
    house
    with
    the
    pleasant
    smell
    of
    Christmas.
    “It’s
    not
    like
    the
    one
    you
    used
    to
    find,”
    my
    mother
    went
    on.“Yours
    were
    always
    in
    good
    shape.I
    suppose
    the
    Gates
    boy
    didn’t
    know
    where
    to
    look.But
    I
    couldn’t
    be
    fussy(挑剔的).”
    “Don’t
    worry,”
    I
    told
    her.“It’s
    perfect.”
    It
    wasn’t,
    of
    course,
    but
    at
    the
    moment
    I
    realized
    something
    for
    the
    first
    time:
    all
    Christmas
    trees
    are
    perfect.
    1.From
    the
    passage,
    we
    can
    infer
    that
    ______.
    A.the
    writer
    spent
    his
    first
    Christmas
    during
    the
    war
    B.soldiers
    did
    not
    all
    go
    home
    for
    Christmas
    during
    the
    war
    C.all
    the
    soldiers
    had
    three-day
    passes
    D.the
    writer
    could
    not
    go
    home
    for
    Christmas
    2.When
    the
    writer
    got
    home,
    ______.
    A.it
    was
    December
    23
    B.it
    was
    snowing
    heavily
    C.he
    found
    a
    Christmas
    tree
    in
    the
    living
    room
    D.the
    Gates
    boy
    was
    cutting
    a
    Christmas
    tree
    for
    his
    mother
    3.From
    this
    passage,
    we
    can
    conclude
    that
    ______.
    A.the
    writer
    used
    to
    cut
    very
    beautiful
    Christmas
    trees
    B.his
    mother
    didn’t
    like
    perfect
    trees
    C.his
    mother
    didn’t
    want
    to
    have
    a
    tree
    D.the
    writer
    wouldn’t
    have
    a
    tree
    cut
    by
    someone
    else
    4.“All
    Christmas
    trees
    are
    perfect”,
    because
    they
    can
    remind
    you
    of
    ______.
    A.the
    wartime
    B.the
    green
    of
    a
    pine
    C.the
    pleasant
    smell
    D.the
    sweet
    home
    5.The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    would
    be
    “______”.
    A.How
    to
    Choose
    a
    Christmas
    Tree
    B.How
    Soldiers
    Spent
    Christmas
    C.The
    Perfect
    Christmas
    Tree
    D.The
    Christmas
    Without
    a
    Tree
    Key:
    1-5
    BCADC
    高考英语阅读练习(079)
    Nowadays,most
    employees
    of
    local
    high-tech
    industries
    are
    below
    the
    age
    of
    35,and
    for
    newly
    rising
    industries
    such
    as
    computer
    software
    and
    the
    Internet,
    the
    figure
    is
    below
    30.People
    in
    this
    age
    bracket(阶层)
    are
    known
    as
    Generation-X,which
    is
    made
    up
    of
    those
    born
    between
    1963
    and
    1981(i.
    e.
    those
    aged
    between
    17
    and
    35).Compared
    with
    those
    born
    from
    1946
    to
    1960,Generation-X
    are
    typically
    independent,
    they
    also
    have
    their
    shortcomings.Employers
    often
    complain
    that
    Generation-X
    are
    a
    group
    hard
    to
    manage.Although
    willingness
    and
    enthusiasm(热情)are
    highly
    valued
    by
    Generation-X,they
    will
    not
    accept
    orders
    blindly.In
    short,Generation-X
    will
    not
    accept
    authoritarian(权力主义)
    leadership.They
    expect
    their
    leaders
    to
    have
    a
    detailed
    understanding
    of
    the
    job,
    and
    most
    importantly,to
    treat
    them
    as
    an
    important
    member
    of
    them-as
    partners.
    As
    a
    result,
    managing
    Generation-X
    employees
    is
    not
    only
    a
    science
    but
    also
    an
    art.There
    are
    basic
    guidelines
    to
    follow
    in
    managing
    them
    and
    helping
    them
    perform
    at
    their
    best:
    1.Support
    them
    in
    their
    quest(追求)for
    knowledge
    skills;
    2.Room
    for
    creativity
    and
    failure:
    3.Provide
    frequent
    and
    timely
    feedback(反馈);
    4.Provide
    communication
    channels
    If
    managers
    follow
    these
    basic
    guidelines,
    they
    may
    find
    that
    the
    employees
    they
    once
    considered
    as
    young,
    selfish
    and
    uncontrollable
    turn
    out
    to
    be
    responsible,
    energetic
    team
    players.
    1.Generation-X
    in
    this
    article
    refers
    to
    the
    group
    of
    people
    who
    are______.
    A.educated
    employees
    below
    the
    age
    of
    35
    B.young
    hard-working
    workers
    in
    factories
    C.disliked
    by
    the
    managers
    D.born
    after
    the
    year
    of
    1963
    2.From
    the
    article
    we
    know
    that
    the
    writer
    ______.
    A.thinks
    highly
    of
    Generation-X
    B.feels
    disappointed
    with
    Generation-X
    C.has
    a
    perfect
    understanding
    of
    Generation-X
    D.suggests
    that
    the
    managers
    be
    strict
    with
    Generation-X
    3.Employers
    often
    complain
    about
    Generation-X
    because
    ______.
    A.these
    young
    people
    will
    not
    accept
    their
    leadership
    B.they
    don’t
    understand
    their
    employees’
    job
    C.managing
    this
    group
    of
    people
    is
    no
    easy
    job
    D.they
    don’t
    know
    how
    to
    manage
    and
    help
    this
    group
    of
    people
    4.If
    you
    were
    a
    manager
    working
    with
    Generation-X,
    you
    should
    ______.
    A.treat
    them
    as
    equals
    and
    encourage
    them
    to
    try
    new
    ideas
    B.give
    them
    orders
    frequently
    and
    make
    them
    work
    hard
    C.let
    them
    know
    they
    are
    selfish
    and
    uncontrollable
    D.warn
    them
    that
    they
    may
    lose
    jobs
    at
    any
    time
    Key:
    1─4
    ACDAD
    高考英语阅读练习(080)
    A
    spell
    checker
    is
    a
    program
    that
    checks
    the
    spelling
    of
    every
    word
    in
    a
    document
    by
    looking
    up
    each
    word
    in
    its
    dictionary.If
    the
    word
    does
    not
    appear
    in
    the
    dictionary,
    the
    user
    is
    alerted
    to
    a
    possible
    misspelling,
    and
    possible
    corrections
    are
    often
    suggested.Many
    word
    processing(处理)
    programs
    include
    spell
    checkers.An
    effective
    spell
    checker
    needs
    to
    store
    a
    large
    number
    of
    words
    using
    efficient
    data(数据)
    compression(压缩)
    techniques,
    and
    it
    must
    be
    able
    to
    search
    the
    list
    quickly
    with
    a
    binary(二进位的)
    search.A
    spell
    checker
    will
    not
    recognize
    unusual
    proper
    names
    or
    specialized
    terms,
    but
    it
    will
    often
    allow
    you
    to
    create
    your
    own
    personal
    dictionary
    of
    specialized
    words
    you
    often
    use.Spell
    checkers
    are
    valuable
    aids
    to
    proofreading,
    but
    they
    cannot
    catch
    the
    substitution
    of
    one
    correctly
    spelled
    word
    for
    another(such
    as
    form
    for
    from,
    or
    to
    for
    too).Thus
    they
    do
    not
    make
    sure
    that
    a
    document
    is
    free
    of
    spelling
    errors.
    1.Which
    of
    the
    following
    words
    will
    a
    spell
    checker
    not
    be
    able
    to
    recognize?
    A.maximum
    B.minibus
    C.Mickey
    D.Mathilde
    2.Which
    of
    the
    following
    mistakes
    cannot
    a
    spell
    checker
    find?
    A.Tom
    is
    watiting
    for
    Mary
    outsyde
    the
    school
    gate.
    B.Tom
    is
    waiting
    or
    Mary
    outside
    the
    school
    gate.
    C.Tom
    is
    waitting
    or
    Mary
    outside
    the
    school
    gate.
    D.Tum
    is
    waiting
    for
    Mary
    outside
    the
    school
    gate.
    3.What
    does
    the
    word
    “alerted”
    in
    the
    passage
    probably
    mean?
    A.suggested
    B.warned
    C.reminded
    D.led
    Key:
    1-3
    DBB
    高考英语阅读练习(081)
    In
    China
    some
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    use
    hotlines
    to
    encourage
    the
    listeners
    to
    take
    part
    in
    the
    talk
    shows.
    That"s
    a
    good
    idea.
    Yes,
    the
    fact
    is
    some
    people
    do
    nothing
    but
    break
    the
    whole
    programme.
    Some
    people
    know
    little
    about
    the
    topic
    under
    the
    discussion.
    Sometimes
    they
    do
    not
    even
    know
    what
    the
    host(主持人)is
    talking
    about.
    So
    the
    host
    has
    to
    tell
    the
    caller
    what
    the
    show
    is
    about.
    Usually
    the
    caller
    will
    ask
    a
    few
    questions
    which
    express
    his
    hope
    and
    show
    his
    ignorance(无知).
    The
    host
    has
    to
    answer
    and
    explain──how
    silly
    this
    is!
    It
    wastes
    a
    lot
    of
    time.
    It
    seems
    that
    some
    people
    phone
    the
    hotlines
    in
    fun.
    They
    just
    want
    to
    let
    the
    listeners
    hear
    them.
    They
    don"t
    care
    what
    the
    topic
    is,
    whether
    they
    themselves
    are
    interested
    in
    the
    topic
    or
    how
    silly
    they
    appear
    to
    be.
    It"s
    necessary
    for
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    to
    improve
    the
    hotline
    programmes.
    In
    my
    opinion,
    if
    a
    caller
    doesn"t
    know
    what
    is
    going
    on,
    the
    operator
    should
    not
    let
    the
    caller
    take
    part
    in
    it.
    1.
    The
    sentence
    "...some
    people
    do
    nothing
    but
    break
    the
    whole
    programmes
    may
    tell
    us
    that_______.
    A.
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    use
    hotlines
    in
    a
    wrong
    way
    B.
    some
    people
    have
    unclear
    thoughts
    C.
    there
    are
    problems
    to
    solve
    in
    the
    use
    of
    hotlines
    by
    some
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    D.
    the
    use
    of
    hotlines
    by
    some
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    is
    a
    good
    idea
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    not
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Some
    people
    do
    not
    know
    what
    the
    host
    is
    talking
    about.
    B.
    Some
    people
    do
    not
    know
    what
    the
    show
    is
    about.
    C.
    Some
    people
    know
    little
    about
    the
    topic
    under
    the
    discussion.
    D.
    The
    writer
    tells
    us
    that
    the
    host
    is
    silly.
    3.
    The
    host
    has
    to
    answer
    and
    explain________.
    A.
    because
    Of
    lots
    of
    questions
    raised
    by
    the
    caller
    B.
    because
    of
    the
    caller"s
    ignorance
    C.
    for
    the
    host
    likes
    talking
    to
    the
    caller
    D.
    for
    the
    host
    works
    hard
    4.
    The
    passage
    doesn"t
    tell
    us
    the
    idea________.
    A.
    that
    some
    listeners
    phone
    the
    hotlines
    in
    fun
    B.
    that
    some
    people
    just
    wont
    to
    be
    heard
    by
    others
    C.
    that
    some
    people
    who
    don"
    t
    care
    what
    the
    topic
    is
    must
    have
    realized
    that
    they
    appear
    to
    be
    silly
    D.
    what
    the
    hotline
    programmes
    are
    Keys:
    1-4
    CDBC
    高考英语阅读练习(082)
    People
    today
    expect
    to
    be
    examined
    when
    they
    enter
    a
    doctor"s
    office.
    At
    least
    they
    expect
    their
    blood
    pressure
    and
    temperature
    to
    be
    measured.
    However,
    as
    recently
    as
    two
    hundred
    years
    ago,
    a
    doctor"s
    treatment
    depended
    on
    talking
    with
    patients.
    In
    general,
    the
    communication
    between
    doctors
    and
    their
    patients
    was
    the
    most
    important
    part
    of
    medical
    methods.
    The
    modem
    age
    of
    medicine
    began
    with
    the
    stethoscope
    ,an
    instrmnent
    for
    listening
    to
    patients
    heartbeat
    and
    breathing.
    Before
    that,
    a
    doctor
    did
    not
    touch
    a
    patient.
    In
    fact,there
    was
    no
    such
    things
    as
    a
    medical
    examination.
    The
    stethoscope──and
    all
    other
    medical
    instruments──-had
    a
    serious
    effect,
    on
    the
    practice
    of
    medicine.
    Doctors
    became
    better
    at
    finding
    the
    medical
    problems.
    More
    lives
    were
    saved.
    At
    the
    same
    time,
    doctors
    gave
    less
    importance
    to
    the
    communication
    between
    patients
    and
    doctors.
    Some
    doctors
    actually
    stopped
    talking
    to
    their
    patients.
    It
    is
    easy
    to
    understand
    why
    some
    sick
    people
    thought
    themselves
    as
    broken
    machines.
    1.
    A
    stethoscope
    can
    be
    used
    to________.
    A.
    check
    health
    conditions
    B.
    cure
    some
    illness
    C.
    measure
    temperature
    D.
    treat
    heart
    disease
    2.
    Doctors
    gave
    less
    importance
    to
    the
    communication
    between
    patients
    and
    doctors
    mainly
    because________.
    A.
    modern
    medical
    instruments
    were
    used
    B.
    they
    could
    cure
    more
    diseases
    and
    save
    more
    lives
    C.
    they
    had
    much
    more
    medical
    experience
    than
    before
    D.
    they
    were
    too
    busy
    to
    have
    time
    to
    talk
    with
    patients
    3.
    Some
    sick
    people
    thought
    of
    themselves
    as
    broken
    machines,
    which
    suggested
    that_______.
    A.
    modern
    doctors
    should
    treat
    their
    patients
    as
    machines
    B.
    the
    level
    of
    the
    treatment
    was
    greatly
    improved
    C.
    they
    thought
    they
    were
    useless
    just
    like
    broken
    machines
    D.
    they
    were
    not
    satisfied
    with
    the
    manner
    in
    which
    doctors
    treated
    them
    4.
    The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    should
    be________.
    A.
    Medical
    Methods
    of
    Two
    Hundred
    Years
    Ago
    B.
    The
    Development
    of
    Medical
    Methods
    C.
    The
    Modem
    Age
    of
    Medicine
    D.
    The
    Use
    of
    the
    Stethoscope
    Keys:
    1-4
    AADB
    高考英语阅读练习(083)
    We
    may
    be
    very
    pleased
    with
    the
    rapid
    progress
    we
    have
    made
    in
    every
    field
    of
    study.
    But
    the
    way
    to
    test
    a
    student"s
    knowledge
    and
    ability
    still
    remains
    as
    poor
    as
    it
    was,
    We
    have
    almost
    done
    nothing
    to
    improve
    our
    examination
    system.
    It
    is
    well
    known
    that
    the
    examination
    system
    we
    are
    now
    using
    may
    be
    a
    good
    way
    of
    testing
    a
    student"s
    memory,
    but
    it
    can
    tell
    you
    nothing
    about
    a
    student"s
    ability.
    It
    does
    no
    good
    to
    students
    and
    teachers.
    As
    soon
    as
    a
    child
    begins
    school,he
    enters
    a
    world
    of
    examination
    that
    will
    decide
    his
    future
    of
    job.
    In
    fact
    a
    good
    examination
    system
    should
    train
    a
    student
    to
    think
    for
    himself.
    But
    it
    now
    does
    nothing
    about
    that.
    So
    students
    are
    encouraged
    to
    member
    what
    is
    taught.
    It
    does
    not
    enable
    them
    to
    gain
    more
    and
    note
    knowledge.
    The
    students
    who
    come
    out
    first
    in
    the
    examination
    often
    may
    not
    be
    the
    best
    in
    their
    studies.
    Besides,
    the
    examinations
    often
    force
    teachers
    to
    train
    students
    what
    to
    do
    with
    the
    coming
    examination
    from
    time
    to
    time.
    There
    must
    be
    some
    simpler
    and
    better
    way
    to
    test
    a
    student"
    s
    ability
    besides
    knowledge.
    And
    that
    is
    what
    we
    should
    do
    at
    once.
    1.
    Now
    little
    has
    been
    done
    to________.
    A.
    decide
    a
    student"s
    job
    B.
    test
    a
    student"s
    ability
    C.
    test
    a
    student"s
    knowledge
    D.
    test
    a
    student"s
    memory
    2.
    The
    examination
    system
    we
    are
    now
    using
    can
    only
    make
    the
    students________.
    A.
    gain
    more
    and
    more
    knowledge
    B.
    make
    rapid
    progress
    C.
    remember
    what
    is
    taught
    D.
    think
    for
    themselves
    3.
    In
    order
    to
    make
    students
    gain
    high
    marks
    in
    the
    coming
    examination,
    teachers
    have
    to________.
    A.
    develop
    their
    students"
    ability
    B.
    fill
    their
    students"
    heads
    with
    much
    information
    C.
    teach
    freely
    D.
    teach
    their
    students
    how
    to
    study
    4.
    The
    passage
    tells
    us
    about
    the
    importance
    of________.
    A.
    getting
    examination
    system
    improved
    B.
    taking
    examinations
    C.
    testing
    a
    student"
    s
    knowledge
    D.
    working
    hard
    at
    all
    lessons
    Keys:
    1-4
    BCBA
    高考英语阅读练习(084)
    Some
    English
    words
    are
    made
    up
    of
    the
    same
    part
    and
    have
    different
    beginnings
    and
    different
    endings,
    such
    as
    import,
    report
    and
    transport.
    All
    these
    words,
    you
    can
    see,
    have
    the
    same
    root
    "port",
    which
    comes
    from
    the
    Latin
    word,
    meaning"to
    carry"or"to
    move"from
    one
    place
    to
    another.
    And
    according
    to
    the
    bit
    at
    the
    beginning-
    which
    we
    call
    the
    prefix(~S~)
    -the
    meaning
    changes:
    "import"
    means
    "to......
    carry
    in”
    or
    "to
    bring
    into
    a
    country”;
    export
    ,
    "ex"
    means
    "out
    of"
    ,
    so
    this
    word
    means
    "to
    carry
    out
    of
    a
    country";
    "re"
    means
    "back”,
    so
    the
    word
    "report”
    means
    "to
    tell
    somebody
    to
    bring
    back
    information
    to
    somebody";
    "transport",
    "trans"
    means
    "across"
    and
    it
    means
    "
    to
    carry
    across
    one
    place
    to
    another".
    Let"s
    look
    at
    the
    following
    words:
    supporter,
    reporter,
    importer
    and
    exporter.
    You
    can
    see
    that
    in
    this
    case
    these
    words
    are
    nouns
    which
    are
    made
    up
    of
    the
    verbs
    plus
    a
    suffix(后辍)
    ,thus
    meaning
    a
    person
    who
    completes
    the
    verb.
    So
    supporter
    means
    somebody
    who
    supports.
    A
    reporter
    is
    somebody
    who
    reports.
    Importer
    is
    somebody
    who
    imports
    and
    exporter
    is
    somebody
    who
    exports,
    and
    so
    on.
    1.
    In
    the
    sentence
    "Some
    English
    words
    are
    made
    up
    of
    the
    same
    part…"",
    "part"
    means
    _______.
    A.
    different
    beginnings
    and
    different
    endings
    B.
    the
    root
    of
    a
    word
    C.
    the
    same
    root
    which
    has
    different
    meanings
    D.
    the
    same
    part
    which
    has
    several
    meanings
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    not
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Apart
    from"port”,
    most
    English
    words
    have
    the
    same
    root
    which
    comes
    from
    the
    Latin
    word.
    B.
    "Port"
    has
    the
    root
    meaning
    "to
    move”
    from
    one
    place
    to
    another.
    C.
    "Port”
    is
    the
    root
    forming
    some
    English
    words.
    D.
    The
    root
    "port"
    means
    "to
    carry".
    3.
    By
    adding
    a
    prefix
    or
    a
    suffix
    to
    a
    root,
    we
    can
    get
    a
    word
    which
    has_______.
    A.
    a
    different
    meaning
    B.
    a
    lot
    of
    meanings
    C.
    the
    meaning
    of
    a
    Latin
    word
    D.
    the
    meaning
    of
    "in"
    or"
    out
    of"
    4.
    We
    can
    get
    a
    noun_________.
    A.
    by
    adding
    a
    suffix
    to
    a
    verb
    B.
    by
    changing
    a
    prefix
    C.
    just
    by
    adding
    "er"
    to
    verbs
    D.
    only
    by
    adding"
    er"
    to
    a
    root
    Keys:
    1-4
    BAAA
    高考英语阅读练习(085)
    To
    lift
    something
    from
    the
    floor
    correctly,
    first
    bend
    your
    knees
    and
    squat
    down.
    Keep
    your
    back
    and
    hips(臀部)
    and
    waist
    (腰部)
    in
    a
    line.
    If
    you
    bend
    over,
    the
    muscles
    (
    ~
    I$1
    )
    in
    your
    lower
    back
    can
    become
    hurt
    easily.
    If
    you
    keep
    your
    back
    and
    hips
    straight,
    the
    muscles
    are
    stronger,
    because
    they
    have
    much
    more
    support.
    The
    other
    muscles
    can
    then
    help
    the
    lower
    back
    muscles.
    As
    you
    squat
    down,
    try
    to
    get
    close
    to
    the
    object
    as
    possible.
    For
    example,
    if
    you
    are
    going
    to
    pick
    up
    a
    heavy
    box,
    squat
    down
    directly
    in
    front
    of
    it.
    Maybe
    you
    will
    have
    to
    spread
    your
    knees
    and
    legs.
    Put
    one
    knee
    on
    each
    side
    of
    the
    box.
    Remember
    at
    all
    times
    to
    keep
    your
    back
    straight.
    Put
    your
    hands
    under
    the
    object
    that
    is
    in
    front
    of
    you,
    between
    your
    knees.
    To
    lift
    the
    object,
    you
    should
    stand
    up
    slowly.
    Use
    your
    muscles
    in
    order
    to
    stand
    up.
    In
    other
    words,
    lift
    with
    your
    legs,
    not
    with
    your
    back.
    1.
    The
    underlined
    word
    "squat"
    means________.
    A.
    to
    bend
    over
    your
    waist
    B.
    to
    bend
    yourself
    by
    bending
    your
    legs
    C.
    to
    lower
    yourself
    by
    bending
    your
    legs
    D.
    to
    stand
    straight
    2.
    You
    should
    keep
    your
    back
    straight
    so
    that________.
    A.
    the
    muscles
    can"
    t
    be
    hurt
    B.
    the
    muscles
    will
    have
    more
    support
    C.
    you
    seem
    to
    be
    stranger
    D.
    you
    will
    get
    more
    muscles
    3.
    The
    correct
    way
    to
    lift
    something
    heavy
    from
    the
    floor
    is________.
    A.
    to
    bend
    over
    from
    your
    waist
    first
    B.
    to
    bend
    your
    knees
    and
    squat
    down
    first
    C.
    to
    keep
    your
    back
    in
    a
    line
    D.
    to
    put
    your
    hands
    under
    the
    object
    4.
    What
    lifts
    the
    object
    in
    fact?
    A.
    The
    muaelea
    of
    your
    arms.
    B.
    The
    muscles
    of
    your
    back.
    C.
    Your
    hands.
    D.
    Your
    leg
    muscles.
    Keys:
    1-4
    CBBD
    高考英语阅读练习(086)
    In
    1977,
    a
    dead
    author
    of
    detective
    stories
    saved
    the
    life
    of
    a
    19-month-old
    baby
    in
    a
    most
    unusual
    way.
    The
    author
    was
    Agatha
    Christie,
    one
    of
    the
    most
    successful
    writers
    of
    detective
    stories
    in
    the
    world.
    In
    June
    1977,
    a
    baby
    girl
    became
    seriously
    ill
    in
    Qatar,
    near
    Saudi
    Arabia.
    Doctors
    were
    unable
    to
    find
    out
    the
    cause
    of
    her
    illness
    with
    confidence,
    so
    she
    was
    sent
    to
    Hammersmith
    Hospital
    in
    London.
    She
    was
    then
    only
    semi-conscious
    and
    on
    the
    "Dangerously
    Ill"
    list.
    A
    team
    of
    doctors
    hurried
    to
    examine
    the
    baby
    only
    to
    discover
    that
    they,
    too,
    were
    confused
    by
    the
    very
    unusual
    symptoms
    (症状).
    While
    they
    were
    discussing
    the
    baby"s
    case,
    a
    nurse
    asked
    to
    speak
    to
    them.
    "Excuse
    me,"
    said
    Nurse
    Marsha
    Maitlan,
    "but
    I
    think
    the
    baby
    is
    suffering
    from
    thallium
    (铊)
    poisoning."
    "What
    makes
    you
    think
    that?"
    Dr.
    Brown
    asked.
    "Thallium
    poisoning
    is
    extremely
    rare."
    "A
    few
    days
    ago,
    I
    was
    reading
    a
    novel
    called
    A
    Pale
    Horse
    by
    Agatha
    Christie,"
    Nurse
    Maitlan
    explained.
    "In
    the
    book,
    somebody
    uses
    thallium
    poison,
    and
    all
    the
    symptoms
    are
    described.
    They"re
    exactly
    the
    same
    as
    the
    baby"s."
    "You"re
    very
    thoughtful
    and
    you
    may
    be
    right,"
    another
    doctor
    said.
    "We"ll
    carry
    out
    some
    tests
    and
    find
    out
    whether
    it"s
    thallium
    or
    not."
    Tests
    showed
    that
    the
    baby
    had
    indeed
    been
    poisoned
    by
    thallium,
    a
    rare
    metallic
    substance
    used
    in
    making
    special
    glass.
    Once
    they
    knew
    the
    cause
    of
    the
    illness,
    the
    doctors
    were
    able
    to
    give
    the
    baby
    the
    correct
    treatment.
    She
    soon
    recovered
    and
    was
    sent
    back
    to
    Qatar.
    Later
    it
    was
    reported
    that
    the
    poison
    might
    have
    come
    from
    an
    insecticide
    (杀虫剂)
    used
    in
    Qatar.
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    The
    one
    who
    first
    suggested
    the
    correct
    cause
    of
    the
    baby"s
    illness
    was
    _____.
    A.
    a
    doctor
    in
    Qatar
    B.
    Nurse
    Maitlan
    C.
    Dr.
    Brown
    D.
    Agatha
    Christie
    2.
    The
    baby
    was
    sent
    to
    London
    because
    _____.
    A.
    she
    was
    born
    there
    B.
    the
    hospitals
    in
    Qatar
    were
    full
    at
    that
    time
    C.
    she
    was
    the
    daughter
    of
    a
    doctor
    in
    London
    D.
    the
    Qatar
    doctors
    were
    not
    sure
    whether
    they
    could
    cure
    her
    3.
    As
    far
    as
    we
    can
    tell
    from
    the
    passage,
    Agatha
    Christie
    _____.
    A.
    had
    never
    met
    this
    baby
    B.
    had
    spent
    a
    long
    time
    studying
    the
    baby"s
    case
    C.
    visited
    the
    baby
    in
    the
    hospital
    at
    Hammersmith
    D.
    gave
    Nurse
    Maitlan
    some
    advice
    on
    the
    phone
    4.
    It
    seems
    likely
    from
    the
    passage
    that
    the
    baby"s
    illness
    had
    something
    to
    do
    with
    _____.
    A.
    a
    dangerous
    pair
    of
    glasses
    B.
    the
    water
    in
    Qatar
    C.
    a
    harmful
    substance
    used
    to
    kill
    insects
    D.
    a
    dead
    writer
    5.
    When
    the
    baby
    was
    sent
    to
    the
    hospital
    in
    London,
    her
    case
    was
    considered
    to
    be
    _____.
    A.
    an
    urgent
    one
    B.
    quite
    a
    simple
    one
    C.
    a
    usual
    one
    D.
    the
    result
    of
    thallium
    poisoning
    Keys:
    BDACA
    高考英语阅读练习(087)
    The
    expensive
    shops
    in
    a
    famous
    arcade
    (有拱廊的街道)
    near
    Piccadilly
    were
    just
    opening.
    At
    this
    time
    of
    the
    morning,
    the
    arcade
    was
    almost
    empty.
    Mr.
    Taylor,
    the
    owner
    of
    a
    jewellery
    shop
    was
    admiring
    a
    new
    window
    display.
    Two
    of
    his
    assistants
    had
    been
    working
    busily
    since
    8
    o"clock
    and
    had
    only
    just
    finished.
    Diamond
    necklaces
    and
    rings
    had
    been
    beautifully
    arranged
    on
    a
    background
    of
    black
    velvet
    (丝绒).
    After
    gazing
    at
    the
    display
    for
    several
    minutes,
    Mr.
    Taylor
    went
    back
    into
    his
    shop.
    The
    silence
    was
    suddenly
    broken
    when
    a
    large
    car,
    with
    its
    headlights
    on
    and
    its
    horn
    blaring
    (喇叭响声),
    roared
    down
    the
    arcade.
    it
    came
    to
    stop
    outside
    the
    jeweller"s.
    One
    man
    stayed
    at
    the
    wheel
    two
    others
    with
    black
    stockings
    over
    their
    faces
    jumped
    out
    and
    smashed
    the
    window
    of
    the
    shop
    with
    iron
    bars.
    While
    this
    was
    going
    on,
    Mr.
    Taylor
    was
    upstairs.
    He
    and
    his
    staff
    began
    throwing
    furniture
    out
    of
    the
    window.
    Chairs
    and
    tables
    went
    flying
    into
    the
    arcade.
    One
    of
    the
    thieves
    was
    struck
    by
    a
    heavy
    stature,
    but
    he
    was
    too
    busy
    helping
    himself
    to
    diamonds
    to
    notice
    any
    pain.
    The
    raid
    (袭击)
    was
    all
    over
    in
    three
    minutes,
    for
    the
    men
    scram-bled
    back
    into
    the
    car
    and
    it
    moved
    off
    at
    an
    unbelievable
    speed.
    Just
    as
    it
    was
    leaving,
    Mr.
    Taylor
    rushed
    out
    and
    ran
    after
    it
    throwing
    ashtrays
    (烟灰缸)
    and
    vases,
    but
    it
    was
    impossible
    to
    stop
    the
    thieves.
    They
    had
    got
    away
    with
    thousands
    of
    pounds
    worth
    of
    diamonds.
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    The
    expensive
    shops
    in
    ____
    were
    just
    opening.
    A.
    Piccadilly"s
    famous
    arcade
    B.
    a
    Piccadilly
    famous
    arcade
    C.
    a
    famous
    Piccadilly
    arcade
    D.
    the
    famous
    arcade
    of
    Piccadilly
    2.
    Had
    one
    of
    the
    thieves
    not
    been
    so
    busy
    taking
    the
    diamonds,
    he
    ____
    the
    blow.
    A.
    would
    feel
    B.
    had
    been
    feeling
    C.
    had
    felt
    D.
    would
    have
    felt
    3.
    While
    Mr.
    Taylor
    was
    admiring
    the
    new
    window
    display
    ____.
    A.
    his
    two
    assistants
    were
    arranging
    jewellery
    in
    the
    window
    B.
    some
    thieves
    were
    arranging
    C.
    he
    was
    standing
    inside
    his
    shop
    D.
    his
    staff
    were
    finishing
    their
    work
    for
    the
    day
    4.
    The
    car
    headlights
    were
    on
    and
    its
    horn
    blaring
    ____.
    A.
    as
    the
    thieves
    wanted
    to
    warn
    people
    out
    of
    their
    way
    B.
    as
    a
    special
    signal
    to
    the
    assistants
    C.
    as
    the
    thieves
    could
    see
    where
    they
    were
    going
    D.
    to
    break
    the
    early
    morning
    silence.
    5.
    The
    thieves
    chose
    Mr.
    Taylor"s
    shop
    because
    ____.
    A.
    it
    was
    early
    in
    the
    morning
    and
    not
    many
    shop
    were
    open
    B.
    they
    didn"t
    expect
    Mr.
    Taylor
    and
    his
    staff
    to
    try
    and
    stop
    them
    C.
    it
    usually
    had
    a
    great
    deal
    of
    valuable
    jewellery
    on
    display
    D.
    they
    had
    a
    very
    fast
    car
    to
    get
    away
    in
    Keys:
    CDBAC
    高考英语阅读练习(088)
    Mary
    and
    Peter
    were
    having
    a
    picnic
    with
    some
    friends
    near
    a
    river
    when
    Mary
    notice
    an
    object
    overhead.
    "Look!"
    she
    shouted
    to
    her
    friends.
    "That"s
    a
    spaceship
    up
    there
    and
    it"s
    going
    to
    land
    here."
    Frightened
    by
    the
    strange
    silver-colored
    spaceship,
    most
    of
    the
    young
    people
    got
    in
    their
    cars
    and
    drove
    away
    quickly.
    Peter
    was
    fond
    of
    Mary
    and
    always
    stayed
    close
    to
    her.
    They,
    more
    curious
    than
    frightened,
    watched
    the
    spaceship
    land
    and
    saw
    a
    door
    open.
    When
    nobody
    came
    out,
    they
    went
    to
    the
    spaceship
    and
    entered
    inside.
    Peter
    followed
    Mary
    into
    the
    spaceship
    and
    did
    not
    hear
    the
    door
    closed
    behind
    him.
    The
    temperature
    fell
    rapidly
    and
    the
    two
    young
    people
    lost
    consciousness.
    When
    they
    woke
    up,
    they
    were
    surprised
    to
    see
    that
    they
    were
    back
    by
    the
    river
    again.
    The
    spaceship
    had
    gone.
    Their
    car
    was
    nearby.
    "What
    happened?"
    asked
    Mary.
    Peter
    scratched
    (抓)
    his
    head,
    saying
    slowly,
    "Don"t
    ask
    me.
    Perhaps
    we
    had
    a
    dream.
    Did
    you...Did
    you
    see
    a
    spaceship?"
    "Yes,"
    said
    Mary.
    "And
    we
    both
    went
    into
    it.
    Then..."
    she
    looked
    at
    her
    wrist.
    "That"s
    funny.
    My
    watch
    has
    stopped.
    Oh,
    well,
    come
    on.
    It"s
    time
    to
    go
    home."
    Driving
    about
    fifty
    meters,
    they
    found
    their
    way
    blocked
    by
    a
    thick
    wall
    made
    of
    something
    like
    glass.
    They
    got
    out
    of
    the
    car
    and
    tried
    to
    find
    their
    way
    round
    the
    wall
    but
    discovered
    that
    they
    were
    inside
    a
    circular
    wall.
    It
    was
    like
    a
    mirror
    and
    prevented
    them
    from
    seeing
    through
    it.
    On
    the
    other
    side
    of
    the
    wall,
    strange
    creatures
    walked
    past
    slowly.
    A
    few
    stopped
    to
    stare
    through
    the
    wall
    and
    read
    a
    new
    notice
    which,
    translated
    into
    English,
    said:
    "New
    arrivals
    at
    the
    zoo:
    a
    pair
    of
    Earthlings
    in
    their
    natural
    surroundings
    with
    their
    mobile
    house."
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    When
    the
    spaceship
    arrived,
    why
    didn"t
    Peter
    drive
    away?
    A.
    He
    did
    not
    like
    leaving
    Mary.
    B.
    He
    knew
    that
    the
    spaceship
    was
    harmless.
    C.
    He
    was
    too
    frightened
    to
    drive.
    D.
    There
    was
    a
    wall
    blocking
    the
    road.
    2.
    Why
    did
    Peter
    enter
    the
    spaceship?
    A.
    He
    saw
    the
    food
    and
    was
    hungry.
    B.
    Mary
    told
    him
    to
    enter
    it.
    C.
    He
    just
    followed
    Mary.
    D.
    He
    wanted
    to
    study
    it.
    3.
    Peter
    scratched
    his
    head
    so
    we
    know
    that
    _____.
    A.
    he
    had
    lost
    consciousness
    B.
    he
    was
    puzzled
    and
    did
    not
    know
    what
    to
    say
    to
    Mary
    C.
    he
    had
    lost
    his
    memory
    D.
    he
    was
    still
    half
    asleep
    4.
    What
    do
    the
    words
    "strange
    creatures"
    mean
    to
    tell
    us?
    A.
    They
    were
    wild
    animals
    in
    a
    zoo.
    B.
    They
    were
    robbers.
    C.
    They
    had
    landed
    on
    Earth
    in
    a
    spaceship
    and
    lived
    there.
    D.
    The
    young
    couple
    were
    on
    another
    planet.
    5.
    Which
    word
    in
    the
    notice
    tells
    us
    that
    Mary
    and
    Peter
    were
    not
    on
    earth?
    A.
    natural
    B.
    surroundings
    C.
    Earthlings
    D.
    house
    Keys:
    ACBDC
    高考英语阅读练习(089)
    It
    began
    as
    a
    game:
    high
    school
    and
    college
    students
    studying
    computer
    technology
    figured
    out
    (领会到,想象出来)
    they
    could
    use
    personal
    computers
    to
    break
    into
    (闯入)
    telephone
    company
    computers
    and
    make
    free,
    long-distance
    telephone
    calls.
    These
    young
    computer
    wizards
    (奇才)
    soon
    gained
    the
    nickname
    "hackers
    (黑客)".
    Police
    put
    the
    collar
    on
    (拘留,逮捕)
    a
    few
    hackers,
    but
    many
    went
    on
    to
    even
    more
    complex
    hacking.
    One
    hacker
    was
    arrested
    for
    making
    illegal
    telephone
    calls
    and
    later
    used
    a
    jailhouse
    (监狱)
    phone
    to
    alter
    (变更)
    a
    police
    officer"s
    credit
    records
    (信用记录)
    to
    get
    back
    at
    (报复)
    the
    officer
    for
    arresting
    him.
    The
    hacker
    also
    used
    a
    computer
    to
    alter
    his
    college
    records
    to
    give
    himself
    better
    grades.
    As
    hackers
    gained
    experience,
    they
    began
    invading
    (侵入)
    computers
    at
    banks,
    airlines
    and
    other
    businesses.
    In
    one
    scheme
    (计划,方案),
    a
    hacker
    instructed
    an
    airline"s
    computer
    to
    give
    him
    free
    airplane
    tickets.
    The
    U.S.
    government
    is
    worried
    hackers
    may
    break
    into
    its
    sophisticated
    (复杂的,尖端的)
    networks
    of
    defense
    computers.
    The
    government"s
    classified
    (分类的)
    secrets
    are
    vulnerable
    (脆弱的)
    because
    thousands
    of
    government
    computers
    are
    connected
    by
    telephone
    lines
    that
    hackers
    can
    tap
    into
    (敲入,进入).
    In
    November
    1988,
    a
    college
    student
    tapped
    into
    a
    non-classified
    U.S.
    Defense
    Department
    computer
    network
    called
    Arpanet.
    The
    hacker
    injected
    (输入,注入)
    a
    computer
    program
    that
    left
    copies
    of
    itself
    throughout
    Arpanet.
    Some
    hackers
    use
    each
    "viruses
    (病毒)"
    to
    destroy
    all
    the
    data
    in
    a
    computer.
    But
    in
    this
    case,
    government
    officials
    shut
    down
    the
    network
    before
    the
    program
    reached
    every
    computer
    in
    the
    system.
    Shutting
    down
    the
    system
    angered
    many
    researchers
    who
    were
    using
    the
    computers.
    The
    hacker
    turned
    himself
    in
    (自首)
    to
    police
    and
    told
    them
    how
    to
    get
    his
    program
    out
    of
    the
    computer
    system.
    He
    was
    charged
    with
    a
    crime.
    The
    incident
    put
    the
    spotlight
    on
    (引起留意)
    computer
    hacking
    in
    the
    United
    States.
    Many
    companies
    have
    hired
    experts
    to
    protect
    their
    computers
    from
    hackers,
    and
    many
    computer
    experts
    now
    advise
    companies
    on
    how
    to
    protect
    their
    computers.
    The
    U.S.
    government
    believes
    foreign
    governments
    have
    hired
    hackers
    to
    try
    to
    break
    into
    top-secret
    (绝密的)
    defense
    computers.
    It
    fears
    a
    hacker
    could
    inject
    a
    virus
    into
    military
    computers
    that
    would
    erase
    all
    the
    data
    during
    a
    war.
    Experts
    disagree
    over
    whether
    a
    computer
    network
    can
    ever
    be
    safe
    from
    hacking.
    But
    in
    the
    future,
    some
    of
    the
    most
    brilliant
    (杰出的,卓越的)
    minds
    in
    the
    U.S.
    will
    be
    working
    to
    frustrate
    (挫败)
    the
    efforts
    of
    computer
    hackers
    and
    spies.
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    The
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    article
    is
    _____.
    A.
    computer
    hackers
    only
    want
    to
    make
    free
    long-distance
    phone
    calls
    B.
    the
    government
    wants
    to
    hire
    computer
    hackers
    to
    spy
    on
    the
    Russians
    C.
    computer
    hackers
    are
    a
    threat
    to
    private
    companies
    and
    government
    secrets
    D.
    many
    companies
    have
    hired
    experts
    to
    protect
    their
    computers
    from
    hackers
    who
    carry
    viruses
    2.
    A
    computer
    "virus"
    is
    like
    a
    human
    virus
    because
    it
    _____.
    A.
    makes
    a
    computer
    cough
    and
    throw
    up
    B.
    spreads
    from
    one
    computer
    to
    other
    computers
    C.
    can
    erase
    a
    person"s
    doctor
    bills
    D.
    requires
    regular
    visits
    to
    a
    doctor
    3.
    A
    hacker
    can
    be
    dangerous
    because
    _____.
    A.
    he
    knows
    how
    to
    make
    free
    long-distance
    telephone
    calls
    B.
    vital
    information
    is
    stored
    in
    computers,
    and
    a
    hacker
    knows
    how
    to
    change
    or
    erase
    the
    information
    C.
    once
    in
    jail,
    he
    can
    use
    a
    telephone
    to
    operate
    his
    computer
    D.
    a
    hacker
    who
    steals
    a
    free
    airplane
    ticket
    might
    deprive
    a
    doctor
    of
    that
    seat
    on
    the
    airplane
    4.
    U.S.
    government
    computers
    are
    vulnerable
    to
    a
    hacker
    because
    _____.
    A.
    the
    government
    always
    pays
    its
    telephone
    bills
    on
    time
    B.
    the
    Russians
    know
    what"s
    in
    the
    U.S.
    computers
    C.
    viruses
    attack
    only
    government
    computers
    D.
    many
    government
    computers
    are
    connected
    by
    telephone
    lines
    5.
    In
    the
    future
    _____.
    A.
    Some
    of
    the
    most
    brilliant
    minds
    in
    America
    will
    be
    working
    to
    try
    to
    stop
    computer
    hackers
    and
    spies
    B.
    hackers
    will
    begin
    invading
    computers
    at
    banks,
    airlines
    and
    other
    businesses
    C.
    many
    computer
    hackers
    will
    be
    arrested
    for
    making
    free
    telephone
    calls
    D.
    some
    computer
    hackers
    will
    turn
    themselves
    in
    to
    the
    police
    Keys:
    CBBDA
    高考英语阅读练习(090)
    Animal
    experimentation(实验)
    is
    the
    backbone(支柱,基础)
    of
    American
    research
    and
    treatment
    of
    disease.
    Each
    year,
    17
    million
    to
    22
    million
    animals
    are
    sacrificed
    in
    the
    name
    of(以......的名义)
    science.
    While
    90
    percent
    of
    them
    are
    rats
    and
    mice,
    180,000
    dogs,
    50,000
    cats,
    61,000
    monkeys
    and
    554,000
    rabbits
    are
    done
    away
    with
    in
    laboratories
    operated
    by
    industry
    and
    government.
    But
    the
    public
    has
    raised
    an
    outcry(导致抗议)
    over
    these
    deaths.
    Spurred(驱策,刺激)
    vivid(生动的)
    reports
    of
    cruelty(残忍),
    the
    animal
    rights
    movement(维护动物权利运动)
    is
    made
    up
    of
    (由...组成)7,000
    organizations
    with
    10
    million
    members.
    They"ve
    documented(用文件或证书等证实)
    cases
    in
    which
    monkeys
    were
    isolated(隔离)
    in
    steel
    tanks(箱、柜)
    for
    45
    days
    and
    dogs
    were
    bombarded(轰击、辐射)
    with
    radiation(放射线)
    or
    chemicals
    until
    they
    bled
    from
    the
    mouth.
    Scientists
    say
    such
    incidents(事件)
    are
    rare.
    Laws
    have
    been
    passed
    to
    govern(治理)
    testing.
    Many
    research
    centers
    now
    have
    committees(委员会)
    to
    review(审查)
    all
    proposed
    animal
    experiments,
    and
    computers
    can
    be
    used
    in
    place
    of(代替)animals
    in
    many
    experiments.
    But
    scientists
    say
    they
    can"t
    do
    without(不用,放弃)
    animals
    to
    test
    new
    drugs
    and
    treatments
    on
    animals
    to
    make
    sure
    they"re
    safe
    for
    humans.
    Animal
    experiments
    produced
    vaccines(疫苗)
    or
    treatments
    for
    diseases
    such
    as
    diabetes(糖尿病),
    and
    techniques
    used
    in
    open
    heart
    surgery(心脏外科手术).
    They"re
    important
    to
    efforts
    to
    find
    a
    treatment
    for
    AIDS.
    Animal
    rights
    activists
    have
    shown
    they
    will
    go
    to
    almost
    any
    length(奉陪到底).
    One
    New
    York
    researcher
    received
    more
    than
    10,000
    protest(抗议)
    letters
    following
    publicity(公开)
    of
    her
    experiments
    in
    which
    she
    gave
    drugs
    to
    monkeys.
    The
    researcher
    was
    studying
    drug
    addiction(依靠,成瘾).
    A
    protester
    was
    arrested
    in
    Connecticut
    for
    placing
    a
    pipe
    bomb(铁管土炸药)outside
    a
    company
    that
    used
    animals
    in
    tests.
    After
    fires
    and
    break-ins(闯入,破门而入),
    many
    labs
    have
    bought
    electronic
    locks
    and
    alarms
    for
    protection.
    Other
    targets(目标,对象)
    of
    the
    animal
    rights
    movement
    are
    the
    fur
    industry,
    farms,
    and
    school
    biology(生物学)
    classes
    in
    which
    children
    dissect(解剖)
    frogs.
    The
    movement
    has
    scored
    some
    successes(获得某些成功).
    A
    dozen
    states
    no
    longer
    allow
    pounds(兽栏)
    ──
    places
    that
    accept
    dogs
    and
    cats
    that
    have
    no
    homes
    ──
    to
    sell
    animals
    to
    scientists.
    Scientists
    claim
    the
    cost
    of
    their
    work
    will
    rise
    as
    a
    result.
    The
    battle
    between
    scientists
    and
    activists
    raises
    a
    basic
    question:
    Can
    modern
    society
    be
    both
    humane(仁慈的)
    in
    its
    treatment
    of
    living
    things(生物)
    and
    advanced(先进的,高级的)
    in
    its
    treatment
    of
    disease?
    It
    seems
    certain
    there
    will
    be
    new
    restrictions(限制,约束)
    placed
    on
    the
    use
    of
    animals
    in
    scientific
    experiments.
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    The
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    article
    is
    _____.
    A.
    fewer
    animals
    should
    be
    taken
    to
    laboratories
    B.
    Americans
    are
    questioning
    the
    use
    of
    animals
    in
    experiments
    C.
    mice
    and
    rats
    make
    the
    best
    subjects
    for
    experiments
    D.
    scientific
    experiments
    can
    be
    carried
    out
    without
    animals
    2.
    Animal
    experiments
    will
    probably
    continue
    because
    _____.
    A.
    scientists
    insist
    they
    are
    harmless
    B.
    the
    groups
    that
    oppose
    them
    aren"t
    very
    big
    or
    powerful
    C.
    they
    are
    critical
    for
    understanding
    and
    curing
    human
    disease
    D.
    there
    are
    enough
    regulations
    to
    protect
    animals
    from
    abuse
    3.
    Proponents
    of
    animal
    rights
    are
    most
    convincing
    when
    they
    _____.
    A.
    explode
    bombs
    at
    laboratories
    that
    conduct
    scientific
    tests
    B.
    point
    out
    the
    diseases
    that
    have
    been
    cured
    by
    scientists
    C.
    threat
    their
    own
    pets
    kindly
    D.
    give
    examples
    of
    animals
    that
    were
    mistreated
    in
    labs
    4.
    The
    animal
    rights
    movement
    is
    _____.
    A.
    not
    very
    successful
    in
    passing
    laws
    to
    protect
    animals
    B.
    trying
    many
    different
    approaches
    to
    accomplish
    its
    goals
    C.
    more
    interested
    in
    protecting
    dogs
    than
    in
    protecting
    mice
    D.
    supported
    mostly
    by
    people
    who
    dislike
    scientists
    5.
    Scientists
    will
    be
    satisfied
    only
    if
    _____.
    A.
    they
    can
    continue
    using
    animals
    in
    their
    experiments
    B.
    the
    animal
    rights
    movement
    comes
    to
    a
    halt
    C.
    they
    install
    locks
    and
    alarms
    on
    their
    labs
    D.
    their
    supply
    of
    animals
    is
    increased
    significantly
    Keys:
    BCDBA
    高考英语阅读练习(091)
    A
    Father’s
    day
    is
    a
    day
    set
    aside
    for
    honouring
    fathers
    in
    church
    services
    and
    in
    the
    home.
    It’s
    celebrated
    in
    the
    U.S.
    in
    the
    third
    Sunday
    of
    June.
    This
    idea
    was
    begun
    by
    Mrs
    John
    Bruces
    Dodd,
    who
    in
    1909
    persuaded
    an
    organization
    in
    Washington
    to
    salute
    fathers
    with
    special
    church
    services.
    The
    idea
    was
    officially
    agreed
    to
    by
    President
    Woodrow
    Wilson
    in
    1916.
    In
    1924,
    President
    Calvin
    Coolidge
    suggested
    national
    celebration
    of
    the
    day
    to
    form
    closer
    relations
    between
    fathers
    and
    their
    children,
    and
    to
    impress
    upon
    fathers
    the
    full
    measure
    of
    their
    duties.
    The
    red
    or
    white
    rose
    is
    recognized
    as
    the
    official
    Father’s
    Day
    flower.
    1.
    Father’s
    Day,
    at
    first,
    meant
    ______.
    A.
    to
    respect
    all
    the
    fathers
    B.
    to
    win
    honour
    for
    fathers
    in
    church
    services
    C.
    to
    do
    honour
    to
    fathers
    at
    home
    D.
    to
    warn
    the
    fathers
    of
    their
    duties
    2.
    Father’s
    Day
    was
    first
    celebrated
    by
    _____.
    A.
    the
    French
    B.
    the
    British
    C.
    the
    German
    D.
    the
    American
    3.
    The
    first
    president
    who
    agreed
    to
    Father’s
    Day
    was
    _____.
    A.
    Woodrow
    Wilson
    B.
    Calvin
    Coolidge
    C.
    George
    Washington
    D.
    Abraham
    Lincoln
    4.
    The
    president
    wanted
    Father’s
    Day
    to
    be
    a
    day
    on
    which
    _____.
    A.
    people
    remembered
    their
    fathers
    B.
    the
    relations
    between
    fathers
    and
    their
    children
    became
    closer
    C.
    fathers
    must
    remember
    that
    they
    should
    be
    good
    fathers
    D.
    both
    B
    and
    C
    Keys:
    1.
    A
    2.
    D
    3.
    A
    4.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(092)
    Few
    can
    refuse
    to
    accept
    the
    strange
    coincidences
    (巧合)
    in
    the
    deaths
    of
    John
    F.
    Kennedy
    and
    Abraham
    Lincoln.
    For
    example,
    Kennedy
    was
    elected
    in
    1960
    while
    Lincoln
    came
    into
    power
    in
    the
    U.S.
    in
    1860.
    Both
    men
    were
    murdered
    from
    behind,
    on
    a
    Friday,
    and
    with
    their
    wives
    present.
    The
    two
    men
    were
    born
    exactly
    one
    hundred
    years
    apart,
    as
    were
    their
    murderers,
    Lee
    Harvey
    Oswald
    and
    John
    Wilkes
    Booth.
    Perhaps
    the
    strangest
    coincidence
    is
    that
    Kennedy’s
    secretary,
    whose
    name
    was
    Lincoln,
    advised
    him
    not
    to
    go
    to
    Dellas
    where
    he
    was
    shot,
    and
    Lincoln’s
    secretary,
    whose
    name
    was
    Kennedy,
    advised
    him
    not
    to
    go
    to
    the
    Ford
    Theater
    where
    he
    met
    his
    death.
    1.
    Both
    of
    the
    two
    men
    _____.
    A.
    were
    presidents
    of
    the
    U.S.
    B.
    were
    elected
    presidents
    of
    the
    U.S.
    twice
    C.
    had
    a
    secretary
    by
    the
    name
    of
    Kennedy
    D.
    were
    murdered
    by
    the
    men
    of
    the
    same
    names.
    2.
    From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    find
    out
    _____.
    A.
    Oswald
    and
    Booth
    were
    of
    an
    age
    B.
    Oswald
    was
    100
    years
    older
    than
    Booth
    C.
    Booth
    was
    100
    years
    younger
    than
    Oswald
    D.
    There
    were
    100
    years
    between
    Oswald
    and
    Booth
    3.
    Abraham
    Lincoln
    and
    john
    F.
    Kennedy
    were
    murdered
    _____.
    A.
    in
    Dellas
    B.
    at
    a
    stadium
    C.
    at
    a
    theater
    D.
    with
    their
    wives
    on
    the
    spot
    4.
    There
    were
    such
    strange
    coincidences
    between
    the
    two
    American
    presidents
    that
    _____.
    A.
    nobody
    can
    accept
    B.
    almost
    everybody
    can
    accept
    C.
    only
    a
    few
    persons
    can
    accept
    D.
    hardly
    anybody
    has
    to
    accept
    Keys:
    1.
    A
    2.
    D
    3.
    D
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(093)
    The
    man
    from
    the
    west
    stopped
    and
    drew
    back
    his
    arm.
    "You’re
    not
    Jimmy
    Wells,"
    he
    said
    in
    a
    quick
    and
    angry
    way,
    "Twenty
    years
    is
    a
    long
    time,
    but
    not
    long
    enough
    to
    change
    a
    man’
    nose
    from
    a
    Roman
    to
    pug."
    "It
    sometimes
    changes
    a
    good
    man
    into
    a
    bad
    one,”
    said
    the
    tall
    man,
    "you’ve
    been
    under
    arrest
    for
    ten
    minutes.
    Silky
    Bob.
    Chicago
    thinks
    you
    may
    have
    dropped
    over
    our
    way
    and
    phones
    us
    she
    wants
    to
    have
    a
    word
    with
    you.
    Going
    quietly,
    are
    you?
    That’s
    sensible.
    Now
    before
    we
    go
    to
    the
    station
    here’s
    a
    note
    I
    was
    asked
    to
    hand
    you.
    You
    may
    read
    it
    here
    at
    the
    window.
    It’s
    from
    Patrolman
    Wells.?"
    The
    man
    from
    the
    West
    opened
    the
    little
    piece
    of
    paper
    handed
    him.
    His
    hand
    was
    steady
    when
    he
    began
    to
    read,
    but
    it
    trembled
    a
    little
    by
    the
    time
    he抎
    finished.
    The
    note
    was
    rather
    short.
    Bob:
    I
    was
    at
    the
    right
    place
    on
    time.
    When
    you
    struck
    the
    match
    to
    light
    your
    cigar
    I
    saw
    it
    was
    the
    face
    wanted
    in
    Chicago.
    Somehow
    I
    couldn’t
    do
    it
    myself,
    so
    I
    went
    around
    and
    got
    a
    plain
    clothes
    man
    (便衣)
    to
    do
    the
    job.
    1.
    The
    man
    from
    the
    West
    must
    have
    broken
    the
    law
    _____.
    A.
    in
    Chicago
    B.
    in
    New
    York
    C.
    in
    his
    hometown
    D.
    somewhere
    else
    2.
    The
    man
    from
    the
    West
    recognized
    the
    tall
    man
    not
    to
    be
    the
    one
    he
    had
    been
    waiting
    for
    because
    the
    tall
    man
    ____.
    A.
    had
    a
    different
    accent
    from
    his
    B.
    had
    a
    different
    nose
    from
    his
    friend’s
    C.
    was
    his
    another
    old
    friend
    D.
    said
    "Chicago
    wants
    to
    talk
    with
    you.?"
    3.
    The
    two
    men
    may
    have
    walked
    _____.
    A.
    for
    ten
    minutes
    B.
    arm
    in
    arm
    C.
    face
    to
    face
    D.
    both
    A
    and
    B
    4.
    We
    can
    suppose
    Jim
    _____.
    A.
    was
    afraid
    of
    the
    man
    from
    the
    West
    B.
    got
    another
    man
    to
    help
    him
    when
    necessary
    C.
    had
    an
    appointment
    with
    Bob
    20
    years
    ago
    D.
    had
    something
    else
    to
    do
    and
    couldn’t
    come
    himself
    Keys:
    1-4
    ABDC
    高考英语阅读练习(094)
    Shopping
    ──bag
    ladies
    don’t
    beg
    publicly,
    but
    they
    do
    not
    refuse
    what
    is
    offered.
    Once
    a
    shopping
    ──bag
    lady
    appears
    where
    you
    live,
    it
    is
    as
    hard
    to
    pass
    her
    by
    without
    giving
    her
    some
    money
    as
    it
    is
    to
    pay
    no
    attention
    to
    the
    collection
    box(功德箱)in
    church.
    And
    although
    you
    may
    not
    like
    it,
    if
    she
    chooses
    your
    doorway
    as
    her
    place
    to
    sleep
    in
    the
    night,
    it
    is
    as
    morally
    hard
    to
    turn
    her
    away
    as
    it
    is
    to
    do
    with
    a
    lost
    dog.
    Most
    shopping
    ──bag
    ladies
    seem
    to
    be
    between
    the
    ages
    of
    40
    and
    65.
    They
    wear
    layers
    (层)
    of
    clothes
    even
    in
    summer
    time,
    with
    newspapers
    filled
    between
    the
    layers
    as
    something
    against
    bad
    weather.
    No
    one
    knows
    how
    many
    shopping
    ──bag
    ladies
    there
    are
    in
    New
    York..
    The
    number
    is
    going
    up.
    Some
    persons
    and
    researchers
    spend
    a
    great
    deal
    of
    time
    taking
    care
    of
    or
    observing
    shopping
    ──bag
    lag
    ladies
    and
    doing
    what
    they
    can
    to
    better
    the
    life
    lady
    hermits
    (隐士)
    who’re
    down.
    1.
    Shopping-bag
    ladies
    are
    _____.
    A.
    lady
    beggars
    B.
    ladies
    who
    sell
    shopping-bags
    C.
    ladies
    who
    make
    shopping-bags
    D.
    those
    who
    go
    hungry
    2.
    They
    fill
    newspapers
    between
    the
    layers
    of
    their
    clothed
    because
    _____.
    A.
    they
    are
    so
    poor
    B.
    they
    have
    no
    place
    to
    put
    them
    C.
    they
    want
    to
    hide
    them
    D.
    they
    have
    to
    use
    them
    to
    keep
    the
    cold
    out
    3.
    They
    fill
    newspapers
    between
    the
    layers
    of
    their
    clothes
    because
    _____.
    A.
    they
    are
    so
    poor
    B.
    they
    have
    no
    place
    to
    put
    them
    C.
    they
    want
    to
    hide
    them
    D.
    they
    have
    to
    use
    them
    to
    keep
    the
    cold
    out
    4.Which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    not
    true
    ?
    A.
    There
    are
    more
    and
    more
    shopping-bag
    ladies
    in
    the
    United
    States.
    B.
    Shopping-bag
    ladies
    appears
    only
    in
    New
    York.
    C.
    Some
    people
    are
    helping
    shopping-bag
    ladies.
    D.
    Some
    people
    are
    engaged
    in
    their
    research
    on
    these
    shopping-bag
    ladies.
    Keys:
    1-4
    ADDB
    高考英语阅读练习(095)
    No
    one
    could
    have
    failed
    to
    be
    moved
    had
    he
    watched
    the
    live
    televised
    volleyball
    game
    between
    the
    Chinese
    and
    Cuban
    women’s
    teams.
    As
    we
    sat
    before
    the
    television
    set,
    with
    our
    eyes
    fixed
    on
    the
    screen,
    we
    experienced
    every
    kind
    of
    feeling.
    When
    the
    two
    teams
    played
    neck
    and
    neck,
    we
    were
    on
    pins
    and
    needles,
    anxious
    as
    to
    what
    would
    come
    next,
    and
    when
    our
    team
    fell
    behind
    our
    hearts
    were
    in
    our
    mouths.
    Watching
    the
    game
    between
    those
    two
    teams
    is
    not
    only
    a
    matter
    of
    great
    joy.
    For
    more
    than
    that
    it
    provides
    food
    for
    thought.
    Just
    see
    how
    the
    Chinese
    women
    won
    the
    game
    ──by
    their
    co
    ──operation
    (合作),
    by
    their
    excellent
    skill,
    their
    effort
    and
    strong
    will.
    A
    Chinese
    saying
    goes,
    “When
    two
    competent
    opponents
    (比赛的双方)
    meet,
    the
    strong
    ──minded
    one
    will
    win.
    “This
    is
    the
    spirit
    of
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team.
    If
    every
    Chinese
    showed
    some
    of
    the
    spirit,
    never
    losing
    heart
    in
    times
    of
    difficulty
    and
    remaining
    clear
    ──minded
    in
    times
    of
    advantage
    (优势),
    then
    our
    nation
    would
    stand
    in
    the
    vanguard
    (前列)
    of
    the
    world
    family
    of
    nations,
    just
    as
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    has
    done,
    is
    doing
    and
    will
    do.
    1.
    While
    watching
    the
    game,
    we
    _____.
    A.
    had
    feelings
    of
    different
    kind
    B.
    enjoyed
    a
    friendly
    and
    wonderful
    game
    C.
    clapped
    and
    cheered
    only
    for
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    D.
    were
    eager
    to
    know
    what
    would
    happen
    later
    on
    2.
    The
    wonderful
    game
    _____.
    A.
    brought
    us
    great
    joy
    B.
    provided
    us
    with
    food
    for
    our
    thoughts
    C.
    gave
    us
    not
    only
    great
    joy
    but
    also
    food
    for
    thoughts
    D.
    give
    us
    a
    valuable
    amusement
    3.
    The
    author
    believed
    that
    _____.
    A.
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    was
    the
    strongest
    B.
    China
    was
    sure
    to
    become
    stronger
    and
    stronger
    if
    only
    we
    have
    that
    spirit
    of
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    C.
    The
    Chinese
    must
    remain
    clear-minded
    in
    time
    of
    advantage
    D.
    The
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    never
    lost
    heart
    in
    times
    of
    difficulty
    4.
    The
    best
    title
    of
    the
    passage
    might
    be
    _____.
    A.
    Watching
    a
    Close
    Volleyball
    Game
    B.
    The
    Spirit
    of
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    C.
    Learn
    from
    the
    Members
    of
    the
    Volleyball
    Team
    D.
    The
    Strong
    ──Minded
    Are
    the
    Winners
    B)
    Keys:
    1-4
    ACBD
    高考英语阅读练习(096)
    George
    Banks
    was
    a
    clever
    journalist.
    He
    worked
    for
    a
    good
    newspaper,
    and
    he
    liked
    arguing
    very
    much.
    He
    argued
    with
    anybody,
    and
    about
    anything.
    Sometimes
    the
    people
    whom
    he
    argued
    with
    were
    as
    clever
    as
    he
    was,
    but
    often
    they
    were
    not.
    He
    did
    not
    mind
    arguing
    with
    stupid
    people
    at
    all:
    he
    knew
    that
    he
    could
    never
    persuade
    them
    to
    agree,
    because
    they
    could
    never
    really
    understand
    what
    he
    was
    saying,
    and
    the
    stupider
    they
    were,
    the
    surer
    they
    were
    that
    they
    were
    right;
    but
    he
    often
    found
    that
    stupid
    people
    said
    very
    amusing
    things.
    At
    the
    end
    of
    one
    argument
    which
    George
    had
    with
    one
    of
    these
    less
    clever
    people,
    the
    man
    said
    something
    which
    George
    has
    always
    remembered
    and
    which
    has
    always
    amused
    him.
    It
    was,
    “Well,
    Sir,
    you
    should
    never
    forget
    this:
    there
    are
    always
    three
    answers
    to
    every
    question:
    you
    answer,
    my
    answer,
    and
    the
    correct
    answer.”
    1.
    It
    seemed
    to
    George
    as
    if
    ________.
    A.
    it
    was
    more
    interesting
    to
    argue
    with
    as
    clever
    people
    as
    he
    was
    B.
    it
    was
    more
    interesting
    to
    argue
    with
    clever
    people
    than
    with
    stupid
    ones
    C.
    it
    was
    more
    interesting
    to
    argue
    with
    stupid
    people
    than
    with
    clever
    ones
    D.
    it
    was
    no
    good
    arguing
    with
    stupid
    people 
    2.
    From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    conclude
    that________.
    A.
    George
    did
    nothing
    but
    argue
    with
    others
    B.
    George
    was
    a
    man
    full
    of
    sense
    of
    humour
    C.
    George
    always
    won
    the
    arguments
    D.
    What
    George
    said
    was
    difficult
    to
    understand 
    3.
    Why
    didn’t
    George
    mind
    arguing
    with
    stupid
    people?
    Because
    ________
    A.
    he
    wanted
    to
    win
    the
    arguments
    B.
    he
    wanted
    to
    make
    the
    arguments
    more
    heated
    C.
    stupid
    people
    could
    be
    easily
    fooled
    D.
    what
    stupid
    people
    said
    could
    often
    give
    him
    greater
    pleasure 
    4.
    What
    one
    of
    the
    stupid
    people
    said
    at
    the
    end
    of
    one
    argument
    could
    be
    considered
    very________.
    A.
    clever
    B.
    stupid
    C.
    strange
    D.
    special
    Keys:
    1.
    C
    2.
    B
    3.
    D
    4.
    A
    高考英语阅读练习(097)
    There
    were
    many
    beautiful
    buildings
    in
    ancient
    Rome,
    but
    the
    living
    conditions
    for
    ordinary
    people
    were
    bad.
    Most
    of
    their
    homes
    were
    so
    poorly
    made
    that
    they
    fell
    down
    or
    were
    fire
    hazards
    (=danger)
    with
    their
    steep,
    narrow
    wooden
    stairways.
    Most
    people
    were
    packed
    into
    apartment
    buildings
    that
    rose
    shakily
    (=unsafely)
    six
    to
    twelve
    floors
    above
    the
    ground.
    The
    apartments
    were
    rooms
    about
    three
    metres
    square,
    and
    each
    building
    housed
    about
    five
    hundred
    people.
    These
    tall
    buildings
    faced
    each
    other
    across
    streets
    only
    three
    metres
    wide,
    so
    no
    sunlight
    reached
    the
    ground.
    Even
    so,
    apartments
    were
    costly,
    though
    cheaper
    places
    could
    be
    had
    outside
    Rome.
    But
    people
    wanted
    to
    be
    near
    their
    work
    and
    entertainment.
    So
    the
    streets
    became
    crowded
    and
    it
    was
    hard
    to
    move
    quickly.
    At
    night,
    the
    streets
    were
    filled
    with
    noise
    as
    food
    and
    supplies
    were
    brought
    into
    the
    city
    on
    wagons
    and
    carts.
    1.
    In
    ancient
    Rome,
    most
    people
    lived
    in
    ________
    apartments.
    A.
    small
    and
    crowded
    B.
    clean
    and
    tidy
    C.
    spacious
    and
    sunny
    D.
    tall
    and
    big 
    2.
    The
    streets
    in
    ancient
    Rome
    were
    ________.
    A.
    crowded
    and
    noisy
    B.
    wide
    and
    bright
    C.
    narrow
    and
    dark
    D.
    both
    A
    and
    C 
    3.
    People
    liked
    to
    live
    in
    Rome
    Because________.
    A.
    the
    apartments
    were
    comfortable
    B.
    the
    living
    expenses
    were
    low
    C.
    they
    have
    no
    money
    to
    build
    houses
    outside
    the
    city
    D.
    they
    wanted
    to
    enjoy
    the
    conveniences
    of
    the
    city 
    3.
    This
    passage
    is
    mainly
    about
    ________
    in
    ancient
    Rome.
    A.
    the
    beautiful
    buildings
    B.
    the
    living
    conditions
    of
    ordinary
    people
    C.
    the
    streets
    and
    transportation
    D.
    the
    food
    and
    daily
    supplies
    Keys:
    1.
    A
    2.
    D
    3.
    D
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(098)
    If
    you
    wish
    to
    become
    a
    better
    reader,
    here
    are
    four
    important
    points
    to
    remember
    about
    rate,
    or
    speed,
    of
    reading:
    1.
    Knowing
    why
    you
    are
    reading—what
    you
    are
    reading
    to
    find
    out—will
    often
    help
    you
    to
    know
    whether
    to
    read
    rapidly
    or
    slowly.
    2.
    Some
    things
    should
    be
    read
    slowly
    throughout.
    Examples
    are
    directions
    for
    making
    or
    doing
    something,
    arithmetic
    problems,
    science
    and
    history
    books,
    which
    are
    full
    of
    important
    information.
    You
    must
    read
    such
    things
    slowly
    to
    remember
    each
    important
    step
    and
    understand
    each
    important
    idea.
    3.
    Some
    things
    should
    be
    read
    rapidly
    throughout.
    Examples
    are
    simple
    stories
    meant
    for
    enjoyment,
    news,
    letters
    from
    friends,
    items,
    or
    bits
    of
    news
    from
    local,
    or
    hometown,
    paper,
    telling
    what
    is
    happening
    to
    friends
    and
    neighbours.
    4.
    In
    some
    of
    your
    readings,
    you
    must
    change
    your
    speed
    from
    fast
    to
    slow
    to
    fast,
    as
    you
    go
    along.
    You
    need
    to
    read
    certain
    pages
    rapidly
    and
    then
    slow
    down
    and
    do
    more
    careful
    readings
    when
    you
    come
    to
    important
    ideas
    which
    must
    be
    remembered.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    your
    reading
    speed
    depends
    on
    ________.
    A.
    whether
    the
    reading
    material
    is
    easy
    or
    difficult
    B.
    what
    you
    are
    reading
    C.
    what
    your
    purpose
    in
    reading
    something
    is
    D.
    both
    B
    and
    C 
    2.
    If
    one
    wants
    to
    be
    relaxed
    by
    reading,
    one
    should
    take
    up
    ________.
    A.
    a
    story
    book
    B.
    a
    book
    on
    science
    and
    technology
    C.
    news,
    letters
    from
    friends
    D.
    some
    material
    full
    of
    information 
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    readings
    should
    you
    read
    slowly
    and
    carefully?
    A.
    Fairy
    tales.
    B.
    Aesop’s
    Fables.
    C.
    Directions
    for
    use
    of
    a
    machine
    D.
    An
    evening
    paper. 
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    can
    best
    express
    the
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.
    How
    to
    decide
    your
    reading
    speed.
    B.
    How
    to
    raise
    your
    reading
    speed.
    C.
    How
    to
    improve
    your
    reading
    skills.
    D.
    How
    to
    choose
    your
    reading
    materials.
    Keys:
    1.
    D
    2.
    A
    3.
    C
    4.
    A
    高考英语阅读练习(099)
    Mr.
    Fitzpatrick
    has
    given
    much
    attention
    to
    his
    “Weight
    reduction”(减轻体重)
    programs.
    Just
    last
    year,
    for
    example,
    when
    he
    was
    the
    main
    speaker
    at
    the
    company
    dinner,
    he
    said
    he
    put
    on
    twenty
    pounds
    instead
    of
    losing
    thirty
    he
    promised
    he
    would.
    The
    year
    before
    that,
    he
    joined
    a
    health
    club.
    He
    exercised
    every
    day
    and
    ate
    less
    food.
    At
    the
    end
    of
    three
    months,
    however,
    he
    began
    making
    excuses
    about
    why
    he
    couldn’t
    go
    there
    more
    often.
    After
    the
    health
    club
    failed
    to
    work,
    he
    joined
    Weight
    Watchers
    but
    stopped
    going
    because
    he
    was
    the
    only
    man
    there.
    And
    he
    hated
    following
    any
    of
    the
    diet
    programs.
    Fitz’s
    latest
    idea
    is
    to
    join
    a
    walking
    club
    to
    “walk
    off”
    the
    weight.
    1.
    Mr.
    Fitzpatrick
    was
    ________
    when
    spoke
    at
    the
    company
    dinner
    last
    year.
    A.
    lighter
    than
    the
    year
    before
    B.
    planning
    to
    go
    on
    a
    diet
    C.
    heavier
    than
    the
    year
    before
    D.
    with
    the
    Weight
    Watchers 
    2.
    He
    did
    not
    stay
    with
    Weight
    Watchers
    because
    ________.
    A.
    he
    couldn’t
    do
    as
    the
    diet
    programs
    required
    him
    B.
    he
    felt
    uncomfortable
    being
    watched
    by
    women
    C.
    the
    members
    of
    Weight
    Watchers
    were
    all
    women
    but
    him
    D.
    both
    A
    and
    C 
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    can
    best
    explain
    the
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.
    There
    is
    no
    good
    way
    to
    lose
    weight.
    B.
    One
    can
    do
    nothing
    without
    a
    strong
    will.
    C.
    There
    are
    different
    ways
    to
    lose
    weight.
    D.
    Walking
    is
    the
    best
    way
    of
    losing
    weight.
    Keys:
    1.
    C
    2.
    D
    3.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(100)
    What
    makes
    one
    person
    more
    intelligent
    than
    another?
    What
    makes
    one
    person
    a
    genius,
    like
    the
    brilliant
    Albert
    Einstein,
    and
    another
    person
    a
    fool?
    Are
    people
    born
    intelligent
    or
    stupid,
    or
    is
    intelligence
    the
    result
    of
    where
    and
    how
    you
    live?
    These
    are
    very
    old
    questions
    and
    the
    answers
    to
    them
    are
    still
    not
    clear.
    We
    know,
    however,
    that
    just
    being
    born
    with
    a
    good
    mind
    is
    not
    enough.
    In
    some
    ways,
    the
    mind
    is
    like
    a
    leg
    or
    an
    arm
    muscle.
    It
    needs
    exercise.
    Mental
    (done
    with
    the
    mind)
    exercise
    is
    particularly
    important
    for
    young
    children.
    Many
    child
    psychologists
    (心理学家)
    think
    that
    parents
    should
    play
    with
    their
    children
    more
    often
    and
    give
    them
    problems
    to
    think
    about.
    The
    children
    are
    then
    more
    likely
    to
    grow
    up
    bright
    and
    intelligent.
    If,
    on
    the
    other
    hand,
    children
    are
    left
    alone
    a
    great
    deal
    with
    nothing
    to
    do,
    they
    are
    more
    likely
    to
    become
    dull
    and
    unintelligent.
    Parents
    should
    also
    be
    careful
    with
    what
    they
    say
    to
    young
    children.
    According
    to
    some
    psychologists,
    if
    parents
    are
    always
    telling
    a
    child
    that
    he
    or
    she
    is
    a
    fool
    or
    an
    idiot,
    then
    the
    child
    is
    more
    likely
    to
    keep
    doing
    silly
    and
    foolish
    things.
    So
    it
    is
    probably
    better
    for
    parents
    to
    say
    very
    positive
    (helpful)
    things
    to
    their
    children,
    such
    as
    “That
    was
    a
    very
    clever
    thing
    you
    did.”
    or
    “You
    are
    such
    a
    smart
    child.”
    1.
    The
    words
    “intelligent”
    and
    “brilliant”
    in
    the
    first
    paragraph
    probably
    mean
    _______
    while
    “dull”
    in
    the
    second
    paragraph
    means
    ________.
    A.
    bright
    and
    splendid;
    slow
    in
    thinking
    and
    understanding
    B.
    pretty
    and
    handsome;
    ordinary-looking
    C.
    great
    and
    important;
    common
    D.
    hopeful
    and
    helpful;
    careless 
    2.
    According
    to
    the
    context
    we
    can
    guess
    that
    a
    genius
    is
    ________
    while
    an
    idiot
    is
    ________.
    A.
    a
    normal
    person;
    a
    funny
    person
    B.
    a
    strong
    person;
    a
    weak
    person
    C.
    a
    highly
    intelligent
    person;
    a
    foolish
    or
    weak-minded
    person
    D.
    a
    famous
    person;
    an
    ordinary
    person 
    3.
    A
    person
    ________
    is
    more
    likely
    to
    become
    a
    genius.
    A.
    whose
    parents
    are
    clever
    B.
    often
    thinking
    about
    difficult
    problems
    C.
    often
    helped
    by
    his
    parents
    and
    teachers
    D.
    born
    with
    a
    good
    brain
    and
    putting
    it
    into
    active
    use 
    4.
    It
    is
    better
    for
    parents
    ________.
    A.
    to
    praise
    and
    encourage
    their
    children
    more
    often
    B.
    to
    be
    hard
    on
    their
    children
    C.
    to
    leave
    their
    children
    alone
    with
    nothing
    to
    do
    D.
    to
    give
    their
    children
    as
    much
    help
    as
    possible 
    5.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    NOT
    true
    according
    to
    the
    article?
    A.
    Parents
    play
    an
    important
    part
    in
    their
    children’s
    growth.
    B.
    The
    less
    you
    use
    your
    mind
    the
    duller
    you
    may
    become.
    C.
    Intelligence
    is
    obviously
    the
    result
    of
    where
    and
    how
    you
    live.
    D.
    What
    makes
    a
    person
    bright
    or
    stupid
    is
    still
    under
    discussion.
    Keys:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    3.
    D
    4.
    A
    5.
    C
    B.
    he
    will
    be
    covered
    with
    a
    mattress
    C.his
    life
    is
    endangered
    D.
    his
    safety
    is
    generally
    all
    right
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    the
    main
    factor
    (因素)
    of
    a
    successful
    performance?
    A.
    Strength.
    B.
    Exactness.
    C.
    Speed.
    D.
    Carefulness.
    5.
    What
    can
    be
    inferred
    from
    the
    author"
    s
    example
    of
    the
    Norwegian
    stuntman?
    A.Sometimes
    an
    accident
    can
    occur
    to
    a
    stuntman.
    B.The
    percentage
    of
    serious
    accidents
    is
    high.
    C.Parachutes
    must
    be
    of
    good
    quality.
    D.
    The
    cliff
    is
    too
    high.
    KEY:
    1-
    5
    CBDBA
    高考英语阅读练习(002)
    Activity
    which
    was
    almost
    unknown
    to
    the
    learned
    in
    the
    early
    days
    of
    the
    history,
    while
    during
    the
    fifteenth
    century
    the
    term
    "reading"
    undoubtedly
    meant
    reading
    aloud.
    Only
    during
    the
    nineteenth
    century
    did
    silent
    reading
    become
    popular.
    One
    should
    be
    careful,
    however,
    of
    supposing
    that
    silent
    reading
    came
    about
    simply
    because
    reading
    aloud
    is
    distraction
    (分散留意力)
    to
    others.
    Examination
    of
    reasons
    connected
    with
    the
    historical
    development
    of
    silent
    reading
    shows
    that
    it
    became
    the
    usual
    mode
    of
    reading
    for
    most
    adult
    reading
    tasks
    mainly
    because
    the
    tasks
    themselves
    changed
    in
    character.
    The
    last
    century
    saw
    a
    gradual
    increase
    in
    literacy
    (读写能力)
    and
    thus
    in
    the
    number
    of
    readers.
    As
    readers
    increased,
    so
    the
    number
    of
    listeners
    dropped,
    and
    thus
    there
    was
    some
    reduction
    in
    the
    need
    to
    read
    aloud.
    As
    reading
    for
    the
    benefit
    of
    listeners
    grew
    less
    common,
    so
    came
    the
    popularity
    of
    reading
    as
    a
    private
    activity
    in
    such
    public
    places
    as
    libraries,
    trains
    and
    offices,
    where
    reading
    aloud
    would
    disturb
    other
    readers
    in
    a
    way.
    Towards
    the
    end
    of
    the
    century
    there
    was
    still
    heated
    argument
    over
    whether
    books
    should
    be
    used
    for
    information
    or
    treated
    respectfully,
    and
    over
    whether
    the
    reading
    of
    material
    such
    as
    newspapers
    was
    in
    some
    way
    mentally
    weakening.
    Indeed
    this
    argument
    remains
    with
    us
    still
    in
    education.
    However,
    whatever
    its
    advantages,
    the
    old
    shared
    literacy
    culture
    had
    gone
    and
    was
    replaced
    by
    the
    printed
    mass
    media
    (媒介)
    on
    the
    one
    hand
    and
    by
    books
    and
    magazines
    for
    a
    specialized
    readership
    on
    the
    other.
    By
    the
    end
    of
    the
    century
    students
    were
    being
    advised
    to
    have
    some
    new
    ideas
    of
    books
    and
    to
    use
    skills
    in
    reading
    them
    which
    were
    not
    proper,
    if
    not
    impossible,
    for
    the
    oral
    reader.
    The
    social,
    cultural,
    and
    technological
    developments
    in
    the
    century
    had
    greatly
    changed
    what
    the
    term
    "reading"
    referred
    to.
    1.
    Why
    was
    reading
    aloud
    common
    before
    the
    nineteenth
    century?
    A.
    Because
    silent
    reading
    had
    not
    been
    discovered.
    B.
    Because
    there
    were
    few
    places
    for
    private
    reading.
    C.
    Because
    few
    people
    could
    read
    for
    themselves.
    D.
    Because
    people
    depended
    on
    reading
    for
    enjoyment.
    2.
    The
    development
    of
    silent
    reading
    during
    the
    nineteenth
    century
    showed
    .
    A.
    a
    change
    in
    the
    position
    of
    literate
    people
    B.
    a
    change
    in
    the
    nature
    of
    reading
    C.
    an
    increase
    in
    the
    number
    of
    books
    D.
    an
    increase
    in
    the
    average
    age
    of
    readers
    3.
    Educationalists
    are
    still
    arguing
    about
    _________.
    A.
    the
    importance
    of
    silent
    reading
    B.
    the
    amount
    of
    information
    provided
    by
    books
    and
    newspapers
    C.
    the
    effects
    of
    reading
    on
    health
    D.
    the
    value
    of
    different
    types
    of
    reading
    material
    4.
    What
    is
    the
    writer
    of
    this
    passage
    attempting
    to
    do?
    A.
    To
    explain
    how
    present
    day
    reading
    habits
    developed.
    B.
    To
    change
    people"s
    way
    to
    read.
    C.
    To
    show
    how
    reading
    methods
    have
    improved.
    D.
    To
    encourage
    the
    growth
    of
    reading.
    KEY:
    1-4
    CBDA
    高考英语阅读练习(003)
    In
    some
    ways,
    the
    United
    States
    has
    made
    some
    progress.
    Fires
    no
    longer
    destroy
    18,000
    buildings
    as
    they
    did
    in
    the
    Great
    Chicago
    Fire
    of
    1871,
    or
    kill
    half
    a
    town
    of
    2,400
    people,
    as
    they
    did
    the
    same
    night
    in
    Peshtigo,
    Wisconsin.
    Other
    than
    the
    Beverly
    Hill
    Supper
    Club
    fire
    in
    Kentucky
    in
    1977,
    it
    has
    been
    four
    decades
    since
    more
    than
    100
    Americans
    died
    in
    a
    fire.
    But
    even
    with
    such
    successes,
    the
    United
    States
    still
    has
    one
    of
    the
    worst
    fire
    death
    rates
    in
    the
    world.
    Safety
    experts
    say
    the
    problem
    is
    neither
    money
    nor
    technology,
    but
    the
    indifference(无所谓)
    of
    a
    country
    that
    just
    will
    not
    take
    fires
    seriously
    enough.
    American
    fire
    departments
    are
    some
    of
    the
    world"s
    fastest
    and
    best-equipped.
    They
    have
    to
    be.
    The
    United
    States
    has
    twice
    Japan"s
    population,
    and
    40
    times
    as
    many
    fires.
    It
    spends
    far
    less
    on
    preventing
    fires
    than
    on
    fighting
    them.
    And
    American
    fire
    -safety
    lessons
    are
    aimed
    almost
    entirely
    at
    children,
    who
    die
    in
    large
    numbers
    in
    fires
    but
    who,
    against
    popular
    beliefs,
    start
    very
    few
    of
    them.
    Experts
    say
    the
    error
    is
    an
    opinion
    that
    fires
    are
    not
    really
    anyone"s
    fault.
    That
    is
    not
    so
    in
    other
    countries,
    where
    both
    public
    education
    and
    the
    law
    treat
    fires
    as
    either
    a
    personal
    failing
    or
    a
    crime(罪行).
    Japan
    has
    many
    wood
    houses;
    of
    the
    48
    fires
    in
    world
    history
    that
    burned
    more
    than
    10,000
    buildings,
    Japan
    has
    had
    27.
    Punishment
    for
    causing
    a
    big
    fire
    can
    be
    as
    severe
    as
    life
    imprisonment.
    In
    the
    United
    States,
    most
    education
    dollars
    are
    spent
    in
    elementary
    schools.
    But,
    the
    lessons
    are
    aimed
    at
    too
    limited
    a
    number
    of
    people;
    just
    9
    percent
    of
    all
    fire
    deaths
    are
    caused
    by
    children
    playing
    with
    matches.
    The
    United
    States
    continues
    to
    depend
    more
    on
    technology
    than
    laws
    or
    social
    pressure.
    There
    are
    smoke
    detectors
    in
    85
    percent
    of
    all
    homes.
    Some
    local
    building
    laws
    now
    require
    home
    sprinklers
    (喷水装置).
    New
    heaters
    and
    irons
    shut
    themselves
    off
    if
    they
    are
    tipped.
    1.
    The
    reason
    why
    so
    many
    Americans
    die
    in
    fires
    is
    that
    _____.
    A.
    they
    took
    no
    interest
    in
    new
    technology
    B.
    they
    did
    not
    pay
    great
    attention
    to
    preventing
    fires
    C.
    they
    showed
    indifference
    to
    fighting
    fires
    D.
    they
    did
    not
    spend
    enough
    money
    on
    fire
    equipment
    2.
    It
    can
    be
    inferred
    from
    the
    passage
    that______.
    A.
    fire
    safety
    lessons
    should
    not
    be
    aimed
    only
    at
    American
    children
    B.
    American
    children
    have
    not
    received
    enough
    education
    of
    fire
    safety
    lessons
    C.
    Japan
    is
    better
    equipped
    with
    fire
    equipment
    than
    the
    United
    States
    D.
    America"s
    large
    population
    leads
    to
    more
    fires
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    There
    has
    been
    no
    great
    fire
    in
    the
    USA
    in
    recent
    40
    years
    that
    leads
    to
    high
    death
    rate.
    B.
    There
    have
    been
    several
    great
    fires
    in
    the
    USA
    in
    recent
    40
    years
    that
    lead
    to
    high
    death
    rate.
    C.
    There
    has
    been
    only
    one
    great
    fire
    in
    the
    USA
    in
    recent
    40
    years
    that
    led
    to
    high
    death
    rate.
    D.
    The
    fire
    in
    Kentucky
    in
    1977
    made
    only
    a
    few
    people
    killed.
    KEY:
    BAC
    高考英语阅读练习(004)
    Nuclear
    power"s(核能的)
    danger
    to
    health,
    safety,
    and
    even
    life
    itself
    can
    be
    described
    in
    one
    word;
    radiation(辐射).
    Nuclear
    radiation
    has
    a
    certain
    mystery
    about
    it,
    partly
    because
    it
    cannot
    be
    detected
    (探测)
    by
    human
    senses.
    It
    can"t
    be
    seen
    or
    heard,
    or
    touched
    or
    tasted,
    even
    though
    it
    may
    be
    all
    around
    us.
    There
    are
    other
    things
    like
    that.
    For
    example,
    radio
    waves
    are
    all
    around
    us
    but
    we
    can"t
    detect
    them,
    sense
    them,
    without
    a
    radio
    receiver.
    Similarly,
    we
    can"t
    sense
    radioactivity
    without
    a
    radiation
    detector.
    But
    unlike
    common
    radio
    waves,
    nuclear
    radiation
    is
    not
    harmless
    to
    human
    beings
    and
    other
    living
    things.
    At
    very
    high
    levels,
    radiation
    can
    kill
    an
    animal
    or
    human
    being
    outright
    by
    killing
    masses
    of
    cells
    (细胞)
    in
    important
    organs
    (器官).
    But
    even
    the
    lowest
    levels
    can
    do
    serious
    damage.
    There
    is
    no
    level
    of
    radiation
    that
    is
    completely
    safe.
    If
    the
    radiation
    does
    not
    hit
    anything
    important,
    the
    damage
    may
    not
    be
    significant.
    This
    is
    the
    case
    when
    only
    a
    few
    cells
    are
    hit,
    and
    if
    they
    are
    killed
    outright.
    Your
    body
    will
    replace
    the
    dead
    cells
    with
    healthy
    ones.
    But
    if
    the
    few
    cells
    are
    only
    damaged,
    and
    if
    they
    reproduce
    themselves,
    you
    may
    be
    in
    trouble.
    They
    reproduce
    themselves
    in
    an
    unusual
    way.
    They
    can
    grow
    into
    cancer.
    Sometimes
    this
    does
    not
    show
    up
    for
    many
    years.
    This
    is
    another
    reason
    for
    some
    of
    the
    mystery
    about
    nuclear
    radiation.
    Serious
    damage
    can
    be
    done
    without
    the
    knowledge
    of
    the
    person
    at
    the
    time
    that
    damage
    has
    occurred.
    A
    person
    can
    be
    irradiated(放射治疗)
    and
    feel
    fine,
    then
    die
    of
    cancer
    five,
    ten,
    or
    twenty
    years
    later
    as
    a
    result.
    Or
    a
    child
    can
    be
    born
    weak
    or
    easy
    to
    get
    serious
    illness
    as
    a
    result
    of
    radiation
    absorbed
    by
    its
    grandparents.
    Radiation
    can
    hurt
    us.
    We
    must
    know
    the
    truth.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    the
    danger
    of
    nuclear
    power
    lies
    in
    __________.
    A.
    nuclear
    mystery
    B.
    radiation
    detection
    C.
    radiation
    level
    D.
    nuclear
    radiation
    2.
    Radiation
    can
    lead
    to
    serious
    results
    even
    at
    the
    lowest
    level
    ________.
    A.
    when
    it
    kills
    few
    cells
    B.
    if
    it
    damages
    few
    cells
    C.
    though
    the
    damaged
    cells
    can
    repair
    themselves
    D.
    unless
    the
    damaged
    cells
    can
    reproduce
    themselves
    3.
    Radiation
    can
    hurt
    us
    in
    the
    way
    that
    it
    can
    _____.
    A.
    kill
    large
    numbers
    of
    cells
    in
    main
    organs
    so
    as
    to
    cause
    death
    immediately
    B.
    damage
    cells
    which
    may
    grow
    into
    cancer
    years
    later
    C.
    affect
    the
    healthy
    growth
    of
    our
    younger
    generation
    D.
    lead
    to
    all
    of
    the
    above
    results
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    can
    be
    best
    inferred
    from
    the
    passage?
    A.
    The
    importance
    of
    protection
    from
    radiation
    cannot
    be
    overemphasized
    (过分强调).
    B.
    The
    mystery
    about
    radiation
    remains
    unsolved.
    C.
    Cancer
    is
    mainly
    caused
    by
    radiation.
    D.
    Radiation
    can
    hurt
    those
    who
    do
    not
    know
    about
    its
    danger.
    KEY:
    1-
    4
    DBDA
    高考英语阅读练习(005)
    Today
    is
    the
    date
    of
    that
    afternoon
    in
    April
    a
    year
    ago
    when
    I
    first
    saw
    the
    strange
    and
    attractive
    doll(玩具娃娃)in
    the
    window
    of
    Abe
    Sheftel"s
    toy
    shop
    on
    Third
    Avenue
    near
    Fifteenth
    Street,
    just
    around
    the
    corner
    from
    my
    office,
    where
    the
    plate
    on
    the
    door
    reads.
    Dr
    Samuel
    Amory.
    I
    remember
    just
    how
    it
    was
    that
    day:
    the
    first
    sign
    of
    spring
    floated
    across
    the
    East
    River,
    mixing
    with
    the
    soft
    -
    coal
    smoke
    from
    the
    factories
    and
    the
    street
    smells
    of
    the
    poor
    neighbourhood.
    As
    I
    turned
    the
    corner
    on
    my
    way
    to
    work
    and
    came
    to
    Sheftel"s,
    I
    was
    made
    once
    more
    known
    of
    the
    poor
    collection
    of
    toys
    in
    the
    dusty
    window,
    and
    I
    remembered
    the
    coming
    birthday
    of
    a
    small
    niece
    of
    mine
    in
    Cleveland,
    to
    whom
    I
    was
    in
    the
    habit
    of
    sending
    small
    gifts.
    Therefore,
    I
    stopped
    and
    examined
    the
    window
    to
    see
    if
    there
    might
    be
    anything
    suitable,
    and
    looked
    at
    the
    collection
    of
    unattractive
    objects--a
    red
    toy
    fire
    engine,
    some
    lead
    soldiers,
    cheap
    baseballs,
    bottles
    of
    ink,
    pens,
    yellowed
    envelopes,
    and
    advertisements
    for
    soft
    -
    drinks.
    And
    thus
    it
    was
    that
    my
    eyes
    finally
    came
    to
    rest
    upon
    the
    doll
    stored
    away
    in
    one
    corner,
    a
    doll
    with
    the
    strangest,
    most
    charming
    expression
    on
    her
    face.
    I
    could
    not
    wholly
    make
    her
    out,
    due
    to
    the
    shadows
    and
    the
    film
    of
    dust
    through
    which
    I
    was
    looking,
    but
    I
    was
    sure
    that
    a
    deep
    impression
    had
    been
    made
    upon
    me
    as
    though
    I
    had
    run
    into
    a
    person,
    as
    one
    does
    sometimes
    with
    a
    stranger,
    with
    whose
    personality
    one
    is
    deeply
    impressed.
    1.
    What
    made
    an
    impression
    on
    the
    author?
    A.
    The
    doll"s
    unusual
    face.
    B.
    The
    collection
    of
    toys.
    C.
    A
    stranger
    he
    met
    at
    the
    store.
    D.
    The
    beauty
    and
    size
    of
    the
    doll.
    2.
    Why
    does
    the
    author
    mention
    his
    niece?
    A.
    She
    likes
    dolls.
    B.
    The
    doll
    looks
    like
    her.
    C.
    She
    lives
    near
    Sheftel"s.
    D.
    He
    was
    looking
    for
    a
    gift
    for
    her.
    3.
    Why
    did
    the
    writer
    go
    past
    Sheftel"s?
    A.
    He
    was
    on
    his
    way
    to
    school.
    B.
    He
    was
    looking
    for
    a
    present
    for
    his
    niece.
    C.
    He
    wanted
    to
    buy
    some
    envelopes.
    D.
    None
    of
    the
    above
    is
    right.
    4.
    The
    story
    takes
    place
    in
    the
    ______.
    A.
    early
    summer
    B.
    early
    spring
    C.
    midsummer
    D.
    late
    spring
    KEY:
    1-5
    ADDB
    高考英语阅读练习(006)
    Technology
    is
    the
    application
    (应用)of
    knowledge
    to
    production.
    Thanks
    to
    modern
    technology,
    we
    have
    been
    able
    to
    increase
    greatly
    the
    efficiency
    of
    our
    work
    force.
    New
    machines
    and
    new
    methods
    have
    helped
    cut
    down
    time
    and
    expense
    while
    increasing
    overall
    output.
    This
    has
    meant
    more
    production
    and
    a
    higher
    standard
    of
    living.
    For
    most
    of
    us
    in
    America,
    modern
    technology
    is
    thought
    of
    as
    the
    reason
    why
    we
    can
    have
    cars
    and
    television
    sets.
    However,
    technology
    has
    also
    increased
    the
    amount
    of
    food
    available
    (有用的)to
    us,
    by
    means
    of
    modern
    farming
    machinery
    and
    animalbreeding
    techniques,
    and
    has
    extended
    our
    life
    span
    via()medical
    technology.
    Will
    mankind
    continue
    to
    live
    longer
    and
    have
    a
    higher
    quality
    of
    life?
    In
    large
    measure
    the
    answer
    depends
    on
    technology
    and
    our
    ability
    to
    use
    it
    widely.
    If
    we
    keep
    making
    progress
    as
    we
    have
    over
    the
    past
    fifty
    years,
    the
    answer
    is
    definitely
    yes.
    The
    advancement
    of
    technology
    depends
    upon
    research
    and
    development,
    and
    the
    latest
    statistics
    (统计)
    show
    that
    the
    united
    States
    is
    continuing
    to
    pump
    billions
    of
    dollars
    annually(每年)
    into
    such
    efforts.
    So
    while
    we
    are
    running
    out
    of
    some
    scarce
    resources
    (少的资源)
    we
    may
    well
    find
    technological
    substitutes
    (代用品)
    for
    many
    of
    them
    through
    our
    research
    programs.
    Therefore,
    in
    the
    final
    analysis
    the
    three
    major
    factors
    of
    production
    (land,
    labor
    and
    capital)
    are
    all
    influenced
    by
    technology.
    When
    we
    need
    new
    skills
    on
    techniques
    in
    medicine,
    people
    will
    start
    developing
    new
    technology
    to
    meet
    those
    needs.
    As
    equipment
    proves
    to
    be
    slow
    or
    inefficient,
    new
    machines
    will
    be
    invented.
    Technology
    responds
    to
    our
    needs
    in
    helping
    us
    maintain
    our
    standard
    of
    living.
    1.
    What
    is
    the
    best
    title
    for
    the
    passage?
    A.
    The
    definition
    of
    technology
    B.
    Modern
    technology
    C.
    The
    application
    of
    technology
    D.
    The
    development
    of
    technology
    2.
    From
    the
    passage,
    we
    can
    infer
    that
    this
    article
    is
    probably
    _________.
    A.
    a
    part
    of
    the
    introduction
    to
    American
    business
    B.
    followed
    by
    the
    passage
    talking
    about
    factors
    of
    production
    C.
    taken
    from
    a
    learned
    journal
    D.
    Both
    A
    and
    B
    3.
    Which
    is
    the
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Modern
    technology
    is
    the
    key
    to
    the
    improvement
    of
    standard
    of
    living.
    B.
    The
    three
    major
    factors
    of
    production-land,
    labor
    and
    capital
    are
    all
    influenced
    by
    technology.
    C.
    Technology
    is
    the
    response
    to
    our
    needs.
    D.
    The
    United
    States
    is
    making
    great
    efforts
    to
    advance
    its
    technology.
    4.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    people
    can
    live
    a
    long
    life
    with
    the
    help
    of
    _________.
    A.
    higer
    quality
    of
    life
    B.
    medical
    technology
    C.
    modem
    farming
    machinery
    D.
    technological
    substitute
    KEY:
    1-
    4BDAB
    高考英语阅读练习(007)
    The
    volcano
    is
    one
    of
    the
    most
    surprising
    frightening
    forces
    of
    nature.
    Maybe
    you
    have
    seen
    pictures
    of
    these“fireworks”of
    nature.
    Sometimes
    when
    a
    volcano
    erupts,
    a
    very
    large
    wall
    of
    melted
    rock
    moves
    down
    the
    side
    of
    a
    mountain.
    It
    looks
    like
    a
    “river
    of
    tire.”Sometimes
    volcanoes
    explode,
    throwing
    the
    melted
    rock
    and
    ashes(灰)high
    into
    the
    air.
    But
    where
    does
    this
    melted
    rock
    come
    from?
    The
    earth
    is
    made
    up
    of
    many
    layers(层).
    The
    top
    layer
    that
    we
    see
    is
    called
    the
    crust.
    Under
    the
    crust
    are
    many
    layers
    of
    hard
    rock.
    But
    far,
    far
    beneath
    the
    crust
    whose
    rock
    is
    so
    hot,
    that
    it
    is
    soft.
    In
    some
    places
    it
    even
    melts.
    The
    melted
    rock
    is
    called
    magma.
    Sometimes
    the
    magma
    breaks
    out
    to
    the
    surface
    through
    cracks(爆裂声)in
    the
    crust.
    These
    cracks
    are
    volcanoes.
    Most
    people
    think
    of
    mountains
    when
    they
    think
    of
    volcanoes.
    But
    not
    every
    mountain
    is
    a
    volcano.
    A
    volcano
    is
    simply
    the
    opening
    in
    the
    earth
    from
    which
    the
    magma
    escapes.
    The
    hot
    magma,
    or
    lava
    as
    it
    is
    called,
    cols
    and
    builds
    up
    on
    the
    surface
    of
    the
    earth.
    Over
    thousands
    of
    years,
    this
    pile
    of
    cooled
    lava
    can
    grow
    to
    be
    very,
    very
    big.
    For
    example,
    the
    highest
    mountain
    in
    Africa,
    Kilimanjaro,
    is
    a
    volcano.
    It
    towers
    more
    than
    16,000
    feet
    above
    the
    ground
    around
    it.
    1.The
    underlined
    word“erupts”means
    .
    A.
    moves
    down
    B.
    breaks
    away
    C.
    builds
    up
    D.
    suddenly
    throws
    out
    lava
    2.Which
    words
    in
    the
    passage
    have
    the
    same
    meaning
    as
    “melted
    rock”?
    A.“Volcano”and“explode”.
    B.“Crust”and“hard
    rock”
    C.“magma”and“lava”
    D.“Volcano”and“magma”
    3.Which
    is
    the
    correct
    order
    of
    the
    layers
    of
    the
    earth(beginning
    with
    the
    top
    layer)?
    A.
    crust-hard
    rock-magma-soft
    rock
    B.
    crust-hard
    rock-
    soft
    rock-magma
    C.
    magma-soft
    rock-
    hard
    rock-crust
    D.
    volcano-cracks-magma-crust
    4.The
    best
    title(标题)
    of
    the
    passage
    should
    be
    u.
    A.
    The
    Volcano
    B.
    Kilimanjaro
    Volcano
    C.
    The
    Mountains
    D.
    The
    Melted
    Rock
    KEY:
    DCBA
    高考英语阅读练习(008)
    WHERE
    TO
    STAY
    IN
    BOSWELL
    YOUR
    GUIDE
    TO
    OUR
    BEST
    HOTEL
    Name/AddressNo.
    of
    RoomsSingleDoubleSpecial
    Attractions
    FIRST
    HOTEL
    222
    Edward
    Road
    Tel.414-6433120$25$35Air-conditioned
    rooms,
    French
    restaurant,
    Night
    club,
    Swimming-pool,
    Shops,
    Coffee
    shop
    and
    bar,
    Telephone,
    radio
    and
    TV
    in
    each
    room,
    Close
    to
    the
    city
    center
    FAIRVIEW
    HOTEL
    129
    North
    Road
    Tel.591-562050$12$18Close
    to
    the
    air-port,
    Telephone
    In
    each
    room,
    Bar,
    Restaurant,
    Garage,
    Swimming-pool
    ORCHARD
    HOTEL
    233
    Edward
    Road
    Tel.641-6646120$15$20Facing
    First
    hotel,
    European
    restaurant,
    Coffee
    shop,
    Dry-cleaning,
    Shops,
    tv,
    night-club
    OSAKA
    HOTEL
    1264
    Venning
    Road
    Tel.643-820180$30$50Air-Conditioned
    rooms,
    Japanese
    and
    Chinese
    restaurants,
    Shops,
    Swimming-pool,
    Large
    garden
    1.The
    number
    of
    the
    rooms
    in
    the
    best
    hotels
    in
    Boswell
    is
    .
    A.
    120
    B.
    470
    C.
    450
    D.
    240
    2.If
    a
    Japanese
    traveler
    likes
    to
    eat
    in
    French
    restaurant,
    is
    the
    right
    place
    for
    him
    to
    go
    to.
    A.
    233
    Edward
    Road
    B.
    1264
    Venning
    Road
    C.
    222
    Edward
    Road
    D.
    129
    North
    Road
    3.Which
    hotel
    faces
    the
    Orchard
    hotel?
    A.
    The
    First
    hotel.
    B.
    The
    Osaka
    hotel.
    C.
    The
    Fairview
    Hotel.
    D.
    No
    hotel.
    KEY:
    BCA
    高考英语阅读练习(009)
    When
    I
    asked
    my
    daughter
    which
    item
    she
    would
    keep;
    the
    phone,
    the
    car,
    the
    cooker,
    the
    computer,
    the
    TV,
    or
    her
    boyfriend,
    she
    said“the
    phone”.
    Personally,
    I
    could
    do
    without
    the
    phone
    entirely,
    which
    makes
    me
    unusual.
    Because
    the
    telephone
    is
    changing
    our
    lives
    more
    than
    any
    other
    piece
    of
    technology.
    Point
    1
    The
    telephone
    creates
    the
    need
    to
    communicate,
    in
    the
    same
    way
    that
    more
    roads
    create
    more
    traffic.
    My
    daughter
    comes
    home
    from
    school
    at
    4:00
    pm
    and
    then
    spends
    an
    hour
    on
    the
    phone
    talking
    to
    the
    very
    people
    she
    has
    been
    at
    school
    with
    all
    day.
    If
    the
    phone
    did
    not
    exist,
    would
    she
    have
    anything
    to
    talk
    about?
    Point
    2
    The
    mobile
    phone
    means
    that
    we
    are
    never
    alone.
    “The
    mobile
    saved
    my
    life,”says
    Crystal
    Johnstone.
    She
    had
    an
    accident
    in
    her
    Volvo
    on
    the
    A45
    between
    Otley
    and
    Skipton.
    Trapped
    inside,
    she
    managed
    to
    make
    the
    call
    that
    brought
    the
    ambulance(救护车)
    to
    her
    rescue.
    Point
    3
    The
    mobile
    removes
    our
    secret.
    It
    allows
    marketing
    manager
    of
    Haba
    Deutsch,
    Carl
    Nicolaisen,
    to
    ring
    his
    sales
    staff
    all
    round
    the
    world
    at
    and
    time
    of
    day
    to
    ask
    where
    they
    are
    ,
    where
    they
    are
    going,
    and
    how
    their
    last
    meeting
    went.
    Point
    4
    The
    telephone
    separates
    us.
    Antonella
    Bramante
    in
    Rome
    says,
    “We
    worked
    in
    separate
    offices
    but
    I
    could
    see
    him
    through
    the
    window.
    It
    was
    easy
    to
    get
    his
    number.
    We
    were
    so
    near——but
    we
    didn’t
    meet
    for
    the
    first
    two
    weeks!”
    Point
    5
    The
    telephone
    allows
    us
    to
    reach
    out
    beyond
    our
    own
    lives.
    Today
    we
    can
    talk
    to
    several
    complete
    strangers
    simultaneously
    (
    同时地)
    on
    chat
    lines
    (at
    least
    my
    daughter
    does.
    I
    wouldn’t
    know
    what
    to
    talk
    about).
    We
    can
    talk
    across
    the
    world.
    We
    can
    even
    talk
    to
    astronauts
    (if
    you
    know
    any)
    while
    they’re
    space-walking.
    And,
    with
    the
    phone
    line
    hooked
    up
    to
    the
    computer,
    we
    can
    access(存取)
    the
    Internet,
    the
    biggest
    library
    on
    Earth.
    1.How
    do
    you
    understand‘Point
    1
    —The
    telephone
    creates
    the
    need
    to
    communicate,6…’?
    A.
    People
    don’t
    communicate
    without
    telephone.
    B.
    People
    communicate
    because
    of
    the
    creating
    of
    the
    telephone.
    C.
    People
    communicate
    more
    since
    telephone
    has
    been
    created.
    D.
    People
    communicate
    more
    because
    of
    more
    traffic.
    2.Which
    of
    the
    following
    best
    shows
    people’s
    attitude
    towards
    mobile
    phones?
    A.
    Mobile
    phones
    help
    people
    deal
    with
    the
    emergency.
    B.
    Mobile
    phones
    bring
    convenience
    as
    well
    little
    secret
    to
    people.
    C.
    Mobile
    phones
    are
    so
    important
    and
    should
    be
    encouraged.
    D.
    Mobile
    phones
    are
    part
    of
    people’s
    life.
    3.
    Which
    points
    do
    you
    think
    support
    the
    idea
    that
    phones
    improve
    people’s
    life?
    a.
    Point
    1.
    b.
    Point2.
    c.
    Point3.
    d.
    Point
    4.
    e.
    Point
    5.
    A.
    c,
    d
    B.
    a,
    e
    C.
    a,
    c
    D.
    b,
    e
    4.It
    is
    possible
    to
    talk
    to
    several
    complete
    strangers
    simultaneously
    through
    .
    A.
    the
    TV
    screen
    B.
    a
    fax
    machine
    C.
    the
    phone
    line
    hooked
    up
    to
    the
    computer
    D.
    a
    microphone
    5.The
    best
    heading
    for
    the
    passage
    is
    .
    A.
    phone
    Power
    B.
    Kinds
    of
    Phone
    C.
    how
    to
    Use
    Phones
    D.
    Advantage
    of
    Phones
    KEY:
    1–5
    CBDCA
    高考英语阅读练习(010)
    “It
    hurts
    me
    more
    than
    you”,
    and
    “This
    is
    for
    your
    own
    good”—these
    are
    the
    statements
    my
    mother
    used
    to
    make
    years
    ago
    when
    I
    had
    to
    learn
    Latin,
    clean
    my
    room,
    stay
    home
    and
    do
    homework.
    That
    was
    before
    we
    entered
    the
    permissive
    period
    in
    education
    in
    which
    we
    decided
    it
    was
    all
    right
    not
    to
    push
    our
    children
    to
    achieve
    their
    best
    in
    school.
    The
    schools
    and
    the
    educators
    made
    it
    easy
    for
    us.
    They
    taught
    that
    it
    was
    all
    right
    to
    be
    parents
    who
    take
    a
    let-alone
    policy.
    We
    stopped
    making
    our
    children
    do
    homework.
    We
    gave
    them
    calculators,
    turned
    on
    the
    television,
    left
    the
    teaching
    to
    the
    teachers
    and
    went
    on
    vacation.
    Now
    teachers,
    faced
    with
    children
    who
    have
    been
    developing
    at
    their
    own
    pace
    for
    the
    past
    15
    years,
    are
    realizing
    we’ve
    made
    a
    terrible
    mistake.
    One
    such
    teacher
    is
    Sharon
    Klompus
    who
    says
    of
    her
    students—“so
    passive”—and
    wonders
    what
    has
    happened.
    Nothing
    is
    demanded
    of
    them,
    she
    believes.
    Television,
    says
    Klompus,
    contributes
    to
    children’
    s
    passivity.
    “We’
    re
    talking
    about
    a
    generation
    of
    kids
    who’
    ve
    never
    been
    hurt
    or
    hungry.
    They
    have
    learned
    somebody
    will
    always
    do
    it
    for
    them,
    instead
    of
    saying
    ‘go
    and
    look
    it
    up’,
    you
    tell
    them
    the
    answer.
    It
    takes
    greater
    energy
    to
    say
    no
    to
    a
    kid.”
    Yes,
    it
    does.
    It
    takes
    energy
    and
    it
    takes
    work.
    It’
    s
    time
    for
    parents
    to
    end
    their
    vacation
    and
    come
    back
    to
    work.
    It’
    s
    time
    to
    take
    the
    car
    away,
    to
    turn
    the
    TV
    off,
    to
    tell
    them
    it
    hurts
    you
    more
    than
    them
    but
    it’
    s
    for
    their
    own
    good.
    It’s
    s
    time
    to
    start
    telling
    them
    no
    again.
    1.Children
    are
    becoming
    more
    inactive
    in
    study
    because
    .
    A.
    they
    watch
    TV
    too
    often
    B.
    they
    have
    done
    too
    much
    homework
    C.
    they
    have
    to
    fulfil
    too
    many
    duties
    D.
    teachers
    are
    too
    strict
    with
    them
    2.We
    learn
    from
    the
    passage
    that
    the
    author’s
    mother
    used
    to
    lay
    emphasis
    on
    .
    A.
    learning
    Latin
    B.
    discipline
    C.
    natural
    development
    D.
    education
    at
    school
    3.By“permissive
    period
    in
    education”(L.1,Para.2)the
    author
    means
    a
    time
    .
    A.
    when
    children
    are
    allowed
    to
    do
    what
    they
    wish
    to
    B.
    when
    everything
    can
    be
    taught
    at
    school
    C.
    when
    every
    child
    can
    be
    educated
    D.
    when
    children
    are
    permitted
    to
    receive
    education
    4.
    The
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    passage
    is
    that
    .
    A.
    parents
    should
    leave
    their
    children
    alone
    B.
    kids
    should
    have
    more
    activities
    at
    school
    C.
    it’s
    time
    to
    be
    more
    strict
    with
    our
    kids
    D.
    parents
    should
    always
    set
    a
    good
    example
    to
    their
    kids
    KEY:
    1-
    4ABAC
    高考英语阅读练习(011)
    The
    greatest
    recent
    changes
    have
    ,been
    in
    the
    lives
    of
    women
    ,During
    the
    twentieth
    century
    there
    was
    an
    unusual
    shortening
    of
    the
    time
    of
    a
    woman’s
    life
    spent
    in
    caring
    for
    children.
    A
    woman
    marrying
    at
    the
    end
    of
    the
    19th
    century
    would
    probably
    have
    been
    in
    her
    middle
    twenties
    ,and
    would
    be
    likely
    to
    have
    seven
    or
    eight
    children,
    of
    whom
    four
    or
    five
    lived
    till
    they
    were
    five
    years
    old
    ,By
    the
    time
    the
    youngest
    was
    fifteen
    ,the
    mother
    would
    have
    been
    id
    her
    early
    fifties
    and
    would
    expect
    to
    live
    a
    further
    twenty
    years
    ,during
    which
    custom
    ,chance
    and
    health
    made
    it
    unusual
    for
    her
    to
    get
    paid
    work,
    Today
    women
    marry
    younger
    and
    have
    fewer
    children
    Usually
    a
    woman
    ‘s
    youngest
    child
    will
    be
    fifteen
    when
    she
    is
    forty-five
    and
    is
    likely
    to
    take
    paid
    work
    until
    retirement
    at
    sixty
    Even
    while
    she
    has
    the
    care
    of
    children
    ,her
    work
    is
    lightened
    by
    household
    appliances
    (家用电器)and
    convenience
    foods.
    This
    important
    change
    in
    women’s
    way
    of
    life
    has
    only
    recently
    begun
    to
    have
    its
    full
    effect
    on
    women’
    s
    economic
    position
    Even
    a
    few
    years
    ago
    most
    girls
    left
    school
    at
    the
    first
    opportunity
    and
    most
    of
    them
    took
    a
    full-time
    job
    However
    ,when
    they
    married
    ,they
    usually
    left
    work
    at
    once
    and
    never
    returned
    to
    it
    ,Today
    the
    school-leaving
    age
    is
    sixteen
    ,many
    girls
    stay
    at
    school
    after
    that
    age
    ,and
    though
    women
    tend
    to
    marry
    younger
    ,more
    married
    women
    stay
    at
    work
    at
    leas
    until
    shortly
    before
    their
    first
    child
    is
    born
    Very
    many
    more
    after
    wads
    ,return
    to
    full
    or
    part-time
    work
    Such
    changes
    have
    led
    to
    a
    new
    relationship
    in
    marriage
    ,with
    both
    husband
    and
    wife
    accepting
    a
    greater
    share
    of
    the
    duties
    and
    satisfaction
    of
    family
    life,
    and
    with
    both
    husband
    and
    wife
    sharing
    more
    e-qually
    in
    providing
    the
    money
    and
    running
    the
    home
    ,according
    to
    the
    abilities
    and
    inter-est
    of
    each
    them.
    1.According
    to
    the
    passage
    ,around
    the
    year1990
    most
    women
    married
    A.at
    about
    twenty-five
    B.In
    their
    early
    fifties
    C.as
    soon
    as
    possible
    after
    they
    were
    fifteen
    D.at
    any
    age
    from
    fifteen
    to
    forty-five
    2.We
    are
    told
    that
    in
    an
    average
    family
    about1990
    .
    A.many
    children
    died
    before
    they
    were
    five
    B.the
    youngest
    child
    would
    be
    fifteen
    C.seven
    of
    eight
    children
    lived
    to
    be
    more
    than
    five
    D.four
    of
    five
    children
    died
    when
    they
    were
    five.
    3.When
    she
    was
    over
    fifty
    ,the
    late
    19th
    century
    mother
    .
    A.would
    expect
    to
    work
    until
    she
    died
    B.was
    usually
    expected
    to
    take
    up
    paid
    employment
    C.would
    he
    healthy
    enough
    to
    take
    up
    paid
    employment.
    D.was
    unlikely
    to
    find
    a
    job
    even
    if
    she
    now
    likely.
    4.Many
    girls
    ,the
    passage
    says
    ,are
    now
    likely
    to
    .
    A.marry
    so
    that
    they
    can
    get
    a
    job
    B.Leave
    school
    as
    soon
    as
    they
    can
    C.give
    up
    their
    jobs
    for
    good
    after
    they
    are
    married
    D.continue
    working
    until
    they
    are
    going
    to
    have
    a
    baby
    5.According
    to
    the
    passage
    ,it
    is
    now
    quite
    usual
    for
    women
    to
    .
    A.stay
    at
    hone
    after
    leaving
    school
    B.marry
    men
    younger
    than
    themselves
    C.start
    working
    again
    later
    in
    life
    D.Marry
    while
    still
    at
    school
    KEY:
    1-5
    ADDDC
    高考英语阅读练习(012)
    Language
    learning
    begins
    with
    listening.
    Children
    are
    greatly
    different
    in
    the
    amount
    of
    listening
    they
    do
    before
    they
    start
    speaking,
    and
    later
    starters
    are
    often
    long
    listeners
    .Most
    children
    will“obey”spoken
    instructions
    some
    time
    before
    they
    can
    speak,
    though
    the
    word“obey”is
    hardly
    accurate
    as
    a
    description
    of
    the
    eager
    and
    delighted
    cooperation
    usually
    shown
    by
    the
    child
    .Before
    they
    can
    speak,
    many
    children
    will
    also
    ask
    questions
    by
    gesture
    and
    by
    making
    questioning
    noises.
    Any
    attempt
    to
    study
    the
    development
    from
    the
    noises
    babies
    make
    to
    their
    first
    spo-ken
    words
    leads
    to
    considerable
    difficulties.
    It
    is
    agreed
    that
    they
    enjoy
    making
    noises
    ,and
    that
    during
    the
    first
    few
    months
    one
    or
    two
    noises
    sort
    themselves
    as
    particularly
    ex-pressive
    as
    delight,
    pain
    ,friendliness,
    and
    so
    on
    But
    since
    these
    can’t
    be
    said
    to
    show
    the
    baby;s
    intention
    to
    communicate
    ,they
    can
    hardly
    be
    regarded
    as
    early
    forms
    of
    language
    ,It
    is
    agreed,
    too,
    that
    from
    about
    three
    months
    they
    play
    with
    sounds
    for
    enjoyment
    ,and
    that
    by
    six
    months
    theyare
    able
    to
    add
    new
    words
    to
    their
    store
    This
    self-imitation(摸仿)leads
    on
    to
    deliberate
    (有意的)imitation
    of
    sounds
    made
    or
    words
    spoken
    to
    them
    by
    other
    people.
    The
    problem
    then
    arises
    as
    to
    the
    point
    at
    which
    one
    can
    say
    that
    these
    imita-tions
    can
    be
    considered
    as
    speech.
    It
    is
    a
    problem
    we
    need
    to
    get
    out
    teeth
    into.
    The
    meaning
    of
    a
    word
    depends
    on
    what
    a
    word
    depends
    on
    what
    a
    particular
    person
    means
    by
    it
    in
    a
    particular
    situation;
    and
    it
    is
    clear
    that
    what
    a
    child
    means
    by
    a
    word
    will
    change
    as
    he
    gains
    more
    experience
    of
    the
    world
    .Thus
    the
    use
    .at
    seven
    months
    .of
    “mama”as
    a
    greeting
    for
    his
    mother
    cannot
    be
    dismissed
    as
    a
    meaning-less
    sound
    simply
    because
    he
    also
    uses
    it
    at
    another
    times
    for
    his
    father
    ,his
    dog
    ,or
    any-thing
    else
    he
    likes.
    Playful
    and
    meaningless
    imitation
    of
    what
    other
    people
    say
    continues
    after
    the
    child
    has
    begun
    to
    speak
    for
    himself
    ,I
    doubt
    ,however
    whether
    anything
    is
    gained
    when
    parents
    take
    advantage
    of
    this
    ability
    in
    an
    attempt
    to
    teach
    new
    sounds
    .
    1.Before
    children
    start
    speaking
    .
    A.they
    need
    equal
    amount
    of
    listening
    B.they
    need
    different
    amounts
    of
    listening
    C.they
    are
    all
    eager
    to
    cooperate
    with
    the
    adults
    by
    obey
    spoken
    instructions
    D.they
    can’t
    understand
    and
    obey
    the
    adult
    ‘s
    oral
    instructions
    2.Children
    who
    start
    speaking
    late
    .
    A.may
    have
    problems
    with
    their
    listening
    B.Probably
    do
    not
    hear
    enough
    language
    spoken
    around
    them
    C.Usually
    pay
    close
    attention
    to
    what
    they
    hear
    D.Often
    take
    a
    long
    tine
    in
    learning
    to
    listen
    properly
    3.A
    baby’s
    first
    noises
    are
    .
    A.an
    expression
    of
    his
    moods
    and
    feelings
    B.an
    early
    form
    of
    language
    C.a
    sign
    that
    he
    means
    to
    tell
    you
    something
    D.An
    imitation
    of
    the
    speech
    of
    adults.
    4.The
    problem
    of
    deciding
    at
    what
    point
    a
    baby’
    imitations
    can
    be
    considered
    as
    speech

    A.is
    important
    because
    words
    have
    different
    meanings
    for
    different
    people
    B.is
    not
    especially
    important
    because
    the
    changeover
    takes
    place
    gradually
    C.is
    one
    that
    should
    be
    properly
    understood
    because
    the
    meaning
    of
    words
    changes
    with
    age.
    D.Is
    one
    that
    should
    be
    completely
    ignored(忽略)because
    children’s
    use
    of
    words
    is
    of-ten
    meaningless
    .
    5.The
    speaker
    implies
    .
    A.parents
    can
    never
    hope
    to
    teach
    their
    children
    new
    sounds.
    B.children
    no
    longer
    imitate
    people
    after
    they
    begin
    to
    speak
    C.Children
    who
    are
    good
    at
    imitating
    learn
    new
    words
    more
    quickly
    D.even
    after
    they
    have
    learnt
    to
    speak
    ,children
    still
    enjoy
    imitating
    KEY:
    1-5
    BDABD
    高考英语阅读练习(013)
    This
    is
    John
    Roberts
    reporting
    from
    Cardiff
    The
    result
    of
    the
    match
    which
    finished
    at
    four
    this
    afternoon
    between
    France
    and
    Wales
    was
    a
    draw.
    Neither
    side
    scored
    .The
    Dutch
    referee(裁判)did
    not
    allow
    the
    one
    goal
    which
    France
    managed
    to
    kick
    The
    reason
    for
    this
    was
    that
    a
    French
    player
    was
    unfortunately
    off
    side
    .So
    both
    teams
    went
    home
    disap-pointed
    with
    the
    game
    They
    particularly
    admired
    the
    French
    forwards
    ,who
    were
    always
    fast
    and
    often
    threatened
    the
    Welsh
    defense
    .Once
    it
    looked
    as
    if
    the
    Welsh
    goalkeeper
    was
    in
    serious
    trouble.
    He
    dived
    to
    his
    right
    to
    save
    a
    shot
    from
    the
    French
    centre
    forward
    and
    crashed
    his
    head
    against
    the
    goal
    post
    ,A
    doctor
    examined
    him
    and
    he
    soon
    began
    to
    play
    a-gain
    .Of
    course
    the
    large
    ,friendly
    crowd
    cheered
    for
    him
    Wales
    will
    certainly
    welcome
    an-other
    visit
    from
    this
    splendid
    team.
    1.This
    passage
    is
    .
    A.a
    piece
    of
    sports
    news
    broadcast
    over
    radio
    B.a
    piece
    of
    sports
    news
    in
    a
    newspaper
    C.An
    advertisement
    about
    sports
    D.An
    assay
    about
    sports
    2.The
    word
    “draw”in
    this
    passage
    means
    ?
    A.an
    act
    of
    puling
    B.Taking
    money
    from
    a
    bank
    C.a
    state
    in
    which
    neither
    side
    wins
    D.Making
    pictures
    with
    a
    pencil
    or
    a
    pen
    3.Which
    of
    the
    following
    sentence
    is
    NOT
    TRUE
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.The
    French
    team
    is
    a
    visiting
    team
    while
    the
    Welsh
    team
    is
    the
    home
    team.
    B.The
    Welsh
    goalkeeper
    was
    brave
    and
    he
    didn’t
    quit
    the
    match
    even
    after
    he
    had
    his
    head
    Seriously
    injured
    in
    the
    game.
    C.People
    liked
    the
    French
    forwards
    for
    they
    were
    very
    active
    on
    the
    field.
    D.A
    French
    player
    did
    kick
    a
    goal
    but
    the
    referee
    refused
    to
    admit
    it.
    KEY:
    1-3
    ACB
    高考英语阅读练习(014)
    There
    are
    several
    ways
    you
    can
    find
    out
    about
    the
    countries
    and
    places
    you
    wish
    to
    visit
    .You
    can
    talk
    to
    friends
    who
    have
    travelled
    to
    the
    places.
    Or
    you
    can
    to
    and
    see
    a
    colour
    film
    Or
    you
    can
    read
    travel
    books.
    It
    would
    seem
    that
    there
    are
    three
    kinds
    of
    travel
    books
    The
    first
    are
    those
    that
    give
    a
    personal
    ,subjective
    (主观的)account
    of
    travels
    which
    the
    author
    has
    actually
    made
    himself
    .if
    they
    are
    informative
    and
    have
    a
    good
    index
    (索引)then
    they
    can
    be
    useful
    to
    you
    when
    you
    are
    planning
    your
    travels
    .The
    second
    kind
    are
    those
    books
    whose
    purpose
    is
    to
    give
    a
    purely
    objective
    (客观的)description
    of
    things
    to
    be
    done
    and
    seen
    If
    a
    well-read
    ,cultured
    person
    has
    written
    such
    a
    book
    then
    it
    is
    even
    more
    useful
    .It
    can
    be
    sorted
    as
    a
    selected
    guide
    book
    The
    third
    kind
    are
    those
    books
    which
    are
    called“a
    guide”to
    some
    place
    or
    other
    ,If
    they
    are
    good
    ,they
    will,
    in
    addition
    to
    their
    factual
    information
    ,give
    an
    analysis
    or
    an
    explanation
    Like
    the
    first
    kind
    they
    can
    be
    inspiring
    and
    interesting
    .But
    their
    basic
    purpose
    is
    to
    help
    the
    reader
    who
    wishes
    to
    plan
    in
    the
    most
    practical
    way.
    Whatever
    kind
    of
    travel
    book
    you
    choose
    you
    must
    make
    sure
    that
    it
    does
    not
    describe
    everything
    as
    “wonderful”,“excellent”or
    “magical”。You
    must
    also
    note
    its
    date
    of
    publi-cation
    because
    travel
    is
    a
    very
    practical
    affair
    and
    many
    things
    change
    quickly
    in
    the
    twenty
    –first
    century
    Finally
    ,you
    should
    make
    sure
    that
    the
    contents
    are
    well
    presented
    and
    easy
    to
    find.
    1.This
    passage
    is
    about

    A.how
    to
    travel
    B.how
    to
    buy
    travel
    books
    C.how
    to
    read
    a
    travel
    book
    D.travel
    books
    2.The
    following
    travel
    books
    may
    be
    of
    use
    when
    you
    plan
    your
    travels
    except
    .
    A.the
    book
    written
    by
    some
    people
    who
    have
    had
    the
    same
    travel
    experience
    themselves
    B.the
    book
    which
    tells
    you
    what
    is
    worth
    doing
    and
    seeing
    based
    on
    the
    facts
    C.the
    book
    in
    which
    a
    lot
    of
    big
    adjectives
    are
    used
    to
    draw
    your
    attention
    D.the
    book
    which
    offers
    you
    a
    lot
    of
    useful
    information
    like
    a
    tour
    guide
    3.The
    date
    of
    the
    publication
    must
    be
    noticed
    because
    .
    A.the
    world
    is
    changing
    and
    so
    are
    the
    places
    you
    are
    going
    to
    visit
    B.the
    price
    of
    the
    book
    is
    always
    changing
    C.the
    author
    of
    the
    book
    may
    be
    different
    D.the
    contents
    of
    the
    book
    are
    always
    the
    same
    KEY:
    1-3
    DCA
    高考英语阅读练习(015)
    The
    United
    States
    is
    not
    the
    only
    country
    affected
    by
    the“computer
    revolution”,All
    the
    major
    countries
    of
    the
    world
    have
    computers
    ,and
    the
    developing
    countries
    have
    also
    realized
    that
    computers
    play
    a
    big
    part
    in
    their
    economic
    development.
    Usually
    what
    one
    sees
    is
    a
    machine
    that
    looks
    like
    a
    typewriter
    ;it
    is
    called
    a
    computer
    terminal(终端)But
    computers
    are
    also
    used
    in
    unseen
    ways
    For
    example
    they
    determine
    how
    much
    tine
    there
    should
    be
    between
    traffic
    signals
    to
    prevent
    traffic
    problems
    and
    to
    keep
    millions
    of
    cars
    moving
    in
    an
    orderly
    flow
    When
    you
    buy
    a
    car
    ,a
    factory
    process
    (过程)that
    is
    controlled
    by
    a
    computer
    enables
    you
    to
    obtain
    a
    car
    with
    your
    own
    choice
    of
    colours
    and
    special
    features
    (特征)in
    just
    a
    few
    weeks’
    time
    In
    medical
    laboratories
    ,com-puters
    have
    reduced
    the
    mistakes
    in
    testing
    ,and
    they
    have
    saved
    doctors’
    countless
    hours
    of
    work
    Before
    long
    ,medical
    histories
    of
    all
    Americans
    will
    be
    kept
    in
    computer
    “banks”.If
    a
    person
    becomes
    ill
    far
    from
    his
    home
    ,local
    doctors
    will
    be
    able
    to
    get
    his
    medical
    record
    immediately
    ,In
    science
    the
    computer
    has
    performed
    in
    minutes
    experiments
    which
    would
    have
    required
    thousands
    of
    hours
    of
    work
    by
    human
    hands
    and
    minds.
    Most
    experts
    agree
    that
    computers
    are
    necessary
    to
    solve
    the
    problems
    of
    increasing
    population
    ,city
    living
    ,and
    public
    affairs
    Without
    computers,
    the
    jobs
    of
    solving
    these
    problems
    would
    require
    millions
    of
    workers
    to
    do
    tons
    of
    paperwork
    Before
    any
    computer
    can
    work
    on
    any
    problem,
    it
    must
    be
    told
    what
    to
    do
    Someone
    must
    program
    the
    computer
    ,step―by―step.
    At
    first
    this
    was
    done
    by
    having
    the
    programmer
    write
    out
    his
    instructions
    in
    the
    form
    of
    numbers
    which
    would
    be“understood”by
    the
    machine
    ,Within
    a
    short
    time,
    attempts
    were
    made
    to
    perform
    a
    system
    that
    would
    enable
    humans
    to
    communicate
    programmer
    could
    use
    words
    that
    had
    meanings
    for
    him
    ,and
    another
    program
    in
    the
    ma-chine
    would
    translate
    the
    words
    into
    the
    computer’s
    number
    system.
    Without
    special
    training
    ,in
    is
    impossible
    to
    under
    stand
    exactly
    how
    a
    computer
    does
    int
    work
    however
    ,many
    people
    without
    scientific
    training
    use
    computers
    in
    their
    daily
    lives
    .In
    some
    American
    schools
    for
    example
    young
    children
    are
    being
    taught
    by
    comput-ers
    for
    part
    of
    the
    school
    day.
    The
    use
    of
    computers
    in
    school
    has
    worried
    some
    Americans
    There
    are
    those
    who
    fear
    is
    will
    remove
    human
    element(成分)from
    teacher-student
    relationships
    .On
    the
    other
    hand
    there
    are
    educators
    who
    consider
    computer
    program
    a
    valuable
    means
    of
    freeing
    teachers
    from
    the
    more
    boring
    and
    tiring
    tasks
    ,thus
    enabling
    them
    to
    spend
    more
    time
    with
    a
    single
    student.
    In
    education
    ,as
    in
    business
    and
    industry
    science
    and
    medicine
    ,computers
    play
    an
    important
    part
    in
    almost
    every
    type
    of
    operation
    the
    future
    will
    bring
    major
    advances
    in
    computer
    technology
    ,which
    will
    aid
    man
    in
    his
    efforts
    to
    improve
    the
    world.
    1.Operators
    of
    computers
    should
    give
    instructions
    to
    work
    in
    the
    form
    of
    program
    .
    A.young
    children
    B.Experienced
    operators
    C.Common
    readers
    D.Scientists
    in
    the
    computer
    field
    2.Operators
    of
    computers
    should
    give
    instructions
    to
    work
    in
    the
    form
    of
    program
    .
    A.which
    are
    introduced
    in
    turn
    into
    computers
    B.Through
    which
    computers
    could
    process“language”
    C.Which
    could
    tell
    computers
    what
    to
    do
    and
    how
    to
    do
    D.All
    of
    the
    above
    3.The
    arguments
    for
    computer
    program
    used
    in
    education
    were
    that
    .
    A.computers
    like
    toys
    would
    attract
    much
    attention
    of
    school
    children
    B.there
    are
    lots
    of
    buttons
    which
    you
    can
    press
    for
    doing
    anything
    at
    your
    will
    C.computer
    program
    would
    take
    the
    place
    of
    teachers
    ,turning
    a
    school
    into
    a
    computer
    world
    D.Computers
    could
    give
    teachers
    the
    opportunity
    to
    spare
    time
    to
    deal
    with
    students
    re-
    spectively.
    4.Which
    of
    the
    following
    best
    express
    the
    main
    idea
    of
    this
    passage?
    A.The
    world
    will
    enjoy
    the
    beautiful
    picture
    of
    the
    computers.
    B.Computer
    technology
    will
    change
    the
    human
    life
    C.Computer
    would
    work
    freely
    in
    the
    future
    D.Computer
    would
    work
    with
    a
    great
    memory-storage
    and
    at
    highest
    speed.
    KEY:
    1-4
    BDAB
    高考英语阅读练习(016)
    Advertising
    is
    a
    highly
    developed
    twentieth-century
    industry.
    The
    development
    of
    radio,
    television,
    cinema,
    magazines
    and
    newspapers
    has
    gone
    hand
    in
    hand
    with
    the
    development
    of
    advertising.
    Why
    is
    advertising
    so
    popular?
    Is
    it
    a
    waste
    of
    money?
    It
    has
    been
    proved
    again
    and
    again
    that
    ?repeated
    advertising
    increases
    product
    sales.
    Since
    it
    increases
    production,
    the
    price
    can
    be
    reduced.
    Therefore
    advertising,
    instead
    of
    making
    a
    product
    more
    expensive,
    makes
    it
    cheaper.
    Advertising
    is
    now
    a
    scientific
    business.
    Once
    managers
    would
    say
    jokingly,
    "
    I
    know
    that
    half
    of
    what
    I
    spend
    on
    advertising
    is
    wasted,
    but
    I
    don"t
    know
    which
    half."
    Now,
    all
    parts
    of
    an
    advertising
    programme
    are
    properly
    measured
    and
    researched.
    What
    makes
    a
    good
    advertisement?
    There
    have
    been
    major
    changes
    in
    advertising
    in
    the
    past
    sixty
    years..
    People
    read
    advertisements
    partly
    for
    information
    and
    partly
    for
    pleasure.
    Today"s
    advertisements
    often
    start
    with
    a
    question,
    or
    a
    puzzle,
    with
    the
    purpose
    of
    attracting
    the
    reader"s
    attention.
    Of
    course,
    most
    advertisements
    contain
    information.
    But
    this
    is
    usually
    contained
    in
    a
    text
    that
    is
    interesting
    and
    often
    funny.
    Humour
    is
    very
    important.
    Sometimes
    advertisements
    tell
    a
    story,
    or
    the
    story
    may
    be
    continued
    over
    a
    number
    of
    advertisements.
    However,
    there
    is
    a
    danger
    in
    this.
    It
    is
    possible
    that
    the
    reader
    or
    viewer
    will
    remember
    the
    advertisement
    but
    not
    the
    name
    of
    the
    product.
    1.
    The
    purpose
    of
    advertising
    is
    ____.
    A.
    to
    increase
    product
    sales
    B.
    to
    make
    a
    product
    much
    better
    C.
    to
    spend
    more
    money
    D.
    to
    reduce
    the
    production
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    can
    be
    used
    in
    place
    of
    the
    underlined
    phrase
    "hand
    in
    hand"
    ?
    A.
    Here
    and
    there.
    B.
    Again
    and
    again.
    C.
    As
    usual.
    D.
    At
    the
    same
    time.
    3.
    What
    is
    meant
    by
    what
    managers
    said
    in
    the
    second
    paragraph?
    A.
    A11
    the
    money
    on
    advertising
    was
    wasted.
    B.
    Not
    all
    the
    advertisements
    were
    well
    designed.
    C.A11
    the
    managers
    knew
    about
    advertising
    then.
    D.
    Managers
    spent
    no
    money
    on
    advertising.
    4.
    What
    does
    the
    writer
    think
    of
    advertising?
    A.
    Useless.
    B.
    Unnecessary.
    C.
    Important.
    D.
    Wasteful.
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    D
    3.
    B
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(017)
    Three
    men
    ran
    after
    a
    robber
    into
    East
    Putney
    Station,
    London,
    after
    he
    hit
    and
    kicked
    an
    old
    woman,
    but
    were
    turned
    back
    at
    the
    gate
    because
    they
    had
    no
    tickets.
    This
    was
    what
    the
    Central
    Court
    stated
    this
    morning.
    They
    were
    refused
    the
    use
    of
    a
    telephone
    to
    call
    the
    police,
    so
    they
    bought
    platform
    tickets.
    When
    they
    went
    into
    the
    station,
    they
    caught
    the
    robber,
    a
    youth
    of
    21.
    One
    of
    the
    men
    had
    to
    go
    outside
    to
    make
    a
    999
    call.
    Mr
    Justice
    Stevenson
    said
    the
    incident
    ought
    to
    be
    brought
    to
    the
    attention
    of
    the
    railway
    officials.
    He
    sent
    the
    robber
    to
    prison
    for
    five
    years.
    Terry
    Tailor
    earlier
    had
    admitted
    his
    attack
    to
    Mrs
    Percy,
    aged
    67,
    with
    the
    purpose
    of
    robbing
    her.
    1.
    What
    did
    the
    three
    men
    want
    to
    do
    inside
    the
    station?
    A.
    To
    catch
    the
    train.
    B.
    To
    help
    Mrs
    Percy.
    C.
    To
    catch
    the
    robber.
    D.
    To
    escape
    from
    the
    police.
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    the
    right
    order
    according
    to
    the
    story?
    a.
    They
    were
    stopped
    at
    the
    gate.
    b.
    An
    old
    lady
    was
    attacked
    near
    a
    railway
    station.
    c.
    Three
    men
    ran
    after
    the
    robber
    in
    order
    to
    catch
    him.
    d.
    He
    was
    sent
    to
    prison
    for
    five
    years,
    e.
    The
    robber
    admitted
    he
    had
    attacked
    the
    old
    lady.
    A.
    b,
    a,
    c,
    d,
    e
    B.
    b,
    c,
    a,
    e,
    d
    C.
    b,
    c,
    a,
    d,
    e
    D.
    a,
    b,
    c,
    d,
    e
    3.
    According
    to
    the
    judge,
    _____
    ought
    to
    have
    a
    good
    thinking
    about
    the
    incident.
    A.
    railway
    officials
    B.
    the
    policemen
    C.
    Mrs
    Percy
    D.
    Terry
    Tailor
    4.
    Where
    do
    you
    think
    this
    passage
    might
    be
    taken
    from
    ?
    A.
    A
    magazine
    .
    B.
    A
    diary.
    C.
    A
    story
    book.
    D.
    A
    newspaper.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    B
    3.
    A
    4.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(018)
    Learning
    online
    should
    make
    use
    of
    a
    number
    of
    Internet
    tools:
    e-mail
    lets
    you
    exchange
    letters
    between
    continents
    very
    cheaply
    and
    almost
    immediately.
    Large
    groups
    of
    people
    can
    share
    their
    discussions
    by
    using
    electronic
    lists
    to
    send
    every
    letter
    to
    everyone
    on
    the
    list.
    Electronic
    magazines
    bring
    you
    up-to-date
    topics,
    such
    as
    news,
    arts,
    and
    sports.
    Search
    engines
    allow
    you
    to
    look
    for
    anything
    you
    want
    on
    the
    Internet,
    including
    the
    holdings
    of
    major
    libraries.
    In
    a
    chat
    room
    you
    can
    have
    a
    real-time
    written
    talk.
    Audio
    and
    video
    bring
    the
    world
    to
    your
    computer
    -—
    you
    can
    listen
    to
    the
    world"s
    radio
    stations,
    watch
    the
    evening
    news
    from
    another
    continent.
    And
    in
    an
    online
    conference
    you
    can
    even
    talk
    to
    your
    teacher
    and
    fellow
    students
    abroad.
    Do
    you
    have
    e-mail?
    How
    much
    do
    you
    communicate
    with
    your
    friends
    over
    the
    Internet?
    Internet,
    the
    newest
    child
    in
    technology,
    is
    like
    a
    modern
    communication
    highway.
    It"s
    also
    a
    kind
    of
    super-shop,
    almost
    anything
    you
    can
    buy
    in
    a
    store
    -—
    you
    can
    get
    it
    through
    Internet,
    without
    leaving
    home
    at
    all.
    1.
    What
    is
    the
    passage
    mainly
    about?
    A.
    Internet.
    B.
    Radio
    stations.
    C.
    Magazines.
    D.
    Libraries.
    2.
    What
    is
    the
    quickest
    and
    cheapest
    way
    of
    getting
    in
    touch
    with
    your
    friend
    abroad?
    A.
    By
    telegraph.
    B.
    By
    air-mail.
    C.
    By
    e-mail.
    D.
    By
    telephone.
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    will
    you
    choose
    if
    you
    want
    to
    hold
    a
    meeting
    over
    the
    Internet?
    A.
    Chat
    room.
    B.
    Search
    engines.
    C.
    Online
    conference.
    D.
    Electronic
    lists.
    4.
    Where
    does
    the
    writer
    suggest
    we
    might
    work?
    A.
    In
    the
    office.
    B.
    At
    home.
    C.
    At
    the
    library.
    D.
    In
    the
    store.
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(019)
    Flying
    Saucers
    In
    1947
    the
    pilot
    of
    a
    small
    aeroplane
    saw
    nine
    strange
    objects
    in
    the
    sky
    over
    Washing-ton
    in
    the
    USA.
    He
    said
    that
    they
    looked
    like
    saucers.
    Newspapers
    printed
    his
    story
    un-der
    the
    headline
    "Flying
    Saucers".
    Since
    then,
    all
    over
    the
    world,
    people
    have
    reported
    seeing
    similar
    strange
    objects.
    No
    one
    knows
    what
    they
    are
    or
    where
    they
    come
    from.
    Some
    people
    say
    that
    they
    do
    not
    exist,
    but
    many
    others
    say
    that
    they
    have
    seen
    them.
    Usually
    people
    on
    the
    ground
    have
    seen
    them
    but
    not
    always.
    Airline
    pilots
    also
    have
    reported
    seeing
    them
    and
    so
    have
    astro-nauts
    ──
    the
    men
    who
    fly
    in
    spaceships.
    Perhaps
    some
    people
    saw
    them
    only
    in
    their
    imagination.
    Perhaps
    some
    people
    made
    a
    mistake.
    But
    airline
    pilots
    and
    astro-nauts
    do
    not
    usually
    make
    mistakes
    of
    this
    kind.
    Captain
    Ed
    Mitchell,
    who
    was
    the
    sixth
    man
    to
    walk
    on
    the
    moon,
    said
    in
    1974
    that
    he
    believes
    that
    some
    "flying
    saucers"
    are
    real.
    Many
    other
    people
    now
    believe
    that
    these
    strange
    flying
    objects
    are
    visiting
    the
    earth
    from
    other
    worlds
    in
    space.
    "They
    have
    come
    to
    look
    at
    us,"
    they
    say.
    The
    American
    government
    tried
    to
    find
    out
    more
    about
    these
    objects.
    It
    listened
    to
    a
    great
    many
    people
    who
    said
    they
    had
    seen
    them.
    But
    the
    Government
    Committee
    could
    not
    decide
    on
    what
    the
    objects
    were.
    It
    called
    them
    UFOs,
    which
    is
    short
    for
    "Unidentified
    Flying
    Objects".
    Some
    say
    they
    have
    seen
    people
    in
    the
    fly-ing
    saucers!
    In
    1964,
    a
    driver
    of
    a
    police
    car
    in
    New
    Mexico
    saw
    a
    UFO
    landing
    a
    mile
    away.
    When
    he
    reached
    it,
    there
    were
    two
    small
    figures
    standing
    near
    it.
    They
    looked
    like
    little
    men.
    When
    he
    reported
    on
    his
    radio,
    they
    got
    inside
    the
    object
    and
    flew
    away.
    In
    1973
    two
    men
    were
    out
    fishing
    in
    Mississippi.
    They
    say
    they
    saw
    a
    UFO
    shaped
    like
    an
    egg.
    There
    were
    three
    creatures
    like
    men
    but
    their
    skins
    were
    silver
    in
    colour.
    They
    had
    no
    eyes,
    and
    their
    mouths
    were
    just
    slits
    (裂缝).
    Their
    noses
    and
    ears
    were
    pointed.
    They
    made
    the
    fishermen
    get
    inside
    the
    UFO
    for
    a
    while.
    Then
    the
    creatures
    photographed
    them
    and
    took
    them
    to
    the
    place
    where
    they
    had
    been
    fishing.
    There
    are
    many
    other
    similar
    stories.
    Some
    are
    probably
    untrue
    but
    some
    may
    be
    true.
    No
    one
    knows.
    1.
    ___
    took
    pictures
    of
    the
    two
    fishermen.
    A.
    The
    creatures
    in
    a
    UFO
    B.
    A
    driver
    of
    a
    police
    car
    C.
    A
    pilot
    of
    a
    plane
    D.
    Captain
    Ed
    Mitchell
    2.
    The
    American
    government
    tried
    to
    ____.
    A.
    look
    for
    the
    flying
    objects
    B.
    know
    where
    the
    objects
    come
    from
    C.
    learn
    more
    about
    UFOs
    D.
    report
    more
    about
    UFOs
    3.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    the
    name
    "flying
    saucers"
    was
    first
    used
    by
    ____.
    A.
    a
    pilot
    of
    a
    small
    plane
    B.
    an
    official
    in
    Washington
    C.
    an
    editor
    of
    a
    newspaper
    D.
    the
    man
    who
    flies
    in
    saucers
    4.
    The
    purpose
    of
    this
    passage
    is
    to
    tell
    us
    _.
    A.
    the
    shape
    of
    UFOs
    B.
    how
    to
    observe
    UFOs
    C.
    the
    danger
    of
    UFOs
    D.
    what
    we
    know
    about
    UFOs
    5.
    It
    is
    implied
    in
    the
    passage
    that
    the
    author
    A.
    does
    not
    believe
    at
    all
    about
    the
    exis-tence
    of
    UFOs
    B.
    believes
    that
    UFOs
    are
    real
    objects
    flying
    in
    the
    sky
    C.
    is
    not
    sure
    whether
    there
    are
    UFOs
    or
    not
    D.
    thinks
    UFOs
    come
    from
    other
    planets
    Key:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    4.
    D
    5.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(020)
    Britons
    Learn
    to
    Forgive
    LEEDS,
    England

    A
    Leeds
    University
    psychology
    (心理学)
    professor
    is
    teaching
    a
    course
    to
    help
    dozens
    of
    Britons
    forgive
    their
    enemies.
    "The
    hatred
    we
    hold
    within
    us
    is
    a
    can-cer,"
    Professor
    Ken
    Hart
    said,
    adding
    that
    holding
    in
    anger
    can
    lead
    to
    problems
    such
    as
    high
    blood
    pressure
    and
    heart
    disease.
    More
    than
    70
    people
    have
    become
    mem-bers
    in
    Hart"s
    first
    20-week
    workshop
    in
    Lon-don

    a
    course
    he
    says
    is
    the
    first
    of
    its
    kind
    in
    the
    world.
    These
    are
    people
    who
    are
    sick
    and
    tired
    of
    living
    with
    a
    memory.
    They
    realize
    their
    bitterness
    is
    a
    poison
    they
    think
    they
    can
    pour
    out,
    but
    they
    end
    up
    drinking
    it
    themselves,
    said
    Canadian-born
    Hart.
    The
    students
    meet
    in
    groups
    of
    eight
    to
    ten
    for
    a
    two-hour
    workshop
    with
    an
    adviser
    every
    fortnight.
    The
    course,
    ending
    in
    July,
    is
    expected
    to
    get
    rid
    of
    the
    cancer
    of
    hate
    in
    these
    peo-ple.
    "People
    have
    lots
    of
    negative
    attitudes
    to-wards
    forgiveness,"
    he
    said.
    "People
    confuse
    (把……混淆)
    forgiveness
    with
    forgetting.
    Forgiveness
    means
    changing
    from
    a
    negative
    attitude
    to
    a
    positive
    one."
    Hart
    and
    his
    team
    have
    created
    instruc-tions
    to
    provide
    the
    training
    needed.
    "The
    main
    idea
    is
    to
    give
    you
    guidelines
    on
    how
    to
    look
    at
    various
    kinds
    of
    angers
    and
    how
    they
    affect
    you,
    and
    how
    to
    change
    your
    attitudes
    towards
    the
    person
    you
    are
    angry
    with,"
    said
    Norman
    Claringbull,
    a
    senior
    expert
    on
    the
    forgiveness
    project.
    Hart
    said
    he
    believes
    forgiveness
    is
    a
    skill
    that
    can
    be
    taught,
    as
    these
    people
    "want
    to
    get
    free
    of
    the
    past".
    1.
    From
    this
    passage
    we
    know
    that
    ______.
    A.
    high
    blood
    pressure
    and
    heart
    disease
    are
    caused
    by
    hatred
    B.
    high
    blood
    pressure
    can
    only
    be
    cured
    by
    psychology
    professors
    C.
    without
    hatred,
    people
    will
    have
    less
    trouble
    connected
    with
    blood
    and
    heart
    D.
    people
    who
    suffer
    from
    blood
    pressure
    and
    heart
    disease
    must
    have
    many
    enemies
    2.
    If
    you
    are
    angry
    with
    somebody,
    you
    should
    A.
    try
    your
    best
    to
    defeat
    him
    or
    her
    B.
    never
    meet
    him
    or
    her
    again
    C.
    persuade
    him
    or
    her
    to
    have
    a
    talk
    with
    you
    D.
    relax
    yourself
    by
    not
    thinking
    of
    him
    or
    her
    any
    more
    3.
    In
    Hart"s
    first
    20-week
    workshop,
    people
    there
    can
    ___.
    A.
    meet
    their
    enemies
    B.
    change
    their
    minds
    C.
    enjoy
    the
    professor"s
    speech
    D.
    learn
    how
    to
    quarrel
    with
    others
    4.
    If
    you
    are
    a
    member
    in
    Hart"
    s
    workshop,
    you"ll
    ______.
    A.
    pay
    much
    money
    to
    Hart
    B.
    go
    to
    the
    workshop
    every
    night
    C.
    attend
    a
    gathering
    twice
    a
    month
    D.
    pour
    out
    everything
    stored
    in
    your
    mind
    5.
    The
    author
    wrote
    this
    passage
    in
    order
    to
    A.
    persuade
    us
    to
    go
    to
    Hart"s
    workshop
    B.
    tell
    us
    the
    news
    about
    Hart"s
    workshop
    C.
    tell
    us
    how
    to
    run
    a
    workshop
    like
    Hart"s
    D.
    help
    us
    to
    look
    at
    various
    kinds
    of
    angers
    Key:
    1.
    C
    2.
    D
    3.
    B
    4.
    C
    5.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(021)
    Closing
    the
    Gap
    Until
    late
    in
    the
    20th
    century,
    most
    Americans
    spent
    time
    with
    people
    of
    different
    generations.
    Now
    middle-aged
    Americans
    may
    not
    keep
    in
    touch
    with
    old
    people
    until
    they
    are
    old
    themselves.
    That"s
    because
    we
    group
    people
    by
    age.
    We
    put
    our
    three-year-olds
    together
    in
    day-care
    centers,
    our
    13-year-olds
    in
    schools
    and
    sports
    activities,
    and
    our
    80-year-olds
    in
    senior-citizen
    homes.
    Why?
    We
    live
    away
    from
    the
    old
    for
    many
    reasons.
    Young
    people
    sometimes
    avoid
    the
    old
    to
    get
    rid
    of
    fears
    of
    aging
    and
    dying.
    It
    is
    much
    harder
    to
    watch
    someone
    we
    love
    dis-appear
    before
    our
    eyes.
    Sometimes
    it"s
    so
    hard
    that
    we
    stay
    away
    from
    the
    people
    who
    need
    us
    the
    most.
    Fortunately,
    some
    of
    us
    have
    found
    our
    way
    to
    the
    old.
    And
    we
    have
    discovered
    that
    they
    often
    save
    the
    young.
    A
    reporter
    moved
    her
    family
    onto
    a
    block
    filled
    with
    old
    people.
    At
    first
    her
    chil-dren
    were
    disappointed.
    But
    the
    reporter
    baked
    banana
    bread
    for
    the
    neighbours
    and
    had
    her
    children
    deliver
    it
    and
    visit.
    Soon
    the
    children
    had
    many
    new
    friends,
    with
    whom
    they
    shared
    food,
    stories
    and
    projects.
    "My
    children
    have
    never
    been
    less
    lonely,"
    the
    re-porter
    said.
    The
    young,
    in
    turn,
    save
    the
    old.
    Once
    I
    was
    in
    a
    rest
    home
    (养老院)
    when
    a
    visitor
    showed
    up
    with
    a
    baby,
    she
    was
    immediately
    surrounded.
    People
    who
    hadn"t
    gotten
    out
    of
    bed
    in
    a
    week
    suddenly
    were
    ringing
    for
    a
    wheelchair.
    Even
    those
    who
    had
    seemed
    asleep
    woke
    "up
    to
    watch
    the
    child.
    Babies
    have
    an
    astonishing
    power
    to
    comfort
    and
    cure.
    Grandparents
    are
    a
    special
    case.
    They
    give
    their
    grandchildren
    a
    feeling
    of
    security
    (安全)
    and
    continuity.
    As
    my
    husband
    put
    it,
    "My
    grandparents
    gave
    me
    a
    deep
    sense
    that
    things
    would
    turn
    out
    right
    in
    the
    end."
    Grandchil-dren
    speak
    of
    attention
    they
    don"t
    get
    from
    worried
    parents.
    "My
    parents
    were
    always
    telling
    me
    to
    hurry
    up,
    and
    my
    grandparents
    told
    me
    to
    slow
    down,"
    one
    friend
    said.
    A
    teacher
    told
    me
    she
    can
    tell
    which
    pupils
    have
    rela-tionships
    with
    grandparents:
    they
    are
    quieter,
    calmer
    and
    more
    trusting.
    (Words:
    346
    Minutes:
    6)
    1.
    Now
    in
    ah
    American
    family,
    people
    can
    find
    that
    ___.
    A.
    children
    never
    live
    with
    their
    parents
    B.
    not
    all
    working
    people
    live
    with
    their
    parents
    C.
    aged
    people
    are
    supported
    by
    their
    grand-children
    D.
    grandchildren
    are
    supported
    by
    their
    grand-parents
    2.
    The
    reason
    that
    old
    people
    are
    left
    alone
    may
    be
    that
    ?
    "
    A.
    the
    old
    don"t
    like
    to
    live
    in
    a
    big
    family
    B.
    the
    young
    can"t
    get
    enough
    money
    to
    sup-port
    the
    old
    C.
    different
    generations
    have
    different
    lifestyles
    D.
    the
    old
    are
    too
    weak
    to
    live
    with
    the
    young
    3.
    The
    fact
    the
    reporter
    told
    us
    shows
    that
    __.
    A.
    old
    people
    in
    America
    lead
    a
    hard
    life.
    B.
    old
    people
    in
    America
    enjoy
    banana
    bread
    C.
    she
    had
    no
    rime
    to
    take
    care
    of
    her
    children
    D.
    old
    people
    are
    easy
    to
    get
    along
    with
    4.
    Seeing
    a
    baby,
    the
    old
    people
    got
    excited
    because
    __.
    A.
    they
    had
    never
    seen
    a
    baby
    before
    B.
    the
    baby
    was
    clever
    and
    beautiful
    C.
    the
    baby
    brought
    them
    the
    image
    of
    life
    D.
    the
    baby"s
    mother
    would
    take
    care
    of
    them
    5.
    Why
    are
    some
    children
    quieter,
    calmer
    and
    more
    trusting?
    A.
    Because
    they
    have
    relationships
    with
    their
    grandparents.
    B.
    Because
    their
    worried
    parents
    ask
    them
    to
    act
    like
    that.
    C.
    Because
    they
    have
    nothing
    to
    worry
    about.
    D.
    Because
    their
    teachers
    ask
    them
    to
    act
    like
    that.
    Key:
    1.
    B
    2.
    C
    3-D
    4.
    C
    5.A
    高考英语阅读练习(022)
    Nobody
    Benefits
    NEW
    YORK—America
    has
    been
    experi-encing
    the
    longest
    economic
    increase
    in
    its
    history.
    Incomes
    have
    risen,
    unemployment
    has
    fallen,
    and
    cities
    such
    as
    New
    York
    are
    bursting
    with
    new
    office
    buildings.
    But
    just
    a
    short
    walk
    from
    Manhattan"s
    skyscrapers,
    George
    Brown
    sits
    on
    the
    side-walk,
    cooking
    a
    lunch
    of
    rice
    and
    bits
    of
    fish
    over
    a
    can
    of
    cooking
    fuel.
    Brown
    is
    homeless

    one
    of
    the
    2.3
    mil-lion
    people
    in
    the
    US
    who
    end
    up
    on
    the
    street.
    During
    the
    day.
    Brown
    collects
    alumini-um
    cans
    and
    sells
    them
    for
    five
    cents
    a
    piece.
    At
    night,
    he
    sleeps
    on
    the
    street.
    "I
    have
    been
    on
    the
    street
    about
    eight
    or
    nine
    years,
    something
    like
    that,"
    said
    the
    62-year-old
    former
    construction
    worker.
    Brown
    admits
    he"s
    had
    problems
    with
    al-cohol
    and
    has
    smoked
    cocaine.
    But
    he
    said
    he
    still
    wants
    a
    more
    stable
    (稳定的)
    housing
    ar-rangement.
    He
    could
    afford
    it
    just
    with
    the
    money
    he
    earns
    by
    collecting
    cans
    and
    small
    pieces
    of
    metal,
    if
    only
    truly
    low-income
    housing
    were
    available.
    However,
    he
    sees
    no
    hope
    of
    finding
    af-fordable
    housing
    in
    New
    York.
    With
    the
    strong
    economy
    and
    unemploy-ment
    down,
    beautiful
    housing
    is
    being
    built
    to
    meet
    demand.
    A
    US
    report
    shows
    rents
    in
    New
    York
    city
    rose
    more
    than
    27
    per
    cent
    between
    1984
    and
    1999,
    from
    US
    $549
    to
    US
    $700
    a
    month.
    One
    of
    the
    side
    effects
    of
    the
    strong
    economy
    is
    that
    rents
    have
    been
    going
    up.
    The
    majority
    of
    people
    who
    experience
    homelessness
    really
    just
    need
    some
    affordable
    housing
    help.
    But
    few
    housing
    companies
    have
    been
    built
    for
    the
    poor.
    Many
    small
    apartments
    in
    the
    city
    now
    rent
    for
    US
    $1,500
    a
    month
    or
    more.
    Brown,
    the
    homeless
    New
    Yorker,
    said
    he
    has
    a
    daughter
    who
    lives
    in
    the
    city
    but
    he
    rarely
    sees
    her.
    She
    is
    angry
    about
    his
    drinking
    and
    won"t
    allow
    it
    in
    her
    house.
    Smiling,
    he
    said
    he
    also
    has
    seven
    grand-children
    whom
    he"d
    like
    to
    see
    more
    often.
    "All
    I"ve
    got
    to
    do
    is
    clean
    up
    my
    act,"
    he
    said.
    1.
    What
    kind
    of
    life
    does
    George
    Brown
    lead?
    A.
    Homeless
    and
    dangerous.
    B.
    Homeless
    and
    childish.
    C.
    Homeless
    and
    miserable.
    D.
    Homeless
    and
    sleepless.
    2.
    From
    George
    Brown"s
    life
    we
    can
    find
    that
    A.
    old
    Americans
    lead
    a
    hard
    life
    B.
    old
    Americans
    want
    to
    live
    alone
    C.
    American
    cities
    are
    full
    of
    poor
    people
    D.
    bad
    habits
    play
    a
    role
    in
    poor
    people"s
    Life
    3.
    It
    can
    be
    inferred
    from
    this
    passage
    that
    A.
    America
    is
    short
    of
    housing
    companies
    B.
    the
    poor
    can"t
    benefit
    from
    the
    increas-ing
    economy
    C.
    poor
    people
    in
    America
    will
    become
    rich
    D.
    housing
    companies
    will
    build
    more
    houses
    for
    the
    poor
    4.
    If
    this
    passage
    comes
    from
    a
    paper,
    on
    which
    page
    would
    it
    be?
    A.
    Society.
    B.
    Science.
    C.
    Economy.
    D.
    Business.
    5.
    What
    character
    does
    George
    Brown
    have?
    A.
    Selfish.
    B.
    Lazy.
    C.
    Warm-hearted.
    D.
    Open-hearted.
    Key:
    1.
    C
    2.
    D
    3.
    B
    4.
    A
    5.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(023)
    More
    Taiwanese
    Students
    Study
    Here
    TAIBEI—Increasing
    numbers
    of
    Taiwanese
    students
    are
    joining
    the
    island"s
    "China
    rush",
    seeking
    education
    on
    the
    Chinese
    mainland.
    According
    to
    official
    Chinese
    figures,
    the
    number
    of
    Taiwanese
    students
    admitted
    into
    college
    and
    postgraduate
    programmes
    on
    the
    mainland
    totalled
    461
    in
    1996,
    928
    in
    1997
    and
    839
    in
    1998.
    Although
    no
    latest
    official
    numbers
    were
    available,
    Netbig.com
    said
    this
    number
    had
    risen
    between
    30
    to
    50
    per
    cent
    annually
    in
    the
    past
    two
    years
    with
    well
    over
    1,000
    entering
    mainland
    campuses
    last
    year.
    The
    Internet
    site,
    based
    in
    the
    Chinese
    city
    of
    Shenzhen,
    provides
    education
    service
    and
    information
    on
    Chinese
    mainland
    colleges
    and
    universities.
    "Many
    Taiwanese
    believe
    a
    Chinese
    education
    giving
    more
    knowledge
    about
    the
    people
    and
    culture
    in
    the
    mainland
    will
    increase
    their
    chances
    in
    the
    Chinese
    job
    market,"
    Netbig.com
    vice-president
    Ingrid
    Huang
    said.
    "I
    believe
    it
    will
    give
    me
    hands-on
    ex-perience
    in
    the
    business
    field
    in
    the
    Chinese
    mainland
    and
    a
    better
    understanding
    of
    the
    Chinese
    mainland
    people,"
    said
    Lydia
    Chang,
    a
    19-year-old
    majoring
    in
    journalism
    at
    Shih
    Shin
    University.
    Chang
    plans
    to
    go
    on
    to
    get
    a
    master"s
    degree
    in
    business
    administration
    in
    Shanghai,
    which
    she
    says
    offers
    the
    best
    envi-ronment
    for
    such
    studies.
    A
    journalism
    graduate
    student,
    sumamed
    Lin,
    at
    the
    National
    Taiwan
    University
    said
    he
    would
    like
    to
    study
    law
    on
    the
    Chinese
    main-land
    since
    "there
    will
    be
    better
    career
    prospects
    for
    me
    now
    that
    more
    Taiwanese
    companies
    are
    going
    there".
    Some
    business
    executives
    were
    sending
    their
    children
    to
    study
    in
    the
    Chinese
    main-
    land.
    "They
    hope
    the
    children
    could
    build
    up
    connections
    which
    could
    later
    become
    useful
    in
    their
    business
    operations,"
    said
    Yang
    Ching-yao,
    professor
    of
    the
    Chinese
    mainland
    studies.
    A
    Netbig.com
    survey
    showed
    the
    campus-es
    favoured
    by
    Taiwanese
    students
    included
    Beijing,
    Qinghua
    and
    Renmin
    universities
    in
    Bei-jing,
    and
    Jinan
    and
    Zhongshan
    universities
    in
    Guangzhou.
    The
    most
    popular
    studies
    were
    law,
    business
    and
    Chinese
    medicine.
    At
    present,
    Chinese
    Taibei
    doesn"t
    recog-nize
    diplomas
    earned
    in
    the
    Chinese
    mainland
    nor
    help
    with
    any
    inquiries
    about
    studying
    there.
    But
    recognizing
    the
    trend,
    education
    au-thorities
    are
    giving
    a
    final
    form
    to
    a
    policy
    accepting
    certificates
    (iiE45)
    from
    selected
    uni-versities.
    (Words:
    352
    Minutes:
    6)
    1.
    More
    Taiwanese
    students
    study
    on
    the
    Chi-nese
    mainland
    because
    ___.
    A.
    Taiwan
    will
    reunite
    with
    the
    mainland
    sooner
    or
    later
    B.
    the
    fees
    asked
    for
    are
    lower
    than
    those
    of
    Taiwan
    C.
    what
    they
    have
    learned
    on
    the
    mainland
    will
    bring
    them
    a
    bright
    future
    D.
    there
    are
    many
    famous
    universities
    for
    them
    to
    choose
    2.
    Some
    business
    executives
    were
    sending
    their
    children
    to
    study
    in
    the
    Chinese
    mainland
    so
    that
    their
    children
    ___.
    A.
    could
    receive
    better
    education
    B.
    could
    learn
    more
    about
    the
    policy
    there
    C.
    could
    do
    well
    in
    their
    business
    operations
    D.
    could
    make
    more
    friends
    there
    3.
    The
    underlined
    word
    "it"
    refers
    to
    ___.
    A.
    Netbig.com
    B.
    a
    Chinese
    education
    on
    the
    mainland
    C.
    the
    Chinese
    job
    market
    D.
    the
    university
    4.
    The
    main
    idea
    of
    paragraph
    4
    is
    ___.
    A.
    law
    in
    the
    Chinese
    mainland
    is
    pleasant
    to
    learn
    B.
    Taiwanese
    companies
    are
    coming
    to
    the
    Chinese
    mainland
    because
    the
    law
    there
    is
    perfect
    C.
    more
    Taiwanese
    companies
    coming
    to
    the
    mainland
    makes
    it
    better
    to
    learn
    laws
    D.
    the
    mainland
    is
    short
    of
    lawyers
    for
    the
    Taiwanese
    companies
    5.
    The
    author
    wrote
    the
    article
    to
    tell
    us
    __.
    A.
    the
    number
    of
    Taiwanese
    students
    going
    to
    universities
    on
    the
    mainland
    had
    been
    increasing
    year
    after
    year
    B.
    more
    Taiwanese
    students
    are
    studying
    on
    the
    mainland
    C.
    education
    on
    the
    mainland
    is
    more
    at-tractive
    compared
    with
    that
    of
    Taiwan
    D.
    Taiwan
    and
    the
    mainland
    should
    co-operate
    with
    each
    other
    in
    every
    field.
    Key:
    l.C
    2.
    C
    3.
    B
    4.
    C
    5.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(024)
    Parents
    have
    to
    do
    much
    less
    for
    their
    children
    today
    than
    they
    used
    to
    do,
    and
    home
    has
    become
    much
    less
    of
    a
    workshop.
    Clothes
    can
    be
    bought
    ready
    made,
    washing
    can
    go
    to
    the
    laundry,
    food
    can
    be
    bought
    cooked,
    canned
    or
    preserved,
    bread
    is
    baked
    and
    delivered
    by
    the
    baker,
    milk
    arrives
    on
    the
    doorstep,
    meals
    can
    be
    had
    at
    the
    restaurant,
    the
    workers"
    canteen
    (食堂),
    and
    the
    school
    dining-room.
    It
    is
    unusual
    now
    for
    father
    to
    pursue
    (从事)
    his
    trade
    or
    other
    employment
    at
    home,
    and
    his
    children
    rarely,
    if
    ever,
    see
    him
    at
    his
    place
    of
    work.
    Boys
    are
    therefore
    seldom
    trained
    to
    follow
    their
    father"s
    occupation,
    and
    in
    many
    towns
    they
    have
    a
    fairly
    wide
    choice
    of
    employment
    and
    so
    do
    girls.
    The
    young
    wage-earner
    often
    earns
    good
    money,
    and
    soon
    acquires
    a
    feeling
    of
    economic
    indepen-dence.
    In
    textile
    (纺织的)
    areas
    it
    has
    long
    been
    customary
    for
    mothers
    to
    go
    out
    to
    work,
    but
    this
    practice
    has
    become
    so
    widespread
    that
    the
    working
    mother
    is
    now
    a
    not
    unusual
    factor
    in
    a
    child"s
    home
    life,
    the
    number
    of
    married
    women
    in
    employment
    having
    more
    than
    doubled
    in
    the
    last
    twenty-five
    years.
    With.
    mother
    earning
    and
    his
    older
    children
    drawing
    substantial
    wages,
    father
    is
    seldom
    the
    dominant
    (支配的)
    figure
    that
    he
    still
    was
    at
    the
    beginning
    of
    the
    century.
    When
    mother
    works,
    eco-nomic
    advantages
    increase,
    but
    children
    lose
    something
    of
    great
    value
    if
    mother"s
    employment
    prevents
    her
    from
    being
    home
    to
    greet
    them
    when
    they
    return
    from
    school.
    1.
    The
    writer
    compares
    home
    to
    a
    workshop
    because
    _____.
    A.
    fathers
    often
    pursue
    employment
    at
    home
    B.
    parents
    have
    to
    make
    food
    and
    necessity
    themselves
    for
    their
    daily-life
    C.
    many
    families
    produce
    goods
    at
    home
    for
    sale
    D.
    both
    fathers
    and
    mothers
    in
    most
    families
    are
    workers
    2.
    The
    writer
    says
    that
    home
    has
    become
    much
    less
    of
    a
    workshop.
    He
    means
    _____.
    A.
    in
    the
    past,
    home
    was
    more
    like
    a
    workshop
    B.
    home
    is
    much
    more
    of
    a
    workshop
    now
    C.
    home
    workshops
    are
    becoming
    fewer
    and
    fewer
    D.
    home
    was
    less
    like
    a
    workshop
    in
    the
    past
    3.
    The
    chief
    reason
    that
    boys
    are
    seldom
    trained
    to
    follow
    their
    father"s
    occupation
    is
    _____.
    A.
    that
    children
    nowadays
    rarely
    see
    their
    fathers
    at
    their
    place
    of
    work
    B.
    that
    fathers
    do
    not
    like
    to
    pursue
    employment
    at
    home
    any
    more
    C.
    that
    there
    is
    a
    wide
    choice
    of
    employment
    for
    children
    D.
    that
    children
    also
    like
    to
    have
    jobs
    outside
    4.
    What
    makes
    father
    no
    longer
    be
    the
    only
    dominant
    person
    in
    a
    family?
    A.
    With
    their
    earning,
    mother
    and
    children
    do
    not
    need
    to
    depend
    on
    father
    for
    their
    life.
    B.
    There
    are
    many
    choices
    of
    employment
    for
    mothers
    and
    children.
    C.
    Father
    does
    much
    less
    for
    his
    children
    today
    than
    he
    used
    to-
    D.
    The
    number
    of
    married
    women
    in
    employment
    has
    increased
    greatly
    now.
    KEY:
    1-4
    CACA
    高考英语阅读练习(025)
    1.
    Summer
    came
    early
    to
    Middlesbrough
    yesterday,
    as
    temperatures
    shot
    up
    to
    22°C
    (71°F),
    a
    record
    for
    March.
    But
    local
    NFU
    agent
    Jim
    Wilkes
    says
    it
    could
    be
    bad
    news
    for
    farmers.
    "
    The
    crops
    will
    think
    it"s
    summer,"
    he
    told
    our
    reporter,"
    and
    start
    sprouting
    four
    weeks
    before
    time.
    2.
    The
    death
    toll
    of
    the
    Burnside
    train
    crash
    rose
    to
    four
    yesterday
    when
    John
    Phillips,
    32,
    of
    Petersville
    died
    in
    Wallsend
    Hospital.
    Another
    six
    people
    are
    still
    on
    the
    danger
    list.
    Mr
    Phillips,
    an
    electrical
    engineer
    leaves
    a
    wife
    and
    two
    children.
    3.
    China
    and
    the
    United
    States
    reached
    an
    agreement
    on
    the
    protection
    of
    intellectual
    property
    rights
    yesterday,
    after
    strenuous
    marathon
    talks.
    The
    agreement
    is
    good
    news
    for
    all
    parties
    concerned.
    The
    Chinese
    Foreign
    Trade
    Minister
    described
    the
    agreement
    as
    a
    "turning
    point"
    in
    Sino-US
    trade
    relations
    that
    "promises
    further
    progress"
    in
    the
    future.
    The
    agreement
    will
    not
    only
    favourably
    impact
    trade
    relations
    between
    China
    and
    the
    United
    States,
    it
    may
    favourably
    influence
    the
    overall
    relations
    between
    the
    two
    countries.
    1.
    What
    do
    you
    get
    to
    know
    from
    article
    I?
    A.
    It
    is
    as
    cold
    as
    usual
    in
    Middlesbrough,
    and
    the
    farmers
    are
    pleased.
    B.
    It
    is
    hotter
    than
    usual
    in
    Middlesbrough,
    and
    the
    farmers
    are
    pleased.
    C.
    It
    is
    hotter
    than
    usual
    in
    Middlesbrough,
    and
    the
    farmers
    are
    worried.
    D.
    It
    is
    colder
    than
    usual
    in
    Middlesbrough,
    and
    the
    farmers
    are
    worried.
    2.
    How
    many
    people
    have
    died
    in
    the
    train
    crash
    in
    article
    2
    ?
    A.
    Only
    John
    Phillips
    has
    died.
    B.
    Ten
    people
    have
    died
    in
    the
    crash,
    including
    John
    Phillips.
    C.
    Four
    people
    have
    died
    in
    the
    crash,
    including
    John
    Phillips.
    D.
    John
    Phillips,
    his
    wife
    and
    children
    all
    died
    in
    the
    crash.
    3.
    Who
    are
    on
    the
    danger
    list?
    A.
    Petersville
    and
    Wallsend.
    B.
    an
    electrical
    engineer
    and
    John
    Phillips.
    C.
    John
    Phillips"
    wife
    and
    two
    children.
    D.
    another
    six
    people
    who
    were
    on
    the
    train.
    4.
    What
    agreement
    did
    China
    and
    the
    United
    States
    reach
    in
    article
    3?
    A.
    It
    is
    an
    agreement
    on
    a
    marathon
    race.
    B.
    It
    is
    an
    agreement
    on
    trade
    relations.
    C.
    It
    is
    an
    agreement
    on
    overall
    relations.
    D.
    It
    is
    an
    agreement
    on
    intellectual
    property
    rights
    protection.
    5.
    What
    are
    relations
    going
    to
    be
    like
    between
    China
    and
    the
    United
    States?
    A.
    Relations
    between
    China
    and
    the
    United
    States
    are
    going
    to
    be
    sometimes
    worse
    and
    sometimes
    better.
    B.
    Relations
    between
    China
    and
    the
    United
    States
    are
    going
    to
    be
    better.
    C.
    Relations
    between
    China
    and
    the
    United
    States
    are
    going
    to
    be
    worse.
    D.
    Relations
    between
    China
    and
    the
    United
    States
    are
    going
    to
    remain
    the
    same.
    KEY:
    1-5
    CCDDB
    高考英语阅读练习(026)
    I
    never
    realized
    that
    bureaucratism
    (管僚主义)
    hated
    criticism
    so
    much
    until
    I
    myself
    was
    taught
    a
    good
    lesson
    by
    some
    bureaucrats.
    One
    sunny
    morning,
    I
    went
    to
    a
    high-level
    organization
    to
    report
    on
    some
    business.
    Once
    in
    the
    office,
    I
    found
    the
    man
    in
    charge
    busy
    and
    about
    to
    leave.
    “Wait
    a
    minute,
    please.
    You
    are
    the
    comrade
    I
    was
    told
    I
    must
    see.”
    I
    walked
    closer
    to
    the
    chief.
    “Sorry,
    I’m
    busy
    now,”
    the
    reply
    was
    polite
    but
    firm.
    “Would
    you
    please
    spare
    me
    just
    a
    few
    minutes?
    I
    came
    from
    a
    great
    distance
    and
    it’s
    not
    easy
    for
    me
    to
    pay
    another
    visit
    here
    in
    a
    short
    time.”
    “Then
    come
    when
    you
    can,”
    now
    a
    chief’s
    tone
    (语气),
    very
    businesslike.
    “Just
    take
    a
    look
    at
    this
    paper.
    One
    minute
    is
    enough.”
    “But
    I
    don’t
    even
    have
    one
    minute,
    no,
    not
    one
    single
    minute.”
    “Then
    I
    must
    come
    back
    again?”
    “Right,
    you
    must.”
    “You
    are
    practicing
    bureaucratism!”
    I
    lost
    control
    of
    my
    temper
    that
    had
    been
    suppressed
    (压抑)
    since
    I
    entered
    the
    office.
    “Good
    criticism
    (批评),”
    the
    chief
    smiled
    and
    left.
    That
    was
    “bad”
    criticism,
    bad
    for
    me,
    as
    later
    I
    was
    told
    that
    my
    report
    was
    turned
    down.
    I
    was
    beaten
    by
    bureaucratism.
    I
    learned
    the
    lesson:
    bureaucratism
    hates
    criticism.
    It
    seems
    that
    I
    need
    to
    learn
    more
    about
    the
    battle
    against
    that
    ugly
    social
    evil
    (弊病).
    1.
    From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    see
    _____.
    A.
    the
    man
    in
    charge
    had
    a
    good
    temper
    B.
    the
    writer
    was
    a
    bad-tempered
    person
    C.
    the
    man
    in
    charge
    didn’t
    lose
    temper
    D.
    the
    writer
    avoided
    losing
    his
    temper
    2.
    The
    chief
    smiled
    and
    said
    “Good
    criticism”.
    This
    really
    shows
    _____.
    A.
    he
    was
    open
    to
    the
    writer’s
    criticism
    B.
    his
    patience
    and
    politeness
    C.
    his
    false
    politeness
    D.
    he
    didn’t
    mind
    much
    though
    the
    writer
    lost
    temper
    3.
    The
    report
    was
    turned
    down
    only
    because
    _____.
    A.
    the
    writer
    wouldn’t
    come
    back
    again
    B.
    the
    chief
    was
    hurt
    by
    his
    criticism
    C.
    the
    writer
    didn’t
    make
    it
    clear
    to
    him
    D.
    the
    report
    itself
    was
    worthless
    KEY:
    1-3
    C
    C
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(027)
    Brazil
    has
    become
    one
    of
    the
    developing
    world’s
    great
    successes
    at
    reducing
    population
    growth-but
    more
    by
    accident
    than
    design.
    While
    countries
    such
    as
    India
    have
    made
    joint
    efforts
    to
    reduce
    birth
    rates,
    Brazil
    has
    had
    better
    result
    without
    really
    trying,
    says
    George
    Martine
    at
    Harvard.
    Brazil’s
    population
    growth
    rate
    has
    dropped
    from
    2.99%
    a
    year
    between
    1951
    and
    1960
    to
    1.93%
    a
    year
    between
    1981
    and
    1990,
    and
    Brazilian
    women
    now
    have
    only
    2.7
    children
    on
    average.
    Martine
    says
    this
    figure
    may
    have
    fallen
    still
    further
    since
    1990,
    an
    achievement
    that
    makes
    it
    the
    envy
    of
    many
    other
    Third
    World
    countries.
    Martine
    puts
    it
    down
    to,
    among
    other
    things,
    soap
    operas
    (通俗电视连续剧)
    and
    installment
    (分期付款)
    plans
    introduced
    in
    the
    1970s.
    both
    played
    an
    important,
    although
    indirect,
    role
    in
    lowering,
    the
    birth
    rate.
    Brazil
    is
    one
    of
    the
    world’s
    biggest
    producers
    of
    soap
    operas.
    Globo,
    Brazil’s
    most
    popular
    television
    network,
    shows
    three
    hours
    of
    soaps
    six
    nights
    a
    week,
    while
    three
    others
    show
    at
    least
    one
    hour
    a
    night.
    Most
    soaps
    are
    based
    on
    wealthy
    characters
    living
    the
    high
    life
    in
    big
    cities.
    “Although
    they
    have
    never
    really
    tried
    to
    work
    in
    a
    message
    towards
    the
    problems
    of
    reproduction,
    they
    describe
    middle
    and
    upper
    class
    values

    not
    many
    children,
    different
    attitudes
    towards
    sex,
    women
    working,”
    says
    Martine.
    “They
    sent
    this
    image
    to
    all
    parts
    of
    Brazil
    and
    made
    people
    conscious
    of
    other
    patterns
    of
    behavior
    and
    other
    values,
    which
    were
    put
    into
    a
    very
    attractive
    package.”
    Meanwhile,
    the
    installment
    plans
    tried
    to
    encourage
    the
    poor
    to
    become
    consumers
    (消费者).
    “This
    led
    to
    an
    enormous
    change
    in
    consumption
    (消耗、消费)
    patterns
    and
    consumption
    was
    incompatible
    (不相容的)
    with
    unlimited
    reproduction.”
    Says
    Martine.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    Brazil
    has
    cut
    back
    its
    population
    growth
    ____.
    A.
    by
    educating
    its
    citizens
    B.
    by
    careful
    family
    planning
    C.
    by
    developing
    TV
    programmes

       D.
    by
    chance
    2.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    many
    Third
    World
    countries
    ______.
    A.
    haven’t
    attacked
    much
    importance
    to
    birth
    control
    B.
    would
    soon
    join
    Brazil
    in
    controlling
    their
    birth
    rate
    C.
    haven’t
    yet
    found
    an
    effective
    measure
    to
    control
    their
    population
    D.
    neglected
    the
    role
    of
    TV
    plays
    in
    family
    planning
    3.
    Soap
    operas
    have
    helped
    in
    lowering
    Brazil’s
    birth
    rate
    because
    ____.
    A.
    they
    keep
    people
    sitting
    long
    hours
    watching
    TV
    B.
    they
    have
    gradually
    changed
    people’s
    way
    of
    life
    C.
    people
    are
    drawn
    to
    their
    attractive
    package
    D.
    they
    popularize
    birth
    control
    measures
    4.
    What
    is
    Martine’s
    conclusion
    about
    Brazil’s
    population
    growth?
    A.
    The
    increase
    in
    birth
    rate
    will
    increase
    consumption.
    B.
    The
    desire
    for
    consumption
    helps
    to
    reduce
    birth
    rate.
    C.
    Consumption
    patterns
    and
    reproduction
    patterns
    are
    contradictory
    (互相矛盾的)
    D.
    A
    country’s
    production
    is
    limited
    by
    its
    population
    growth.
    KEY:
    1-4
    D
    C
    B
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(028)
    First-time
    dog
    owners
    may
    encounter
    many
    problems
    getting
    to
    know
    and
    train
    their
    pets.
    Sometimes
    a
    puppy,
    or
    even
    an
    older
    dog,
    will
    chew
    their
    fingers
    or
    bite
    them.
    Even
    in
    play,
    this
    can
    really
    hurt.
    Unfortunately,
    many
    pet
    owners
    tolerate
    (容忍)
    this
    in
    a
    young
    dog.
    However,
    when
    the
    dog
    gets
    larger,
    it
    is
    not
    fun
    to
    be
    bitten
    by
    it.
    Training
    a
    dog
    never
    to
    place
    his
    teeth
    on
    human
    skin
    or
    clothing
    is
    an
    important
    lesson.
    From
    now
    on,
    if
    you
    feel
    your
    dog’s
    teeth
    while
    you
    are
    playing
    with
    him,
    say
    “Ouch”
    in
    a
    loud
    voice
    and
    move
    away
    from
    him.
    He
    will
    soon
    learn
    that
    when
    he
    bites,
    you
    will
    not
    play
    with
    him
    any
    more.
    Another
    bad
    habit
    that
    many
    people
    tolerate
    in
    their
    pets
    is
    allowing
    them
    to
    bite
    and
    hold
    on
    to
    clothing.
    Don’t
    let
    your
    dog
    do
    this
    to
    you.
    When
    he
    does
    something
    you
    what
    him
    to
    do,
    praise
    him
    and
    tell
    him
    he’s
    a
    good
    dog.
    You
    can
    also
    give
    him
    a
    treat
    at
    the
    same
    time
    he
    performs
    the
    good
    behavior.
    Eventually
    he
    will
    learn
    which
    kind
    of
    behavior
    is
    acceptable
    and
    which
    is
    not.
    Remember
    that
    reward
    is
    more
    effective
    than
    punishment.
    If
    you
    reward
    your
    dog
    when
    he
    does
    what
    you
    want
    to,
    he
    will
    become
    very
    well
    behaved.
    Also
    remember
    that
    puppies
    need
    to
    chew
    on
    something.
    So
    give
    him
    a
    sock
    with
    a
    knot
    tied
    in
    it
    or
    an
    old
    shoe.
    If
    he
    chews
    the
    wrong
    thing,
    take
    it
    away
    while
    saying
    “No”
    and
    give
    him
    something
    he
    can
    chew.
    If
    dogs
    are
    trained
    well,
    they
    will
    truly
    be
    your
    friends
    for
    a
    lifetime.
    1.
    This
    passage
    is
    written
    to
    _____.
    A.
    teach
    people
    how
    to
    train
    dogs
    B.
    show
    dog
    owners
    how
    to
    behave
    C.
    demonstrate
    good
    dog
    behavior.
    D.
    explain
    why
    a
    dog
    chews
    on
    something
    2.
    According
    to
    this
    passage,
    many
    people
    tend
    to
    _____.
    A.
    think
    puppies
    should
    be
    properly
    trained
    B.
    be
    too
    rough
    towards
    their
    dogs
    C.
    give
    their
    dogs
    treats
    infrequently
    D.
    allow
    their
    dogs
    to
    behave
    badly
    3.
    Based
    on
    this
    passage,
    which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    NOT
    TRUE?
    A.
    Our
    behavior
    influences
    our
    dogs’
    behavior.
    B.
    Dogs
    enjoy
    being
    rewarded
    by
    their
    owners.
    C.
    Say
    nothing
    even
    when
    your
    dog
    has
    bitten
    you.
    D.
    Training
    a
    dog
    takes
    patience
    and
    time.
    4.
    The
    author
    thinks
    that
    a
    better
    way
    to
    train
    a
    dog
    is
    to
    ____.
    A.
    punish
    him
    for
    any
    mistake
    he
    has
    made
    B.
    reinforce
    (加强)
    his
    good
    behavior
    with
    a
    treat
    C.
    tolerate
    him
    no
    matter
    what
    he
    does
    D.
    be
    kind
    to
    him
    and
    don’t
    scold
    him
    5.
    What
    does
    the
    underlined
    word
    “eventually”
    mean
    in
    the
    passage?
    A.
    in
    the
    end

    B.
    frequently

    C.
    first
    of
    all
       D.
    unexpectedly
    KEY:
    1-5
    A
    D
    C
    B
    A
    高考英语阅读练习(029)
    Because
    plants
    cannot
    move
    or
    talk,
    most
    people
    believe
    that
    they
    have
    no
    feelings
    and
    that
    they
    cannot
    receive
    signals
    from
    outside.
    However,
    this
    may
    not
    be
    completely
    true.
    People
    who
    studied
    plants
    have
    found
    out
    that
    plants
    carry
    a
    small
    electrical
    charge
    (电荷).
    It
    is
    possible
    to
    measure
    this
    charge
    with
    a
    small
    piece
    of
    equipment
    called
    “galvanometer”.
    The
    galvanometer
    is
    placed
    on
    a
    leaf
    off
    the
    plant,
    and
    it
    records
    any
    changes
    in
    the
    electrical
    field
    of
    the
    leaf.
    Humans
    have
    a
    similar
    field
    which
    can
    change
    when
    we
    are
    shocked
    or
    frightened.
    A
    man
    called
    Backster
    used
    a
    galvanometer
    for
    his
    studies
    of
    plants
    and
    was
    very
    surprised
    at
    his
    results.
    He
    found
    that
    if
    he
    had
    two
    or
    more
    plants
    in
    a
    room
    and
    he
    began
    to
    destroy
    one
    of
    them

    perhaps
    by
    pulling
    off
    its
    leaves
    or
    by
    pulling
    it
    out
    of
    its
    pot

    then
    the
    galvanometer
    on
    the
    leaves
    of
    the
    other
    plants
    showed
    a
    change
    in
    the
    electrical
    field.
    It
    seemed
    as
    if
    the
    plants
    were
    signalling
    a
    feeling
    of
    shock.
    This
    happened
    not
    only
    when
    Backster
    started
    to
    destroy
    plants,
    but
    also
    when
    he
    destroyed
    other
    living
    things
    such
    as
    insects
    (昆虫).
    Backster
    said
    that
    the
    plants
    also
    knew
    if
    someone
    had
    destroyed
    a
    living
    thing
    some
    distance
    away,
    because
    they
    signalled
    when
    a
    man
    who
    had
    just
    cut
    down
    a
    tree
    entered
    the
    room.
    Another
    scientist,
    named
    Sauvin,
    achieved
    similar
    results
    to
    Backster’s.
    He
    kept
    galvanometers
    fixed
    to
    his
    plants
    all
    the
    time
    and
    checked
    regularly
    to
    see
    what
    the
    plants
    were
    doing.
    If
    he
    was
    out
    of
    the
    office,
    he
    telephoned
    to
    find
    out
    about
    the
    signals
    the
    plants
    were
    sending.
    In
    this
    way,
    he
    found
    that
    the
    plants
    were
    sending
    out
    signals
    at
    the
    exact
    times
    when
    he
    felt
    strong
    pleasure
    or
    pain.
    In
    fact,
    Sauvin
    could
    cause
    a
    change
    in
    the
    electrical
    field
    of
    his
    plants
    over
    a
    distance
    of
    a
    few
    miles
    simply
    by
    thinking
    about
    them.
    1.
    Backster
    was
    surprised
    at
    the
    results
    of
    his
    studies
    because
    _____.
    A.
    he
    destroyed
    an
    insect
    B.
    he
    destroyed
    a
    plant
    by
    pulling
    off
    its
    leaves
    C.
    he
    found
    that
    plants
    could
    express
    feelings
    of
    shock
    D.
    he
    found
    that
    plants
    could
    move
    and
    speak
    after
    all
    2.
    The
    plants
    sent
    out
    signals
    _____.
    A.
    only
    when
    Backster
    Started
    to
    destroy
    plants
    B.
    when
    Backster
    destroyed
    plants
    or
    other
    living
    things
    C.
    only
    when
    he
    destroyed
    things
    such
    as
    insects
    D.
    only
    when
    Backster
    placed
    the
    galvanometer
    on
    the
    leaves
    of
    the
    plants
    3.
    The
    scientist
    called
    Sauvin
    _____.
    A.
    did
    not
    agree
    with
    Backster’s
    ideas
    B.
    did
    not
    get
    the
    same
    sort
    of
    results
    as
    Backster
    did
    C.
    got
    different
    results
    from
    Backster’s
    D.
    found
    out
    some
    of
    the
    same
    things
    that
    Backster
    did
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    The
    electrical
    charge
    plants
    carry
    may
    shock
    or
    frighten
    us.
    B.
    A
    tree
    will
    signal
    when
    it
    has
    been
    cut
    down.
    C.
    Sauvin
    could
    make
    his
    plants
    send
    out
    signals
    some
    distance
    away.
    D.
    Plants
    have
    feelings
    because
    they
    can
    receive
    signals
    without
    moving.
    KEY:
    1-4
    C
    B
    D
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(030)
    With
    the
    support
    of
    our
    readers,
    China
    Today
    has
    become
    successful
    in
    helping
    the
    world
    learn
    about
    China,
    and
    has
    built
    a
    bridge
    of
    friendship
    between
    the
    people
    of
    China
    and
    the
    rest
    of
    the
    world.
    Every
    day
    we
    receive
    many
    letters
    from
    our
    readers
    expressing
    their
    admiration
    for
    China,
    their
    appreciation
    of
    our
    work,
    and
    suggestions
    for
    improving
    the
    quality
    of
    the
    magazine.
    Some
    letters
    are
    published
    in
    “Postbag”
    while
    others
    are
    kept
    for
    reference.
    Many
    readers
    have
    suggested
    contests
    to
    develop
    closer
    contact
    (联系)
    between
    readers
    and
    editors.
    We
    held
    a
    History
    and
    Tourism
    Contest
    in
    1995
    and
    a
    China
    Travel
    Contest
    in
    1996.
    We
    received
    warm
    responses
    to
    both.
    This
    year,
    China
    Today
    is
    holding
    a
    Reading
    Contest.
    Questions,
    chosen
    from
    articles
    published
    this
    year,
    will
    appear
    every
    three
    issues
    (期).
    Entrants
    (参赛者)
    must
    mail
    their
    answers
    before
    January
    31,
    1999.
    Fifty
    entries
    (参加)
    with
    correct
    answers
    to
    all
    the
    questions
    will
    be
    selected
    as
    prize
    winners.
    All
    the
    winners
    will
    be
    named
    in
    the
    April
    1999
    issue.
    Please
    address
    your
    entries
    to:
    Mr.
    Kang
    Jing
    China
    Today
    24
    Baiwanzhuang
    Road
    Beijing,
    China,
    100037
    Fax:
    0086

    010

    68238338
    The
    First
    Three
    Questions:
    1.
    What
    was
    Shanghai’s
    GDP
    in
    1996?
    2.
    How
    much
    of
    the
    Chinese
    population
    still
    lacks
    enough
    food
    and
    clothing?
    3.
    When
    was
    the
    law
    on
    the
    Organization
    of
    the
    Villager
    Committees
    of
    the
    People’s
    Republic
    of
    China
    passed?
    Please
    do
    not
    post
    your
    answers
    right
    away,
    but
    wait
    until
    all
    the
    questions
    have
    been
    published.
    1.
    If
    you
    are
    going
    to
    be
    an
    entrant,
    how
    many
    ways
    can
    you
    send
    your
    entries
    to
    China
    Today?
    A.
    It’s
    not
    clear.
      B.
    Only
    one.
    C.
    No
    less
    than
    two.
     
    D.
    At
    least
    three.
    2.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    we
    can
    draw
    a
    conclusion
    that
    ____.
    A.
    fifty
    people
    who
    answer
    all
    the
    questions
    correctly
    may
    see
    their
    names
    in
    the
    April
    1999
    issue
    B.
    all
    the
    people
    who
    answer
    the
    three
    questions
    correctly
    may
    see
    their
    names
    in
    the
    April
    1999
    issue
    C.
    all
    the
    people
    who
    answer
    all
    the
    questions
    correctly
    must
    win
    prizes
    D.
    all
    the
    people
    who
    answer
    the
    three
    questions
    correctly
    can
    win
    prizes
    3.
    Supposing
    China
    Today
    is
    a
    monthly,
    this
    one
    in
    which
    there
    are
    the
    first
    three
    questions
    can
    be
    ____
    A.
    the
    January
    1995
    issue
       B.
    the
    January
    1999
    issue
    C.
    the
    May
    1997
    issue

     D.
    the
    March
    1998
    issue
    4.
    How
    did
    the
    editors
    deal
    with
    the
    letters
    from
    the
    readers?
    A.
    They
    put
    some
    letters
    in
    a
    big
    postbag
    for
    reference.
    B.
    They
    published
    some
    letters
    in
    the
    column
    “Postbag”
    and
    kept
    the
    rest
    for
    reference.
    C.
    They
    looked
    up
    some
    information
    in
    the
    letters
    and
    then
    published
    a
    “Postbag”.
    D.
    They
    did
    nothing
    but
    keep
    all
    the
    letters
    for
    reference.
    KEY:
    1-4
    C
    A
    D
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(031)
    Every
    weekday
    morning
    I
    take
    the
    8:30
    bus
    to
    go
    to
    my
    job.
    I
    know
    by
    sight
    several
    people
    who
    also
    fide
    that
    bus.
    Some
    of
    the
    girls
    work
    as
    maids.
    They
    get
    off
    at
    each
    stop
    in
    ones,
    twos
    or
    threes.
    But
    at
    one
    corner
    something
    wonderful
    happens.
    Before
    the
    bus
    stops,
    a
    little
    dog
    races
    out
    of
    the
    nearest
    house.
    He
    doesn"t
    look
    at
    two
    of
    the
    maids
    who
    get
    off.
    But
    for
    the
    third
    he
    has
    a
    joyful
    "Hello!".
    From
    head
    to
    tail
    his
    little
    body
    wags
    his
    happiness.
    Everyone
    on
    the
    bus
    watches
    until
    the
    maid
    and
    the
    dog
    go
    into
    the
    house.
    One
    day
    not
    long
    ago
    the
    maid
    wasn"t
    on
    the
    bus.
    I
    wondered
    if
    the
    dog
    would
    be
    waiting
    for
    her.
    Sure
    enough,
    he
    was!
    He
    stood
    at
    the
    back
    door
    of
    the
    bus
    for
    a
    minute.
    I
    could
    see
    his
    joyful
    welcome
    turning
    into
    fearful
    worry.
    Where
    was
    she?
    The
    driver
    closed
    the
    back
    door.
    The
    dog
    raced
    to
    the
    front
    door.
    It,
    too,
    shut
    in
    his
    face.
    Everyone
    on
    the
    bus
    felt
    sad.
    Poor
    little
    pup!
    He
    looked
    so
    unhappy,
    standing
    there!
    The
    driver
    couldn"t
    stand
    it.
    He
    opened
    the
    door
    and
    looked
    down
    at
    the
    dog.
    "She
    didn"t
    come
    today,"
    he
    said,
    in
    a
    loud,
    kind
    voice.
    A
    man
    in
    a
    front
    seat
    leaned
    forward.
    "Maybe
    she
    will
    come
    tomorrow,"
    he
    called.
    The
    dog
    wagged
    his
    tail
    as
    if
    to
    say
    "thank
    you."
    He
    watched
    the
    bus
    as
    we
    pulled
    away.
    Then
    he
    turned
    to
    trot
    home
    ──
    alone.
    The
    next
    day
    everyone
    on
    the
    bus
    was
    happy
    to
    see
    the
    maid
    back
    again.
    Yes,
    the
    dog
    was
    waiting
    for
    her.
    The
    welcome
    he
    gave
    her
    was
    even
    warmer
    and
    more
    delighted
    than
    usual.
    We
    all
    smiled
    at
    one
    another.
    How
    bright
    and
    good
    the
    morning
    suddenly
    seemed
    to
    us!
    1.
    What
    do
    the
    people
    on
    the
    bus
    usually
    see
    at
    one
    corner?
    A.
    A
    little
    dog
    coming
    close
    to
    the
    bus
    when
    it
    stops.
    B.
    Two
    maids
    get
    off
    the
    moment
    the
    bus
    stops.
    C.
    A
    dog
    waiting
    for
    someone.
    D.
    A
    dog
    greets
    a
    maid
    merrily
    and
    follow
    her
    into
    a
    house.
    2.
    One
    day
    the
    maid
    wasn"t
    on
    the
    bus
    and
    the
    dog
    ___.
    A.
    didn"t
    appear
    B.
    stood
    waiting
    at
    the
    bus
    stop
    till
    the
    bus
    left
    C.
    raced
    about
    looking
    for
    the
    maid
    D.
    went
    back
    the
    moment
    he
    found
    the
    maid
    wasn"t
    there
    3.
    All
    this
    made
    people
    on
    the
    bus
    ___.
    A.
    awfully
    sorry
    B.
    greatly
    surprised
    C.
    very
    bored
    D.
    much
    exited
    4.
    The
    next
    day
    people
    on
    the
    bus
    were
    happy,
    for
    ___.
    A.
    the
    maid
    was
    among
    them
    again
    B.
    she
    would
    not
    take
    the
    same
    bus
    C.
    she
    was
    not
    on
    their
    bus
    D.
    she
    was
    waiting
    for
    an
    empty
    bus
    to
    come
    5.
    We
    can
    safely
    say
    this
    story
    is
    about
    ___.
    A.
    a
    magic
    dog
    B.
    a
    young
    maid
    that
    has
    magic
    powers
    C.
    a
    bus
    that
    can
    produce
    magical
    results
    D.
    the
    close
    relationship
    between
    a
    maid
    and
    her
    dog
    KEY:
    1.
    D
    2.
    C
    3.
    A
    4.
    A
    5.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(033)
    Pablo
    Ruiz
    Picasso
    was
    the
    favorite
    child
    of
    his
    family.
    He
    was
    the
    only
    boy
    among
    great
    many
    girl
    cousins.
    That
    was
    enough
    to
    make
    him
    important,
    but
    his
    father
    loved
    him
    especially,
    because
    he
    knew
    his
    son
    was
    going
    to
    be
    an
    artist.
    Pablo
    knew
    the
    word
    for
    himself
    making
    delightful
    little
    drawings
    of
    animals
    and
    people.
    If
    his
    mother
    sent
    him
    out
    to
    play
    in
    the
    square,
    he
    went
    on
    drawing
    in
    the
    dust
    under
    the
    trees.
    One
    of
    his
    favorite
    models
    was
    his
    younger
    sister,
    Lola.
    Don
    Jose
    Ruiz,
    Pablo"s
    father
    was
    director
    of
    the
    museum
    at
    Malaga
    in
    southern
    Spain.
    He
    earned
    only
    a
    small
    salary,
    but
    there
    was
    not
    much
    work
    to
    do
    and
    he
    was
    able
    to
    practice
    his
    hobby,
    which
    was
    painting
    pigeons.
    don
    Jose
    loved
    pigeons
    very
    much.
    He
    painted
    them
    dead
    or
    alive,
    in
    ones
    and
    twos
    and
    in
    dozens.
    Sometimes
    he
    painted
    them
    on
    paper,
    and
    then
    stuck
    them
    on
    to
    canvas
    (画布);
    sometimes
    he
    stuck
    real
    feathers
    on
    to
    his
    pictures.
    He
    knew
    a
    great
    deal
    about
    he
    technique
    of
    painting
    and
    he
    taught
    it
    all
    to
    Pablo.
    Life
    in
    Malaga
    was
    very
    pleasant.
    In
    the
    hot,
    Mediterranean
    (地中海的)
    sunshine
    father
    and
    son
    would
    walk
    down
    to
    the
    beach
    to
    look
    at
    the
    boats
    on
    the
    shore
    or
    wander
    round
    the
    open
    markets.
    They
    made
    a
    strange
    pair.
    Don
    Jose
    was
    tall
    and
    thin,
    with
    red
    hair
    and
    beard,
    sad
    gray
    eyes
    and
    a
    fine
    set
    of
    whiskers
    (髯).
    He
    was
    so
    shy
    and
    correct
    that
    he
    was
    nicknamed
    "the
    Englishman".
    Pablo
    was
    quite
    the
    opposite.
    He
    had
    his
    mother"s
    small,
    strong
    build;
    he
    had
    straight
    black
    hair,
    and
    bright
    black
    eyes
    that
    noticed
    everything
    that
    was
    going
    on
    around
    him.
    1.
    Don
    Jose
    and
    Pablo
    were
    "a
    strange
    pair"
    because
    ___.
    A.
    they
    liked
    to
    wander
    about
    the
    town
    B.
    they
    noticed
    everything
    that
    was
    going
    on
    around
    them
    C.
    they
    both
    painted
    D.
    they
    looked
    so
    different
    from
    each
    other
    2.
    Malaga
    is
    probably
    ___.
    A.
    an
    island
    in
    the
    Mediterranean
    B.
    a
    sea
    port
    in
    Spain
    C.
    an
    inland
    city
    in
    southern
    Spain
    D.
    a
    small
    country
    township
    KEY:
    1.
    D
    2.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(034)
    Kevin
    Rogers
    used
    to
    be
    my
    boss.
    At
    that
    time
    he
    was
    a
    hard-working,
    up-and-coming
    businessman
    and
    a
    real
    slave-driver,
    always
    telling
    us
    we
    had
    to
    sell
    more
    and
    more.
    As
    soon
    as
    I
    could,
    I
    got
    a
    job
    with
    another
    company.
    The
    last
    time
    I
    saw
    Rogers
    was
    more
    than
    ten
    years
    ago.
    At
    least
    that"s
    what
    I
    thought
    until
    last
    Thursday.
    But
    now
    I"m
    not
    so
    sure.
    I
    was
    on
    my
    way
    back
    to
    my
    office
    in
    the
    center
    of
    town.
    There
    is
    a
    small
    park
    nearby
    which
    I
    sometimes
    walk
    through
    after
    lunch.
    It
    was
    almost
    empty,
    except
    for
    an
    unshaven,
    shabby-looking
    man
    on
    one
    of
    the
    benches.
    He
    looked
    about
    fifty
    years
    old
    and
    was
    wearing
    an
    old,
    gray
    overcoat.
    it
    was
    a
    cold,
    wintry
    day,
    and
    he
    was
    shivering.
    "It"s
    been
    a
    long
    time
    since
    I
    had
    a
    meal.
    Can
    you
    help
    me?"
    he
    said.
    There
    was
    something
    about
    his
    voice
    that
    sounded
    familiar.
    I
    gave
    him
    a
    few
    coins
    and
    he
    mumbled
    something
    about
    being
    grateful.
    As
    he
    stumbled
    (蹒跚)
    past
    me,
    I
    looked
    at
    his
    face
    closely.
    I
    wondered
    where
    I
    had
    seen
    him
    before.
    Then
    it
    hit
    me.
    Could
    it
    possibly
    be
    ...?
    No!
    Impossible,
    I
    thought.
    I
    watched
    him
    walking
    away.
    He
    was
    the
    same
    height
    as
    Rogers
    but
    looked
    a
    lot
    thinner
    than
    I
    remembered.
    Then,
    as
    he
    left
    the
    park
    and
    turned
    down
    the
    street,
    I
    caught
    sight
    of
    his
    face
    again,
    this
    time
    from
    his
    side.
    The
    nose
    was
    the
    same
    as
    Rogers"
    too.
    I
    almost
    followed
    him
    but
    something
    made
    me
    stop.
    I
    just
    couldn"t
    be
    sure.
    But
    the
    resemblance
    (相似)
    was
    very
    close.
    Yesterday
    I
    ran
    into
    someone
    who
    had
    worked
    for
    Rogers
    at
    the
    same
    time
    I
    did,
    and
    had
    stayed
    on
    longer.
    I
    started
    telling
    him
    about
    the
    man
    I
    had
    seen
    in
    the
    park.
    "For
    a
    moment
    I
    thought
    it
    was
    our
    old
    boss.
    The
    voice,
    the
    nose,
    and
    even
    the
    face
    were
    just
    like
    Rogers.
    But
    it
    couldn"t
    have
    been.
    Rogers
    must
    be
    the
    director
    of
    a
    big
    company
    by
    now."
    I
    said.
    My
    ex-colleague
    (先前的同事)
    shook
    his
    head.
    "I
    thought
    you
    knew."
    "Knew?
    Knew
    what?
    What
    are
    you
    talking
    about?"
    "Rogers
    was
    sent
    to
    prison
    six
    years
    ago.
    He"s
    probably
    out
    by
    now.
    For
    all
    I
    know
    he"s
    sleeping
    on
    park
    benches
    and
    begging
    money
    from
    passers-by."
    1.
    It
    seems
    that
    when
    Rogers
    was
    the
    writer"s
    boss,
    the
    writer
    ___.
    A.
    rather
    liked
    Rogers
    B.
    admired
    Rogers"
    ability
    to
    sell
    C.
    thought
    Rogers
    was
    lazy
    D.
    was
    not
    very
    happy
    in
    his
    job
    2.
    When
    his
    story
    begins,
    the
    writer
    ___.
    A.
    was
    working
    for
    a
    man
    called
    Rogers
    B.
    was
    on
    his
    way
    to
    work
    in
    the
    morning
    C.
    was
    going
    back
    to
    work
    after
    lunch
    D.
    had
    finished
    work
    and
    was
    going
    home
    3.
    When
    the
    man
    in
    the
    park
    saw
    the
    writer,
    the
    man
    ___.
    A.
    begged
    some
    money
    from
    him
    B.
    tried
    to
    hit
    him
    C.
    offered
    to
    help
    him
    D.
    walked
    away
    from
    him
    KEY:
    1.
    D
    2.
    A
    3.
    A
    高考英语阅读练习(035)
    Lucky
    is
    the
    man
    who
    has
    no
    “skeleton
    in
    his
    closet.”
    When
    a
    man
    has
    done
    something
    in
    his
    life
    that
    he
    is
    ashamed
    of,
    that
    he
    wants
    to
    hide,
    he
    is
    said
    to
    have
    a
    “skeleton
    in
    his
    closet.”
    Some
    people
    may
    have
    more
    than
    one
    skeleton.
    As
    we
    have
    noted
    many
    times,
    it
    is
    hard
    to
    find
    out
    how
    these
    expressions
    begin.
    Sometimes,
    we
    get
    some
    hard
    facts.
    But
    more
    often
    we
    have
    to
    depend
    on
    guesswork.
    And
    that
    is
    true
    of
    this
    phrase,
    which
    came
    from
    England.
    Before
    1932,English
    law
    did
    not
    permit
    a
    doctor
    to
    cut
    open
    a
    dead
    human
    body
    for
    scientific
    examination,
    unless
    it
    was
    the
    corpse(尸体)
    of
    an
    executed(处决)
    criminal.
    But
    when
    it
    became
    legal,
    more
    and
    more
    doctors
    demanded
    skeletons
    for
    a
    more
    scientific
    study
    of
    medicine.
    It
    was
    helping
    in
    the
    advance
    of
    modern
    medicine.
    The
    demand
    had
    become
    so
    strong
    that
    men
    began
    to
    rob
    tombs
    and
    sell
    skeletons
    to
    doctors
    at
    high
    prices.
    We
    are
    told
    that
    a
    doctor
    would
    usually
    buy
    just
    one
    skeleton
    for
    scientific
    study.
    It
    became
    very
    important
    in
    his
    work.
    But
    he
    had
    to
    keep
    it
    hidden
    because
    most
    people
    objected
    to
    keeping
    such
    a
    thing.
    As
    a
    rule,
    the
    doctor
    would
    keep
    his
    skelton
    in
    some
    dark
    corner
    where
    it
    could
    not
    be
    seen,
    or
    hide
    it
    in
    a
    closet.
    After
    a
    time,
    people
    began
    to
    suspect(怀疑)
    every
    doctor
    of
    hiding
    a
    skeleton
    in
    the
    closet.
    From
    this
    suspicion,
    the
    phrase
    “a
    skeleton
    in
    the
    colset”
    took
    on
    a
    broader,
    more
    general
    meaning.
    To
    describe
    anything
    that
    a
    man
    wanted
    to
    keep
    others
    from
    discovering.
    It
    could
    be
    proof
    of
    a
    criminal
    act,
    or
    something
    much
    less
    serious.
    Well,
    that
    is
    one
    theory.
    One
    writer,
    however,
    believes
    that
    the
    phrase
    might
    have
    come
    from
    something
    that
    really
    happened.
    It
    is
    his
    guess
    that
    a
    hidden
    closet
    in
    some
    old
    English
    country
    home
    may
    have
    turned
    up
    a
    real
    skeleton,
    clear
    proof
    of
    some
    old
    family
    shame
    or
    crime.
    Well,
    one
    man"s
    guess
    is
    as
    good
    as
    another.
    But
    this
    sounds
    like
    a
    story
    by
    the
    great
    French
    novelist,
    Balzac.
    Baizac
    tells
    us
    of
    a
    man
    who
    suspected
    his
    wife
    of
    having
    a
    lover.
    The
    husband
    comes
    home
    by
    surprise.
    But
    she
    hears
    him
    and
    quickly
    hides
    her
    lover
    in
    the
    closet
    of
    her
    bedroom.
    He
    enters
    her
    room
    and
    asks
    her
    if
    she
    is
    hiding
    her
    lover.
    He
    says
    he
    will
    not
    open
    the
    door
    to
    the
    closet
    if
    she
    promises
    him
    there
    is
    no
    one
    there;
    He
    will
    believe
    her.
    She
    answers
    firmly
    that
    she
    is
    not
    hiding
    anyone
    in
    the
    closet.
    The
    husband
    then
    begins
    to
    build
    a
    solid
    brick
    wall
    against
    the
    closet.
    His
    wife
    watches,
    knowing
    that
    her
    lover
    will
    never
    come
    out
    alive.
    But
    she
    will
    not
    change
    her
    the
    story
    and
    admit
    her
    guilt.
    1.Which
    of
    the
    following
    situations
    is
    suitable
    for
    using
    the
    phrase
    “Skeleton
    in
    the
    closet”?
    A.
    You
    have
    stolen
    something
    presious
    and
    don"t
    want
    it
    discovered.
    B.
    You
    are
    a
    doctor
    and
    have
    to
    keep
    a
    skeleton
    for
    research
    C.
    If
    you
    have
    cut
    open
    a
    dead
    human
    body
    for
    scientific
    examination
    you
    should
    keep
    the
    skeleton
    secret.
    D.
    You
    have
    done
    a
    crime
    or
    done
    something
    foolish,
    but
    you
    want
    to
    keep
    others
    from
    discovering
    it.
    2.From
    the
    text
    we
    know
    that
    there
    are
    _____
    theories
    about
    how
    the
    phrase
    “skeleton
    in
    the
    closet”
    came
    into
    being.
    A.
    one

     B.
    two

     C.
    three

    D.
    four
    3.In
    Chinese
    the
    world
    “Skeleton”
    means
    ________
    .
    A.尸体

     B.标本

     C.收藏

     D.骷髅
    4.Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    right
    according
    to
    the
    text?
    A.
    In
    the
    19th
    century,
    doctors
    realized
    the
    importance
    of
    anatomy(解剖)
    in
    the
    development
    of
    medicine.
    B.
    The
    doctors
    of
    the
    ancient
    times
    liked
    to
    collect
    as
    many
    skeleton
    as
    possible.
    C.
    The
    thieves
    stole
    skeletons
    from
    tombs
    in
    order
    to
    help
    the
    doctors
    D.
    It
    is
    legal
    that
    corpses
    of
    anybody
    are
    cut
    open
    for
    scientific
    examination
    in
    history.
    5.From
    the
    story
    Balzac
    told
    we
    know
    that
    the
    wife"s
    lover
    must
    have
    become
    _______.
    A.
    a
    corpse

    B.
    a
    phrase

    C.
    a
    skeleton
       D.
    a
    secret
    KEY:
    1.
    D
    2.
    B
    3.
    D
    4.
    A
    5.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(036)
    A
    great
    big
    fellow,
    weighing
    around
    250
    pounds,
    walked
    with
    slow
    heavy
    noisy
    footsteps
    up
    to
    the
    produce
    counter
    in
    the
    supermarket.
    "Give
    me
    half
    a
    head
    of
    cabbage,
    "he
    told
    the
    clerk.
    "All
    we
    have
    are
    whole
    heads,
    "came
    the
    cold
    reply.
    "I
    don"t
    want
    a
    whole
    head,
    "the
    customer
    demanded.
    "Just
    half
    a
    head.
    Are
    you
    going
    to
    sell
    me
    half
    a
    head?
    "
    "Wait
    a
    minute,
    "said
    the
    clerk
    nervously,
    "Let
    me
    ask
    the
    manager."
    She
    went
    back
    where
    the
    manager
    was
    stamping
    prices
    on
    canned
    goods.
    "Hey",she
    said,"there"s
    a
    big,stupid-looking
    buffalo(水牛)out
    front
    who
    wants
    me
    to
    sell
    him
    half
    ahead
    of
    cabbage.
    Shall
    I
    tell
    the
    fool
    to..."She
    said,"wants
    to
    buy
    the
    other
    half。"
    1.What
    is
    the
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage?
    A.A
    Strange
    Customer
    B.
    A
    Friendly
    Customer
    C.
    A
    Nervous
    Customer
    D.
    A
    Polite
    Customer
    2.
    When
    talking
    to
    the
    manager,
    the
    clerk
    was
    referring
    to______.
    A.
    two
    different
    customers
    B.
    the
    same
    customer
    C.
    more
    than
    two
    customers
    D.
    a
    stupid
    -looking
    customer
    and
    a
    gentleman
    3.
    What
    is
    your
    impression(印象)of
    the
    customer?
    A.
    Looking
    like
    an
    animal.
    B.
    Looking
    like
    a
    housewife
    C.
    Looking
    like
    a
    gentleman
    D.
    A
    man
    of
    strong
    build.
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    B
    3.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(037)
    Although
    man
    has
    known
    about
    asbestos
    for
    many
    hundreds
    of
    years,
    it
    was
    not
    until
    160
    years
    ago
    that
    it
    was
    mined
    for
    the
    first
    time
    on
    the
    North
    American
    continent.
    H.
    W.
    Johns,
    owner
    of
    a
    New
    York
    City
    Supply
    Shop
    for
    roofers,
    was
    responsible
    for
    (对……负责)the
    opening
    of
    that
    first
    mine.
    Mr,
    Jonhs
    was
    given
    a
    piece
    of
    asbestos
    which
    had
    been
    found
    in
    Italy.
    He
    experimented
    with
    the
    material
    and
    then
    showed
    its
    surprising
    powers
    to
    his
    customers.
    After
    putting
    on
    a
    pair
    of
    asbestos
    gloves,
    which
    looked
    much
    like
    ordinary
    work
    gloves,
    he
    took
    red-hot
    coals
    from
    the
    fireplace
    and
    played
    with
    them
    in
    his
    hands.
    How
    astonished
    the
    customers
    were
    to
    discover
    that
    he
    was
    not
    burned
    at
    all.
    You
    can
    well
    imaging
    that
    he
    had
    increasing
    business
    in
    asbestos
    roofing
    materials.
    However,
    because
    it
    was
    very
    expensive
    to
    transport(carry)them
    from
    Italy
    to
    the
    United
    States,
    Mr
    Johns
    sent
    out
    a
    young
    scientist
    to
    seek
    a
    source
    nearer
    home.
    This
    young
    man
    found
    great
    vein(岩脉),
    in
    the
    province
    of
    Quebec
    in
    Canada.
    Ever
    since
    1881
    Quebec
    has
    led
    the
    world
    in
    the
    production
    of
    this
    unusual
    mineral,
    which
    is
    made
    up
    of
    magnesium,
    silicon,
    iron,
    and
    oxygen.
    When
    it
    is
    mined,
    the
    asbestos
    is
    heavy,
    just
    as
    you
    would
    expect
    a
    mineral
    to
    be.
    When
    it
    is
    separated,
    a
    strange
    thing
    happens
    ;the
    rock
    breaks
    down
    into
    fine,
    soft,
    soapy
    fibres(纤维).
    Scientists
    do
    not
    know
    why
    the
    rock
    can
    be
    separated
    easily
    into
    threads(线),
    but
    they
    have
    found
    thousands
    of
    uses
    for
    this
    fireproof
    material,
    of
    the
    called
    the
    “cloth
    of
    stone”.
    1.The
    title
    that
    best
    expresses
    the
    main
    idea
    of
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.Asbestos
    mined
    in
    Canada
    B.
    Fireproof
    matter
    C.A
    “Wonder”
    mineral
    D.
    A
    new
    roofing
    material
    2.
    Johns
    proved
    his
    ability
    as
    a
    salesman
    by
    ______.
    A.
    going
    into
    the
    roofing
    business
    B.
    carrying
    asbestos
    from
    Italy
    C.
    sending
    a
    trained
    scientist
    D.
    showing
    the
    use
    of
    asbestos
    gloves
    3.
    Which
    is
    the
    most
    important
    character
    of
    asbestos
    that
    the
    author
    wants
    to
    show
    us?
    A.
    It
    is
    like
    thread
    B.
    It
    feels
    soapy
    C.
    It
    burns
    easily
    D.
    It
    is
    unusually
    heavy
    4.
    The
    author’s
    main
    purpose
    in
    writing
    this
    passage
    was
    to______.
    A.
    show
    the
    need
    for
    more
    scientists
    B.
    compare
    asbestos
    with
    other
    minerals
    C.
    increase
    the
    sales
    of
    asbestos
    D.
    present
    facts
    about
    asbestos
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    D
    3.
    A
    4.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(038)
    The
    news
    report
    that
    night
    was
    about
    a
    famine(饥荒)in
    Ethiopia.
    The
    pictures
    were
    of
    people
    who
    were
    so
    thin
    that
    they
    looked
    like
    beings
    from
    another
    planet.
    The
    camera
    (摄像机)focused
    (聚焦)on
    one
    man
    so
    that
    he
    looked
    directly
    at
    me,
    sitting
    in
    my
    comfortable
    living
    room.
    All
    around
    was
    the
    sound
    of
    death.
    It
    was
    clear
    that
    the
    world
    had
    not
    noticed
    this
    until
    now.
    You
    could
    hear
    the
    sadness
    in
    the
    voice
    of
    the
    reporter.
    Michael
    Buerk.
    At
    the
    end
    of
    the
    report
    he
    was
    silent.
    Paula
    started
    crying,
    then
    rushed
    upstairs
    to
    check
    our
    baby,
    Fifi,
    who
    was
    sleeping
    peacefully.
    I
    kept
    seeing
    the
    news
    pictures
    in
    my
    mind.
    What
    could
    I
    do?
    I
    was
    only
    a
    pop
    singer
    and
    by
    now
    not
    a
    very
    successful
    pop
    singer.
    All
    I
    could
    do
    was
    to
    make
    records
    which
    no
    one
    bought.
    But
    I
    would
    do
    that.
    I
    would
    give
    all
    the
    profits
    (利润)of
    the
    next
    Rats
    (the
    name
    of
    the
    music
    group
    he
    was
    in)record
    to
    Oxfam
    (an
    organization
    in
    Britain
    which
    helps
    poor
    people
    around
    the
    would).
    What
    good
    would
    that
    do?
    It
    would
    only
    be
    a
    little
    money
    but
    it
    was
    more
    than
    I
    could
    give
    just
    from
    my
    bank
    account.
    Maybe
    some
    people
    would
    buy
    it
    because
    the
    profits
    were
    for
    Oxfam.
    And
    I
    would
    be
    protesting
    about
    this
    disaster
    (灾难).
    But
    that
    was
    not
    enough.
    1.
    What
    do
    we
    learn
    about
    the
    writer
    from
    the
    text?
    A.
    He
    felt
    really
    bad
    because
    the
    news
    report
    made
    him
    think
    of
    his
    own
    hard
    life.
    B.
    After
    he
    saw
    a
    news
    report
    on
    TV
    about
    the
    faming
    in
    Ethiopia,
    he
    decided
    he
    had
    to
    do
    something
    about
    the
    problem.
    C.
    His
    ideas
    on
    how
    to
    collect
    money
    for
    the
    people
    in
    Ethiopia
    were
    very
    successful
    D.
    He
    wanted
    to
    do
    more
    than
    just
    be
    a
    famous
    singer.
    2.
    Which
    paragraph
    describes(描写)what
    he
    thought
    about
    after
    the
    report?
    A.
    Paragraph
    1
    B.
    Paragraph
    2
    C.
    Paragraph
    3
    D.
    None.
    3.
    The
    writer
    wished
    that.
    A.
    he
    would
    be
    a
    very
    successful
    pop
    singer
    if
    he
    could
    have
    sold
    all
    his
    records.
    B.
    he
    would
    rather
    give
    all
    his
    money
    from
    his
    bank
    account
    than
    the
    little
    money
    made
    by
    making
    new
    records
    C.
    perhaps
    people
    would
    be
    interested
    in
    his
    records
    because
    they
    knew
    that
    the
    money
    they
    paid
    for
    them
    would
    go
    to
    Oxfam.
    D.
    He
    would
    make
    records
    which
    no
    one
    bought.
    KEY:
    1.
    B
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(039)
    CARDIFF,
    Wales──Poets,
    singers
    and
    musicians
    from
    across
    the
    globe
    gathered
    Wales
    to
    celebrate
    the
    tradition(传统)of
    storytelling.
    “It
    might
    seem
    strange
    that
    people
    still
    want
    to
    listen
    in
    age
    of
    watching
    television,
    but
    this
    is
    an
    unusual
    art
    form
    whose
    time
    has
    cone
    again,
    ”said
    David
    Ambrose,
    director
    of
    Beyond
    the
    Border,
    an
    international
    storytelling
    festival(节)in
    Wales.
    “Some
    of
    the
    tales,
    like
    those
    of
    the
    Inuit
    from
    Canada,
    are
    thousands
    years
    old.
    So
    our
    storytellers
    have
    come
    from
    distant
    lands
    to
    connect
    us
    with
    the
    distance
    of
    time,
    ”he
    said
    early
    this
    month.
    Two
    Inuit
    women,
    both
    in
    their
    mid
    60s,
    are
    among
    the
    few
    remaining
    who
    can
    do
    Kntadjait,
    or
    throat
    singing,
    which
    has
    few
    words
    and
    much
    sound.
    Their
    art
    is
    governed
    by
    the
    cold
    of
    their
    surroundings,
    forcing
    them
    to
    say
    little
    but
    listen
    attentively.
    Ambrose
    started
    the
    festival
    in
    1993,
    after
    several
    years
    of
    working
    with
    those
    reviving(coming
    back
    into
    use
    or
    existence)storytelling
    in
    Wales.
    “It
    came
    out
    of
    a
    group
    of
    people
    who
    wanted
    to
    reconnect
    with
    traditions.
    and
    as
    all
    the
    Welsh
    are
    storytellers,
    it
    was
    in
    good
    hands
    here,
    ”Ambrose
    said.
    1.
    Ambrose
    believes
    that
    the
    art
    of
    storytelling______.
    A.
    will
    be
    more
    popular
    than
    TV
    B.
    will
    be
    popular
    again
    C.
    started
    in
    Wales
    D.
    are
    in
    the
    hands
    of
    some
    old
    people
    2.
    From
    the
    tales
    told
    by
    the
    Inuit,
    people
    can
    learn
    ______.
    A.
    about
    their
    life
    as
    early
    as
    thousands
    of
    years
    ago.
    B.
    Why
    they
    tell
    the
    stories
    in
    a
    throat-singing
    way.
    C.
    How
    cold
    it
    has
    been
    where
    the
    Inuit
    live
    D.
    How
    difficult
    it
    is
    to
    understand
    the
    Inuit
    3.
    According
    to
    the
    writer,
    which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    not
    true?
    A.
    Storytelling
    once
    stopped
    in
    Wales.
    B.
    Storytelling
    has
    a
    long
    history
    in
    Wales.
    C.
    Storytelling
    is
    always
    well
    received
    in
    Wales
    D.
    Storytelling
    did
    not
    come
    back
    until
    1993
    in
    Wales.
    4.
    The
    underlined
    phrase
    in
    good
    hands
    means.
    A.
    controlled
    by
    rich
    people
    B.
    grasped
    by
    good
    storytellers
    C.
    taken
    good
    care
    of
    D.
    protected
    by
    kind
    people
    KEY:
    1.
    B
    2.
    A
    3.
    D
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(040)
    Problem
    Page
    Dear
    Lifeline,
    I
    shall
    be
    getting
    married
    in
    August.My
    mother
    wants
    me
    to
    have
    a
    white
    wedding
    in
    church,
    because
    I
    am
    the
    only
    daughter,
    and
    she
    wants
    me
    to
    have
    the
    kind
    of
    wedding
    that
    she
    had.I
    ,
    on
    the
    other
    hand,
    would
    like
    to
    have
    a
    simple
    wedding
    and
    a
    small
    party
    afterwards
    for
    my
    immediate
    family
    and
    close
    friends.I
    don’t
    want
    my
    parents
    to
    go
    to
    a
    lot
    of
    expense
    just
    for
    one
    day;I’d
    rather
    they
    spent
    the
    money
    on
    things
    that
    my
    husband
    and
    I
    will
    need,
    that
    will
    last
    us
    for
    many
    years.
    Do
    you
    agree
    with
    me
    that
    this
    is
    a
    reasonable
    point
    of
    view?
    Can
    you
    think
    of
    a
    way
    in
    which
    I
    might
    persuade
    my
    parents
    to
    think
    as
    I
    do
    ?
    Yours,
    Money-Conscious
    Dear
    Money-Conscious,
    We
    agree
    that
    your
    point
    of
    view
    is
    reasonable;
    but
    reason
    isn’t
    everything.
    Your
    parents
    clearly
    do
    not
    mind
    ‘going
    to
    a
    lot
    of
    expense’,
    as
    you
    put
    it.
    They
    would
    mind
    more
    if
    you
    prevented
    them
    from
    doing
    so.
    There
    is,
    in
    fact,
    no
    reason
    why
    a
    white
    wedding
    in
    church
    should
    cost
    a
    lot
    of
    money.
    Such
    a
    wedding
    can
    be
    very
    simple,
    yet
    it
    can
    give
    you
    the
    sort
    of
    happy
    memories
    that
    your
    mother
    has
    of
    her
    own
    wedding
    day.
    We
    suggest
    you
    meet
    your
    mother
    halfway.
    Have
    a
    simple
    church
    wedding
    and
    a
    simple
    party
    afterwards.
    If
    it
    means
    so
    much
    to
    your
    mother,
    perhaps
    you
    owe
    it
    to
    her
    to
    do
    as
    she
    wishes.
    We
    are
    sure
    that
    you
    will
    not
    regret
    it.
    Dear
    lifeline,
    I
    have
    known
    my
    girlfriend
    for
    six
    years.
    The
    other
    day,
    I
    asked
    her
    to
    marry
    me,
    certain
    that
    I
    knew
    what
    the
    answer
    would
    be.
    But
    she
    said
    she
    wanted
    to
    think
    about
    it.
    I
    shall
    be
    going
    on
    holiday
    soon,
    and
    I
    hoped
    she
    would
    come
    with
    me;
    but
    now
    she
    says
    she’d
    rather
    go
    on
    holiday
    with
    a
    friend
    of
    hers.
    Am
    I
    losing
    her?
    Yours,
    Deeply
    Worried
    Dear
    Deeply
    Worried,
    Perhaps
    you
    were
    too
    certain
    of
    your
    girlfriend.
    Six
    years
    is
    a
    long
    time.
    Perhaps
    you
    have
    been
    in
    each
    other’s
    packets
    for
    too
    long.
    Give
    yourselves
    a
    holiday
    from
    each
    other,
    and
    then
    ask
    her
    again
    on
    your
    return.
    We
    think
    you
    will
    find
    that
    she
    will
    give
    you
    the
    answer
    that
    you
    want.
    1.It
    is
    the
    purpose
    of
    the
    Problem
    Page
    to
    _____.
    A.write
    letters
    to
    lonely,
    troubled
    people
    B.try
    to
    find
    answers
    to
    readers’
    problems
    C.ask
    readers
    to
    give
    their
    answers
    to
    problems
    D.send
    questions
    to
    readers
    for
    their
    answers
    2.“Money-Conscious”
    would
    like
    her
    parents
    to
    _____.
    A.
    go
    to
    a
    lot
    of
    expense
    to
    buy
    what
    she
    will
    need
    B.
    give
    her
    and
    her
    husband
    the
    money
    instead
    of
    a
    church
    wedding
    C.
    give
    her
    money
    over
    a
    period
    of
    years
    D.
    spend
    the
    money
    on
    useful
    presents
    rather
    than
    on
    the
    wedding
    3.“Lifeline”
    suggests
    a
    simple
    church
    wedding
    because
    ______.
    A.this
    is
    the
    least
    expensive
    kind
    of
    wedding
    B.you
    cannot
    be
    reasonable
    about
    something
    like
    a
    wedding
    C.it
    can
    be
    inexpensive
    yet
    provide
    a
    lifetime’s
    memories
    D.it
    is
    the
    simplest,
    yet
    happiest
    sort
    of
    wedding
    4.“Deeply
    Worried”
    was
    worried
    that
    ______.
    A.
    he
    might
    lose
    his
    girl-friend
    while
    they
    were
    on
    holiday
    together
    B.
    his
    girlfriend
    was
    losing
    interest
    in
    him
    C.
    he
    had
    known
    his
    girl-friend
    for
    too
    long
    D.
    he
    would
    have
    to
    go
    away
    on
    holiday
    by
    himself
    KEY:
    1-4
    BDCB
    高考英语阅读练习(041)
    Don’t
    Let
    Them
    Close
    Your
    School!
    Minutes
    of
    the
    meeting
    held
    in
    Malupit
    Community
    School
    on
    Wednesday
    14th
    March
    at
    8.00p.m.
    Mr.
    I.Pomat
    ,
    a
    Malupit
    shop
    owner,
    called
    the
    meeting
    to
    find
    out
    the
    views
    of
    the
    community
    on
    local
    government
    plans
    to
    close
    the
    Malupit
    Community
    School
    at
    the
    end
    of
    the
    present
    school
    year.
    Mr.
    Pomat
    acted
    as
    chairman
    of
    the
    meeting.
    He
    introduced
    Mr.
    L.Karazin,
    the
    Planning
    Office
    of
    the
    Raval
    Education
    Department.Mr.
    Karazin
    pointed
    out
    that
    there
    were
    now
    only
    fifty-three
    children
    at
    Malupit
    Community
    School.This
    was
    considered
    to
    be
    too
    high
    a
    number
    for
    the
    forming
    of
    two
    classes
    and
    the
    employment
    of
    two
    teachers.Mrs.
    Luvako,
    who
    had
    taught
    at
    the
    school
    for
    the
    past
    twenty-two
    years,
    would
    be
    retiring
    from
    the
    teaching
    service
    in
    July.The
    Planning
    Office
    wished
    to
    take
    this
    opportunity
    to
    close
    the
    school,
    because
    it
    is
    expensive
    to
    run
    ,
    and
    to
    move
    the
    children
    to
    two
    bigger
    schools
    in
    Raval,
    six
    miles
    away.
    Mrs.
    Jarvis,
    the
    mother
    of
    an
    eight-year-old
    boy
    at
    Malupit,
    asked
    what
    would
    happen
    about
    transport
    o
    Ravel.Mr.
    Karazin
    replied
    that
    the
    children
    would
    travel
    by
    bus.This
    would
    be
    provided
    by
    the
    Raval
    Transport
    Department,
    and
    it
    would
    take
    Malupit
    children
    to
    and
    from
    school
    free
    of
    charge.
    Another
    parent,
    Mr.
    W.Riley,
    expressed
    the
    fear
    of
    many
    parents
    that
    closing
    the
    local
    school
    would
    mean
    that
    the
    children
    of
    Malupit
    would
    not
    grow
    up
    with
    the
    same
    sense
    of
    community
    as
    in
    the
    past.They
    would
    feel
    lost
    in
    the
    much
    larger
    schools
    in
    Raval.
    Mr.
    Karazin
    replied
    that
    the
    Raval
    schools
    were
    not
    very
    large,
    and
    that
    ,
    in
    any
    case
    the
    children
    would
    have
    to
    go
    to
    Raval
    later
    on
    for
    education
    at
    high-school
    level.
    The
    chairman
    voiced
    the
    view
    of
    the
    meeting
    when
    he
    said
    hat
    there
    was
    good
    reason
    to
    believe
    that
    there
    would
    soon
    be
    more
    young
    children
    living
    in
    Malupit.It
    would
    be
    foolish,
    he
    said,
    to
    close
    the
    school,
    and
    then
    to
    find
    that
    there
    were
    more
    than
    enough
    local
    children
    to
    form
    two
    classes
    and
    employ
    two
    teachers.
    A
    final
    point
    was
    made
    by
    Mr.
    Colmar,
    a
    retired
    business
    man,
    that
    without
    Malupit
    Community
    School,
    there
    would
    be
    nowhere
    big
    enough
    for
    local
    clubs
    and
    organizations
    to
    hold
    their
    meetings.
    Mr.
    Karazin
    promised
    that
    the
    would
    bring
    these
    points
    to
    the
    attention
    of
    the
    Education
    Department.
    Mr.
    Pomat
    brought
    the
    meeting
    to
    a
    close
    shortly
    after
    9
    o’clock.
    1.The
    Planning
    Office
    had
    decided
    to
    close
    the
    school
    because
    A.there
    were
    too
    many
    children
    in
    each
    class.
    B.the
    schools
    in
    Raval
    were
    bigger
    and
    better.
    C.it
    had
    too
    few
    children
    and
    it
    was
    expensive
    to
    run.
    D.the
    teacher
    was
    retiring
    and
    they
    could
    not
    find
    another.
    2.The
    children
    would
    no
    longer
    go
    to
    Malupit
    Community
    School,
    they
    would
    _____.
    A.
    go
    to
    Raval
    for
    education
    at
    high-school
    level
    B.
    receive
    their
    education
    at
    the
    Ravel
    Education
    Department
    C.
    attend
    a
    new
    local
    school
    to
    be
    built
    by
    the
    Planning
    Office
    D.
    travel
    every
    day
    to
    two
    schools
    in
    Raval,
    six
    miles
    away
    3.Mr.
    Karazin
    said
    that
    the
    children
    would
    _____.
    A.travel
    by
    bus
    to
    Raval,
    without
    cost
    to
    their
    parents
    B.travel
    to
    Raval
    in
    their
    parents’
    cars
    C.be
    taken
    each
    day
    by
    bus
    to
    the
    Raval
    Transport
    Department
    D.go
    by
    bus
    to
    and
    from
    school
    at
    a
    low
    cost
    to
    parents
    4.“The
    Chairman
    voiced
    the
    view
    of
    the
    meeting”
    means
    _____.
    A.
    he
    was
    the
    one
    who
    called
    the
    meeting
    to
    find
    out
    parents’
    views
    B.
    he
    spoke
    most
    at
    the
    meeting
    because
    he
    was
    chairman
    C.
    he
    said
    what
    everyone
    at
    the
    meeting
    had
    asked
    him
    to
    say
    D.
    he
    expressed
    the
    opinion
    held
    by
    everyone
    at
    the
    meeting
    KEY:
    1-4
    CDAD
    高考英语阅读练习(042)
    Cosmo
    Books
    Unlimited
    18,
    Woodman
    road,
    Tow
    Bridges,
    West
    Sussex.
    Cosmo
    Books
    Ltd.,
    Hertford
    Estate,
    Rickmanswarth,
    Middx.
    25th
    February
    Ref.GBS/SW/4CJ
    Dear
    Sir,
    Just
    over
    six
    months
    ago,
    I
    saw
    an
    advertisement
    in
    the
    Morning
    Mail
    for
    a
    set
    of
    the
    complete
    works
    of
    William
    Shakespeare.Your
    company,
    Cosmo
    Books
    Ltd.,
    offered
    this
    set
    (eight
    books
    of
    plays
    and
    two
    books
    of
    poetry)at
    what
    was
    claimed
    to
    be
    a
    ‘remarkable’price:fifteen
    pounds
    and
    fifty
    pence,
    including
    postage
    and
    packing.I
    had
    wanted
    a
    set
    of
    Shakespeare’s
    plays
    and
    poems
    for
    some
    time,
    and
    these
    books
    in
    red
    imitation
    leather,
    looked
    particularly
    attractive;so
    I
    sent
    for
    them.
    Two
    weeks
    later,
    the
    books
    arrived,
    together
    with
    a
    set
    of
    the
    complete
    works
    of
    Charles
    Dickens
    which
    I
    had
    not
    ordered.So
    I
    returned
    the
    Dickens
    books
    to
    you
    ,
    with
    a
    cheque
    for
    fifteen
    pounds
    and
    fifty
    pence
    for
    the
    works
    of
    Shakespeare.Two
    more
    weeks
    passed.Then
    there
    arrived
    on
    my
    door
    step
    a
    second
    set
    of
    the
    works
    of
    Shakespeare,
    the
    same
    set
    of
    novels
    by
    Dickens
    and
    a
    six-book
    set
    of
    the
    plays
    of
    Moliere,
    in
    French.Since
    I
    do
    not
    read
    French,
    these
    were
    of
    no
    use
    to
    me
    at
    all.However,
    I
    could
    not
    afford
    to
    post
    all
    these
    books
    back
    to
    you
    ,
    so
    I
    wrote
    to
    you
    at
    the
    end
    of
    August
    of
    last
    year,
    instructing
    you
    to
    come
    and
    collect
    all
    the
    books
    that
    I
    did
    not
    want,
    and
    asking
    you
    not
    to
    send
    any
    other
    books
    until
    further
    notice.
    You
    did
    not
    reply
    to
    that
    letter.Instead
    you
    sent
    me
    a
    bill
    for
    forty-two
    pounds,
    and
    a
    set
    of
    the
    plays
    of
    Schiller,
    in
    German.Since
    then,
    a
    new
    set
    of
    books
    has
    arrived
    every
    two
    weeks:the
    works
    of
    Goethe,
    the
    poems
    of
    Milton,
    the
    plays
    of
    Strindberg;I
    hardly
    know
    what
    I
    have.The
    books
    are
    still
    all
    in
    their
    boxes,
    in
    the
    garage,
    and
    my
    car
    has
    to
    stand
    in
    the
    rain
    outside.
    I
    have
    no
    room
    for
    any
    more
    books,
    and
    even
    if
    I
    read
    from
    now
    on
    until
    the
    Last
    Judgement,
    I
    should
    not
    finish
    reading
    all
    the
    books
    that
    you
    hove
    sent
    me.
    Please
    send
    no
    more
    books,
    send
    no
    more
    bills,
    send
    no
    more
    angry
    letters
    demanding
    payment.Just
    send
    one
    large
    lorry
    and
    take
    all
    the
    books
    away,
    leaving
    me
    only
    with
    the
    one
    set
    of
    the
    complete
    works
    of
    Shakespeare
    for
    which
    I
    have
    paid.
    Yours
    faithfully,
    Simon
    Walker
    1.The
    advertisement
    that
    Mr.
    Walker
    saw
    in
    the
    Morning
    Mail
    was
    for
    ______.
    A.an
    unlimited
    number
    of
    Cosmo
    Books
    B.a
    set
    of
    10
    books
    of
    the
    works
    of
    Shakespeare
    C.a
    book
    containing
    all
    the
    plays
    and
    poems
    of
    Shakespeare
    D.fifteen
    pounds
    and
    fifty
    pence
    2.Mr.
    Walker
    answered
    the
    advertisement
    because
    ______.
    A.
    he
    wanted
    a
    set
    of
    Shakespeare’s
    works,
    and
    this
    set
    was
    cheap,
    and
    looked
    attractive
    B.
    he
    claimed
    that
    the
    books
    were
    being
    offered
    at
    a
    remarkable
    price
    C.
    he
    had
    ordered
    the
    set
    and
    had
    been
    waiting
    for
    them
    to
    come
    for
    some
    time
    D.
    the
    set
    he
    already
    had
    was
    not
    particularly
    attractive
    3.Another
    two
    weeks
    passed,
    then
    there
    arrived
    ______.
    A.three
    sets
    of
    books
    and
    a
    cheque
    for
    fifteen
    pounds
    and
    fifty
    pence
    B.a
    third
    set
    of
    Shakespeare,
    a
    second
    of
    Dickens
    and
    a
    set
    of
    Moliere
    C.three
    sets
    of
    books
    including
    one
    in
    French
    D.the
    same
    set
    of
    Shakespeare,
    the
    novels
    of
    Moliere
    and
    a
    set
    of
    Dickens
    4.Mr.
    Walker
    did
    mot
    want
    the
    novels
    of
    Dickens
    because
    ______.
    A.
    he
    had
    not
    ordered
    them
    and
    had
    already
    sent
    one
    set
    back
    B.
    he
    only
    wanted
    one
    set
    of
    Dickens,
    not
    two
    sets
    C.
    he
    could
    not
    afford
    to
    buy
    his
    novels
    as
    well
    as
    his
    plays
    D.
    he
    had
    not
    ordered
    them
    and
    could
    not
    read
    French
    KEY:
    1-4
    BACA
    高考英语阅读练习(043)
    The
    Garden
    Hotel
    When
    you
    are
    next
    in
    Nanoko,
    be
    sure
    to
    stay
    at
    the
    Garden
    Hotel.Whether
    you
    come
    on
    business
    or
    on
    holiday,
    you
    will
    find
    everything
    as
    comfortable
    and
    as
    convenient
    as
    you
    would
    expect
    in
    a
    first-class
    international
    hotel.
    Every
    bedroom
    has
    its
    own
    private
    bathroom,
    telephone,
    wall-to-wall
    carpeting
    and
    colourful,
    modern
    materials
    and
    furniture
    in
    the
    local
    style.
    In
    the
    Mitsu
    Restaurant,
    you
    can
    choose
    your
    meals
    from
    as
    wide
    a
    variety
    of
    dishes,
    both
    Eastern
    and
    European,
    as
    you
    will
    find
    anywhere
    in
    the
    country.In
    the
    Beach
    Bar,
    you
    can
    drink
    with
    your
    family
    and
    friends
    in
    air-conditioned
    comfort,
    to
    the
    music
    of
    internationally
    known
    artists.Or
    you
    can
    take
    your
    drink
    outside
    into
    the
    beautiful
    garden
    that
    gives
    the
    hotel
    its
    name,
    or
    to
    the
    tables
    that
    surround
    the
    swimming
    pool.Throughout
    the
    hotel,
    you
    will
    find
    the
    service
    is
    both
    friendly
    and
    efficient.
    By
    day,
    the
    pool
    is
    alive
    with
    the
    holiday
    spirit
    and
    the
    happy
    shouting
    of
    children;and
    by
    right,
    soft
    lights
    and
    music
    make
    it
    the
    perfect
    place
    for
    a
    party,
    or
    simply
    for
    an
    after-dinner
    drink
    and
    conversation.
    The
    Garden
    Hotel
    has
    its
    own
    private
    mini-bus
    service.Give
    us
    a
    ring
    and
    we
    will
    arrange
    to
    collect
    you
    at
    the
    airport
    or
    in
    the
    city
    center.Every
    day
    a
    bus
    leaves
    the
    hotel
    for
    day
    trips
    up
    into
    the
    hills
    to
    see
    the
    ruined
    city
    of
    Morote,
    or
    the
    villages
    and
    temples
    of
    the
    hill
    people;oralong
    the
    coast
    to
    the
    seaside
    towns
    and
    wonderful
    beaches
    of
    Cape
    St
    Germain.
    If
    you
    prefer,
    we
    can
    arrange
    for
    you
    to
    visit
    the
    Wainiri
    Islands
    that
    lie
    just
    off
    the
    coast.Here
    you
    can
    swim
    and
    sun-bathe
    in
    private
    and
    in
    peace;or
    you
    can
    fish
    for
    one
    of
    the
    many
    varieties
    of
    sea-life
    for
    which
    the
    Wainiris
    are
    justly
    famous.
    The
    Garden
    Hotel
    is
    right
    on
    the
    beach,
    only
    five
    minutes
    for
    Nanoko’s
    modern
    shopping
    centre.Here
    you
    will
    find
    all
    that
    money
    can
    buy,
    at
    prices
    you
    can
    afford.
    GARDEN
    HOTEL,
    BEACH
    AVENUE,
    NANOKO,
    P.R.T.TEL:46-0488
    1.The
    Mitsu
    Restaurant
    serves
    food
    A.of
    both
    Eastern
    and
    Western
    varieties.
    B.from
    all
    over
    the
    country,
    in
    air-conditioned
    comfort.
    C.That
    is
    air-conditioned,
    friendly
    and
    efficient.
    D.from
    which
    you
    can
    choose
    meals
    in
    the
    local
    style.
    2.Service
    is
    both
    friendly
    the
    efficient’
    means
    ______.
    A.
    you
    can
    meet
    your
    friends
    there
    in
    air-conditioned
    comfort
    B.
    you
    can
    serve
    yourself,
    your
    family
    and
    friends
    C.
    internationally-known
    artists
    will
    serve
    you
    D.
    you
    get
    what
    you
    want
    quickly
    and
    pleasantly
    3.The
    hotel
    can
    arrange
    for
    the
    visitor
    to
    ______.
    A.
    go
    fishing
    off
    Cape
    St
    Germain,
    near
    Wainiri
    B.
    go
    across
    to
    the
    Wainiri
    Islands
    to
    swim
    or
    fish
    C.
    see
    the
    famous
    sea-life
    off
    the
    coast
    of
    the
    Wainiri
    D.
    go
    by
    bus
    to
    the
    Wainiri
    Island,
    for
    peace
    and
    quiet
    4.You
    will
    find
    the
    Garden
    Hotel
    ______.
    A.close
    to
    shops
    where
    everything
    is
    cheap
    and
    justly
    famous
    B.on
    the
    beach
    where
    you
    will
    find
    all
    that
    money
    can
    buy
    C.on
    the
    beach
    not
    far
    from
    Nanoko’s
    excellent
    shops
    D.just
    off
    the
    coast,
    five
    minutes
    from
    the
    shops
    KEY:
    1-4
    ADBC
    高考英语阅读练习(044)
    Exchange
    of
    Letters
    Dear
    Mr.
    Harringtom,
    I
    saw
    your
    name
    on
    a
    list
    of
    teachers
    of
    French
    who
    wish
    to
    spend
    their
    holidays
    in
    France
    this
    summer.I
    am
    a
    teacher
    of
    English
    in
    Saint-Simon,
    a
    charming
    little
    village
    in
    the
    Loire
    valley,
    just
    south
    of
    Saumur.I
    should
    very
    much
    like
    to
    spend
    some
    time
    in
    England,
    because
    it
    is
    many
    years
    since
    I
    had
    an
    opportunity
    to
    practise
    my
    English.Perhaps
    we
    could
    exchange
    houses
    for
    three
    weeks
    in
    late
    July
    or
    early
    August.
    I
    have
    heard
    a
    lot
    about
    Cumbria
    and
    the
    Lake
    District.I
    have
    been
    keen
    to
    spend
    a
    holiday
    in
    Cumbria
    ever
    since
    I
    first
    saw
    pictures
    of
    the
    foxhunting,
    and
    read
    about
    the
    fine
    hunting
    dogs
    that
    you
    have
    in
    your
    part
    of
    the
    country.I
    am
    very
    interested
    in
    fox-hunting
    and
    I
    take
    my
    dogs
    out
    hunting
    in
    the
    local
    forest
    whenever
    I
    can.
    I
    shall
    tell
    you
    more
    about
    Saint-Simon
    and
    the
    surrounding
    countryside
    when
    and
    if
    you
    express
    interest
    in
    my
    plan.I
    look
    forward
    to
    hearing
    from
    you.
    Yours
    sincerely,
    Jean-Baptiste
    Foucault
    Dear
    Mr.
    Foucault,
    I
    was
    very
    interested
    to
    receive
    your
    letter
    of
    3rd
    March.You
    are
    right
    in
    thinking
    that
    I
    should
    like
    to
    spend
    some
    time
    in
    France.I
    am
    sure
    my
    French
    is
    as
    rusty
    as
    your
    English!
    You
    are
    also
    right
    in
    thinking
    that
    Cumbria
    is
    famous
    for
    its
    foxes
    and
    its
    hunting
    dogs;but
    there
    are
    many
    other
    things
    for
    which
    Cumbria
    is
    famous.Barrow,
    for
    example,
    it
    famous
    for
    its
    ship-building
    industry;
    I
    live
    just
    across
    the
    road
    from
    the
    docks
    where
    ships
    from
    Ireland
    and
    elsewhere
    load
    and
    unload.In
    fact,
    on
    days
    when
    the
    Irish
    Sea
    is
    not
    under
    a
    blanket
    of
    fog,
    I
    can
    see
    the
    hills
    of
    Northern
    Ireland
    in
    one
    direction,
    as
    clearly
    as
    I
    can
    see
    the
    Cumbrian
    hills
    in
    the
    other.
    In
    short,
    I
    am
    afraid
    Barrow
    might
    not
    have
    been
    what
    you
    had
    in
    mind
    when
    you
    thought
    about
    a
    holiday
    in
    Cumbria.Instead
    of
    being
    able
    to
    offer
    you
    the
    dog
    and
    the
    fox,
    I
    can
    only
    offer
    you
    the
    fog
    and
    the
    docks!
    Yours
    sincerely,
    Robert
    Harrington
    1.Mr.
    Foucault
    wishes
    to
    spend
    a
    holiday
    in
    Cumbria
    because
    ______.
    A.
    he
    is
    a
    keen
    fox-hunting
    man
    B.
    there
    are
    many
    forests
    where
    he
    can
    take
    his
    dog
    hunting
    C.
    he
    has
    heard
    a
    lot
    about
    the
    good
    English
    spoken
    in
    Cumbria
    D.
    the
    first
    pictures
    he
    saw
    of
    England
    were
    of
    Cumbria
    and
    the
    Lake
    District
    2.Mr.
    Foucault
    does
    not
    say
    much
    about
    Saint-Simon
    because
    ______.
    A.Mr.
    Harrington
    has
    been
    there
    and
    seen
    it
    for
    himself
    B.it
    is
    such
    a
    small
    village
    there
    is
    very
    little
    to
    say
    about
    it
    C.he
    wants
    to
    know
    first
    whether
    Mr.
    Harrington
    is
    interested
    in
    his
    plan
    D.he
    knows
    Mr.
    Harrington
    will
    not
    be
    very
    interested
    in
    Saint-Simon
    3.Mr.
    Harrington
    agrees
    with
    Mr.
    Foucault
    that
    ______.
    A.Cumbrian
    dogs
    are
    very
    much
    like
    foxes
    B.Cumbria
    has
    a
    reputation
    as
    a
    fox-hunting
    district
    C.Cumbria
    is
    only
    famous
    for
    its
    fox-hunting
    D.Cumbria
    is
    more
    famous
    for
    ship-building
    than
    fox-hunting
    4.Mr.
    Harrington
    thinks
    ______.
    A.Mr.
    Foucault
    will
    want
    to
    change
    his
    mind
    about
    exchanging
    B.Barrow
    will
    be
    just
    what
    Mr.
    Foucault
    had
    in
    mind
    for
    his
    holiday
    C.fog
    and
    docks
    have
    as
    much
    to
    offer
    the
    holiday-makers
    as
    dogs
    and
    foxes
    D.Mr.
    Foucault
    will
    enjoy
    his
    holiday
    in
    Barrow
    because
    of
    the
    fog
    and
    docks
    KEY:
    1-4
    ACBA
    高考英语阅读练习(045)
    Robert
    Spring,
    a
    19th
    century
    forger
    (伪造签字者),
    was
    as
    good
    at
    his
    profession
    that
    he
    was
    able
    to
    make
    his
    living
    for
    15
    years
    by
    selling
    false
    signatures
    of
    famous
    Americans.
    Spring
    was
    born
    in
    England
    in
    1813
    and
    arrived
    in
    Philadelphia
    in
    1858
    to
    open
    a
    bookstore.
    At
    first
    he
    make
    some
    money
    by
    selling
    his
    small
    but
    genuine
    of
    early
    U.S.
    autographs
    (亲笔签字).
    Discovering
    his
    ability
    at
    copying
    handwriting,
    he
    began
    imitating
    signatures
    of
    George
    Washington
    and
    Ban
    Franklin
    and
    writing
    them
    on
    the
    title
    pages
    of
    old
    books.
    To
    make
    less
    the
    chance
    of
    detection
    (发觉),
    he
    sent
    his
    forgeries
    (伪造物)
    to
    England
    and
    Canada
    for
    sale
    and
    circulation
    (销售).
    Forgers
    have
    a
    hard
    time
    selling
    their
    products.
    A
    forger
    can"t
    approach
    a
    respectable
    buyer
    but
    must
    deal
    with
    people
    who
    don"t
    have
    much
    knowledge
    in
    the
    field.
    Forgers
    have
    many
    ways
    to
    make
    their
    work
    look
    real.
    For
    example,
    they
    buy
    old
    books
    to
    use
    the
    aged
    paper
    of
    the
    title
    page,
    and
    they
    can
    treat
    paper
    and
    ink
    with
    chemicals.
    In
    Spring"s
    time,
    right
    after
    the
    Civil
    War,
    Britain
    was
    still
    fond
    of
    the
    Southern
    states,
    so
    Spring
    invented
    a
    respectable
    maiden
    lady
    known
    as
    Miss
    Fanny
    Jackson,
    the
    only
    daughter
    of
    General
    "Stonewall"
    Jackson.
    For
    several
    years
    Miss
    Fanny"s
    economic
    problems
    forced
    her
    to
    sell
    a
    great
    number
    of
    letters
    and
    manuscripts
    belonging
    to
    her
    famous
    father.
    Spring
    had
    to
    work
    very
    hard
    to
    satisfy
    the
    demand.
    All
    this
    activity
    did
    not
    prevent
    Spring
    from
    dying
    in
    poverty,
    leaving
    sharp-eye
    experts
    the
    difficult
    task
    of
    separating
    this
    forgeries
    from
    the
    originals.
    1.
    Why
    did
    Spring
    sell
    his
    autographs
    in
    England
    and
    Canada?
    A.
    There
    was
    a
    greater
    demand
    there
    than
    in
    America.
    B.
    There
    was
    less
    chance
    of
    being
    detected
    there.
    C.
    Britain
    was
    Spring"s
    birthplace.
    D.
    The
    price
    were
    higher
    in
    England
    and
    Canada.
    2.
    After
    the
    Civil
    War,
    there
    was
    a
    great
    demand
    in
    Britain
    for
    ___.
    A.
    Southern
    money
    B.
    signatures
    of
    George
    Washington
    and
    Ben
    Franklin
    C.
    Southern
    manuscripts
    and
    letters
    D.
    Civil
    War
    battle
    plans
    3.
    Robert
    Spring
    spent
    15
    years
    ___.
    A.
    running
    a
    bookstore
    in
    Philadelphia
    B.
    corresponding
    with
    Miss
    Fanny
    Jackson
    C.
    as
    a
    forger
    D.
    as
    a
    respectable
    dealer
    4.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    forgeries
    are
    usually
    sold
    to
    ___.
    A.
    sharp-eyed
    experts
    B.
    persons
    who
    aren"t
    experts
    C.
    book
    dealers
    D.
    owner
    of
    the
    old
    books
    5.
    Who
    was
    Miss
    Fanny
    Jackson?
    A.
    The
    only
    daughter
    of
    General
    "Stonewall"
    Jackson.
    B.
    A
    little-known
    girl
    who
    sold
    her
    father"s
    papers
    to
    Robert
    Spring.
    C.
    Robert
    Spring"s
    daughter.
    D.
    An
    imaginary
    person
    created
    by
    Spring.
    KEY:
    1.
    B
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    4.
    B
    5.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(046)
    In
    1909
    an
    English
    newspaper
    offered
    £1,000
    to
    the
    first
    man
    to
    fly
    across
    the
    English
    Channel
    in
    an
    aeroplane.
    Today,
    modern
    jets
    cross
    it
    in
    minutes.
    But
    at
    that
    time
    it
    still
    seemed
    a
    good
    distance.
    The
    race
    to
    win
    the
    money
    soon
    became
    a
    race
    between
    two
    men.
    Both
    were
    very
    colorful.
    One
    is
    Louis
    Bleriot.
    He
    owed
    a
    factory
    in
    France
    that
    made
    motor
    car
    lamps.
    He
    was
    already
    well
    known
    as
    a
    pilot
    because
    he
    had
    crashed
    several
    times.
    Some
    people
    laughed
    at
    him.
    One
    man
    said,
    "He
    may
    not
    be
    the
    first
    to
    fly
    across
    the
    Channel
    but
    he
    will
    certainly
    be
    the
    first
    to
    die
    in
    a
    crash!"
    But
    Bleriot
    was
    really
    a
    good
    and
    brave
    pilot.
    He
    also
    had
    many
    good
    ideas
    about
    aeroplane
    design.
    The
    other
    man
    was
    Hubert
    Latham.
    He
    was
    half
    French
    and
    half
    English.
    He
    took
    up
    flying
    when
    his
    doctors
    told
    him
    he
    had
    only
    a
    year
    to
    live.
    "Oh,
    well,"
    he
    said,
    "If
    I"m
    going
    to
    die
    soon,
    I
    think
    I
    shall
    have
    a
    dangerous
    and
    interesting
    life
    now."
    Latham
    was
    the
    first
    to
    try
    the
    flight
    across
    the
    Channel.
    Ten
    kilometers
    from
    the
    French
    coast,
    his
    plane
    had
    engine
    trouble.
    It
    crashed
    into
    the
    water
    and
    began
    to
    sink
    under
    the
    water.
    A
    boat
    reached
    Latham
    just
    in
    time.
    He
    was
    sitting
    calmly
    on
    the
    wing
    and
    was
    coolly
    lighting
    a
    cigarette.
    Bleriot
    took
    off
    six
    days
    later.
    He
    flew
    into
    some
    very
    bad
    weather
    and
    very
    low
    cloud.
    He
    somehow
    got
    to
    the
    English
    side
    and
    landed
    in
    a
    farmer"s
    field.
    When
    he
    did
    so,
    a
    customs
    officer
    rushed
    up
    to
    his
    plane.
    Planes
    have
    changed
    since
    then
    but
    customs
    officers
    have
    not.
    "Have
    you
    anything
    to
    declare?"
    the
    officer
    demanded.
    1.
    The
    story
    took
    place
    ___.
    A.
    in
    the
    early
    20th
    century
    B.
    in
    the
    19th
    century
    C.
    right
    after
    World
    War
    I
    D.
    at
    a
    time
    not
    mentioned
    in
    the
    passage
    2.
    "A
    good
    distance"
    here
    means
    ___.
    A.
    a
    fairly
    long
    distance
    B.
    a
    distance
    shorter
    than
    people
    thought
    C.
    an
    easy
    flying
    distance
    D.
    no
    distance
    at
    all
    3.
    Bleriot
    was
    well
    known
    as
    a
    pilot
    because
    ___.
    A.
    he
    was
    exceptionally
    brave
    B.
    he
    was
    quite
    rich
    C.
    he
    had
    many
    good
    ideas
    about
    the
    aeroplane
    design
    D.
    he
    had
    a
    few
    accidents
    4.
    Why
    did
    Hubert
    Latham
    want
    to
    fly
    across
    the
    Channel?
    A.
    He
    thought
    he
    could
    manage
    it
    easily.
    B.
    He
    wanted
    to
    compete
    with
    Louis
    Bleriot.
    C.
    He
    knew
    he
    only
    had
    a
    year
    to
    live.
    D.
    He
    had
    always
    been
    interested
    in
    flying.
    5.
    Why
    did
    the
    customs
    officer
    rush
    to
    the
    plane?
    A.
    To
    see
    if
    everything
    was
    all
    right
    with
    the
    plane.
    B.
    To
    make
    sure
    that
    the
    pilot
    was
    not
    hurt.
    C.
    To
    ask
    why
    the
    plane
    had
    landed
    in
    a
    farmer"s
    field.
    D.
    None
    of
    the
    above.
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    A
    3.
    D
    4.
    C
    5.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(047)
    Frederic
    Chopin
    was
    one
    of
    the
    greatest
    composers
    of
    music
    for
    the
    piano.
    He
    wrote
    over
    two
    hundred
    musical
    compositions.
    They
    are
    still
    popular
    today.
    Frederic
    Chopin
    was
    born
    in
    1810
    in
    Zelazowa-Wola,
    a
    village
    near
    Warsaw,
    Poland.
    His
    father
    had
    moved
    there
    from
    France.
    Chopin
    was
    to
    feel
    strong
    ties
    to
    Poland
    throughout
    his
    life.
    Many
    of
    his
    musical
    works
    have
    the
    spirit
    and
    rhythm
    (节奏)
    of
    Polish
    folk
    dances.
    Chopin
    showed
    musical
    ability
    at
    an
    early
    age.
    He
    was
    giving
    public
    concerts
    and
    writing
    music
    by
    the
    time
    he
    was
    eight
    years
    old.
    The
    young
    Chopin
    often
    performed
    for
    members
    of
    the
    wealthy
    Polish
    nobility.
    He
    was
    a
    guest
    in
    their
    homes
    and
    was
    treated
    well
    by
    them.
    Poland
    was
    a
    kingdom
    under
    Russian
    control.
    In
    1831,
    Chopin
    left
    Poland
    to
    make
    a
    tour
    of
    other
    European
    countries.
    While
    he
    was
    away,
    the
    Poles
    tried
    to
    win
    freedom
    from
    Russia.
    Their
    rebellion
    failed,
    and
    the
    Kingdom
    of
    Poland
    was
    crushed.
    Chopin
    never
    returned
    to
    his
    homeland.
    The
    piano
    fascinated
    Chopin.
    Believing
    that
    it
    could
    produce
    new
    and
    varied
    music,
    he
    challenged
    (对……有异议)
    many
    of
    the
    strict
    rules
    that
    were
    followed
    by
    earlier
    composers.
    Chopin
    created
    lively,
    moving
    music
    by
    using
    new
    musical
    patterns.
    Chopin
    suffered
    from
    poor
    health.
    He
    became
    ill
    with
    tuberculosis
    (肺结核),
    a
    disease
    that
    affected
    his
    lungs.
    It
    caused
    his
    death
    in
    1849,
    when
    he
    was
    only
    thirty-nine
    years
    old.
    1.
    We
    can
    infer
    from
    the
    passage
    that
    ___.
    A.
    Chopin
    died
    in
    a
    foreign
    country
    B.
    the
    Poles
    fought
    against
    the
    Russians
    and
    succeeded
    in
    defeating
    them
    in
    1831
    C.
    Chopin
    followed
    many
    of
    the
    strict
    rules
    as
    some
    earlier
    composers
    D.
    although
    Chopin
    loved
    his
    motherland,
    he
    had
    never
    learned
    anything
    from
    Polish
    folk
    dances
    2.
    The
    passage
    is
    mainly
    about
    ___.
    A.
    Chopin"s
    musical
    works
    and
    the
    piano
    B.
    Poland
    and
    Russia
    C.
    Chopin"s
    life
    D.
    new
    musical
    patterns
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(048)
    It
    was
    not
    yet
    eleven
    o"clock
    when
    a
    boat
    crossed
    the
    river
    with
    a
    single
    passenger
    who
    had
    obtained
    his
    transportations
    at
    that
    unusual
    hour
    by
    promising
    an
    extra
    fare.
    While
    the
    youth
    stood
    on
    the
    landing-place
    searching
    in
    his
    pockets
    for
    money,
    the
    ferryman
    lifted
    a
    lantern,
    by
    the
    aid
    of
    which,
    together
    with
    the
    newly
    risen
    moon,
    he
    took
    a
    very
    accurate
    survey
    (打量)
    of
    the
    stranger"s
    figure.
    He
    was
    a
    young
    man
    of
    barely
    eighteen
    years,
    evidently
    country
    bred,
    and
    now,
    as
    it
    seemed,
    on
    his
    first
    visit
    to
    town.
    He
    was
    wearing
    a
    rough
    gray
    coat,
    which
    was
    in
    good
    shape,
    but
    which
    had
    seen
    many
    winters
    before
    this
    one.
    The
    garments
    under
    his
    coat
    were
    well
    constructed
    of
    leather,
    and
    fitted
    tightly
    to
    a
    pair
    of
    muscular
    (肌肉发达的)
    legs;
    his
    stockings
    of
    blue
    yarn
    (线)
    must
    have
    been
    the
    work
    of
    a
    mother
    or
    sister,
    and
    on
    his
    head
    was
    a
    three-cornered
    hat,
    which
    in
    its
    better
    days
    had
    perhaps
    sheltered
    the
    grayer
    head
    of
    the
    lad"s
    father.
    In
    his
    left
    hand
    was
    a
    walking
    stick,
    and
    his
    equipment
    was
    completed
    by
    a
    leather
    bag
    not
    so
    abundantly
    stocked
    as
    to
    inconvenience
    the
    strong
    shoulders
    on
    which
    it
    hung.
    Brown,
    curly
    hair,
    well-shaped
    features,
    bright,
    cheerful
    eyes
    were
    nature"s
    gifts,
    and
    worth
    all
    that
    art
    could
    have
    done
    for
    his
    adornment
    (装饰).
    The
    youth,
    whose
    name
    was
    Robin,
    paid
    the
    boatman,
    and
    then
    walked
    forward
    into
    the
    town
    with
    a
    light
    step,
    as
    if
    he
    had
    not
    already
    traveled
    more
    than
    thirty
    miles
    that
    day.
    As
    he
    walked,
    he
    surveyed
    his
    surroundings
    as
    eagerly
    as
    if
    he
    were
    entering
    London
    or
    Madrid,
    instead
    of
    the
    little
    metropolis
    (首府)
    of
    a
    New
    England
    colony
    (殖民地).
    1.
    What
    time
    of
    year
    was
    it
    in
    this
    story?
    A.
    spring
    B.
    summer
    C.
    fall
    D.
    winter
    2.
    At
    what
    time
    of
    day
    did
    Robin
    cross
    the
    river?
    A.
    morning
    B.
    midday
    C.
    late
    afternoon
    D.
    night
    3.
    The
    boatman
    was
    willing
    to
    take
    Robin
    across
    the
    river
    because
    ___.
    A.
    he
    wanted
    to
    make
    extra
    money
    B.
    he
    saw
    that
    Robin
    was
    young
    and
    rich
    C.
    he
    was
    going
    to
    row
    across
    the
    river
    anyway
    D.
    he
    felt
    sorry
    for
    him
    because
    Robin
    looked
    poor
    KEY:
    1.
    D
    2.
    D
    3.
    A
    高考英语阅读练习(049)
    Invited
    by
    Mr.
    Ye
    Huixian,
    host
    of
    the
    well-received
    TV
    programme
    "Stars
    Tonight",
    Miss
    Luo
    Lin,
    Miss
    Asia
    of
    1991,
    appeared
    as
    the
    guest
    hostess
    on
    the
    Shanghai
    TV
    screen
    last
    Sunday.
    Born
    in
    Shanghai
    and
    taken
    to
    Hongkong
    when
    she
    was
    only
    six
    years
    old,
    Luo
    Lin
    has
    never
    dreamed
    of
    being
    Miss
    Asia.
    Her
    childhood
    dream
    was
    to
    be
    an
    air-hostess.
    Before
    she
    took
    part
    in
    the
    competition,
    she
    had
    been
    an
    air-hostess
    in
    Cathay
    Airline
    for
    seven
    years.
    However,
    it
    still
    took
    her
    three
    months
    to
    learn
    the
    art
    of
    walking
    on
    the
    stage,
    dancing,
    singing,
    making-up
    and
    other
    proper
    manners,
    designed
    by
    the
    Asia
    TV
    Station.
    "It"s
    really
    a
    hard
    job
    for
    me.
    I
    won"t
    enter
    for
    such
    competition
    any
    more.
    Anyhow,
    I
    am
    quite
    lucky.
    I
    am
    also
    glad
    to
    have
    had
    more
    chance
    to
    work
    for
    the
    social
    welfare
    since
    I
    won
    the
    title.
    This
    time,
    in
    Shanghai,
    I"d
    love
    to
    make
    a
    deep
    impression
    on
    my
    TV
    audience,"
    said
    Luo
    Lin
    with
    a
    sweet
    smile.
    1.
    Luo
    Lin
    became
    Miss
    Asia
    because
    she
    _____.
    A.
    was
    the
    most
    beautiful
    among
    the
    girls
    who
    took
    part
    in
    the
    competition
    B.
    beat
    all
    the
    other
    girls
    in
    the
    competition
    C.
    had
    always
    been
    lucky
    D.
    had
    been
    an
    air
    hostess
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    Luo
    Lin
    is
    a
    native
    of
    Shanghai.
    B.
    Luo
    Lin
    moved
    to
    Hongkong
    with
    her
    parents.
    C.
    Luo
    Lin
    won
    the
    title
    of
    Miss
    Asia
    in
    1991.
    D.
    Asia
    TV
    Station
    helped
    Luo
    Lin
    to
    become
    Miss
    Asia.
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    Luo
    Lin
    has
    hoped
    to
    make
    a
    name
    for
    herself
    since
    childhood.
    B.
    Luo
    Lin
    was
    deeply
    moved
    by
    her
    TV
    audience
    last
    Sunday.
    C.
    Luo
    Lin"s
    childhood
    dream
    has
    never
    been
    realized.
    D.
    Luo
    Lin
    is
    a
    warm-hearted
    girl.
    KEY:
    1.
    B
    2.
    B
    3.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(050)
    Which
    is
    safer
    ──
    staying
    at
    home,
    traveling
    to
    work
    on
    public
    transport,
    or
    working
    at
    the
    office?
    Surprisingly,
    each
    of
    these
    carries
    the
    same
    risk,
    which
    is
    very
    low.
    However,
    what
    about
    flying
    compared
    to
    working
    in
    the
    chemical
    industry?
    Unfortunately,
    the
    former
    is
    65
    times
    riskier
    than
    the
    latter!
    In
    fact
    the
    accident
    rate
    of
    workers
    in
    the
    chemical
    industry
    is
    less
    than
    that
    of
    almost
    any
    of
    human
    activity,
    and
    almost
    as
    safe
    as
    staying
    at
    home.
    The
    trouble
    with
    the
    chemical
    industry
    is
    that
    when
    things
    go
    wrong
    they
    often
    cause
    death
    to
    those
    living
    nearby.
    It
    is
    this
    that
    chemical
    accidents
    so
    newsworthy.
    Fortunately,
    they
    are
    extremely
    rare.
    The
    most
    famous
    ones
    happened
    at
    Texas
    City
    (1947),
    Flixborough
    (1974),
    Seveso
    (1976),
    Pemex
    (1984)
    and
    Bhopal
    (1984).
    Some
    of
    these
    are
    always
    in
    the
    minds
    of
    the
    people
    even
    though
    the
    loss
    of
    life
    was
    small.
    No
    one
    died
    at
    Seveso,
    and
    only
    28
    workers
    at
    Flixborough.
    The
    worst
    accident
    of
    all
    was
    Bhopal,
    where
    up
    to
    3,000
    were
    killed.
    The
    Texas
    City
    explosion
    of
    fertilizer
    killed
    552.
    The
    Pemex
    fire
    at
    a
    storage
    plant
    for
    natural
    gas
    in
    the
    suburbs
    of
    Mexico
    City
    took
    542
    lives,
    just
    a
    month
    before
    the
    unfortunate
    event
    at
    Bhopal.
    Some
    experts
    have
    discussed
    these
    accidents
    and
    used
    each
    accident
    to
    illustrate
    a
    particular
    danger.
    Thus
    the
    Texas
    City
    was
    caused
    by
    tons
    of
    ammonium
    nitrate,
    which
    is
    safe
    unless
    stored
    in
    a
    great
    quantity.
    The
    Flixborough
    fireball
    was
    the
    fault
    of
    management,
    which
    took
    risks
    to
    keep
    production
    going
    during
    essential
    repairs.
    The
    Seveso
    accident
    shows
    what
    happens
    if
    the
    local
    authorities
    lack
    knowledge
    of
    the
    danger
    on
    their
    doorstep.
    When
    the
    poisonous
    gas
    drifted
    over
    the
    town,
    local
    leaders
    were
    incapable
    of
    taking
    effective
    action.
    The
    Pemex
    fire
    was
    made
    worse
    by
    an
    overloaded
    site
    in
    an
    overcrowded
    suburb.
    The
    fire
    set
    off
    a
    chain
    reaction
    of
    exploding
    storage
    tanks.
    Yet,
    by
    a
    miracle,
    the
    two
    largest
    tanks
    did
    not
    explode.
    Had
    these
    caught
    fire,
    then
    3,000
    strong
    rescue
    team
    and
    fire
    fighters
    would
    all
    have
    died.
    1.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    Working
    at
    the
    office
    is
    safer
    than
    staying
    at
    home.
    B.
    Travelling
    to
    work
    on
    public
    transport
    is
    safer
    than
    working
    at
    the
    office.
    C.
    Staying
    at
    home
    is
    safer
    than
    working
    in
    the
    chemical
    industry.
    D.
    Working
    in
    the
    chemical
    industry
    is
    safer
    than
    traveling
    by
    air.
    2.
    From
    the
    passage
    we
    know
    that
    ammonium
    nitrate
    is
    a
    kind
    of
    _____.
    A.
    natural
    gas,
    which
    can
    easily
    catch
    fire
    B.
    fertilizer,
    which
    can"t
    be
    stored
    in
    a
    great
    quantity
    C.
    poisonous
    substance,
    which
    can"t
    be
    used
    in
    overcrowded
    areas
    D.
    fuel,
    which
    is
    stored
    in
    large
    tanks
    3.
    From
    the
    discussion
    among
    some
    experts
    we
    may
    conclude
    that
    _____.
    A.
    to
    avoid
    any
    accident
    we
    should
    not
    repair
    the
    facilities
    in
    chemical
    industry
    B.
    the
    local
    authorities
    should
    not
    be
    concerned
    with
    the
    production
    of
    the
    chemical
    industry
    C.
    all
    these
    accidents
    could
    have
    been
    avoided
    or
    controlled
    if
    effective
    measures
    had
    been
    taken
    D.
    natural
    gas
    stored
    in
    very
    large
    tanks
    is
    always
    safe
    KEY:
    1.
    D
    2.
    B
    3.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(051)
    Scientists
    have
    recently
    discovered
    that
    mothers
    tend
    to
    hold
    their
    baby
    on
    the
    left.
    Of
    255
    right-handed
    mothers,
    83%
    held
    the
    baby
    on
    the
    left.
    And
    out
    of
    32
    left-handed
    women,
    78%
    held
    the
    baby
    o
    the
    left.
    As
    a
    control,
    women
    were
    watched
    coming
    from
    supermarkets
    carrying
    baby-sized
    bags;
    the
    bags
    were
    held
    with
    no
    side
    preference.
    Then,
    dental
    patients
    were
    given
    a
    large
    rubber
    ball
    to
    hold
    during
    treatment.
    The
    majority
    held
    the
    ball
    to
    their
    left
    side,
    even
    when
    it
    interfered
    with
    the
    dentist"s
    activities.
    This
    suggested
    that
    in
    times
    of
    stress
    objects
    are
    held
    against
    the
    left
    side.
    At
    that
    point
    something
    clearly
    contrary
    was
    observed.
    A
    large
    number
    of
    mothers
    who
    brought
    their
    premature
    babies
    to
    a
    clinic
    were
    seen
    to
    hold
    their
    babies
    against
    their
    right
    side.
    At
    that
    point
    something
    clearly
    contrary
    was
    observed.
    A
    large
    number
    of
    mothers
    who
    brought
    their
    premature
    babies
    to
    a
    clinic
    were
    seen
    to
    hold
    their
    babies
    against
    their
    right
    side.
    So,
    115
    mothers
    who
    had
    been
    separated
    from
    their
    babies
    for
    24
    hours
    after
    birth
    were
    observed
    for
    holding
    response.
    The
    experimenters
    presented
    the
    baby
    directly
    to
    midline
    of
    the
    mother"s
    body,
    and
    noted
    how
    she
    held
    the
    baby.
    53%
    placed
    the
    baby
    on
    the
    left
    and
    47%
    on
    the
    right.
    And
    it
    was
    also
    noted
    that
    the
    mothers
    of
    the
    group
    who
    had
    held
    their
    baby
    on
    the
    left
    had
    already
    had
    a
    baby
    from
    which
    they
    had
    not
    been
    separated
    after
    birth.
    Left-handed
    holding
    enables
    the
    baby
    to
    hear
    the
    heartbeat.
    In
    order
    to
    discover
    whether
    hearing
    the
    heart
    has
    a
    beneficial
    effect
    on
    the
    baby,
    the
    sound
    of
    a
    human
    hear-beat
    was
    played
    to
    102
    babies
    in
    a
    New
    York
    nursery
    for
    4
    days.
    A
    control
    group
    of
    babies
    was
    not
    exposed
    to
    hear-beats.
    The
    babies
    in
    the
    heart-beat
    group
    gained
    more
    weight
    and
    cried
    far
    less
    than
    the
    babies
    in
    the
    control
    group.
    1.
    Scientists
    found
    that
    _____.
    A.
    left-handed
    women
    tend
    to
    hold
    their
    babies
    on
    the
    right
    B.
    more
    right-handed
    women
    than
    left-handed
    women
    tend
    to
    hold
    their
    babies
    on
    the
    left
    C.
    only
    right-handed
    women
    tend
    to
    hold
    their
    babies
    on
    the
    correct
    side
    D.
    women
    who
    hold
    their
    babies
    on
    the
    left
    are
    nearly
    all
    right-handed
    2.
    What
    was
    "some
    clearly
    contrary"?
    A.
    Mothers
    of
    premature
    babies
    held
    their
    babies
    son
    the
    correct
    side.
    B.
    Mothers
    of
    premature
    babies
    took
    their
    babies
    to
    a
    clinic.
    C.
    Mothers
    of
    premature
    babies
    were
    seen
    to
    hold
    their
    babies
    differently
    from
    other
    mothers.
    D.
    Mothers
    of
    premature
    babies
    showed
    no
    side
    preference.
    3.
    In
    one
    experiment,
    102
    babies
    spent
    four
    days
    _____.
    A.
    not
    exposed
    to
    heart-beats
    B.
    in
    a
    control
    group
    C.
    exposed
    to
    the
    sound
    of
    heart-beats
    D.
    in
    a
    New
    York
    heart-beat
    group
    4.
    The
    experiments
    proved
    that
    _____.
    A.
    mothers
    have
    an
    instinct
    to
    hold
    their
    babies
    on
    the
    left
    immediately
    after
    birth
    B.
    mothers
    hold
    their
    babies
    on
    the
    left
    at
    times
    of
    stress
    C.
    mothers
    of
    premature
    babies
    do
    not
    have
    the
    instinct
    to
    hold
    their
    babies
    on
    the
    left
    D.
    mothers
    find
    it
    more
    comfortable
    to
    carry
    their
    babies
    on
    the
    left
    because
    the
    heart
    is
    on
    that
    side
    KEY:
    1.
    B
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(052)
    You
    would
    like
    to
    take
    good
    photographs
    of
    real-life
    situations
    but
    you
    have
    few
    ideas
    for
    pictures.
    I
    suggest
    you
    look
    around
    you.
    The
    everyday
    world
    is
    full
    of
    scenes
    being
    played
    by
    an
    ever-changing
    group
    of
    actors.
    You
    probably
    passed
    a
    dozen
    picture
    situations
    without
    noticing
    on
    your
    way
    to
    work
    this
    morning.
    The
    realistic
    approach
    to
    photograph
    has
    been
    perfected
    in
    the
    past
    by
    such
    maters
    as
    Henri
    Cartier-Bresson
    and
    Bill
    Brandt.
    But
    while
    you
    can
    learn
    a
    great
    deal
    from
    looking
    at
    the
    work
    of
    others,
    any
    success
    you
    can
    hope
    to
    achieve
    in
    this
    field
    has
    to
    come
    from
    developing
    an
    individual
    approach.
    The
    main
    requirement
    for
    any
    photographer
    has
    little
    to
    do
    with
    technical
    matters.
    You
    must
    develop
    an
    awareness
    of
    the
    world
    around
    you
    and
    the
    people
    who
    live
    in
    it,
    and
    you
    should
    learn
    to
    notice
    when
    a
    situation
    may
    develop
    to
    a
    point
    where
    you
    will
    be
    able
    to
    take
    a
    good
    picture.
    Those
    who
    have
    reached
    this
    happy
    state
    will
    be
    prepared
    when
    that
    moment
    comes,
    and
    will
    simply
    raise
    their
    camera
    quickly
    and
    shoot.
    Others
    who
    are
    not
    so
    aware
    will
    be
    struggling
    with
    camera
    cases
    and
    lens
    caps.
    Film
    manufactures
    must
    be
    delighted
    at
    the
    thought
    of
    the
    inexperienced
    photographer
    setting
    out
    in
    search
    of
    the
    right
    situation
    and
    the
    right
    moment.
    Many
    miles
    of
    costly
    material
    have
    passed
    through
    thousands
    of
    cameras
    as
    this
    endless
    search
    continues.
    But
    although
    a
    lot
    of
    this
    waste
    must
    be
    put
    down
    to
    inexperience,
    you"ll
    find
    that
    even
    the
    professionals
    have
    to
    use
    a
    lot
    of
    film
    when
    they
    are
    out
    shooting.
    Not
    every
    shot
    is
    going
    to
    be
    a
    winner.
    If
    you
    look
    at
    the
    work
    of
    even
    the
    best
    photographers,
    you"ll
    notice
    dozens
    of
    pictures
    have
    had
    to
    be
    taken
    only
    because
    they
    lead
    up
    to
    the
    successful
    shot
    of
    a
    situation
    that
    the
    photographer
    has
    obviously
    been
    observing
    through
    the
    lens.
    You
    may
    find
    that
    you
    have
    taken
    one
    or
    two
    pictures
    after
    the
    right
    moment
    has
    passed
    as
    well.
    There
    is
    seldom
    more
    than
    one
    shot
    which
    stands
    out.
    There
    is
    just
    one
    point
    where
    it
    all
    comes
    together,
    and
    you
    often
    have
    to
    waste
    film
    to
    catch
    that
    precious
    moment.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    one
    can
    become
    a
    better
    real-life
    photographer
    by
    _____.
    A.
    watching
    other
    photographers
    at
    work
    B.
    learning
    about
    famous
    photographers
    C.
    just
    taking
    a
    great
    many
    photographs
    D.
    developing
    skills
    and
    ideas
    for
    yourself
    2.
    The
    writer
    thinks
    that
    a
    photographer
    is
    required
    to
    _____.
    A.
    go
    out
    and
    search
    for
    unusual
    situations
    B.
    be
    highly
    skilled
    in
    camera
    techniques
    C.
    be
    able
    to
    tell
    when
    a
    good
    situation
    might
    come
    D.
    have
    a
    camera
    which
    is
    easy
    and
    quick
    to
    use
    3.
    Most
    likely,
    to
    catch
    the
    right
    moment,
    one
    must
    _____.
    A.
    take
    pictures
    without
    too
    much
    preparation
    B.
    take
    a
    whole
    series
    of
    similar
    pictures
    C.
    take
    great
    care
    to
    set
    up
    the
    situation
    D.
    take
    one
    picture
    just
    at
    the
    right
    moment
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    The
    waste
    of
    film
    in
    photography
    is
    essential
    to
    the
    production
    of
    good
    pictures.
    B.
    Film
    manufacturers
    usually
    enjoy
    pictures
    by
    inexperienced
    photographers.
    C.
    Only
    amateur
    photographers
    waste
    film
    in
    taking
    pictures.
    D.
    The
    waste
    of
    film,
    which
    is
    the
    result
    of
    poor
    choice
    of
    subject,
    is
    expensive
    and
    unnecessary.
    5.
    The
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    part
    of
    a
    book
    of
    camera
    instruction
    B.
    an
    advertisement
    for
    film
    C.
    a
    history
    of
    photography
    D.
    an
    introduction
    to
    photography
    KEY:
    1.
    D
    2.
    C
    3.
    B
    4.
    A
    5.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(053)
    The
    Komodo
    lizard
    is
    the
    world"s
    largest
    lizard(蜥蜴).
    It
    was
    not
    discovered
    until
    this
    century
    and
    was
    named
    only
    in
    1921.
    It
    was
    formerly
    found
    on
    three
    Indonesian
    islands:
    Komodo,
    Rintja
    and
    Flores.
    By
    the
    1930"s,
    in
    spite
    of
    government
    protection,
    the
    population
    of
    this
    great
    lizard
    had
    been
    reduced
    to
    a
    few
    hundred.
    It
    was,
    however,
    still
    found
    on
    the
    three
    main
    islands
    and
    there
    were
    still
    lizards
    of
    over
    4
    metres
    in
    length.
    By
    1963,
    after
    a
    period
    of
    only
    fifty
    years
    since
    its
    discovery,
    the
    entire
    population
    was
    based
    on
    Komodo.
    It
    is
    now
    unusual
    to
    see
    one
    as
    long
    as
    3
    metres.
    The
    lizard"s
    normal
    food
    consists
    mainly
    of
    wild
    goats
    and
    pigs,
    animals
    which
    the
    islanders
    also
    hunt.
    This,
    of
    course,
    means
    that
    the
    lizard
    often
    gets
    too
    little
    to
    eat.
    It
    will
    certainly
    die
    out
    soon
    its
    hunting
    and
    breeding(繁殖)
    grounds
    are
    protected
    more
    effectively.
    1.
    The
    Indonesian
    government
    _____
    Komodo
    lizards.
    A.
    thought
    it
    necessary
    to
    protect
    B.
    didn"t
    think
    it
    necessary
    to
    protect
    C.
    reduced
    the
    number
    of
    D.
    killed
    a
    few
    hundred
    of
    2.
    By
    1963,
    the
    Komodo
    lizard
    could
    be
    found
    _____.
    A.
    on
    three
    islands
    B.
    only
    on
    Komodo
    Island
    C.
    only
    on
    Rintja
    Island
    D.
    only
    on
    Flores
    Island
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    FALSE?
    A.
    There
    were
    only
    a
    few
    hundred
    Komodo
    lizards
    living
    by
    the
    1930s.
    B.
    Nobody
    knew
    the
    present
    name
    of
    the
    animal
    before
    1921.
    C.
    The
    islanders
    hunt
    too
    many
    Komodo
    lizards.
    D.
    The
    writer
    worries
    about
    the
    Komodo
    lizards. 
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    B
    3.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(054)
    In
    the
    United
    States,
    it
    is
    not
    customary
    to
    telephone
    someone
    very
    early
    in
    the
    morning.
    If
    you
    telephone
    him
    early
    in
    the
    day,
    while
    he
    is
    shaving
    or
    having
    breakfast,
    the
    time
    of
    the
    call
    shows
    that
    the
    matter
    is
    very
    important
    and
    requires
    immediate
    attention.
    The
    same
    meaning
    is
    attached
    to
    telephone
    calls
    made
    after
    11:00
    p.m.
    If
    someone
    receives
    a
    call
    during
    sleeping
    hours,
    he
    assumes(想当然地认为)it"s
    a
    matter
    of
    life
    and
    death.
    The
    time
    chosen
    for
    the
    call
    communicates
    its
    importance.
    In
    social
    life,
    time
    plays
    a
    very
    important
    part.
    In
    the
    U.S.A.
    guests
    tend
    to
    feel
    they
    are
    not
    highly
    regarded
    if
    the
    attention
    to
    a
    dinner
    party
    is
    extended
    only
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    the
    party
    date.
    But
    it
    is
    not
    true
    in
    all
    countries.
    In
    other
    areas
    of
    the
    world,
    it
    may
    be
    considered
    foolish
    to
    make
    an
    appointment
    too
    far
    in
    advance
    because
    plans
    which
    are
    made
    for
    a
    date
    more
    than
    a
    week
    away
    tend
    to
    be
    forgotten.
    The
    meaning
    of
    time
    differs
    in
    different
    parts
    of
    the
    world.
    Thus,
    misunderstandings
    arise(产生)
    between
    people
    from
    cultures
    that
    treat
    time
    differently.
    Promptness
    is
    valued
    highly
    in
    American
    life,
    for
    example.
    If
    people
    are
    not
    prompt,
    they
    may
    be
    regarded
    as
    impolite
    or
    not
    fully
    responsible.
    In
    the
    U.S.
    no
    one
    would
    think
    if
    keeping
    a
    business
    associate
    waiting
    for
    an
    hour.
    It
    would
    be
    too
    impolite.
    A
    person
    who
    is
    5
    minutes
    late
    is
    expected
    to
    make
    a
    short
    apology.
    If
    he
    is
    less
    than
    5
    minutes
    late,
    he
    will
    say
    a
    few
    words
    of
    explanation,
    though
    perhaps
    he
    will
    not
    complete
    the
    sentence.
    1.
    "The
    same
    meaning
    is
    attached
    to
    telephone
    calls
    after
    11:00p.m."
    Here
    "attached"
    means
    _____.
    A.
    taken
    B.
    drawn
    C.
    given
    D.
    shown
    2.
    According
    to
    this
    passage,
    time
    plays
    an
    important
    role
    in
    _____.
    A.
    everyday
    life
    B.
    school
    life
    C.
    communication
    D.
    private
    life
    3.
    The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    The
    Voice
    of
    Time
    B.
    The
    Importance
    of
    Time
    C.
    The
    Importance
    of
    an
    Announcement
    D.
    Time
    and
    Tide
    Wait
    for
    No
    Man
    4.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    the
    author
    of
    the
    article
    may
    agree
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following
    statements?
    A.
    It
    is
    appropriate
    to
    send
    your
    invitation
    cards
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    a
    dinner
    party
    date
    in
    U.S.A..
    B.
    It
    may
    be
    appropriate
    to
    send
    your
    invitation
    cards
    to
    your
    guests
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    a
    dinner
    party
    date
    in
    some
    countries.
    C.
    It
    is
    best
    for
    one
    to
    make
    telephone
    calls
    at
    eight
    because
    it
    costs
    much
    less.
    D.
    If
    one
    is
    less
    than
    5
    minutes
    late,
    he
    has
    to
    make
    a
    short
    apology.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    C
    3.
    A
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(055)
    Trees
    should
    only
    be
    pruned(修剪)
    when
    there
    is
    a
    good
    and
    clear
    reason
    fordoing
    so
    and,
    fortunately,
    the
    number
    of
    such
    reasons
    is
    small.
    Pruning
    involves
    the
    cutting
    away
    of
    overgrown
    and
    unwanted
    branches,
    and
    the
    inexperienced
    gardener
    can
    be
    encouraged
    by
    the
    thought
    that
    more
    damage
    results
    from
    doing
    it
    unnecessarily
    than
    from
    leaving
    the
    tree
    to
    grow
    in
    its
    own
    way.
    First,
    pruning
    may
    be
    done
    to
    make
    sure
    that
    trees
    have
    a
    desired
    shape
    or
    size.
    The
    object
    may
    be
    to
    get
    a
    tree
    of
    the
    right
    height,
    and
    at
    the
    same
    time
    to
    help
    the
    growth
    of
    small
    side
    branches
    which
    will
    thicken
    its
    appearance
    or
    give
    it
    a
    special
    shape.
    Secondly,
    pruning
    may
    be
    done
    to
    make
    the
    tree
    healthier.
    You
    may
    cur
    out
    diseased
    or
    dead
    wood,
    or
    branches
    that
    are
    rubbing
    against
    each
    other
    and
    thus
    causing
    wounds.
    The
    health
    of
    a
    tree
    may
    be
    encouraged
    by
    removing
    the
    branches
    that
    are
    locking
    up
    the
    centre
    and
    so
    preventing
    the
    free
    movement
    of
    air.
    One
    result
    of
    pruning
    is
    that
    an
    open
    would
    is
    left
    on
    the
    tree
    and
    this
    provides
    an
    easy
    entry(进入)for
    diseases,
    but
    it
    is
    a
    wound
    that
    will
    heal.
    Often
    there
    is
    a
    race
    between
    the
    healing
    and
    the
    disease
    as
    to
    whether
    the
    tree
    will
    live
    or
    die,
    or
    that
    there
    is
    a
    period
    when
    the
    tree
    is
    at
    risk.
    It
    should
    be
    the
    aim
    of
    every
    gardener
    to
    reduce
    the
    risk
    as
    far
    as
    possible.
    It
    is
    essential
    to
    make
    the
    area
    which
    has
    been
    pruned
    smooth
    and
    clean,
    for
    healing
    will
    be
    slowed
    down
    by
    roughness.
    You
    should
    allow
    the
    cut
    surface
    to
    dry
    for
    a
    few
    hours
    and
    then
    paint
    it
    with
    one
    of
    the
    substances
    available
    from
    garden
    shops
    produced
    especially
    for
    this
    purpose.
    Pruning
    is
    usually
    done
    in
    winter,
    for
    then
    you
    can
    see
    the
    shape
    of
    the
    tree
    clearly
    without
    the
    interference(干扰)
    from
    the
    leaves
    and
    it
    is,
    too,
    very
    unlikely
    that
    the
    cuts
    you
    make
    will
    bleed.
    If
    this
    does
    happen,
    it
    is,
    of
    course,
    impossible
    to
    paint
    them
    properly.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    article,_____.
    A.
    damage
    is
    done
    to
    a
    tree
    if
    it
    is
    left
    to
    grow
    in
    its
    own
    way
    B.
    pruning
    is
    necessary
    when
    a
    tree
    has
    grown
    into
    a
    definite
    shape
    or
    size
    C.
    diseased
    or
    dead
    branches
    should
    be
    cut
    away
    if
    they
    are
    found
    to
    rub
    against
    each
    other
    D.
    growing
    side
    branches
    often
    prevent
    air
    from
    moving
    freely
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    usually
    causes
    a
    tree
    to
    grow
    unhealthy?
    A.
    Giving
    a
    tree
    a
    special
    shape
    and
    a
    definite
    height
    B.
    Removing
    small
    side
    branches
    and
    making
    a
    tree
    look
    less
    thick
    C.
    Allowing
    too
    many
    branches
    to
    grow
    in
    the
    middle
    D.
    Having
    a
    tree
    surrounded
    by
    many
    other
    trees
    3.
    The
    writer
    suggests
    that
    pruning
    should
    be
    done
    in
    winter
    because
    _____.
    A.
    the
    cut
    surface
    gets
    dry
    more
    quickly
    B.
    open
    wounds
    on
    the
    tree
    run
    the
    less
    risk
    of
    getting
    diseased
    C.
    a
    gardener
    can
    do
    pruning
    more
    easily
    D.
    wounds
    painted
    with
    a
    special
    substance
    heal
    quickly
    4.
    The
    writer"s
    purpose
    when
    writing
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    to
    describe
    how
    pruning
    a
    tree
    is
    done
    B.
    to
    discuss
    different
    ways
    of
    pruning
    trees
    C.
    to
    give
    practical
    instructions
    for
    pruning
    a
    tree
    D.
    to
    explain
    how
    a
    tree
    wound
    gets
    diseased
    and
    heals
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(056)
    They
    think
    they"re
    lucky
    that
    they"re
    living
    and
    it"s
    Christmas
    again.
    They
    can"t
    see
    that
    we
    live
    on
    a
    dirty
    street
    in
    a
    shabby
    house
    among
    people
    who
    aren"t
    much
    good.
    Johnny
    and
    the
    children
    can"t
    see
    how
    pitiful
    it
    is
    that
    our
    neighbors
    have
    to
    make
    happiness
    out
    of
    this
    filth
    and
    dirt.
    My
    children
    must
    get
    out
    of
    this.
    But
    how?
    The
    money
    that
    we"ve
    saved
    isn"t
    nearly
    enough.
    The
    McGaritys
    have
    money,
    but
    they
    are
    show-offs
    with
    it.
    The
    McGarity
    girl
    just
    yesterday
    stood
    out
    there
    in
    the
    street
    eating
    from
    a
    bag
    of
    cookies
    while
    a
    ring
    of
    hungry
    children
    watched
    her.
    I
    saw
    those
    children
    looking
    at
    her
    and
    crying
    in
    their
    hearts,
    and
    when
    she
    couldn"t
    eat
    any
    more,
    she
    shrew
    the
    rest
    down
    the
    sewer(阴沟).
    Miss
    Jackson
    who
    teaches
    at
    the
    Settlement
    House
    isn"t
    rich,
    but
    she
    knows
    things.
    She
    understands
    people.
    Her
    eyes
    look
    straight
    into
    yours
    when
    she
    talks
    with
    you.
    Everybody
    else
    here
    looks
    away
    because
    they"re
    ashamed(羞愧)of
    their
    lives.
    I"d
    like
    to
    see
    the
    children
    be
    like
    Miss
    Jackson
    when
    they
    grew
    up.
    1.
    The
    writer
    suggests
    that
    her
    family
    _____.
    A.
    is
    extremely
    rich
    B.
    is
    an
    unhappy
    one
    C.
    are
    accustomed
    to
    their
    life
    D.
    long
    for
    a
    change
    in
    their
    life
    2.
    The
    McGarity
    girl
    is
    characterized
    as
    _____.
    A.
    selfish
    and
    cruel
    B.
    friendly
    and
    kind
    C.
    beautiful
    and
    proud
    D.
    rich
    and
    nice
    3.
    The
    writer
    thinks
    Miss
    Jackson
    is
    _____.
    A.
    poor
    but
    brave
    B.
    friendly
    and
    talkative
    C.
    a
    teacher
    liked
    by
    all
    her
    pupils
    D.
    an
    example
    her
    children
    should
    follow
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    The
    writer"s
    family
    is
    the
    poorest
    one
    on
    that
    street.
    B.
    Watching
    the
    rich
    girl
    eating
    cookies,
    those
    hungry
    children
    cried.
    C.
    The
    writer
    wants
    to
    move
    out
    of
    that
    district.
    D.
    The
    writer
    hopes
    that
    her
    children
    will
    become
    teachers.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    A
    3.
    D
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(057)
    The
    Komodo
    lizard
    is
    the
    world"s
    largest
    lizard(蜥蜴).
    It
    was
    not
    discovered
    until
    this
    century
    and
    was
    named
    only
    in
    1921.
    It
    was
    formerly
    found
    on
    three
    Indonesian
    islands:
    Komodo,
    Rintja
    and
    Flores.
    By
    the
    1930"s,
    in
    spite
    of
    government
    protection,
    the
    population
    of
    this
    great
    lizard
    had
    been
    reduced
    to
    a
    few
    hundred.
    It
    was,
    however,
    still
    found
    on
    the
    three
    main
    islands
    and
    there
    were
    still
    lizards
    of
    over
    4
    metres
    in
    length.
    By
    1963,
    after
    a
    period
    of
    only
    fifty
    years
    since
    its
    discovery,
    the
    entire
    population
    was
    based
    on
    Komodo.
    It
    is
    now
    unusual
    to
    see
    one
    as
    long
    as
    3
    metres.
    The
    lizard"s
    normal
    food
    consists
    mainly
    of
    wild
    goats
    and
    pigs,
    animals
    which
    the
    islanders
    also
    hunt.
    This,
    of
    course,
    means
    that
    the
    lizard
    often
    gets
    too
    little
    to
    eat.
    It
    will
    certainly
    die
    out
    soon
    its
    hunting
    and
    breeding(繁殖)
    grounds
    are
    protected
    more
    effectively.
    1.
    The
    Indonesian
    government
    _____
    Komodo
    lizards.
    A.
    thought
    it
    necessary
    to
    protect
    B.
    didn"t
    think
    it
    necessary
    to
    protect
    C.
    reduced
    the
    number
    of
    D.
    killed
    a
    few
    hundred
    of
    2.
    By
    1963,
    the
    Komodo
    lizard
    could
    be
    found
    _____.
    A.
    on
    three
    islands
    B.
    only
    on
    Komodo
    Island
    C.
    only
    on
    Rintja
    Island
    D.
    only
    on
    Flores
    Island
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    FALSE?
    A.
    There
    were
    only
    a
    few
    hundred
    Komodo
    lizards
    living
    by
    the
    1930s.
    B.
    Nobody
    knew
    the
    present
    name
    of
    the
    animal
    before
    1921.
    C.
    The
    islanders
    hunt
    too
    many
    Komodo
    lizards.
    D.
    The
    writer
    worries
    about
    the
    Komodo
    lizards. 
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    B
    3.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(058)
    In
    the
    United
    States,
    it
    is
    not
    customary
    to
    telephone
    someone
    very
    early
    in
    the
    morning.
    If
    you
    telephone
    him
    early
    in
    the
    day,
    while
    he
    is
    shaving
    or
    having
    breakfast,
    the
    time
    of
    the
    call
    shows
    that
    the
    matter
    is
    very
    important
    and
    requires
    immediate
    attention.
    The
    same
    meaning
    is
    attached
    to
    telephone
    calls
    made
    after
    11:00
    p.m.
    If
    someone
    receives
    a
    call
    during
    sleeping
    hours,
    he
    assumes(想当然地认为)it"s
    a
    matter
    of
    life
    and
    death.
    The
    time
    chosen
    for
    the
    call
    communicates
    its
    importance.
    In
    social
    life,
    time
    plays
    a
    very
    important
    part.
    In
    the
    U.S.A.
    guests
    tend
    to
    feel
    they
    are
    not
    highly
    regarded
    if
    the
    attention
    to
    a
    dinner
    party
    is
    extended
    only
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    the
    party
    date.
    But
    it
    is
    not
    true
    in
    all
    countries.
    In
    other
    areas
    of
    the
    world,
    it
    may
    be
    considered
    foolish
    to
    make
    an
    appointment
    too
    far
    in
    advance
    because
    plans
    which
    are
    made
    for
    a
    date
    more
    than
    a
    week
    away
    tend
    to
    be
    forgotten.
    The
    meaning
    of
    time
    differs
    in
    different
    parts
    of
    the
    world.
    Thus,
    misunderstandings
    arise(产生)
    between
    people
    from
    cultures
    that
    treat
    time
    differently.
    Promptness
    is
    valued
    highly
    in
    American
    life,
    for
    example.
    If
    people
    are
    not
    prompt,
    they
    may
    be
    regarded
    as
    impolite
    or
    not
    fully
    responsible.
    In
    the
    U.S.
    no
    one
    would
    think
    if
    keeping
    a
    business
    associate
    waiting
    for
    an
    hour.
    It
    would
    be
    too
    impolite.
    A
    person
    who
    is
    5
    minutes
    late
    is
    expected
    to
    make
    a
    short
    apology.
    If
    he
    is
    less
    than
    5
    minutes
    late,
    he
    will
    say
    a
    few
    words
    of
    explanation,
    though
    perhaps
    he
    will
    not
    complete
    the
    sentence.
    1.
    "The
    same
    meaning
    is
    attached
    to
    telephone
    calls
    after
    11:00p.m."
    Here
    "attached"
    means
    _____.
    A.
    taken
    B.
    drawn
    C.
    given
    D.
    shown
    2.
    According
    to
    this
    passage,
    time
    plays
    an
    important
    role
    in
    _____.
    A.
    everyday
    life
    B.
    school
    life
    C.
    communication
    D.
    private
    life
    3.
    The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    The
    Voice
    of
    Time
    B.
    The
    Importance
    of
    Time
    C.
    The
    Importance
    of
    an
    Announcement
    D.
    Time
    and
    Tide
    Wait
    for
    No
    Man
    4.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    the
    author
    of
    the
    article
    may
    agree
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following
    statements?
    A.
    It
    is
    appropriate
    to
    send
    your
    invitation
    cards
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    a
    dinner
    party
    date
    in
    U.S.A..
    B.
    It
    may
    be
    appropriate
    to
    send
    your
    invitation
    cards
    to
    your
    guests
    three
    or
    four
    days
    before
    a
    dinner
    party
    date
    in
    some
    countries.
    C.
    It
    is
    best
    for
    one
    to
    make
    telephone
    calls
    at
    eight
    because
    it
    costs
    much
    less.
    D.
    If
    one
    is
    less
    than
    5
    minutes
    late,
    he
    has
    to
    make
    a
    short
    apology.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    C
    3.
    A
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(059)
    Trees
    should
    only
    be
    pruned(修剪)
    when
    there
    is
    a
    good
    and
    clear
    reason
    fordoing
    so
    and,
    fortunately,
    the
    number
    of
    such
    reasons
    is
    small.
    Pruning
    involves
    the
    cutting
    away
    of
    overgrown
    and
    unwanted
    branches,
    and
    the
    inexperienced
    gardener
    can
    be
    encouraged
    by
    the
    thought
    that
    more
    damage
    results
    from
    doing
    it
    unnecessarily
    than
    from
    leaving
    the
    tree
    to
    grow
    in
    its
    own
    way.
    First,
    pruning
    may
    be
    done
    to
    make
    sure
    that
    trees
    have
    a
    desired
    shape
    or
    size.
    The
    object
    may
    be
    to
    get
    a
    tree
    of
    the
    right
    height,
    and
    at
    the
    same
    time
    to
    help
    the
    growth
    of
    small
    side
    branches
    which
    will
    thicken
    its
    appearance
    or
    give
    it
    a
    special
    shape.
    Secondly,
    pruning
    may
    be
    done
    to
    make
    the
    tree
    healthier.
    You
    may
    cur
    out
    diseased
    or
    dead
    wood,
    or
    branches
    that
    are
    rubbing
    against
    each
    other
    and
    thus
    causing
    wounds.
    The
    health
    of
    a
    tree
    may
    be
    encouraged
    by
    removing
    the
    branches
    that
    are
    locking
    up
    the
    centre
    and
    so
    preventing
    the
    free
    movement
    of
    air.
    One
    result
    of
    pruning
    is
    that
    an
    open
    would
    is
    left
    on
    the
    tree
    and
    this
    provides
    an
    easy
    entry(进入)for
    diseases,
    but
    it
    is
    a
    wound
    that
    will
    heal.
    Often
    there
    is
    a
    race
    between
    the
    healing
    and
    the
    disease
    as
    to
    whether
    the
    tree
    will
    live
    or
    die,
    or
    that
    there
    is
    a
    period
    when
    the
    tree
    is
    at
    risk.
    It
    should
    be
    the
    aim
    of
    every
    gardener
    to
    reduce
    the
    risk
    as
    far
    as
    possible.
    It
    is
    essential
    to
    make
    the
    area
    which
    has
    been
    pruned
    smooth
    and
    clean,
    for
    healing
    will
    be
    slowed
    down
    by
    roughness.
    You
    should
    allow
    the
    cut
    surface
    to
    dry
    for
    a
    few
    hours
    and
    then
    paint
    it
    with
    one
    of
    the
    substances
    available
    from
    garden
    shops
    produced
    especially
    for
    this
    purpose.
    Pruning
    is
    usually
    done
    in
    winter,
    for
    then
    you
    can
    see
    the
    shape
    of
    the
    tree
    clearly
    without
    the
    interference(干扰)
    from
    the
    leaves
    and
    it
    is,
    too,
    very
    unlikely
    that
    the
    cuts
    you
    make
    will
    bleed.
    If
    this
    does
    happen,
    it
    is,
    of
    course,
    impossible
    to
    paint
    them
    properly.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    article,_____.
    A.
    damage
    is
    done
    to
    a
    tree
    if
    it
    is
    left
    to
    grow
    in
    its
    own
    way
    B.
    pruning
    is
    necessary
    when
    a
    tree
    has
    grown
    into
    a
    definite
    shape
    or
    size
    C.
    diseased
    or
    dead
    branches
    should
    be
    cut
    away
    if
    they
    are
    found
    to
    rub
    against
    each
    other
    D.
    growing
    side
    branches
    often
    prevent
    air
    from
    moving
    freely
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    usually
    causes
    a
    tree
    to
    grow
    unhealthy?
    A.
    Giving
    a
    tree
    a
    special
    shape
    and
    a
    definite
    height
    B.
    Removing
    small
    side
    branches
    and
    making
    a
    tree
    look
    less
    thick
    C.
    Allowing
    too
    many
    branches
    to
    grow
    in
    the
    middle
    D.
    Having
    a
    tree
    surrounded
    by
    many
    other
    trees
    3.
    The
    writer
    suggests
    that
    pruning
    should
    be
    done
    in
    winter
    because
    _____.
    A.
    the
    cut
    surface
    gets
    dry
    more
    quickly
    B.
    open
    wounds
    on
    the
    tree
    run
    the
    less
    risk
    of
    getting
    diseased
    C.
    a
    gardener
    can
    do
    pruning
    more
    easily
    D.
    wounds
    painted
    with
    a
    special
    substance
    heal
    quickly
    4.
    The
    writer"s
    purpose
    when
    writing
    this
    passage
    is
    _____.
    A.
    to
    describe
    how
    pruning
    a
    tree
    is
    done
    B.
    to
    discuss
    different
    ways
    of
    pruning
    trees
    C.
    to
    give
    practical
    instructions
    for
    pruning
    a
    tree
    D.
    to
    explain
    how
    a
    tree
    wound
    gets
    diseased
    and
    heals
    KEY:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    3.
    C
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(060)
    They
    think
    they"re
    lucky
    that
    they"re
    living
    and
    it"s
    Christmas
    again.
    They
    can"t
    see
    that
    we
    live
    on
    a
    dirty
    street
    in
    a
    shabby
    house
    among
    people
    who
    aren"t
    much
    good.
    Johnny
    and
    the
    children
    can"t
    see
    how
    pitiful
    it
    is
    that
    our
    neighbors
    have
    to
    make
    happiness
    out
    of
    this
    filth
    and
    dirt.
    My
    children
    must
    get
    out
    of
    this.
    But
    how?
    The
    money
    that
    we"ve
    saved
    isn"t
    nearly
    enough.
    The
    McGaritys
    have
    money,
    but
    they
    are
    show-offs
    with
    it.
    The
    McGarity
    girl
    just
    yesterday
    stood
    out
    there
    in
    the
    street
    eating
    from
    a
    bag
    of
    cookies
    while
    a
    ring
    of
    hungry
    children
    watched
    her.
    I
    saw
    those
    children
    looking
    at
    her
    and
    crying
    in
    their
    hearts,
    and
    when
    she
    couldn"t
    eat
    any
    more,
    she
    shrew
    the
    rest
    down
    the
    sewer(阴沟).
    Miss
    Jackson
    who
    teaches
    at
    the
    Settlement
    House
    isn"t
    rich,
    but
    she
    knows
    things.
    She
    understands
    people.
    Her
    eyes
    look
    straight
    into
    yours
    when
    she
    talks
    with
    you.
    Everybody
    else
    here
    looks
    away
    because
    they"re
    ashamed(羞愧)of
    their
    lives.
    I"d
    like
    to
    see
    the
    children
    be
    like
    Miss
    Jackson
    when
    they
    grew
    up.
    1.
    The
    writer
    suggests
    that
    her
    family
    _____.
    A.
    is
    extremely
    rich
    B.
    is
    an
    unhappy
    one
    C.
    are
    accustomed
    to
    their
    life
    D.
    long
    for
    a
    change
    in
    their
    life
    2.
    The
    McGarity
    girl
    is
    characterized
    as
    _____.
    A.
    selfish
    and
    cruel
    B.
    friendly
    and
    kind
    C.
    beautiful
    and
    proud
    D.
    rich
    and
    nice
    3.
    The
    writer
    thinks
    Miss
    Jackson
    is
    _____.
    A.
    poor
    but
    brave
    B.
    friendly
    and
    talkative
    C.
    a
    teacher
    liked
    by
    all
    her
    pupils
    D.
    an
    example
    her
    children
    should
    follow
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    TRUE?
    A.
    The
    writer"s
    family
    is
    the
    poorest
    one
    on
    that
    street.
    B.
    Watching
    the
    rich
    girl
    eating
    cookies,
    those
    hungry
    children
    cried.
    C.
    The
    writer
    wants
    to
    move
    out
    of
    that
    district.
    D.
    The
    writer
    hopes
    that
    her
    children
    will
    become
    teachers.
    KEY:
    1.
    C
    2.
    A
    3.
    D
    4.
    C
    高考英语阅读练习(061)
    For
    those
    of
    you
    who
    where
    born
    in
    the
    year
    of
    the
    pig,
    good
    luck
    and
    much
    success!
    This
    is
    your
    year.
    When
    talking
    to
    a
    Westerner,
    however,
    you’ve
    got
    to
    be
    a
    little
    careful
    when
    you
    talk
    about
    pigs.
    Chinese
    people
    view
    the
    pig
    as
    a
    smart
    (聪明)
    and
    prosperous
    (rich,
    lucky)
    animal.
    Western
    ideas
    tend
    to
    be
    a
    little
    more
    negative(否定的).
    A
    pig
    in
    the
    West
    is
    seen
    as
    a
    dirty,
    lazy,
    and
    fat
    animal.
    If
    anyone
    ever
    called
    you
    a
    pig,
    you
    wouldn’t
    be
    smiling.
    When
    a
    person
    doesn’t
    like
    someone,
    sometimes
    he
    will
    call
    that
    person
    a
    pig.
    If
    you
    ever
    meet
    a
    Westerner
    who
    was
    born
    in
    the
    year
    of
    the
    pig,
    don’t
    say,
    “Oh,
    you’re
    a
    pig!”
    Most
    Westerners
    will
    be
    understanding.
    They
    will
    be
    sure
    that
    you
    made
    some
    kind
    of
    a
    mistake.
    However,
    don’t
    take
    any
    chances.
    You
    might
    just
    offend(触怒)someone
    who
    does
    not
    share
    your
    positive(积极)ideas
    about
    pigs.
    1.
    You
    gave
    to
    be
    careful
    when
    you
    talk
    to
    a
    Westerner
    about
    pigs
    because______.
    A.
    they
    worship
    pigs
    best
    of
    all
    B.
    they
    consider
    pigs
    as
    bad
    animals
    C.
    they
    aren’t
    used
    to
    talking
    about
    pigs.
    D.
    they
    don’t
    like
    the
    topic
    about
    pigs
    at
    all
    2.
    According
    to
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    see
    that
    Chinese
    people
    think
    of
    the
    pig
    as
    a
    _______
    animal.
    A.
    clever
    B.
    rich
    C.
    good
    D.
    all
    the
    above
    3.
    A
    Westerner
    will
    call
    someone
    a
    pig
    if
    he
    _______
    that
    man.
    A.
    dislikes
    B.
    is
    afraid
    of
    C.
    looks
    up
    to
    D.
    makes
    fun
    of
    4.
    When
    you
    call
    a
    Westerner
    a
    pig,
    who
    was
    born
    in
    the
    year
    of
    the
    pig,
    most
    of
    them
    ___________.
    A.
    will
    be
    angry
    B.
    will
    be
    very
    surprised
    C.
    can
    forgive(原谅)
    D.
    may
    quarrel
    with
    you
    5.From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    conclude
    that
    _________.
    A.
    different
    people
    have
    different
    ideas
    about
    the
    same
    thing
    B.
    Westerners
    do
    not
    like
    pigs
    as
    much
    as
    the
    Chinese
    C.
    in
    general,
    Westerners
    and
    the
    Chinese
    don’t
    like
    pigs
    D.
    all
    of
    the
    Chinese
    like
    pigs
    better
    than
    Westerners
    Keys:
    1-5
    BDACA
    高考英语阅读练习(062)
    My
    elder
    brother
    Steve,
    in
    the
    absence
    of
    my
    father
    who
    died
    when
    I
    was
    six,
    gave
    me
    important
    lessons
    in
    values
    that
    helped
    me
    grow
    into
    an
    adult.
    For
    instance,
    Steve
    taught
    me
    to
    face
    the
    results
    of
    my
    behavior.
    Once
    when
    I
    returned
    in
    tears
    from
    a
    Saturday
    baseball
    game,
    it
    was
    Steve
    who
    took
    the
    time
    to
    ask
    me
    what
    happened.
    When
    I
    explained
    that
    my
    baseball
    had
    soared
    through
    Mrs.
    Holt’s
    basement
    window,
    breaking
    the
    glass
    with
    a
    crash,
    Steve
    encouraged
    me
    to
    confess
    to
    her.
    After
    all,
    I
    should
    have
    been
    playing
    in
    the
    park
    down
    Fifth
    Street
    and
    not
    in
    the
    path
    between
    buildings.
    Although
    my
    knees
    knocked
    as
    I
    explained
    to
    Mrs.
    Holt,
    I
    offered
    to
    pay
    for
    the
    window
    from
    my
    pocket
    money
    if
    she
    would
    return
    my
    ball.
    I
    also
    learned
    from
    Steve
    that
    personal
    property
    is
    a
    sacred
    thing.
    After
    I
    found
    a
    shiny
    silver
    pen
    in
    my
    fifth-grade
    classroom,
    I
    wanted
    to
    keep
    it,
    but
    Steve
    explained
    that
    it
    might
    be
    important
    to
    someone
    else
    in
    spite
    of
    the
    fact
    that
    it
    had
    little
    value.
    He
    reminded
    me
    of
    how
    much
    I’d
    hate
    to
    lose
    to
    someone
    else
    the
    small
    dog
    my
    father
    carved
    from
    a
    piece
    of
    cheap
    wood.
    I
    returned
    the
    pen
    to
    my
    teacher,
    Mrs.
    Davids,
    and
    still
    remembered
    the
    smell
    of
    her
    perfume
    as
    she
    patted
    me
    on
    my
    shoulder.
    Yet
    of
    all
    the
    instructions
    Steve
    gave
    me,
    his
    respect
    for
    life
    is
    the
    most
    vivid
    in
    my
    mind.
    When
    I
    was
    twelve
    I
    killed
    and
    old
    brown
    sparrow
    in
    the
    yard
    with
    a
    BB
    gun.
    Excited
    with
    my
    accuracy,
    I
    screamed
    to
    Steve
    to
    come
    from
    the
    house
    to
    take
    a
    look.
    I
    shall
    never
    forget
    the
    way
    he
    stood
    for
    a
    long
    moment
    and
    stared
    at
    the
    bird
    on
    the
    ground.
    Then
    in
    a
    dead,
    quiet
    voice,
    he
    asked,
    “Did
    it
    hurt
    you
    first,
    Mark?”
    I
    didn’t
    know
    what
    to
    answer.
    He
    continued
    with
    his
    eyes
    firm,
    “The
    only
    time
    you
    should
    even
    think
    of
    hurting
    a
    living
    thing
    is
    if
    it
    hurts
    you
    first.
    And
    then
    you
    think
    a
    long,
    long
    time.

    I
    really
    felt
    terrible
    then,
    but
    that
    moment
    stands
    out
    as
    the
    most
    important
    lesson
    my
    brother
    taught
    me.
    1.
    What
    is
    the
    main
    subject
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.
    The
    relationship
    between
    mark
    and
    Steve.
    B.
    The
    important
    lesson
    Mark
    learned
    in
    school
    C.
    Steve’s
    important
    role
    in
    mark’s
    growing
    process.
    D.
    Mark
    and
    Steve’s
    respect
    for
    living
    things.
    2.
    It
    can
    be
    inferred
    from
    the
    passage
    that
    when
    mark
    confessed
    to
    Mrs.
    Holt,
    __________.
    A.
    he
    felt
    surprised
    B.
    he
    was
    light-hearted
    C.
    he
    felt
    frightened
    D.
    he
    knelt
    before
    her
    3.
    In
    the
    story
    about
    the
    pen,
    which
    of
    the
    following
    lessons
    did
    Steve
    teach
    his
    brother?
    A.
    Respect
    for
    personal
    property.
    B.
    Respect
    for
    life.
    C.
    Sympathy
    for
    people
    with
    problems.
    D.
    The
    value
    of
    honesty.
    4.
    According
    to
    the
    writer,
    which
    was
    the
    most
    important
    lesson
    Steve
    taught
    his
    young
    brother?
    A.
    Respect
    for
    living
    things.
    B.
    Responsibility
    for
    one’s
    actions.
    C.
    The
    value
    of
    the
    honesty.
    D.
    Care
    for
    the
    property
    of
    others.
    5.
    Which
    of
    the
    follow
    is
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Mark
    was
    still
    a
    boy
    when
    he
    wrote
    this
    passage.
    B.
    Mark
    lost
    the
    small
    dog
    his
    father
    carved.
    C.
    When
    a
    living
    thing
    hurts
    you,
    you
    should
    kill
    it.
    D.
    Even
    if
    a
    living
    thing
    hurts
    you,
    you
    should
    not
    kill
    it
    without
    hesitation.
    Keys:
    1-5
    CCAAD
    高考英语阅读练习(063)
    The
    Man
    of
    Many
    Secretsharry
    Houdini
    was
    one
    of
    the
    greatest
    American
    entertainers
    in
    the
    theater
    this
    century.
    He
    was
    a
    man
    famous
    for
    his
    escapes
    form
    prison
    cells,
    from
    wooden
    boxes
    floating
    in
    rivers,
    from
    locked
    tanks
    full
    of
    water.
    He
    appeared
    in
    theaters
    all
    over
    Europe
    and
    America.
    Crowds
    came
    to
    see
    the
    great
    Houdini
    and
    his
    “magic”
    tricks.
    Of
    course,
    his
    secret
    was
    not
    magic,
    or
    supernatural
    powers.
    It
    was
    simply
    strength.
    He
    had
    the
    ability
    to
    move
    his
    toes
    as
    well
    as
    he
    moved
    his
    fingers.
    He
    could
    move
    his
    body
    into
    almost
    any
    position
    he
    wanted.
    Houdini
    started
    working
    in
    the
    entertainment
    world
    when
    he
    was
    17,
    in
    1891.
    He
    and
    his
    brother
    Theo
    performed
    card
    tricks
    in
    a
    club
    in
    New
    York.
    they
    called
    themselves
    the
    Houdini
    Brothers.
    When
    Harry
    married
    in
    1894,
    he
    and
    his
    wife
    Bess
    worked
    together
    as
    magician
    and
    assistant.
    But
    for
    a
    long
    time
    they
    were
    not
    very
    successful.
    Then
    Harry
    performed
    his
    first
    prison
    escape,
    in
    Chicago
    in
    1898.
    harry
    persuaded
    a
    detective
    to
    let
    him
    try
    to
    escape
    from
    the
    prison,
    and
    he
    invited
    the
    local
    newspapermen
    to
    watch.
    It
    was
    the
    publicity
    that
    came
    from
    this
    the
    started
    Hayyr
    Houdini’s
    success.
    Harry
    had
    fingers
    trained
    to
    escape
    from
    handcuffs
    and
    toes
    trained
    to
    escape
    from
    ankle
    chains.
    But
    his
    biggest
    secret
    was
    how
    he
    unlocked
    the
    prison
    doors.
    Every
    time
    he
    went
    into
    the
    prison
    cell,
    Bess
    gave
    him
    a
    kiss
    for
    good
    luckand
    a
    small
    skeleton
    key,
    which
    is
    a
    key
    that
    fits
    many
    locks,
    passed
    quickly
    from
    her
    mouth
    to
    his.
    Harry
    used
    these
    prison
    escapes
    to
    build
    his
    fame.
    he
    arranged
    to
    escape
    from
    the
    local
    jail
    of
    every
    town
    he
    visited.
    In
    the
    afternoon,
    the
    people
    of
    the
    town
    would
    read
    about
    it
    in
    their
    local
    newspapers,
    and
    in
    the
    evening
    every
    seat
    in
    the
    local
    theater
    would
    be
    full.
    What
    was
    the
    result?
    World-wide
    fame,
    and
    a
    name
    remembered
    today.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    houdini’s
    success
    in
    prison
    escapes
    depends
    on
    ________.
    A.
    his
    magic
    tricks
    and
    unhuman
    powers
    B.
    his
    special
    tricks
    and
    a
    skeleton
    key
    C.
    his
    unusual
    ability
    and
    a
    skeleton
    key
    D.
    his
    unhuman
    talents
    and
    magic
    tricks
    2.
    In
    the
    fourth
    paragraph,
    the
    world
    “this”
    refers
    to
    ________.
    A.
    the
    previous
    sentence
    B.
    “the
    publicity”
    C.
    the
    place,
    Chicago
    D.
    the
    time,
    1898
    3.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    how
    did
    Houdini
    get
    the
    key
    which
    helped
    him
    unlock
    prison
    doors?
    A.
    He
    took
    the
    key
    from
    his
    wife’s
    mouth.
    B.
    His
    wife
    passed
    it
    to
    his
    hand
    while
    kissing
    him.
    C.
    His
    wife
    gave
    it
    to
    him
    by
    a
    magic
    trick.
    D.
    He
    got
    it
    in
    his
    mouth
    through
    a
    kiss
    by
    the
    wife.
    4.
    It
    can
    be
    inferred
    from
    the
    passage
    that
    Houdini
    became
    famous
    _________.
    A.
    when
    he
    was
    about
    24
    B.
    when
    he
    was
    about
    17
    C.
    after
    the
    year
    1894
    D.
    before
    the
    year
    1898
    5.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    true?
    A.
    Houdini
    used
    to
    be
    a
    famous
    magician
    in
    the
    USA.
    B.
    Houdini
    was
    first
    recognized
    widely
    in
    Chicago.
    C.
    Houdini
    entered
    the
    entertainment
    world
    together
    with
    his
    wife.
    D.
    Houdini
    owed
    his
    great
    success
    to
    his
    small
    skeleton
    key.
    Keys:
    1-5
    CADAB
    高考英语阅读练习(064)
    How
    often
    one
    hears
    children
    wishing
    they
    were
    grown
    up,
    and
    old
    people
    wishing
    they
    were
    young
    again.
    Each
    age
    has
    its
    pleasures
    and
    its
    pains,
    and
    the
    happiest
    person
    is
    the
    one
    who
    enjoys
    what
    each
    age
    gives
    him
    without
    wasting
    his
    time
    in
    useless
    regrets.
    Childhood
    is
    a
    time
    when
    there
    are
    few
    responsibilities
    to
    make
    life
    difficult.
    If
    a
    child
    has
    good
    parents,
    he
    is
    fed,
    looked
    after
    and
    loved,
    whatever
    he
    may
    do.
    It
    is
    impossible
    that
    he
    will
    ever
    again
    in
    his
    life
    be
    given
    so
    much
    without
    having
    to
    do
    anything
    in
    return.
    in
    addition,
    life
    is
    always
    presenting
    new
    things
    to
    the
    child-things
    that
    have
    lost
    their
    interest
    for
    older
    people
    because
    they
    are
    too
    well-known.
    But
    a
    child
    has
    his
    parents,
    he
    is
    not
    so
    free
    to
    do
    what
    he
    wishes
    to
    do;
    he
    is
    continually
    being
    told
    not
    to
    do
    things
    or
    being
    punished
    for
    what
    he
    has
    done
    wrong.
    When
    the
    young
    man
    starts
    to
    earn
    his
    own
    living,
    he
    can
    no
    longer
    expect
    others
    to
    pay
    for
    his
    food,
    his
    clothes,
    and
    his
    room,
    but
    has
    to
    work
    if
    he
    wants
    to
    live
    comfortably.
    If
    he
    spends
    most
    of
    his
    time
    playing
    about
    in
    the
    way
    that
    he
    used
    to
    as
    a
    child,
    he
    will
    go
    hungry.
    And
    if
    he
    breaks
    the
    laws
    of
    society
    as
    he
    used
    to
    break
    the
    laws
    of
    his
    parents,
    he
    may
    go
    to
    prison.
    If,
    however,
    he
    works
    hard,
    keeps
    out
    of
    trouble
    and
    has
    good
    health,
    he
    can
    have
    the
    great
    happiness
    of
    building
    up
    for
    himself
    his
    own
    position
    in
    society.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    second
    paragraph,
    the
    writer
    thinks
    that
    _______.
    A.
    life
    for
    a
    child
    is
    comparatively
    easy
    B.
    a
    child
    is
    always
    loved
    whatever
    he
    does
    C.
    if
    much
    is
    given
    to
    a
    child,
    he
    must
    do
    something
    in
    return
    D.
    only
    children
    are
    interested
    in
    life
    2.
    After
    a
    child
    grows
    up,
    he
    ________.
    A.
    will
    have
    little
    time
    playing
    B.
    has
    to
    be
    successful
    in
    finding
    a
    job
    C.
    can
    still
    ask
    for
    help
    in
    time
    of
    trouble
    D.
    should
    be
    able
    to
    take
    care
    of
    himself
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    NOT
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    People
    are
    often
    satisfied
    with
    their
    life.
    B.
    Life
    is
    less
    interesting
    for
    old
    people.
    C.
    Adults
    are
    freer
    to
    do
    what
    they
    want
    to
    do.
    D.
    Adults
    should
    no
    longer
    rely
    on
    others.
    4.
    The
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    passage
    is
    _________.
    A.
    life
    is
    not
    enjoyable
    since
    each
    age
    has
    some
    pains
    B.
    young
    men
    can
    have
    the
    greatest
    happiness
    if
    they
    work
    hard
    C.
    childhood
    is
    the
    move
    enjoyable
    time
    in
    one’s
    life
    D.
    one
    is
    the
    happiest
    if
    he
    can
    make
    good
    use
    of
    each
    age
    in
    his
    life
    5.
    The
    paragraph
    following
    this
    passage
    will
    most
    probably
    discuss
    _________.
    A.
    examples
    of
    successful
    young
    men
    B.
    how
    to
    build
    up
    one’s
    position
    in
    society
    C.
    joys
    and
    pains
    of
    old
    people
    D.
    what
    to
    do
    when
    one
    has
    problems
    in
    life
    Keys:
    1-5
    ADADC
    高考英语阅读练习(065)
    There
    is
    a
    definite
    possibility
    that
    the
    climate
    of
    the
    world
    may
    be
    changing.
    Some
    scientists
    imagine
    that
    this
    could
    even
    mean
    the
    beginning
    of
    another
    ice
    age.
    The
    effects
    of
    such
    a
    change
    in
    climate
    on
    the
    human
    population
    of
    the
    world
    would
    be
    startling(惊人的).
    Recent
    research
    suggests
    that
    the
    general
    warming
    tend
    of
    the
    past
    hundred
    years
    or
    so
    may
    be
    coming
    to
    an
    end.
    During
    the
    past
    ten
    years,
    meteorologists
    tell
    us
    the
    average
    temperature
    of
    the
    earth
    has
    dropped
    about
    one
    degree
    Fahrenheit.
    This
    does
    not
    seem
    like
    much,
    but
    it
    could
    have
    effects
    on
    wind
    and
    rain
    patterns
    which
    influence
    the
    overall
    weather
    picture.
    If
    these
    patterns
    change
    a
    lot,
    it
    could
    mean
    that
    certain
    regions
    of
    the
    world
    may
    continue
    to
    have
    long
    droughts
    while
    others
    will
    possibly
    suffer
    from
    widespread
    flooding.
    What
    regulates(调节)the
    climate
    is
    not
    exactly
    known.
    Meteorologists
    believe
    that
    clouds
    may
    be
    an
    important
    factor
    in
    regulating
    the
    amount
    of
    solar(太阳的)heat
    held
    by
    the
    earth,
    which
    in
    turn
    determines
    he
    temperature
    of
    the
    planet.
    Another
    possibility
    is
    that
    man’s
    industrial
    and
    agricultural
    methods
    may
    be
    affecting
    the
    natural
    weather
    patterns.
    However,
    the
    weather
    is
    not
    understood
    well
    enough
    for
    scientists
    to
    say
    for
    certain
    what
    is
    happening
    to
    the
    climate
    and
    what
    side
    effects
    this
    will
    actually
    have
    on
    the
    word’s
    population.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    text,
    the
    climate
    of
    the
    world
    seems
    to
    ______.
    A.
    be
    getting
    colder
    B.
    be
    getting
    warmer
    C.
    remain
    the
    same
    in
    the
    past
    ten
    years
    D.
    have
    good
    effects
    on
    the
    world’s
    population
    2.
    According
    to
    what
    you
    have
    read,
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    turn?
    A.
    Man’s
    activities
    have
    no
    effect
    on
    the
    climate.
    B.
    Another
    ice
    age
    will
    come
    soon.
    C.
    People
    don’t
    care
    about
    the
    changing
    climate.
    D.
    Scientists
    are
    not
    yet
    sure
    about
    the
    reason
    for
    the
    changing
    climate.
    3.
    A
    meteorologist
    is
    a
    person
    who
    ______.
    A.
    reads
    weather
    forecasts
    on
    radio
    or
    television
    B.
    thinks
    there
    will
    be
    another
    ice
    age
    C.
    studies
    and
    knows
    about
    the
    weather
    D.
    believes
    there
    will
    be
    widespread
    flooding
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    may
    be
    factors
    that
    affect
    the
    natural
    weather
    patterns?
    A.
    Clouds
    B.
    The
    amount
    of
    heat
    the
    earth
    receives
    C.
    Man’s
    industrial
    and
    agricultural
    methods
    D.
    All
    of
    the
    above
    5.
    A
    best
    title
    for
    the
    text
    would
    be
    ______.
    A.
    Droughts
    and
    Floods
    B.
    Meteorologists
    C.
    Changing
    Climate
    D.
    Solar
    Heat
    Keys:
    1-5
    ADCDC
    高考英语阅读练习(066)
    Ternang,
    Mon,
    More
    than
    10,000
    people
    were
    made
    homeless
    in
    Ternang
    after
    six
    days
    of
    continuous
    heavy
    rain.
    The
    wooden
    bridge
    across
    the
    river
    has
    been
    swept
    away.
    The
    town
    is
    cut
    by
    flood
    eaters.
    At
    the
    fifth
    mile
    Jalan
    Tengku,
    the
    water
    is
    now
    two
    metres
    deep.
    It
    is
    closed
    to
    all
    traffic.
    Motorists
    going
    south
    are
    advised
    to
    use
    Jalan
    Hisamuddin.
    Flooding
    first
    appeared
    at
    mid-afternoon
    yesterday
    along
    the
    river
    banks.
    People
    moving
    to
    higher
    ground
    were
    just
    in
    time
    to
    escape
    from
    the
    flood.
    Most
    of
    the
    people
    had
    to
    leave
    their
    possessions
    behind.
    Helped
    by
    the
    army,
    police,
    Red
    Cross
    Society,
    the
    whole
    town
    was
    moved
    out
    of
    danger.
    They
    are
    now
    housed
    near
    the
    town
    of
    Tulang.
    “Everything
    possible
    is
    being
    done
    to
    help
    the
    unfortunate
    people,”
    a
    government
    official
    said,
    “In
    fact,
    money,
    food
    and
    clothing
    have
    begun
    to
    come
    in
    from
    organizations
    and
    people.

    According
    to
    the
    latest
    reports
    it
    is
    still
    raining
    heavily
    at
    Ternang.
    The
    whole
    town
    is
    expected
    to
    be
    totally
    covered.
    So
    far
    nobody
    has
    been
    reported
    dead.
    1.
    Jalan
    Tengku
    was
    closed
    because
    ______.
    A.
    it
    had
    broken
    up
    B.
    the
    bridge
    over
    it
    had
    been
    washed
    away
    C.
    it
    was
    deeply
    flooded
    D.
    it
    was
    damaged
    2.
    Motorists
    to
    the
    south
    were
    advised
    to
    ______.
    A.
    return
    home
    B.
    avoid
    all
    roads
    C.
    move
    the
    higher
    ground
    D.
    travel
    by
    Jalan
    Hisamuddin
    3.
    The
    flood
    victims
    first
    escaped
    to
    ______.
    A.
    the
    nearby
    town
    B.
    Jalan
    Hisamuddin
    C.
    higher
    ground
    D.
    Tulang
    4.
    The
    people
    are
    staying
    ______.
    A.
    at
    a
    newspaper
    office
    B.
    at
    a
    police
    station
    C.
    in
    Tulang
    D.
    on
    their
    roof
    tops
    5.
    The
    flood
    is
    expected
    to
    ______.
    A.
    go
    down
    B.
    cause
    more
    rain
    C.
    become
    worse
    D.
    kill
    more
    people
    Keys:
    1-5
    CDCCC
    高考英语阅读练习(067)
    A
    bar
    owner
    locked
    up
    the
    door
    of
    his
    bar
    at
    2
    a.
    m.
    and
    went
    home
    to
    sleep.
    He
    had
    been
    in
    bed
    only
    a
    few
    minutes
    when
    the
    phone
    rang.
    “What
    time
    do
    you
    open
    up
    in
    the
    morning?”
    he
    heard
    an
    obviously
    drunken
    man
    ask.
    The
    owner
    was
    so
    angry
    that
    he
    slammed
    down(砰地放下)the
    receiver
    and
    went
    back
    to
    bed.
    A
    few
    minutes
    later
    there
    was
    another
    call
    and
    he
    heard
    the
    same
    voice
    ask
    the
    same
    question.
    “Listen,”
    the
    owner
    shouted,
    “there
    is
    no
    sense
    in
    asking
    me
    what
    time
    I
    open
    because
    I
    wouldn’t
    let
    a
    person
    in
    your
    condition
    in.
    “I
    don’t
    want
    to
    get
    in,”
    the
    caller
    interrupted,
    “I
    want
    to
    get
    out.

    1.
    The
    business
    ended
    ______.
    A.
    at
    two
    o’clock
    before
    midnight
    B.
    at
    two
    o’clock
    after
    noon
    C.
    at
    two
    o’clock
    after
    midnight
    D.
    at
    two
    o’clock
    in
    the
    afternoon
    2.
    It’s
    clear
    that
    the
    caller
    ______.
    A.
    enjoyed
    himself
    very
    much
    B.
    had
    eaten
    a
    lot
    of
    rice
    C.
    drank
    a
    lot
    of
    wine
    D.
    wanted
    to
    drink
    more
    3.
    At
    first
    the
    owner
    thought
    ______.
    A.
    the
    caller
    wanted
    to
    drink
    in
    his
    bar
    B.
    it
    too
    late
    to
    enter
    his
    bar
    C.
    it
    impolite
    to
    phone
    him
    at
    that
    time
    D.
    it
    of
    no
    sense
    to
    ask
    him
    such
    a
    question
    4.
    “What
    time
    do
    you
    open
    up?”
    shows
    that
    ______.
    A.
    the
    caller
    didn’t
    know
    the
    exact
    time
    when
    that
    bar
    opened
    B.
    the
    caller
    was
    anxious
    to
    go
    to
    his
    bar
    to
    drink
    C.
    the
    caller
    left
    something
    in
    the
    bar
    and
    he
    wanted
    to
    find
    it
    D.
    the
    caller
    wanted
    to
    get
    out
    5.
    The
    drunken
    man
    made
    two
    phone
    calls
    to
    the
    bar
    owner
    ______.
    A.
    at
    a
    phone
    booth(公用电话间)
    B.
    inside
    the
    bar
    C.
    at
    home
    D.
    in
    a
    hotel
    Keys:
    1-5
    CCADB
    高考英语阅读练习(068)
    The
    human
    nose
    has
    given
    to
    the
    language
    of
    the
    world
    many
    interesting
    expressions.
    Of
    course,
    this
    is
    not
    surprising.
    Without
    the
    nose,
    we
    could
    not
    breathe
    or
    smell.
    It
    is
    the
    part
    of
    the
    face
    that
    gives
    a
    person
    special
    character.
    Cyrano
    de
    Bergerac
    said
    that
    a
    large
    nose
    showed
    a
    great
    man
    courageous,
    manly
    and
    wise.
    A
    famous
    woman
    poet
    wished
    that
    she
    had
    two
    noses
    to
    smell
    a
    rose!
    Blaise
    Pascal
    made
    an
    interesting
    remark
    about
    Cleopatra’s(古埃及王后)nose.
    If
    it
    had
    been
    shorter,
    he
    said,
    it
    would
    have
    changed
    the
    whole
    face
    of
    the
    world!
    Man’s
    nose
    has
    had
    an
    important
    role
    in
    his
    imagination.
    Man
    has
    referred
    to
    the
    nose
    in
    many
    ways
    to
    express
    his
    emotions.
    Expressions
    dealing
    with
    the
    nose
    refer
    to
    human
    weakness:
    anger,
    pride,
    jealousy(嫉妒)and
    revenge(报复).
    In
    English
    there
    are
    a
    number
    of
    phrases
    about
    the
    nose.
    For
    example,
    to
    hold
    up
    one’s
    nose
    expressed
    a
    basic
    human
    feelingpride.
    People
    can
    hold
    up
    their
    hoses
    at
    people,
    things
    and
    places.
    The
    phrase,
    to
    be
    led
    around
    by
    the
    nose,
    shows
    man’s
    weakness.
    A
    person
    who
    is
    led
    around
    by
    the
    nose
    lets
    other
    people
    control
    him.
    On
    the
    other
    hand,
    a
    person
    who
    follows
    his
    nose
    lets
    his
    instinct(本能)guide
    him.
    There
    are
    a
    number
    of
    others.
    However,
    it
    should
    be
    as
    plain
    as
    the
    nose
    on
    your
    face
    that
    the
    nose
    in
    more
    than
    an
    organ
    for
    breathing
    and
    smelling.
    1.
    The
    passage
    is
    about
    ______.
    A.
    an
    organ,
    with
    which
    people
    can
    breathe
    and
    smell
    B.
    the
    nose,
    which
    gives
    different
    and
    useful
    expressions
    C.
    the
    nose
    giving
    a
    person
    special
    character
    D.
    interesting
    remarks
    about
    the
    nose
    made
    by
    some
    people
    2.
    From
    the
    passage
    we
    know
    ______.
    A.
    “Cleopatra’s
    nose”
    changed
    the
    whole
    face
    of
    the
    world
    indeed.
    B.
    Cleopatra
    had
    a
    strong
    will
    to
    change
    the
    whole
    look
    of
    the
    world
    C.
    Cleopatra’s
    nose
    was
    not
    short
    D.
    Cleopatra
    hoped
    that
    people
    would
    change
    the
    whole
    face
    of
    the
    world
    3.
    The
    nose
    expressed
    ______.
    A.
    some
    human
    weakness
    or
    other
    B.
    people’s
    shortcomings
    C.
    people’s
    different
    emotions
    D.
    human
    feeling
    in
    bad
    sense
    4.
    A
    person
    who
    follows
    his
    nose
    ______.
    A.
    won’t
    take
    others’
    advice
    B.
    is
    easily
    controlled
    by
    others
    C.
    is
    weak-minded
    D.
    has
    will
    of
    his
    own
    5.
    How
    many
    expressions
    about
    the
    nose
    are
    mentioned
    in
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Two
    B.
    Three
    C.
    Four
    D.
    Five
    Keys:
    1-5
    BCCDC
    高考英语阅读练习(069)
    A
    thief
    entered
    the
    bedroom
    of
    the
    30th
    President
    of
    the
    United
    States,
    who
    met
    him
    and
    helped
    him
    escape
    punishment.
    The
    event
    happened
    in
    the
    early
    morning
    hours
    in
    one
    of
    the
    first
    days
    when
    Calvin
    Coolidge
    came
    into
    power,
    late
    in
    August,
    1923.He
    and
    his
    family
    were
    living
    in
    the
    same
    third-floor
    suite
    (套房)
    at
    the
    Willard
    Hotel
    in
    Washington
    that
    they
    had
    occupied
    several
    years
    before.The
    former
    President’s
    wife
    was
    still
    living
    in
    the
    White
    House.
    Coolidge
    awoke
    to
    see
    a
    stranger
    go
    through
    his
    clothes,
    remove
    a
    wallet
    and
    a
    watch
    chain.
    Coolidge
    spoke,
    “I
    wish
    you
    wouldn’t
    take
    that.”
    The
    thief,
    gaining
    his
    voice,
    said,
    “Why?”
    “I
    don’t
    mean
    the
    watch
    and
    chain,
    only
    the
    charm
    (表坠).Take
    it
    near
    the
    window
    and
    read
    what
    is
    impressed
    on
    its
    back,

    the
    President
    said.
    The
    thief
    read,
    “Presented
    to
    Calvin
    Coolidge.”
    “Are
    you
    President
    Coolidge
    ?

    he
    asked.
    The
    President
    answered,
    “Yes,
    and
    the
    House
    of
    Representatives
    (众议院)
    gave
    me
    that
    watch
    charm.I’m
    fond
    of
    it.It
    would
    do
    you
    no
    good.You
    want
    money.Let’s
    talk
    this
    over.”
    Holding
    up
    the
    wallet,
    the
    young
    man
    said
    in
    a
    low
    vioce,
    “I’ll
    take
    this
    and
    leave
    everything
    else.”
    Coolidge,
    knowing
    there
    was
    $80
    in
    it,
    persuaded
    the
    young
    man
    to
    sit
    down
    and
    talk.He
    told
    the
    President
    he
    and
    his
    college
    roommate
    had
    overspent
    during
    their
    holiday
    and
    did
    not
    have
    enough
    money
    to
    pay
    their
    hotel
    bill.
    Coolidge
    added
    up
    the
    roommate
    and
    two
    rail
    tickets
    back
    to
    the
    college.Then
    he
    counted
    out
    $32
    said
    it
    was
    a
    loan
    (借款).
    He
    then
    told
    the
    young
    man,
    “There
    is
    a
    guard
    in
    the
    corridor.”
    The
    young
    man
    nodded
    and
    left
    through
    the
    same
    window
    as
    he
    had
    entered.
    1.What
    caused
    the
    thief
    to
    meet
    the
    President?
    A.He
    knew
    the
    President
    had
    lots
    of
    money.
    B.He
    knew
    the
    President
    lived
    in
    the
    suite.
    C.He
    wanted
    to
    be
    a
    rich
    businessman.
    D.He
    wanted
    to
    steal
    some
    money.
    2.Why
    did
    Calvin
    Coolidge
    live
    at
    the
    Willard
    Hotel
    in
    those
    days?
    A.Because
    the
    former
    President
    was
    still
    living
    in
    the
    White
    House.
    B.Because
    the
    former
    First
    Lady
    hadn’t
    left
    the
    White
    House.
    C.Because
    the
    First
    Lady
    liked
    to
    live
    there.
    D.Because
    he
    liked
    there.
    3.Coolidge
    counted
    out
    $32
    ______.
    A.in
    order
    not
    to
    be
    killed
    by
    the
    thief
    B.in
    order
    to
    be
    out
    of
    danger
    C.so
    as
    to
    help
    the
    young
    student
    overcome
    his
    difficulty
    D.because
    he
    had
    no
    more
    money
    4.The
    young
    man’s
    roommate
    went
    back
    to
    the
    college
    ______.
    A.by
    air
    B.by
    water
    C.by
    bus
    D.by
    train
    5.Which
    of
    the
    following
    might
    happen
    afterwards?
    A.The
    young
    student
    repaid
    the$32.
    B.The
    thief
    was
    put
    into
    prison.
    C.The
    President
    told
    many
    reporters
    the
    thief’s
    name.
    D.The
    President
    ordered
    the
    young
    man
    to
    repay
    the
    money.
    Keys:
    1-5
    DBCDA
    高考英语阅读练习(070)
    Homing
    pigeons
    are
    placed
    in
    a
    training
    program
    from
    about
    the
    time
    they
    are
    twenty-eight
    days
    of
    age.They
    are
    taught
    to
    enter
    the
    loft
    through
    a
    trap
    and
    to
    exercise
    above
    and
    around
    the
    loft
    and
    gradually
    they
    are
    taken
    away
    for
    short
    distance
    in
    wicker
    baskets
    and
    released.They
    are
    then
    expected
    to
    find
    their
    way
    home
    in
    the
    shortest
    possible
    time.
    In
    their
    training
    flights
    or
    in
    actual
    races,
    the
    birds
    are
    taken
    to
    prearranged
    distant
    points
    and
    released
    to
    find
    their
    way
    back
    to
    their
    own
    lofts.Once
    the
    birds
    are
    liberated,
    their
    owners,
    who
    are
    standing
    by
    at
    the
    home
    lofts,
    anxiously
    watch
    the
    sky
    for
    the
    return
    of
    their
    entries.Since
    time
    is
    of
    the
    essence
    (本质)
    the
    speed
    with
    which
    the
    birds
    can
    be
    induced
    to
    enter
    the
    loft
    trap
    may
    make
    the
    difference
    between
    gaining
    a
    win
    or
    a
    second
    place.
    The
    head
    of
    a
    homing
    pigeon
    is
    comparatively
    small,
    but
    its
    brain
    is
    one
    quarter
    larger
    than
    that
    of
    the
    ordinary
    pigeon.The
    homing
    pigeon
    is
    very
    intelligent
    and
    will
    persevere
    to
    the
    point
    of
    stubbornness
    (顽强)
    ;some
    have
    been
    known
    to
    fly
    a
    hundred
    miles
    off
    course
    to
    avoid
    a
    storm.
    Some
    homing
    pigeon
    experts
    claim
    that
    this
    bird
    is
    gifted
    with
    a
    form
    of
    built-in
    radar
    that
    helps
    it
    find
    its
    own
    loft
    after
    hours
    of
    flight,
    for
    hidden
    under
    the
    headfeathers
    are
    two
    very
    sensitive
    ears,
    while
    the
    sharp
    prominent
    (突出的)
    eyes
    can
    see
    great
    distances
    in
    daytime.
    Why
    do
    homing
    pigeons
    fly
    home?
    They
    are
    not
    unique
    in
    this
    inherent
    skill;
    it
    is
    found
    in
    most
    migratory
    birds,
    in
    bees,
    ants,
    toads
    and
    even
    turtles,
    which
    have
    been
    known
    to
    travel
    hundreds
    of
    miles
    to
    return
    to
    their
    homes.But
    in
    the
    animal
    world,
    the
    homing
    pigeon
    alone
    can
    be
    trusted
    with
    its
    freedom
    and
    trained
    to
    carry
    out
    the
    missions
    that
    people
    demand.
    1.What
    is
    the
    purpose
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.To
    convince
    the
    reader
    to
    buy
    a
    homing
    pigeon.
    B.To
    inform
    the
    reader
    about
    homing
    pigeons
    and
    their
    training.
    C.To
    protect
    homing
    pigeons
    against
    the
    threat
    of
    extinction.
    D.To
    encourage
    the
    owners
    of
    homing
    pigeons
    to
    set
    the
    birds
    free.
    2.According
    to
    the
    passage,
    what
    happens
    to
    homing
    pigeons
    when
    they
    are
    about
    a
    month
    old?
    A.They
    are
    kept
    in
    a
    trap.
    B.They
    enter
    their
    first
    race.
    C.They
    begin
    a
    training
    program.
    D.They
    get
    their
    wings
    clipped
    and
    marked.
    3.According
    to
    the
    passage,
    what
    is
    the
    difference
    between
    a
    homing
    pigeon
    and
    an
    ordinary
    one?
    A.The
    span
    of
    the
    wings.
    B.The
    shape
    of
    the
    eyes.
    C.The
    texture
    of
    the
    feathers.
    D.The
    size
    of
    the
    brain.
    4.The
    underlined
    word
    “it”
    refers
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following?
    A.radar
    B.bird
    C.loft
    D.form
    5.Why
    does
    the
    author
    mention
    bees,
    ants,
    toads
    and
    turtles
    in
    the
    last
    paragraph?
    A.To
    describe
    some
    unusual
    kinds
    of
    pets.
    B.To
    measure
    distances
    traveled
    by
    various
    animals.
    C.To
    compare
    their
    home-finding
    abilities
    with
    those
    of
    homing
    pigeons.
    D.To
    interest
    the
    reader
    in
    learning
    about
    other
    animals.
    Keys:
    1-5BCDBC
    高考英语阅读练习(071)
    The
    temperature
    of
    the
    sun
    is
    over
    5000
    degrees
    Fahrenheit
    at
    the
    surface,
    but
    it
    rises
    to
    perhaps
    more
    than
    16
    million
    degrees
    at
    the
    center.The
    sun
    is
    so
    much
    hotter
    than
    the
    earth
    that
    matter
    can
    exist
    only
    as
    a
    gas,
    except
    at
    the
    core.In
    the
    core
    of
    the
    sun,
    the
    pressures
    are
    so
    great
    against
    the
    gases
    that,
    despite
    the
    high
    temperature,
    there
    may
    be
    a
    small
    solid
    core.However,
    no
    one
    really
    knows,
    since
    the
    center
    of
    the
    sun
    can
    never
    be
    directly
    observed.
    Solar
    astronomers
    do
    know
    that
    the
    sun
    is
    divided
    into
    five
    layers
    or
    zones.Starting
    at
    the
    outside
    and
    going
    down
    into
    the
    sun,
    the
    zones
    are
    the
    corona,
    chromosphere,
    photosphere,
    convection
    zone
    and
    finally
    the
    core.The
    first
    three
    zones
    are
    regarded
    as
    the
    sun’s
    atmosphere.But
    since
    the
    sun
    has
    no
    solid
    surface,
    it
    is
    hard
    to
    tell
    where
    the
    atmosphere
    ends
    and
    the
    main
    body
    of
    the
    sun
    begins.
    The
    sun’s
    outermost
    layer
    begins
    about
    10000
    miles
    above
    the
    visible(可见的)
    surface
    and
    goes
    outward
    for
    millions
    of
    miles.This
    is
    the
    only
    part
    of
    the
    sun
    that
    can
    be
    seen
    during
    an
    eclipse
    (食)
    such
    as
    the
    one
    in
    February
    1979.At
    any
    other
    time,
    the
    corona
    can
    be
    seen
    only
    when
    special
    instruments
    are
    used
    on
    cameras
    and
    telescopes
    to
    shut
    out
    the
    glare
    of
    the
    sun’s
    rays.
    The
    corona
    is
    a
    brilliant,
    pearly
    white,
    filmy
    light,
    about
    as
    bright
    as
    the
    full
    moon.Its
    beautiful
    rays
    are
    a
    sensational
    sight
    during
    an
    eclipse.The
    corona’s
    rays
    flash
    out
    in
    a
    brilliant
    fan
    that
    has
    wispy
    spikelike
    (一束束穗状)
    rays
    near
    the
    sun’s
    north
    and
    south
    poles.The
    corona
    is
    thickest
    at
    the
    sun’s
    equator.
    The
    corona
    rays
    are
    made
    up
    of
    gases
    streaming
    outward
    at
    tremendous
    speeds
    and
    reaching
    a
    temperature
    of
    more
    than
    2
    million
    degrees
    Fahrenheit.The
    rays
    of
    gas
    thin
    out
    as
    they
    reach
    the
    space
    around
    the
    planets.By
    the
    time
    the
    sun’s
    corona
    rays
    reach
    the
    Earth,
    they
    are
    weak
    and
    invisible.
    1.Matter
    on
    the
    sun
    can
    exist
    only
    in
    the
    form
    of
    gas
    because
    of
    the
    sun’s
    ______.
    A.size
    B.age
    C.location
    D.temperature
    2.With
    what
    topic
    is
    the
    second
    paragraph
    mainly
    concerned?
    A.How
    the
    Sun
    evolved.
    B.The
    structure
    of
    the
    Sun.
    C.Why
    scientists
    study
    the
    Sun.
    D.The
    distance
    of
    the
    Sun
    from
    the
    planets
    3.All
    of
    the
    following
    are
    parts
    of
    the
    sun’s
    atmosphere
    EXCEPT
    the
    ______.
    A.corona
    B.chromosphere
    C.photosphere
    D.core
    4.According
    to
    the
    passage,
    as
    the
    corona
    rays
    reach
    the
    planets,
    they
    become
    ______.
    A.hotter
    B.clearer
    C.thinner
    D.stronger
    5.The
    paragraphs
    following
    the
    passage
    most
    likely
    discuss
    which
    of
    the
    following?
    A.The
    remaining
    layers
    of
    the
    sun.
    B.The
    evolution
    of
    the
    sun
    to
    its
    present
    form.
    C.The
    eclipse
    of
    February
    1979.
    Keys:
    1-5
    DBDCA
    高考英语阅读练习(072)
    Having
    no
    language,
    infants
    cannot
    be
    told
    what
    they
    need
    to
    learn.Yet
    by
    the
    age
    of
    three
    they
    will
    have
    mastered
    the
    basic
    structure
    of
    their
    native
    language
    and
    will
    be
    well
    on
    their
    way
    to
    communicative
    competence
    (能力).Acquiring
    (取得)
    their
    language
    is
    a
    most
    impressive
    intellectual
    feat.Students
    of
    how
    children
    learn
    language
    generally
    agree
    that
    the
    most
    remarkable
    aspect
    (方面)
    of
    this
    feat
    is
    the
    rapid
    acquisition
    of
    grammar.Nevertheless,
    the
    ability
    of
    children
    to
    conform
    to
    grammatical
    rules
    is
    only
    slightly
    more
    wonderful
    than
    their
    ability
    to
    learn
    words.It
    has
    been
    reckoned
    that
    the
    average
    high
    school
    graduate
    in
    the
    United
    States
    has
    a
    reading
    vocabulary
    of
    80000
    words,
    which
    includes
    idiomatic
    expressions
    and
    proper
    names
    of
    people
    and
    places.This
    vocabulary
    must
    have
    been
    learned
    over
    a
    period
    of
    16
    years.From
    the
    figures,
    it
    can
    be
    calculated
    that
    the
    average
    child
    learns
    at
    a
    rate
    of
    about
    13
    new
    words
    per
    day.Clearly
    a
    learning
    process
    of
    great
    complexity
    goes
    on
    at
    a
    rapid
    rate
    in
    children.
    1.What
    is
    the
    main
    subject
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.Language
    acquisition
    in
    children.
    B.Teaching
    languages
    to
    children.
    C.How
    to
    memorize
    words.
    D.Communicating
    with
    infants.
    2.The
    underlined
    word
    “feat”
    is
    closest
    in
    meaning
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following?
    A.experiment
    B.idea
    C.activity
    D.accomplishment
    3.The
    underlined
    word
    “reckoned”
    is
    closest
    in
    meaning
    to
    which
    of
    the
    following?
    A.suspected
    B.estimated
    C.proved
    D.said
    4.The
    underlined
    word
    “which”
    refers
    to
    ______

    A.their
    ability
    B.reading
    vocabulary
    C.idiomatic
    expression
    D.learning
    process
    5.According
    to
    the
    passage,
    what
    is
    impressive
    about
    the
    way
    children
    learn
    vocabulary?
    A.They
    learn
    words
    before
    they
    learn
    grammar.
    B.They
    learn
    even
    very
    long
    words.
    C.They
    learn
    words
    very
    quickly.
    D.They
    learn
    the
    most
    words
    in
    high
    school.
    Keys:
    1-5
    ADBBC
    高考英语阅读练习(073)
    Two
    American
    scientists
    told
    the
    people
    in
    industrial
    nations
    that
    they
    would
    be
    much
    healthier
    if
    they
    ate
    more
    of
    the
    same
    kind
    of
    foods
    eaten
    by
    humans
    living
    more
    than
    10,000
    years
    ago.
    The
    scientists
    say
    that
    the
    human
    body
    has
    changed
    very
    little
    since
    human
    first
    appeared
    on
    earth,
    but
    the
    way
    we
    live
    has
    changed
    greatly.Our
    body
    has
    not
    been
    able
    to
    deal
    with
    these
    changes
    in
    life
    style
    and
    this
    has
    led
    to
    new
    kinds
    of
    sicknesses.These
    new
    sicknesses
    were
    not
    known
    in
    ancient
    times.So
    they
    are
    called
    “diseases
    of
    civilization(文明)”.Many
    cancers(癌)
    and
    diseases
    of
    the
    blood
    system,
    including
    heart
    attacks
    and
    strokes(中风)
    are
    examples
    of
    such
    diseases.
    Scientists
    noted
    that
    early
    stone-age
    people
    used
    very
    little
    alcohol(酒精)or
    tabacco,
    probably
    none.Ancient
    people
    also
    got
    a
    great
    deal
    of
    physical
    exercise,
    but
    a
    change
    in
    food
    is
    one
    of
    the
    main
    differences
    between
    life
    in
    ancient
    times
    and
    life
    today.
    Stone-age
    people
    hunted
    wild
    animals
    for
    their
    meat,
    which
    had
    much
    less
    fat
    than
    farm
    animals.They
    also
    ate
    a
    lot
    of
    fresh
    wild
    vegetables,
    and
    fruits.They
    did
    not
    use
    milk
    and
    other
    dairy
    products(乳制品),
    and
    they
    made
    very
    little
    use
    of
    grains.But
    today,
    we
    eat
    a
    large
    amount
    of
    dairy
    products
    and
    grain
    foods.We
    eat
    six
    times
    more
    salt
    than
    stone-age
    people.We
    eat
    more
    sugar.We
    eat
    twice
    as
    much
    fat
    but
    only
    one
    third
    as
    much
    protein(蛋白质)and
    much
    less
    vitamin(维生素)C.
    People
    today
    probably
    do
    not
    want
    to
    live
    as
    people
    thousands
    of
    years
    ago
    did,
    but
    scientists
    say
    that
    we
    would
    be
    much
    healthier
    if
    we
    ate
    as
    those
    ancient
    people
    did,
    cutting
    the
    amount
    of
    fatty,
    salty
    and
    sweet
    foods.
    1.The
    people
    in
    industrial
    nations
    would
    be
    much
    healthier
    if
    they
    ate
    ______.
    A.more
    foods
    as
    humans
    living
    10,000
    years
    ago
    did
    B.as
    humans
    living
    10,000
    years
    ago
    ate
    C.more
    kinds
    of
    food
    eaten
    by
    people
    living
    over
    10,000
    years
    ago
    D.more
    of
    the
    same
    kinds
    of
    foods
    eaten
    by
    people
    over
    10,000
    years
    ago
    2.New
    kinds
    of
    sicknesses
    have
    been
    found
    because
    ______
    A.the
    human
    body
    has
    changed
    compared
    with
    human
    first
    appeared
    on
    earth
    B.the
    way
    we
    live
    has
    changed
    a
    little
    C.our
    body
    can’t
    deal
    with
    the
    changes
    in
    life
    style
    D.the
    way
    we
    live
    today
    are
    proper
    for
    the
    human
    body
    3.What
    is
    the
    main
    cause
    mentioned
    in
    the
    article
    why
    people
    suffer
    from
    a
    lot
    of
    new
    sicknesses?
    A.Ancient
    people
    did
    a
    great
    deal
    of
    physical
    exercise.
    B.People
    today
    have
    a
    lot
    of
    alcohol.
    C.People
    today
    have
    more
    tobacco.
    D.Food
    is
    quite
    different
    between
    life
    today
    and
    life
    in
    ancient
    times.
    4.Stone-age
    people
    were
    much
    healthier
    than
    people
    today
    because
    they
    ate
    a
    lot
    of
    ______.
    A.milk
    and
    other
    dairy
    products
    B.grain
    foods
    and
    farm
    animals
    C.salt
    and
    sugar
    D.wild
    animals,
    fresh
    wild
    vegetables
    and
    fruits
    5.From
    this
    article,
    we
    know
    that
    ______
    are
    not
    good
    to
    our
    health.
    A.protein
    and
    vitamin
    C
    B.milk
    and
    grain
    foods
    C.wild
    animals,
    vegetables
    and
    fruits
    D.a
    huge
    amount
    of
    fatty,
    salty
    and
    sweet
    foods
    Keys:
    1-5
    DCDDD
    高考英语阅读练习(074)
    Shanghai
    is
    the
    largest
    city
    in
    China.About
    eleven
    million
    people
    make
    their
    homes
    in
    Shanghai
    and
    its
    suburbs(郊区).This
    enormous(巨大的)city
    spreads
    out
    along
    the
    banks
    of
    the
    Huang
    Pu
    River,
    which
    flows
    into
    the
    mouth
    of
    the
    Yangtze
    River
    about
    fourteen
    miles
    north
    of
    here.Large
    oceangoing
    ships
    travel
    to
    Shanghai
    by
    way
    of
    the
    Yanggze
    and
    the
    Huang
    Pu.
    Shanghai
    was
    a
    small,
    unimportant
    city
    until
    1842
    when
    China
    lost
    a
    war
    with
    Great
    Britain.The
    British
    realized
    that
    Shanghai
    was
    in
    an
    excellent
    location(位置)
    to
    serve
    as
    a
    seaport
    for
    the
    densely(密集)
    populated
    Yangtze
    River
    Plain.They
    forced
    the
    Chinese
    to
    allow
    English
    traders
    to
    settle
    on
    the
    wastelands
    outside
    the
    city
    walls.Later,
    French,
    American,
    and
    Japanese
    traders
    also
    came
    to
    Shanghai.The
    foreigners
    built
    whole
    new
    sections
    of
    Shanghai,
    including
    homes,
    stores,
    factories,
    and
    office
    buildings.Thousands
    of
    Chinese
    poured
    into
    Shanghai
    in
    search
    of
    jobs.Most
    of
    them
    settled
    in
    the
    old
    part
    of
    the
    city.As
    time
    passed,
    shanghai
    became
    one
    of
    the
    busiest
    seaports
    in
    the
    world.
    1.According
    to
    the
    article,
    the
    population
    inside
    the
    city
    of
    Shanghai
    is
    ______
    A.eleven
    million
    B.less
    than
    eleven
    million
    C.more
    than
    eleven
    million
    D.about
    eleven
    million
    2.The
    Huang
    Pu
    River
    is
    connected
    with
    ______
    at
    a
    spot
    about
    fourteen
    miles
    ______
    of
    the
    city.
    A.the
    Yangtze……north
    B.the
    city…north
    C.the
    mouth
    of
    Huang
    Pu
    River…north
    D.Yangtze
    River…south
    3.Before
    1842,
    the
    Yangtze
    River
    Plain
    was
    ______.
    A.very
    developed
    B.densely
    populated
    C.at
    a
    war
    with
    Great
    Britain
    D.a
    small,
    unimportant
    city
    4.The
    British
    first
    settled
    on
    the
    land
    because
    ______.
    A.they
    wanted
    to
    build
    stores
    here
    B.they
    thought
    the
    place
    was
    beautiful
    C.they
    realized
    that
    it
    was
    a
    very
    good
    location
    for
    a
    seaport
    D.they
    wanted
    to
    have
    a
    war
    here
    5.A
    lot
    of
    Chinese
    came
    into
    Shanghai
    to
    ______.
    A.visit
    the
    city
    B.trade
    with
    foreigners
    C.build
    one
    of
    the
    busiest
    seaports
    D.look
    for
    jobs
    Keys:
    1-5
    BABCD
    高考英语阅读练习(075)
    In
    1986,
    Willie
    Mays
    was
    paid
    $
    125,000
    to
    play
    baseball,
    but
    the
    $
    80,000
    a
    year
    earned
    by
    Babe
    Ruth,
    the
    homerun
    king
    of
    the
    early
    1930’s,
    went
    a
    great
    deal
    farther.The
    two
    men
    paid
    greatly
    different
    amounts
    for
    federal
    taxes
    and
    consumer
    goods.read
    what
    Dr
    Lawrence
    Ritter
    had
    to
    say
    on
    this
    matter.Dr
    Ritter
    is
    chairman
    of
    the
    department
    of
    finance(财政)at
    New
    York
    University’s
    graduate
    school
    of
    business.
    “On
    his
    $
    80,000
    Ruth
    paid
    $
    11,500
    in
    federal
    income
    taxes,
    giving
    him
    a
    takehome
    pay
    of
    $
    68,500.On
    his
    $
    125,000
    Mays
    paid
    a
    federal
    income
    tax
    of
    $
    73,000,
    leaving
    $
    52,000
    in
    take-home
    pay.In
    addition,
    consumer
    prices
    today
    are
    about
    2.2
    times
    as
    high
    as
    they
    were
    in
    1931.At
    today’s
    prices,
    Mays’
    $
    52,000
    takehome
    bay
    would
    buy
    what
    $
    23,000
    would
    have
    bought
    in
    1931.In
    terms
    of
    purchasing(购买)
    power,
    Mays’
    Salary(薪水)
    was
    worth
    only
    about
    one-third
    of
    Ruth’s.”
    1.The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    is
    ______.
    A.Poor
    Willie
    B.Rich
    Babe
    C.Rising
    Price
    D.Too
    Much
    Tax
    2.The
    passage
    seems
    truthful
    because
    ______.
    A.it
    is
    about
    real
    people
    B.Dr
    Ritter
    is
    a
    famous
    professor
    C.it
    gives
    exact
    figures(数字)
    D.it
    is
    well
    written
    3.Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    true?
    A.Ruth
    had
    bigger
    salary.
    B.Mays
    got
    more
    take-home
    pay.
    C.Ruth
    had
    bigger
    purchasing
    power.
    D.Mays
    could
    spend
    less
    money
    on
    consumer
    goods.
    4.Mays’
    federal
    income
    tax
    is
    ______
    higher
    than
    Ruth’s.
    A.14.4%
    B.58.4%
    C.44%
    D.16.8%
    5.From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    conclude
    that
    ______.
    A.the
    United
    States
    is
    getting
    richer
    and
    richer
    B.the
    dollar
    today
    is
    worth
    less
    than
    it
    was
    in
    the
    thirties
    C.American
    people
    are
    paid
    today
    less
    than
    in
    1931
    D.Amercian
    sportsmen
    become
    poorer
    and
    poorer
    Keys:
    1-5
    ACCCB
    高考英语阅读练习(076)
    The
    Antarctic(南极地区)is
    actually
    a
    desert.It
    is
    the
    only
    continent
    on
    the
    earth
    without
    a
    river
    or
    a
    lake.
    The
    Antarctic
    is
    all
    ice
    all
    year
    round.The
    warmest
    temperature
    ever
    recorded
    there
    is
    zero,
    at
    the
    south
    Pole.Explorers
    used
    to
    think
    that
    a
    place
    so
    cold
    would
    have
    a
    heavy
    snowfall.But
    less
    than
    ten
    inches
    of
    snow
    falls
    each
    year.That
    is
    less
    than
    half
    an
    inch
    of
    water.Ten
    times
    that
    much
    moisture(水分)
    falls
    in
    parts
    of
    the
    Sahara.
    The
    little
    snow
    that
    falls
    in
    Antarctica(南极)never
    melts.It
    continues
    to
    pile
    up
    deeper
    and
    deeper
    year
    after
    year
    and
    century
    after
    century.When
    the
    snow
    gets
    to
    be
    about
    eighty
    feet
    deep,
    it
    is
    turned
    to
    ice
    by
    the
    weight
    of
    the
    snow
    above
    it.
    1.Antarctica
    is
    called
    a
    desert
    because
    it
    ______.
    A.is
    sandy
    B.has
    the
    same
    temperature
    as
    desert
    C.has
    little
    moisture
    and
    no
    lakes
    or
    rivers
    D.all
    of
    the
    above
    2.The
    Antarctic
    has
    ______.
    A.ten
    times
    as
    much
    moisture
    as
    the
    Sahara
    B.the
    same
    amount
    of
    moisture
    as
    the
    Sahara
    C.about
    one-tenth
    the
    moisture
    of
    the
    Sahara
    D.none
    of
    these
    3.The
    snow
    in
    Antarctica
    is
    very
    deep
    because
    it
    ______.
    A.never
    stops
    falling
    B.piles
    up
    year
    after
    year
    C.never
    melts
    D.both
    B
    and
    C
    4.The
    snow
    turns
    to
    ice
    when
    ______.
    A.it
    gets
    wet
    B.the
    temperature
    gets
    colder
    C.the
    next
    snowfall
    comes
    D.the
    snow
    above
    it
    is
    heavy
    enough
    5.The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    is
    ______.
    A.A
    Strange
    Continent
    B.the
    AntarcticAn
    Ice
    C.Snowfall
    at
    the
    South
    Pole
    D.the
    World’s
    Greatest
    Desert
    Keys:
    1-5
    CCDDB
    高考英语阅读练习(077)
    By
    following
    the
    footsteps
    on
    the
    muddy
    road,
    the
    dog
    guided
    us
    to
    a
    small
    house.I
    waved
    to
    my
    comrades
    and
    we
    came
    near
    to
    a
    window.Looking
    in
    we
    found
    a
    man
    turning
    his
    radio
    set
    or
    operating
    some
    other
    instruments,
    possibly
    trying
    to
    get
    in
    touch
    with
    someone.He
    suddenly
    turned
    round.He
    must
    have
    sensed
    that
    there
    was
    something
    wrong.The
    danger
    he
    was
    in
    hit
    him.He
    picked
    up
    his
    gun,
    opened
    the
    door
    as
    quickly
    as
    possible,
    and
    rushed
    out,
    trying
    to
    flee.He
    was
    out
    of
    breath
    when
    he
    saw
    us
    closing
    in
    and
    let
    out
    a
    cry
    in
    despair(绝望).
    1.What
    does
    the
    phrase
    “closing
    in”
    in
    this
    passage
    mean?
    A.“Shooting
    at”
    B.“Coming
    nearer
    in
    order
    to
    attack”
    C.“Making
    a
    quick
    attack”
    D.“Asking
    someone
    to
    give
    in”
    2.From
    the
    story
    we
    can
    infer
    that
    ______
    A.the
    police
    searched
    for
    a
    spy
    and
    caught
    him
    in
    the
    end
    B.a
    group
    of
    children
    were
    playing
    the
    game
    of
    hide
    and
    seek
    C.the
    police
    found
    the
    man
    by
    chance
    D.the
    man
    was
    brave
    enough
    to
    face
    those
    people
    3.From
    the
    passage,
    we
    can
    imagine
    that
    in
    the
    end
    ______.
    A.
    the
    man
    was
    caught
    easily
    B.the
    man
    was
    caught
    after
    a
    good
    fighting
    C.the
    man
    was
    shot
    dead
    D.the
    man
    would
    rather
    die
    than
    give
    in
    Key:
    1─3
    BAA
    高考英语阅读练习(078)
    When
    my
    first
    wartime
    Christmas
    came,
    I
    was
    in
    basic
    training
    in
    New
    Jersey
    and
    not
    sure
    if
    I
    could
    make
    it
    home
    for
    the
    holidays.Only
    on
    the
    afternoon
    of
    December
    23
    was
    the
    list
    of
    men
    who
    would
    have
    three-day
    passes
    posted.I
    was
    one
    of
    the
    lucky
    soldiers.It
    was
    Christmas
    Eve
    when
    I
    arrived
    home,
    and
    a
    light
    snow
    had
    fallen.Mother
    opened
    the
    front
    door.I
    could
    see
    beyond
    her,
    into
    the
    corner
    of
    the
    living
    room
    where
    the
    tree
    had
    always
    stood.There
    were
    lights,
    all
    colors,
    and
    ornaments(装饰物)shining
    against
    the
    green
    of
    a
    pine.
    “Where
    did
    it
    come
    from?”
    I
    asked.
    “I
    asked
    the
    Gates
    boy
    to
    cut
    it,”
    my
    mother
    said.“I
    wouldn’t
    have
    had
    one
    just
    for
    myself,
    but
    when
    called-oh,
    such
    a
    rush!
    He
    just
    brought
    it
    in
    this
    afternoon…”
    The
    pine
    reached
    to
    the
    proper
    height,
    almost
    to
    the
    ceiling,
    and
    the
    Tree
    Top
    Krystal
    Star
    was
    its
    place.A
    few
    green
    branches
    reached
    about
    a
    little
    awkwardly(不够美观地)at
    the
    side,
    I
    thought,
    and
    there
    was
    a
    bit
    of
    bare
    trunk
    showing
    in
    the
    middle.But
    the
    tree
    filled
    the
    room
    with
    warm
    light
    and
    the
    whole
    house
    with
    the
    pleasant
    smell
    of
    Christmas.
    “It’s
    not
    like
    the
    one
    you
    used
    to
    find,”
    my
    mother
    went
    on.“Yours
    were
    always
    in
    good
    shape.I
    suppose
    the
    Gates
    boy
    didn’t
    know
    where
    to
    look.But
    I
    couldn’t
    be
    fussy(挑剔的).”
    “Don’t
    worry,”
    I
    told
    her.“It’s
    perfect.”
    It
    wasn’t,
    of
    course,
    but
    at
    the
    moment
    I
    realized
    something
    for
    the
    first
    time:
    all
    Christmas
    trees
    are
    perfect.
    1.From
    the
    passage,
    we
    can
    infer
    that
    ______.
    A.the
    writer
    spent
    his
    first
    Christmas
    during
    the
    war
    B.soldiers
    did
    not
    all
    go
    home
    for
    Christmas
    during
    the
    war
    C.all
    the
    soldiers
    had
    three-day
    passes
    D.the
    writer
    could
    not
    go
    home
    for
    Christmas
    2.When
    the
    writer
    got
    home,
    ______.
    A.it
    was
    December
    23
    B.it
    was
    snowing
    heavily
    C.he
    found
    a
    Christmas
    tree
    in
    the
    living
    room
    D.the
    Gates
    boy
    was
    cutting
    a
    Christmas
    tree
    for
    his
    mother
    3.From
    this
    passage,
    we
    can
    conclude
    that
    ______.
    A.the
    writer
    used
    to
    cut
    very
    beautiful
    Christmas
    trees
    B.his
    mother
    didn’t
    like
    perfect
    trees
    C.his
    mother
    didn’t
    want
    to
    have
    a
    tree
    D.the
    writer
    wouldn’t
    have
    a
    tree
    cut
    by
    someone
    else
    4.“All
    Christmas
    trees
    are
    perfect”,
    because
    they
    can
    remind
    you
    of
    ______.
    A.the
    wartime
    B.the
    green
    of
    a
    pine
    C.the
    pleasant
    smell
    D.the
    sweet
    home
    5.The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    would
    be
    “______”.
    A.How
    to
    Choose
    a
    Christmas
    Tree
    B.How
    Soldiers
    Spent
    Christmas
    C.The
    Perfect
    Christmas
    Tree
    D.The
    Christmas
    Without
    a
    Tree
    Key:
    1-5
    BCADC
    高考英语阅读练习(079)
    Nowadays,most
    employees
    of
    local
    high-tech
    industries
    are
    below
    the
    age
    of
    35,and
    for
    newly
    rising
    industries
    such
    as
    computer
    software
    and
    the
    Internet,
    the
    figure
    is
    below
    30.People
    in
    this
    age
    bracket(阶层)
    are
    known
    as
    Generation-X,which
    is
    made
    up
    of
    those
    born
    between
    1963
    and
    1981(i.
    e.
    those
    aged
    between
    17
    and
    35).Compared
    with
    those
    born
    from
    1946
    to
    1960,Generation-X
    are
    typically
    independent,
    they
    also
    have
    their
    shortcomings.Employers
    often
    complain
    that
    Generation-X
    are
    a
    group
    hard
    to
    manage.Although
    willingness
    and
    enthusiasm(热情)are
    highly
    valued
    by
    Generation-X,they
    will
    not
    accept
    orders
    blindly.In
    short,Generation-X
    will
    not
    accept
    authoritarian(权力主义)
    leadership.They
    expect
    their
    leaders
    to
    have
    a
    detailed
    understanding
    of
    the
    job,
    and
    most
    importantly,to
    treat
    them
    as
    an
    important
    member
    of
    them-as
    partners.
    As
    a
    result,
    managing
    Generation-X
    employees
    is
    not
    only
    a
    science
    but
    also
    an
    art.There
    are
    basic
    guidelines
    to
    follow
    in
    managing
    them
    and
    helping
    them
    perform
    at
    their
    best:
    1.Support
    them
    in
    their
    quest(追求)for
    knowledge
    skills;
    2.Room
    for
    creativity
    and
    failure:
    3.Provide
    frequent
    and
    timely
    feedback(反馈);
    4.Provide
    communication
    channels
    If
    managers
    follow
    these
    basic
    guidelines,
    they
    may
    find
    that
    the
    employees
    they
    once
    considered
    as
    young,
    selfish
    and
    uncontrollable
    turn
    out
    to
    be
    responsible,
    energetic
    team
    players.
    1.Generation-X
    in
    this
    article
    refers
    to
    the
    group
    of
    people
    who
    are______.
    A.educated
    employees
    below
    the
    age
    of
    35
    B.young
    hard-working
    workers
    in
    factories
    C.disliked
    by
    the
    managers
    D.born
    after
    the
    year
    of
    1963
    2.From
    the
    article
    we
    know
    that
    the
    writer
    ______.
    A.thinks
    highly
    of
    Generation-X
    B.feels
    disappointed
    with
    Generation-X
    C.has
    a
    perfect
    understanding
    of
    Generation-X
    D.suggests
    that
    the
    managers
    be
    strict
    with
    Generation-X
    3.Employers
    often
    complain
    about
    Generation-X
    because
    ______.
    A.these
    young
    people
    will
    not
    accept
    their
    leadership
    B.they
    don’t
    understand
    their
    employees’
    job
    C.managing
    this
    group
    of
    people
    is
    no
    easy
    job
    D.they
    don’t
    know
    how
    to
    manage
    and
    help
    this
    group
    of
    people
    4.If
    you
    were
    a
    manager
    working
    with
    Generation-X,
    you
    should
    ______.
    A.treat
    them
    as
    equals
    and
    encourage
    them
    to
    try
    new
    ideas
    B.give
    them
    orders
    frequently
    and
    make
    them
    work
    hard
    C.let
    them
    know
    they
    are
    selfish
    and
    uncontrollable
    D.warn
    them
    that
    they
    may
    lose
    jobs
    at
    any
    time
    Key:
    1─4
    ACDAD
    高考英语阅读练习(080)
    A
    spell
    checker
    is
    a
    program
    that
    checks
    the
    spelling
    of
    every
    word
    in
    a
    document
    by
    looking
    up
    each
    word
    in
    its
    dictionary.If
    the
    word
    does
    not
    appear
    in
    the
    dictionary,
    the
    user
    is
    alerted
    to
    a
    possible
    misspelling,
    and
    possible
    corrections
    are
    often
    suggested.Many
    word
    processing(处理)
    programs
    include
    spell
    checkers.An
    effective
    spell
    checker
    needs
    to
    store
    a
    large
    number
    of
    words
    using
    efficient
    data(数据)
    compression(压缩)
    techniques,
    and
    it
    must
    be
    able
    to
    search
    the
    list
    quickly
    with
    a
    binary(二进位的)
    search.A
    spell
    checker
    will
    not
    recognize
    unusual
    proper
    names
    or
    specialized
    terms,
    but
    it
    will
    often
    allow
    you
    to
    create
    your
    own
    personal
    dictionary
    of
    specialized
    words
    you
    often
    use.Spell
    checkers
    are
    valuable
    aids
    to
    proofreading,
    but
    they
    cannot
    catch
    the
    substitution
    of
    one
    correctly
    spelled
    word
    for
    another(such
    as
    form
    for
    from,
    or
    to
    for
    too).Thus
    they
    do
    not
    make
    sure
    that
    a
    document
    is
    free
    of
    spelling
    errors.
    1.Which
    of
    the
    following
    words
    will
    a
    spell
    checker
    not
    be
    able
    to
    recognize?
    A.maximum
    B.minibus
    C.Mickey
    D.Mathilde
    2.Which
    of
    the
    following
    mistakes
    cannot
    a
    spell
    checker
    find?
    A.Tom
    is
    watiting
    for
    Mary
    outsyde
    the
    school
    gate.
    B.Tom
    is
    waiting
    or
    Mary
    outside
    the
    school
    gate.
    C.Tom
    is
    waitting
    or
    Mary
    outside
    the
    school
    gate.
    D.Tum
    is
    waiting
    for
    Mary
    outside
    the
    school
    gate.
    3.What
    does
    the
    word
    “alerted”
    in
    the
    passage
    probably
    mean?
    A.suggested
    B.warned
    C.reminded
    D.led
    Key:
    1-3
    DBB
    高考英语阅读练习(081)
    In
    China
    some
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    use
    hotlines
    to
    encourage
    the
    listeners
    to
    take
    part
    in
    the
    talk
    shows.
    That"s
    a
    good
    idea.
    Yes,
    the
    fact
    is
    some
    people
    do
    nothing
    but
    break
    the
    whole
    programme.
    Some
    people
    know
    little
    about
    the
    topic
    under
    the
    discussion.
    Sometimes
    they
    do
    not
    even
    know
    what
    the
    host(主持人)is
    talking
    about.
    So
    the
    host
    has
    to
    tell
    the
    caller
    what
    the
    show
    is
    about.
    Usually
    the
    caller
    will
    ask
    a
    few
    questions
    which
    express
    his
    hope
    and
    show
    his
    ignorance(无知).
    The
    host
    has
    to
    answer
    and
    explain──how
    silly
    this
    is!
    It
    wastes
    a
    lot
    of
    time.
    It
    seems
    that
    some
    people
    phone
    the
    hotlines
    in
    fun.
    They
    just
    want
    to
    let
    the
    listeners
    hear
    them.
    They
    don"t
    care
    what
    the
    topic
    is,
    whether
    they
    themselves
    are
    interested
    in
    the
    topic
    or
    how
    silly
    they
    appear
    to
    be.
    It"s
    necessary
    for
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    to
    improve
    the
    hotline
    programmes.
    In
    my
    opinion,
    if
    a
    caller
    doesn"t
    know
    what
    is
    going
    on,
    the
    operator
    should
    not
    let
    the
    caller
    take
    part
    in
    it.
    1.
    The
    sentence
    "...some
    people
    do
    nothing
    but
    break
    the
    whole
    programmes
    may
    tell
    us
    that_______.
    A.
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    use
    hotlines
    in
    a
    wrong
    way
    B.
    some
    people
    have
    unclear
    thoughts
    C.
    there
    are
    problems
    to
    solve
    in
    the
    use
    of
    hotlines
    by
    some
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    D.
    the
    use
    of
    hotlines
    by
    some
    radio
    broadcasting
    stations
    is
    a
    good
    idea
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    not
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Some
    people
    do
    not
    know
    what
    the
    host
    is
    talking
    about.
    B.
    Some
    people
    do
    not
    know
    what
    the
    show
    is
    about.
    C.
    Some
    people
    know
    little
    about
    the
    topic
    under
    the
    discussion.
    D.
    The
    writer
    tells
    us
    that
    the
    host
    is
    silly.
    3.
    The
    host
    has
    to
    answer
    and
    explain________.
    A.
    because
    Of
    lots
    of
    questions
    raised
    by
    the
    caller
    B.
    because
    of
    the
    caller"s
    ignorance
    C.
    for
    the
    host
    likes
    talking
    to
    the
    caller
    D.
    for
    the
    host
    works
    hard
    4.
    The
    passage
    doesn"t
    tell
    us
    the
    idea________.
    A.
    that
    some
    listeners
    phone
    the
    hotlines
    in
    fun
    B.
    that
    some
    people
    just
    wont
    to
    be
    heard
    by
    others
    C.
    that
    some
    people
    who
    don"
    t
    care
    what
    the
    topic
    is
    must
    have
    realized
    that
    they
    appear
    to
    be
    silly
    D.
    what
    the
    hotline
    programmes
    are
    Keys:
    1-4
    CDBC
    高考英语阅读练习(082)
    People
    today
    expect
    to
    be
    examined
    when
    they
    enter
    a
    doctor"s
    office.
    At
    least
    they
    expect
    their
    blood
    pressure
    and
    temperature
    to
    be
    measured.
    However,
    as
    recently
    as
    two
    hundred
    years
    ago,
    a
    doctor"s
    treatment
    depended
    on
    talking
    with
    patients.
    In
    general,
    the
    communication
    between
    doctors
    and
    their
    patients
    was
    the
    most
    important
    part
    of
    medical
    methods.
    The
    modem
    age
    of
    medicine
    began
    with
    the
    stethoscope
    ,an
    instrmnent
    for
    listening
    to
    patients
    heartbeat
    and
    breathing.
    Before
    that,
    a
    doctor
    did
    not
    touch
    a
    patient.
    In
    fact,there
    was
    no
    such
    things
    as
    a
    medical
    examination.
    The
    stethoscope──and
    all
    other
    medical
    instruments──-had
    a
    serious
    effect,
    on
    the
    practice
    of
    medicine.
    Doctors
    became
    better
    at
    finding
    the
    medical
    problems.
    More
    lives
    were
    saved.
    At
    the
    same
    time,
    doctors
    gave
    less
    importance
    to
    the
    communication
    between
    patients
    and
    doctors.
    Some
    doctors
    actually
    stopped
    talking
    to
    their
    patients.
    It
    is
    easy
    to
    understand
    why
    some
    sick
    people
    thought
    themselves
    as
    broken
    machines.
    1.
    A
    stethoscope
    can
    be
    used
    to________.
    A.
    check
    health
    conditions
    B.
    cure
    some
    illness
    C.
    measure
    temperature
    D.
    treat
    heart
    disease
    2.
    Doctors
    gave
    less
    importance
    to
    the
    communication
    between
    patients
    and
    doctors
    mainly
    because________.
    A.
    modern
    medical
    instruments
    were
    used
    B.
    they
    could
    cure
    more
    diseases
    and
    save
    more
    lives
    C.
    they
    had
    much
    more
    medical
    experience
    than
    before
    D.
    they
    were
    too
    busy
    to
    have
    time
    to
    talk
    with
    patients
    3.
    Some
    sick
    people
    thought
    of
    themselves
    as
    broken
    machines,
    which
    suggested
    that_______.
    A.
    modern
    doctors
    should
    treat
    their
    patients
    as
    machines
    B.
    the
    level
    of
    the
    treatment
    was
    greatly
    improved
    C.
    they
    thought
    they
    were
    useless
    just
    like
    broken
    machines
    D.
    they
    were
    not
    satisfied
    with
    the
    manner
    in
    which
    doctors
    treated
    them
    4.
    The
    best
    title
    for
    this
    passage
    should
    be________.
    A.
    Medical
    Methods
    of
    Two
    Hundred
    Years
    Ago
    B.
    The
    Development
    of
    Medical
    Methods
    C.
    The
    Modem
    Age
    of
    Medicine
    D.
    The
    Use
    of
    the
    Stethoscope
    Keys:
    1-4
    AADB
    高考英语阅读练习(083)
    We
    may
    be
    very
    pleased
    with
    the
    rapid
    progress
    we
    have
    made
    in
    every
    field
    of
    study.
    But
    the
    way
    to
    test
    a
    student"s
    knowledge
    and
    ability
    still
    remains
    as
    poor
    as
    it
    was,
    We
    have
    almost
    done
    nothing
    to
    improve
    our
    examination
    system.
    It
    is
    well
    known
    that
    the
    examination
    system
    we
    are
    now
    using
    may
    be
    a
    good
    way
    of
    testing
    a
    student"s
    memory,
    but
    it
    can
    tell
    you
    nothing
    about
    a
    student"s
    ability.
    It
    does
    no
    good
    to
    students
    and
    teachers.
    As
    soon
    as
    a
    child
    begins
    school,he
    enters
    a
    world
    of
    examination
    that
    will
    decide
    his
    future
    of
    job.
    In
    fact
    a
    good
    examination
    system
    should
    train
    a
    student
    to
    think
    for
    himself.
    But
    it
    now
    does
    nothing
    about
    that.
    So
    students
    are
    encouraged
    to
    member
    what
    is
    taught.
    It
    does
    not
    enable
    them
    to
    gain
    more
    and
    note
    knowledge.
    The
    students
    who
    come
    out
    first
    in
    the
    examination
    often
    may
    not
    be
    the
    best
    in
    their
    studies.
    Besides,
    the
    examinations
    often
    force
    teachers
    to
    train
    students
    what
    to
    do
    with
    the
    coming
    examination
    from
    time
    to
    time.
    There
    must
    be
    some
    simpler
    and
    better
    way
    to
    test
    a
    student"
    s
    ability
    besides
    knowledge.
    And
    that
    is
    what
    we
    should
    do
    at
    once.
    1.
    Now
    little
    has
    been
    done
    to________.
    A.
    decide
    a
    student"s
    job
    B.
    test
    a
    student"s
    ability
    C.
    test
    a
    student"s
    knowledge
    D.
    test
    a
    student"s
    memory
    2.
    The
    examination
    system
    we
    are
    now
    using
    can
    only
    make
    the
    students________.
    A.
    gain
    more
    and
    more
    knowledge
    B.
    make
    rapid
    progress
    C.
    remember
    what
    is
    taught
    D.
    think
    for
    themselves
    3.
    In
    order
    to
    make
    students
    gain
    high
    marks
    in
    the
    coming
    examination,
    teachers
    have
    to________.
    A.
    develop
    their
    students"
    ability
    B.
    fill
    their
    students"
    heads
    with
    much
    information
    C.
    teach
    freely
    D.
    teach
    their
    students
    how
    to
    study
    4.
    The
    passage
    tells
    us
    about
    the
    importance
    of________.
    A.
    getting
    examination
    system
    improved
    B.
    taking
    examinations
    C.
    testing
    a
    student"
    s
    knowledge
    D.
    working
    hard
    at
    all
    lessons
    Keys:
    1-4
    BCBA
    高考英语阅读练习(084)
    Some
    English
    words
    are
    made
    up
    of
    the
    same
    part
    and
    have
    different
    beginnings
    and
    different
    endings,
    such
    as
    import,
    report
    and
    transport.
    All
    these
    words,
    you
    can
    see,
    have
    the
    same
    root
    "port",
    which
    comes
    from
    the
    Latin
    word,
    meaning"to
    carry"or"to
    move"from
    one
    place
    to
    another.
    And
    according
    to
    the
    bit
    at
    the
    beginning-
    which
    we
    call
    the
    prefix(~S~)
    -the
    meaning
    changes:
    "import"
    means
    "to......
    carry
    in”
    or
    "to
    bring
    into
    a
    country”;
    export
    ,
    "ex"
    means
    "out
    of"
    ,
    so
    this
    word
    means
    "to
    carry
    out
    of
    a
    country";
    "re"
    means
    "back”,
    so
    the
    word
    "report”
    means
    "to
    tell
    somebody
    to
    bring
    back
    information
    to
    somebody";
    "transport",
    "trans"
    means
    "across"
    and
    it
    means
    "
    to
    carry
    across
    one
    place
    to
    another".
    Let"s
    look
    at
    the
    following
    words:
    supporter,
    reporter,
    importer
    and
    exporter.
    You
    can
    see
    that
    in
    this
    case
    these
    words
    are
    nouns
    which
    are
    made
    up
    of
    the
    verbs
    plus
    a
    suffix(后辍)
    ,thus
    meaning
    a
    person
    who
    completes
    the
    verb.
    So
    supporter
    means
    somebody
    who
    supports.
    A
    reporter
    is
    somebody
    who
    reports.
    Importer
    is
    somebody
    who
    imports
    and
    exporter
    is
    somebody
    who
    exports,
    and
    so
    on.
    1.
    In
    the
    sentence
    "Some
    English
    words
    are
    made
    up
    of
    the
    same
    part…"",
    "part"
    means
    _______.
    A.
    different
    beginnings
    and
    different
    endings
    B.
    the
    root
    of
    a
    word
    C.
    the
    same
    root
    which
    has
    different
    meanings
    D.
    the
    same
    part
    which
    has
    several
    meanings
    2.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    not
    true
    according
    to
    the
    passage?
    A.
    Apart
    from"port”,
    most
    English
    words
    have
    the
    same
    root
    which
    comes
    from
    the
    Latin
    word.
    B.
    "Port"
    has
    the
    root
    meaning
    "to
    move”
    from
    one
    place
    to
    another.
    C.
    "Port”
    is
    the
    root
    forming
    some
    English
    words.
    D.
    The
    root
    "port"
    means
    "to
    carry".
    3.
    By
    adding
    a
    prefix
    or
    a
    suffix
    to
    a
    root,
    we
    can
    get
    a
    word
    which
    has_______.
    A.
    a
    different
    meaning
    B.
    a
    lot
    of
    meanings
    C.
    the
    meaning
    of
    a
    Latin
    word
    D.
    the
    meaning
    of
    "in"
    or"
    out
    of"
    4.
    We
    can
    get
    a
    noun_________.
    A.
    by
    adding
    a
    suffix
    to
    a
    verb
    B.
    by
    changing
    a
    prefix
    C.
    just
    by
    adding
    "er"
    to
    verbs
    D.
    only
    by
    adding"
    er"
    to
    a
    root
    Keys:
    1-4
    BAAA
    高考英语阅读练习(085)
    To
    lift
    something
    from
    the
    floor
    correctly,
    first
    bend
    your
    knees
    and
    squat
    down.
    Keep
    your
    back
    and
    hips(臀部)
    and
    waist
    (腰部)
    in
    a
    line.
    If
    you
    bend
    over,
    the
    muscles
    (
    ~
    I$1
    )
    in
    your
    lower
    back
    can
    become
    hurt
    easily.
    If
    you
    keep
    your
    back
    and
    hips
    straight,
    the
    muscles
    are
    stronger,
    because
    they
    have
    much
    more
    support.
    The
    other
    muscles
    can
    then
    help
    the
    lower
    back
    muscles.
    As
    you
    squat
    down,
    try
    to
    get
    close
    to
    the
    object
    as
    possible.
    For
    example,
    if
    you
    are
    going
    to
    pick
    up
    a
    heavy
    box,
    squat
    down
    directly
    in
    front
    of
    it.
    Maybe
    you
    will
    have
    to
    spread
    your
    knees
    and
    legs.
    Put
    one
    knee
    on
    each
    side
    of
    the
    box.
    Remember
    at
    all
    times
    to
    keep
    your
    back
    straight.
    Put
    your
    hands
    under
    the
    object
    that
    is
    in
    front
    of
    you,
    between
    your
    knees.
    To
    lift
    the
    object,
    you
    should
    stand
    up
    slowly.
    Use
    your
    muscles
    in
    order
    to
    stand
    up.
    In
    other
    words,
    lift
    with
    your
    legs,
    not
    with
    your
    back.
    1.
    The
    underlined
    word
    "squat"
    means________.
    A.
    to
    bend
    over
    your
    waist
    B.
    to
    bend
    yourself
    by
    bending
    your
    legs
    C.
    to
    lower
    yourself
    by
    bending
    your
    legs
    D.
    to
    stand
    straight
    2.
    You
    should
    keep
    your
    back
    straight
    so
    that________.
    A.
    the
    muscles
    can"
    t
    be
    hurt
    B.
    the
    muscles
    will
    have
    more
    support
    C.
    you
    seem
    to
    be
    stranger
    D.
    you
    will
    get
    more
    muscles
    3.
    The
    correct
    way
    to
    lift
    something
    heavy
    from
    the
    floor
    is________.
    A.
    to
    bend
    over
    from
    your
    waist
    first
    B.
    to
    bend
    your
    knees
    and
    squat
    down
    first
    C.
    to
    keep
    your
    back
    in
    a
    line
    D.
    to
    put
    your
    hands
    under
    the
    object
    4.
    What
    lifts
    the
    object
    in
    fact?
    A.
    The
    muaelea
    of
    your
    arms.
    B.
    The
    muscles
    of
    your
    back.
    C.
    Your
    hands.
    D.
    Your
    leg
    muscles.
    Keys:
    1-4
    CBBD
    高考英语阅读练习(086)
    In
    1977,
    a
    dead
    author
    of
    detective
    stories
    saved
    the
    life
    of
    a
    19-month-old
    baby
    in
    a
    most
    unusual
    way.
    The
    author
    was
    Agatha
    Christie,
    one
    of
    the
    most
    successful
    writers
    of
    detective
    stories
    in
    the
    world.
    In
    June
    1977,
    a
    baby
    girl
    became
    seriously
    ill
    in
    Qatar,
    near
    Saudi
    Arabia.
    Doctors
    were
    unable
    to
    find
    out
    the
    cause
    of
    her
    illness
    with
    confidence,
    so
    she
    was
    sent
    to
    Hammersmith
    Hospital
    in
    London.
    She
    was
    then
    only
    semi-conscious
    and
    on
    the
    "Dangerously
    Ill"
    list.
    A
    team
    of
    doctors
    hurried
    to
    examine
    the
    baby
    only
    to
    discover
    that
    they,
    too,
    were
    confused
    by
    the
    very
    unusual
    symptoms
    (症状).
    While
    they
    were
    discussing
    the
    baby"s
    case,
    a
    nurse
    asked
    to
    speak
    to
    them.
    "Excuse
    me,"
    said
    Nurse
    Marsha
    Maitlan,
    "but
    I
    think
    the
    baby
    is
    suffering
    from
    thallium
    (铊)
    poisoning."
    "What
    makes
    you
    think
    that?"
    Dr.
    Brown
    asked.
    "Thallium
    poisoning
    is
    extremely
    rare."
    "A
    few
    days
    ago,
    I
    was
    reading
    a
    novel
    called
    A
    Pale
    Horse
    by
    Agatha
    Christie,"
    Nurse
    Maitlan
    explained.
    "In
    the
    book,
    somebody
    uses
    thallium
    poison,
    and
    all
    the
    symptoms
    are
    described.
    They"re
    exactly
    the
    same
    as
    the
    baby"s."
    "You"re
    very
    thoughtful
    and
    you
    may
    be
    right,"
    another
    doctor
    said.
    "We"ll
    carry
    out
    some
    tests
    and
    find
    out
    whether
    it"s
    thallium
    or
    not."
    Tests
    showed
    that
    the
    baby
    had
    indeed
    been
    poisoned
    by
    thallium,
    a
    rare
    metallic
    substance
    used
    in
    making
    special
    glass.
    Once
    they
    knew
    the
    cause
    of
    the
    illness,
    the
    doctors
    were
    able
    to
    give
    the
    baby
    the
    correct
    treatment.
    She
    soon
    recovered
    and
    was
    sent
    back
    to
    Qatar.
    Later
    it
    was
    reported
    that
    the
    poison
    might
    have
    come
    from
    an
    insecticide
    (杀虫剂)
    used
    in
    Qatar.
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    The
    one
    who
    first
    suggested
    the
    correct
    cause
    of
    the
    baby"s
    illness
    was
    _____.
    A.
    a
    doctor
    in
    Qatar
    B.
    Nurse
    Maitlan
    C.
    Dr.
    Brown
    D.
    Agatha
    Christie
    2.
    The
    baby
    was
    sent
    to
    London
    because
    _____.
    A.
    she
    was
    born
    there
    B.
    the
    hospitals
    in
    Qatar
    were
    full
    at
    that
    time
    C.
    she
    was
    the
    daughter
    of
    a
    doctor
    in
    London
    D.
    the
    Qatar
    doctors
    were
    not
    sure
    whether
    they
    could
    cure
    her
    3.
    As
    far
    as
    we
    can
    tell
    from
    the
    passage,
    Agatha
    Christie
    _____.
    A.
    had
    never
    met
    this
    baby
    B.
    had
    spent
    a
    long
    time
    studying
    the
    baby"s
    case
    C.
    visited
    the
    baby
    in
    the
    hospital
    at
    Hammersmith
    D.
    gave
    Nurse
    Maitlan
    some
    advice
    on
    the
    phone
    4.
    It
    seems
    likely
    from
    the
    passage
    that
    the
    baby"s
    illness
    had
    something
    to
    do
    with
    _____.
    A.
    a
    dangerous
    pair
    of
    glasses
    B.
    the
    water
    in
    Qatar
    C.
    a
    harmful
    substance
    used
    to
    kill
    insects
    D.
    a
    dead
    writer
    5.
    When
    the
    baby
    was
    sent
    to
    the
    hospital
    in
    London,
    her
    case
    was
    considered
    to
    be
    _____.
    A.
    an
    urgent
    one
    B.
    quite
    a
    simple
    one
    C.
    a
    usual
    one
    D.
    the
    result
    of
    thallium
    poisoning
    Keys:
    BDACA
    高考英语阅读练习(087)
    The
    expensive
    shops
    in
    a
    famous
    arcade
    (有拱廊的街道)
    near
    Piccadilly
    were
    just
    opening.
    At
    this
    time
    of
    the
    morning,
    the
    arcade
    was
    almost
    empty.
    Mr.
    Taylor,
    the
    owner
    of
    a
    jewellery
    shop
    was
    admiring
    a
    new
    window
    display.
    Two
    of
    his
    assistants
    had
    been
    working
    busily
    since
    8
    o"clock
    and
    had
    only
    just
    finished.
    Diamond
    necklaces
    and
    rings
    had
    been
    beautifully
    arranged
    on
    a
    background
    of
    black
    velvet
    (丝绒).
    After
    gazing
    at
    the
    display
    for
    several
    minutes,
    Mr.
    Taylor
    went
    back
    into
    his
    shop.
    The
    silence
    was
    suddenly
    broken
    when
    a
    large
    car,
    with
    its
    headlights
    on
    and
    its
    horn
    blaring
    (喇叭响声),
    roared
    down
    the
    arcade.
    it
    came
    to
    stop
    outside
    the
    jeweller"s.
    One
    man
    stayed
    at
    the
    wheel
    two
    others
    with
    black
    stockings
    over
    their
    faces
    jumped
    out
    and
    smashed
    the
    window
    of
    the
    shop
    with
    iron
    bars.
    While
    this
    was
    going
    on,
    Mr.
    Taylor
    was
    upstairs.
    He
    and
    his
    staff
    began
    throwing
    furniture
    out
    of
    the
    window.
    Chairs
    and
    tables
    went
    flying
    into
    the
    arcade.
    One
    of
    the
    thieves
    was
    struck
    by
    a
    heavy
    stature,
    but
    he
    was
    too
    busy
    helping
    himself
    to
    diamonds
    to
    notice
    any
    pain.
    The
    raid
    (袭击)
    was
    all
    over
    in
    three
    minutes,
    for
    the
    men
    scram-bled
    back
    into
    the
    car
    and
    it
    moved
    off
    at
    an
    unbelievable
    speed.
    Just
    as
    it
    was
    leaving,
    Mr.
    Taylor
    rushed
    out
    and
    ran
    after
    it
    throwing
    ashtrays
    (烟灰缸)
    and
    vases,
    but
    it
    was
    impossible
    to
    stop
    the
    thieves.
    They
    had
    got
    away
    with
    thousands
    of
    pounds
    worth
    of
    diamonds.
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    The
    expensive
    shops
    in
    ____
    were
    just
    opening.
    A.
    Piccadilly"s
    famous
    arcade
    B.
    a
    Piccadilly
    famous
    arcade
    C.
    a
    famous
    Piccadilly
    arcade
    D.
    the
    famous
    arcade
    of
    Piccadilly
    2.
    Had
    one
    of
    the
    thieves
    not
    been
    so
    busy
    taking
    the
    diamonds,
    he
    ____
    the
    blow.
    A.
    would
    feel
    B.
    had
    been
    feeling
    C.
    had
    felt
    D.
    would
    have
    felt
    3.
    While
    Mr.
    Taylor
    was
    admiring
    the
    new
    window
    display
    ____.
    A.
    his
    two
    assistants
    were
    arranging
    jewellery
    in
    the
    window
    B.
    some
    thieves
    were
    arranging
    C.
    he
    was
    standing
    inside
    his
    shop
    D.
    his
    staff
    were
    finishing
    their
    work
    for
    the
    day
    4.
    The
    car
    headlights
    were
    on
    and
    its
    horn
    blaring
    ____.
    A.
    as
    the
    thieves
    wanted
    to
    warn
    people
    out
    of
    their
    way
    B.
    as
    a
    special
    signal
    to
    the
    assistants
    C.
    as
    the
    thieves
    could
    see
    where
    they
    were
    going
    D.
    to
    break
    the
    early
    morning
    silence.
    5.
    The
    thieves
    chose
    Mr.
    Taylor"s
    shop
    because
    ____.
    A.
    it
    was
    early
    in
    the
    morning
    and
    not
    many
    shop
    were
    open
    B.
    they
    didn"t
    expect
    Mr.
    Taylor
    and
    his
    staff
    to
    try
    and
    stop
    them
    C.
    it
    usually
    had
    a
    great
    deal
    of
    valuable
    jewellery
    on
    display
    D.
    they
    had
    a
    very
    fast
    car
    to
    get
    away
    in
    Keys:
    CDBAC
    高考英语阅读练习(088)
    Mary
    and
    Peter
    were
    having
    a
    picnic
    with
    some
    friends
    near
    a
    river
    when
    Mary
    notice
    an
    object
    overhead.
    "Look!"
    she
    shouted
    to
    her
    friends.
    "That"s
    a
    spaceship
    up
    there
    and
    it"s
    going
    to
    land
    here."
    Frightened
    by
    the
    strange
    silver-colored
    spaceship,
    most
    of
    the
    young
    people
    got
    in
    their
    cars
    and
    drove
    away
    quickly.
    Peter
    was
    fond
    of
    Mary
    and
    always
    stayed
    close
    to
    her.
    They,
    more
    curious
    than
    frightened,
    watched
    the
    spaceship
    land
    and
    saw
    a
    door
    open.
    When
    nobody
    came
    out,
    they
    went
    to
    the
    spaceship
    and
    entered
    inside.
    Peter
    followed
    Mary
    into
    the
    spaceship
    and
    did
    not
    hear
    the
    door
    closed
    behind
    him.
    The
    temperature
    fell
    rapidly
    and
    the
    two
    young
    people
    lost
    consciousness.
    When
    they
    woke
    up,
    they
    were
    surprised
    to
    see
    that
    they
    were
    back
    by
    the
    river
    again.
    The
    spaceship
    had
    gone.
    Their
    car
    was
    nearby.
    "What
    happened?"
    asked
    Mary.
    Peter
    scratched
    (抓)
    his
    head,
    saying
    slowly,
    "Don"t
    ask
    me.
    Perhaps
    we
    had
    a
    dream.
    Did
    you...Did
    you
    see
    a
    spaceship?"
    "Yes,"
    said
    Mary.
    "And
    we
    both
    went
    into
    it.
    Then..."
    she
    looked
    at
    her
    wrist.
    "That"s
    funny.
    My
    watch
    has
    stopped.
    Oh,
    well,
    come
    on.
    It"s
    time
    to
    go
    home."
    Driving
    about
    fifty
    meters,
    they
    found
    their
    way
    blocked
    by
    a
    thick
    wall
    made
    of
    something
    like
    glass.
    They
    got
    out
    of
    the
    car
    and
    tried
    to
    find
    their
    way
    round
    the
    wall
    but
    discovered
    that
    they
    were
    inside
    a
    circular
    wall.
    It
    was
    like
    a
    mirror
    and
    prevented
    them
    from
    seeing
    through
    it.
    On
    the
    other
    side
    of
    the
    wall,
    strange
    creatures
    walked
    past
    slowly.
    A
    few
    stopped
    to
    stare
    through
    the
    wall
    and
    read
    a
    new
    notice
    which,
    translated
    into
    English,
    said:
    "New
    arrivals
    at
    the
    zoo:
    a
    pair
    of
    Earthlings
    in
    their
    natural
    surroundings
    with
    their
    mobile
    house."
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    When
    the
    spaceship
    arrived,
    why
    didn"t
    Peter
    drive
    away?
    A.
    He
    did
    not
    like
    leaving
    Mary.
    B.
    He
    knew
    that
    the
    spaceship
    was
    harmless.
    C.
    He
    was
    too
    frightened
    to
    drive.
    D.
    There
    was
    a
    wall
    blocking
    the
    road.
    2.
    Why
    did
    Peter
    enter
    the
    spaceship?
    A.
    He
    saw
    the
    food
    and
    was
    hungry.
    B.
    Mary
    told
    him
    to
    enter
    it.
    C.
    He
    just
    followed
    Mary.
    D.
    He
    wanted
    to
    study
    it.
    3.
    Peter
    scratched
    his
    head
    so
    we
    know
    that
    _____.
    A.
    he
    had
    lost
    consciousness
    B.
    he
    was
    puzzled
    and
    did
    not
    know
    what
    to
    say
    to
    Mary
    C.
    he
    had
    lost
    his
    memory
    D.
    he
    was
    still
    half
    asleep
    4.
    What
    do
    the
    words
    "strange
    creatures"
    mean
    to
    tell
    us?
    A.
    They
    were
    wild
    animals
    in
    a
    zoo.
    B.
    They
    were
    robbers.
    C.
    They
    had
    landed
    on
    Earth
    in
    a
    spaceship
    and
    lived
    there.
    D.
    The
    young
    couple
    were
    on
    another
    planet.
    5.
    Which
    word
    in
    the
    notice
    tells
    us
    that
    Mary
    and
    Peter
    were
    not
    on
    earth?
    A.
    natural
    B.
    surroundings
    C.
    Earthlings
    D.
    house
    Keys:
    ACBDC
    高考英语阅读练习(089)
    It
    began
    as
    a
    game:
    high
    school
    and
    college
    students
    studying
    computer
    technology
    figured
    out
    (领会到,想象出来)
    they
    could
    use
    personal
    computers
    to
    break
    into
    (闯入)
    telephone
    company
    computers
    and
    make
    free,
    long-distance
    telephone
    calls.
    These
    young
    computer
    wizards
    (奇才)
    soon
    gained
    the
    nickname
    "hackers
    (黑客)".
    Police
    put
    the
    collar
    on
    (拘留,逮捕)
    a
    few
    hackers,
    but
    many
    went
    on
    to
    even
    more
    complex
    hacking.
    One
    hacker
    was
    arrested
    for
    making
    illegal
    telephone
    calls
    and
    later
    used
    a
    jailhouse
    (监狱)
    phone
    to
    alter
    (变更)
    a
    police
    officer"s
    credit
    records
    (信用记录)
    to
    get
    back
    at
    (报复)
    the
    officer
    for
    arresting
    him.
    The
    hacker
    also
    used
    a
    computer
    to
    alter
    his
    college
    records
    to
    give
    himself
    better
    grades.
    As
    hackers
    gained
    experience,
    they
    began
    invading
    (侵入)
    computers
    at
    banks,
    airlines
    and
    other
    businesses.
    In
    one
    scheme
    (计划,方案),
    a
    hacker
    instructed
    an
    airline"s
    computer
    to
    give
    him
    free
    airplane
    tickets.
    The
    U.S.
    government
    is
    worried
    hackers
    may
    break
    into
    its
    sophisticated
    (复杂的,尖端的)
    networks
    of
    defense
    computers.
    The
    government"s
    classified
    (分类的)
    secrets
    are
    vulnerable
    (脆弱的)
    because
    thousands
    of
    government
    computers
    are
    connected
    by
    telephone
    lines
    that
    hackers
    can
    tap
    into
    (敲入,进入).
    In
    November
    1988,
    a
    college
    student
    tapped
    into
    a
    non-classified
    U.S.
    Defense
    Department
    computer
    network
    called
    Arpanet.
    The
    hacker
    injected
    (输入,注入)
    a
    computer
    program
    that
    left
    copies
    of
    itself
    throughout
    Arpanet.
    Some
    hackers
    use
    each
    "viruses
    (病毒)"
    to
    destroy
    all
    the
    data
    in
    a
    computer.
    But
    in
    this
    case,
    government
    officials
    shut
    down
    the
    network
    before
    the
    program
    reached
    every
    computer
    in
    the
    system.
    Shutting
    down
    the
    system
    angered
    many
    researchers
    who
    were
    using
    the
    computers.
    The
    hacker
    turned
    himself
    in
    (自首)
    to
    police
    and
    told
    them
    how
    to
    get
    his
    program
    out
    of
    the
    computer
    system.
    He
    was
    charged
    with
    a
    crime.
    The
    incident
    put
    the
    spotlight
    on
    (引起留意)
    computer
    hacking
    in
    the
    United
    States.
    Many
    companies
    have
    hired
    experts
    to
    protect
    their
    computers
    from
    hackers,
    and
    many
    computer
    experts
    now
    advise
    companies
    on
    how
    to
    protect
    their
    computers.
    The
    U.S.
    government
    believes
    foreign
    governments
    have
    hired
    hackers
    to
    try
    to
    break
    into
    top-secret
    (绝密的)
    defense
    computers.
    It
    fears
    a
    hacker
    could
    inject
    a
    virus
    into
    military
    computers
    that
    would
    erase
    all
    the
    data
    during
    a
    war.
    Experts
    disagree
    over
    whether
    a
    computer
    network
    can
    ever
    be
    safe
    from
    hacking.
    But
    in
    the
    future,
    some
    of
    the
    most
    brilliant
    (杰出的,卓越的)
    minds
    in
    the
    U.S.
    will
    be
    working
    to
    frustrate
    (挫败)
    the
    efforts
    of
    computer
    hackers
    and
    spies.
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    The
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    article
    is
    _____.
    A.
    computer
    hackers
    only
    want
    to
    make
    free
    long-distance
    phone
    calls
    B.
    the
    government
    wants
    to
    hire
    computer
    hackers
    to
    spy
    on
    the
    Russians
    C.
    computer
    hackers
    are
    a
    threat
    to
    private
    companies
    and
    government
    secrets
    D.
    many
    companies
    have
    hired
    experts
    to
    protect
    their
    computers
    from
    hackers
    who
    carry
    viruses
    2.
    A
    computer
    "virus"
    is
    like
    a
    human
    virus
    because
    it
    _____.
    A.
    makes
    a
    computer
    cough
    and
    throw
    up
    B.
    spreads
    from
    one
    computer
    to
    other
    computers
    C.
    can
    erase
    a
    person"s
    doctor
    bills
    D.
    requires
    regular
    visits
    to
    a
    doctor
    3.
    A
    hacker
    can
    be
    dangerous
    because
    _____.
    A.
    he
    knows
    how
    to
    make
    free
    long-distance
    telephone
    calls
    B.
    vital
    information
    is
    stored
    in
    computers,
    and
    a
    hacker
    knows
    how
    to
    change
    or
    erase
    the
    information
    C.
    once
    in
    jail,
    he
    can
    use
    a
    telephone
    to
    operate
    his
    computer
    D.
    a
    hacker
    who
    steals
    a
    free
    airplane
    ticket
    might
    deprive
    a
    doctor
    of
    that
    seat
    on
    the
    airplane
    4.
    U.S.
    government
    computers
    are
    vulnerable
    to
    a
    hacker
    because
    _____.
    A.
    the
    government
    always
    pays
    its
    telephone
    bills
    on
    time
    B.
    the
    Russians
    know
    what"s
    in
    the
    U.S.
    computers
    C.
    viruses
    attack
    only
    government
    computers
    D.
    many
    government
    computers
    are
    connected
    by
    telephone
    lines
    5.
    In
    the
    future
    _____.
    A.
    Some
    of
    the
    most
    brilliant
    minds
    in
    America
    will
    be
    working
    to
    try
    to
    stop
    computer
    hackers
    and
    spies
    B.
    hackers
    will
    begin
    invading
    computers
    at
    banks,
    airlines
    and
    other
    businesses
    C.
    many
    computer
    hackers
    will
    be
    arrested
    for
    making
    free
    telephone
    calls
    D.
    some
    computer
    hackers
    will
    turn
    themselves
    in
    to
    the
    police
    Keys:
    CBBDA
    高考英语阅读练习(090)
    Animal
    experimentation(实验)
    is
    the
    backbone(支柱,基础)
    of
    American
    research
    and
    treatment
    of
    disease.
    Each
    year,
    17
    million
    to
    22
    million
    animals
    are
    sacrificed
    in
    the
    name
    of(以......的名义)
    science.
    While
    90
    percent
    of
    them
    are
    rats
    and
    mice,
    180,000
    dogs,
    50,000
    cats,
    61,000
    monkeys
    and
    554,000
    rabbits
    are
    done
    away
    with
    in
    laboratories
    operated
    by
    industry
    and
    government.
    But
    the
    public
    has
    raised
    an
    outcry(导致抗议)
    over
    these
    deaths.
    Spurred(驱策,刺激)
    vivid(生动的)
    reports
    of
    cruelty(残忍),
    the
    animal
    rights
    movement(维护动物权利运动)
    is
    made
    up
    of
    (由...组成)7,000
    organizations
    with
    10
    million
    members.
    They"ve
    documented(用文件或证书等证实)
    cases
    in
    which
    monkeys
    were
    isolated(隔离)
    in
    steel
    tanks(箱、柜)
    for
    45
    days
    and
    dogs
    were
    bombarded(轰击、辐射)
    with
    radiation(放射线)
    or
    chemicals
    until
    they
    bled
    from
    the
    mouth.
    Scientists
    say
    such
    incidents(事件)
    are
    rare.
    Laws
    have
    been
    passed
    to
    govern(治理)
    testing.
    Many
    research
    centers
    now
    have
    committees(委员会)
    to
    review(审查)
    all
    proposed
    animal
    experiments,
    and
    computers
    can
    be
    used
    in
    place
    of(代替)animals
    in
    many
    experiments.
    But
    scientists
    say
    they
    can"t
    do
    without(不用,放弃)
    animals
    to
    test
    new
    drugs
    and
    treatments
    on
    animals
    to
    make
    sure
    they"re
    safe
    for
    humans.
    Animal
    experiments
    produced
    vaccines(疫苗)
    or
    treatments
    for
    diseases
    such
    as
    diabetes(糖尿病),
    and
    techniques
    used
    in
    open
    heart
    surgery(心脏外科手术).
    They"re
    important
    to
    efforts
    to
    find
    a
    treatment
    for
    AIDS.
    Animal
    rights
    activists
    have
    shown
    they
    will
    go
    to
    almost
    any
    length(奉陪到底).
    One
    New
    York
    researcher
    received
    more
    than
    10,000
    protest(抗议)
    letters
    following
    publicity(公开)
    of
    her
    experiments
    in
    which
    she
    gave
    drugs
    to
    monkeys.
    The
    researcher
    was
    studying
    drug
    addiction(依靠,成瘾).
    A
    protester
    was
    arrested
    in
    Connecticut
    for
    placing
    a
    pipe
    bomb(铁管土炸药)outside
    a
    company
    that
    used
    animals
    in
    tests.
    After
    fires
    and
    break-ins(闯入,破门而入),
    many
    labs
    have
    bought
    electronic
    locks
    and
    alarms
    for
    protection.
    Other
    targets(目标,对象)
    of
    the
    animal
    rights
    movement
    are
    the
    fur
    industry,
    farms,
    and
    school
    biology(生物学)
    classes
    in
    which
    children
    dissect(解剖)
    frogs.
    The
    movement
    has
    scored
    some
    successes(获得某些成功).
    A
    dozen
    states
    no
    longer
    allow
    pounds(兽栏)
    ──
    places
    that
    accept
    dogs
    and
    cats
    that
    have
    no
    homes
    ──
    to
    sell
    animals
    to
    scientists.
    Scientists
    claim
    the
    cost
    of
    their
    work
    will
    rise
    as
    a
    result.
    The
    battle
    between
    scientists
    and
    activists
    raises
    a
    basic
    question:
    Can
    modern
    society
    be
    both
    humane(仁慈的)
    in
    its
    treatment
    of
    living
    things(生物)
    and
    advanced(先进的,高级的)
    in
    its
    treatment
    of
    disease?
    It
    seems
    certain
    there
    will
    be
    new
    restrictions(限制,约束)
    placed
    on
    the
    use
    of
    animals
    in
    scientific
    experiments.
    Choose
    the
    correct
    answer.
    1.
    The
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    article
    is
    _____.
    A.
    fewer
    animals
    should
    be
    taken
    to
    laboratories
    B.
    Americans
    are
    questioning
    the
    use
    of
    animals
    in
    experiments
    C.
    mice
    and
    rats
    make
    the
    best
    subjects
    for
    experiments
    D.
    scientific
    experiments
    can
    be
    carried
    out
    without
    animals
    2.
    Animal
    experiments
    will
    probably
    continue
    because
    _____.
    A.
    scientists
    insist
    they
    are
    harmless
    B.
    the
    groups
    that
    oppose
    them
    aren"t
    very
    big
    or
    powerful
    C.
    they
    are
    critical
    for
    understanding
    and
    curing
    human
    disease
    D.
    there
    are
    enough
    regulations
    to
    protect
    animals
    from
    abuse
    3.
    Proponents
    of
    animal
    rights
    are
    most
    convincing
    when
    they
    _____.
    A.
    explode
    bombs
    at
    laboratories
    that
    conduct
    scientific
    tests
    B.
    point
    out
    the
    diseases
    that
    have
    been
    cured
    by
    scientists
    C.
    threat
    their
    own
    pets
    kindly
    D.
    give
    examples
    of
    animals
    that
    were
    mistreated
    in
    labs
    4.
    The
    animal
    rights
    movement
    is
    _____.
    A.
    not
    very
    successful
    in
    passing
    laws
    to
    protect
    animals
    B.
    trying
    many
    different
    approaches
    to
    accomplish
    its
    goals
    C.
    more
    interested
    in
    protecting
    dogs
    than
    in
    protecting
    mice
    D.
    supported
    mostly
    by
    people
    who
    dislike
    scientists
    5.
    Scientists
    will
    be
    satisfied
    only
    if
    _____.
    A.
    they
    can
    continue
    using
    animals
    in
    their
    experiments
    B.
    the
    animal
    rights
    movement
    comes
    to
    a
    halt
    C.
    they
    install
    locks
    and
    alarms
    on
    their
    labs
    D.
    their
    supply
    of
    animals
    is
    increased
    significantly
    Keys:
    BCDBA
    高考英语阅读练习(091)
    A
    Father’s
    day
    is
    a
    day
    set
    aside
    for
    honouring
    fathers
    in
    church
    services
    and
    in
    the
    home.
    It’s
    celebrated
    in
    the
    U.S.
    in
    the
    third
    Sunday
    of
    June.
    This
    idea
    was
    begun
    by
    Mrs
    John
    Bruces
    Dodd,
    who
    in
    1909
    persuaded
    an
    organization
    in
    Washington
    to
    salute
    fathers
    with
    special
    church
    services.
    The
    idea
    was
    officially
    agreed
    to
    by
    President
    Woodrow
    Wilson
    in
    1916.
    In
    1924,
    President
    Calvin
    Coolidge
    suggested
    national
    celebration
    of
    the
    day
    to
    form
    closer
    relations
    between
    fathers
    and
    their
    children,
    and
    to
    impress
    upon
    fathers
    the
    full
    measure
    of
    their
    duties.
    The
    red
    or
    white
    rose
    is
    recognized
    as
    the
    official
    Father’s
    Day
    flower.
    1.
    Father’s
    Day,
    at
    first,
    meant
    ______.
    A.
    to
    respect
    all
    the
    fathers
    B.
    to
    win
    honour
    for
    fathers
    in
    church
    services
    C.
    to
    do
    honour
    to
    fathers
    at
    home
    D.
    to
    warn
    the
    fathers
    of
    their
    duties
    2.
    Father’s
    Day
    was
    first
    celebrated
    by
    _____.
    A.
    the
    French
    B.
    the
    British
    C.
    the
    German
    D.
    the
    American
    3.
    The
    first
    president
    who
    agreed
    to
    Father’s
    Day
    was
    _____.
    A.
    Woodrow
    Wilson
    B.
    Calvin
    Coolidge
    C.
    George
    Washington
    D.
    Abraham
    Lincoln
    4.
    The
    president
    wanted
    Father’s
    Day
    to
    be
    a
    day
    on
    which
    _____.
    A.
    people
    remembered
    their
    fathers
    B.
    the
    relations
    between
    fathers
    and
    their
    children
    became
    closer
    C.
    fathers
    must
    remember
    that
    they
    should
    be
    good
    fathers
    D.
    both
    B
    and
    C
    Keys:
    1.
    A
    2.
    D
    3.
    A
    4.
    D
    高考英语阅读练习(092)
    Few
    can
    refuse
    to
    accept
    the
    strange
    coincidences
    (巧合)
    in
    the
    deaths
    of
    John
    F.
    Kennedy
    and
    Abraham
    Lincoln.
    For
    example,
    Kennedy
    was
    elected
    in
    1960
    while
    Lincoln
    came
    into
    power
    in
    the
    U.S.
    in
    1860.
    Both
    men
    were
    murdered
    from
    behind,
    on
    a
    Friday,
    and
    with
    their
    wives
    present.
    The
    two
    men
    were
    born
    exactly
    one
    hundred
    years
    apart,
    as
    were
    their
    murderers,
    Lee
    Harvey
    Oswald
    and
    John
    Wilkes
    Booth.
    Perhaps
    the
    strangest
    coincidence
    is
    that
    Kennedy’s
    secretary,
    whose
    name
    was
    Lincoln,
    advised
    him
    not
    to
    go
    to
    Dellas
    where
    he
    was
    shot,
    and
    Lincoln’s
    secretary,
    whose
    name
    was
    Kennedy,
    advised
    him
    not
    to
    go
    to
    the
    Ford
    Theater
    where
    he
    met
    his
    death.
    1.
    Both
    of
    the
    two
    men
    _____.
    A.
    were
    presidents
    of
    the
    U.S.
    B.
    were
    elected
    presidents
    of
    the
    U.S.
    twice
    C.
    had
    a
    secretary
    by
    the
    name
    of
    Kennedy
    D.
    were
    murdered
    by
    the
    men
    of
    the
    same
    names.
    2.
    From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    find
    out
    _____.
    A.
    Oswald
    and
    Booth
    were
    of
    an
    age
    B.
    Oswald
    was
    100
    years
    older
    than
    Booth
    C.
    Booth
    was
    100
    years
    younger
    than
    Oswald
    D.
    There
    were
    100
    years
    between
    Oswald
    and
    Booth
    3.
    Abraham
    Lincoln
    and
    john
    F.
    Kennedy
    were
    murdered
    _____.
    A.
    in
    Dellas
    B.
    at
    a
    stadium
    C.
    at
    a
    theater
    D.
    with
    their
    wives
    on
    the
    spot
    4.
    There
    were
    such
    strange
    coincidences
    between
    the
    two
    American
    presidents
    that
    _____.
    A.
    nobody
    can
    accept
    B.
    almost
    everybody
    can
    accept
    C.
    only
    a
    few
    persons
    can
    accept
    D.
    hardly
    anybody
    has
    to
    accept
    Keys:
    1.
    A
    2.
    D
    3.
    D
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(093)
    The
    man
    from
    the
    west
    stopped
    and
    drew
    back
    his
    arm.
    "You’re
    not
    Jimmy
    Wells,"
    he
    said
    in
    a
    quick
    and
    angry
    way,
    "Twenty
    years
    is
    a
    long
    time,
    but
    not
    long
    enough
    to
    change
    a
    man’
    nose
    from
    a
    Roman
    to
    pug."
    "It
    sometimes
    changes
    a
    good
    man
    into
    a
    bad
    one,”
    said
    the
    tall
    man,
    "you’ve
    been
    under
    arrest
    for
    ten
    minutes.
    Silky
    Bob.
    Chicago
    thinks
    you
    may
    have
    dropped
    over
    our
    way
    and
    phones
    us
    she
    wants
    to
    have
    a
    word
    with
    you.
    Going
    quietly,
    are
    you?
    That’s
    sensible.
    Now
    before
    we
    go
    to
    the
    station
    here’s
    a
    note
    I
    was
    asked
    to
    hand
    you.
    You
    may
    read
    it
    here
    at
    the
    window.
    It’s
    from
    Patrolman
    Wells.?"
    The
    man
    from
    the
    West
    opened
    the
    little
    piece
    of
    paper
    handed
    him.
    His
    hand
    was
    steady
    when
    he
    began
    to
    read,
    but
    it
    trembled
    a
    little
    by
    the
    time
    he抎
    finished.
    The
    note
    was
    rather
    short.
    Bob:
    I
    was
    at
    the
    right
    place
    on
    time.
    When
    you
    struck
    the
    match
    to
    light
    your
    cigar
    I
    saw
    it
    was
    the
    face
    wanted
    in
    Chicago.
    Somehow
    I
    couldn’t
    do
    it
    myself,
    so
    I
    went
    around
    and
    got
    a
    plain
    clothes
    man
    (便衣)
    to
    do
    the
    job.
    1.
    The
    man
    from
    the
    West
    must
    have
    broken
    the
    law
    _____.
    A.
    in
    Chicago
    B.
    in
    New
    York
    C.
    in
    his
    hometown
    D.
    somewhere
    else
    2.
    The
    man
    from
    the
    West
    recognized
    the
    tall
    man
    not
    to
    be
    the
    one
    he
    had
    been
    waiting
    for
    because
    the
    tall
    man
    ____.
    A.
    had
    a
    different
    accent
    from
    his
    B.
    had
    a
    different
    nose
    from
    his
    friend’s
    C.
    was
    his
    another
    old
    friend
    D.
    said
    "Chicago
    wants
    to
    talk
    with
    you.?"
    3.
    The
    two
    men
    may
    have
    walked
    _____.
    A.
    for
    ten
    minutes
    B.
    arm
    in
    arm
    C.
    face
    to
    face
    D.
    both
    A
    and
    B
    4.
    We
    can
    suppose
    Jim
    _____.
    A.
    was
    afraid
    of
    the
    man
    from
    the
    West
    B.
    got
    another
    man
    to
    help
    him
    when
    necessary
    C.
    had
    an
    appointment
    with
    Bob
    20
    years
    ago
    D.
    had
    something
    else
    to
    do
    and
    couldn’t
    come
    himself
    Keys:
    1-4
    ABDC
    高考英语阅读练习(094)
    Shopping
    ──bag
    ladies
    don’t
    beg
    publicly,
    but
    they
    do
    not
    refuse
    what
    is
    offered.
    Once
    a
    shopping
    ──bag
    lady
    appears
    where
    you
    live,
    it
    is
    as
    hard
    to
    pass
    her
    by
    without
    giving
    her
    some
    money
    as
    it
    is
    to
    pay
    no
    attention
    to
    the
    collection
    box(功德箱)in
    church.
    And
    although
    you
    may
    not
    like
    it,
    if
    she
    chooses
    your
    doorway
    as
    her
    place
    to
    sleep
    in
    the
    night,
    it
    is
    as
    morally
    hard
    to
    turn
    her
    away
    as
    it
    is
    to
    do
    with
    a
    lost
    dog.
    Most
    shopping
    ──bag
    ladies
    seem
    to
    be
    between
    the
    ages
    of
    40
    and
    65.
    They
    wear
    layers
    (层)
    of
    clothes
    even
    in
    summer
    time,
    with
    newspapers
    filled
    between
    the
    layers
    as
    something
    against
    bad
    weather.
    No
    one
    knows
    how
    many
    shopping
    ──bag
    ladies
    there
    are
    in
    New
    York..
    The
    number
    is
    going
    up.
    Some
    persons
    and
    researchers
    spend
    a
    great
    deal
    of
    time
    taking
    care
    of
    or
    observing
    shopping
    ──bag
    lag
    ladies
    and
    doing
    what
    they
    can
    to
    better
    the
    life
    lady
    hermits
    (隐士)
    who’re
    down.
    1.
    Shopping-bag
    ladies
    are
    _____.
    A.
    lady
    beggars
    B.
    ladies
    who
    sell
    shopping-bags
    C.
    ladies
    who
    make
    shopping-bags
    D.
    those
    who
    go
    hungry
    2.
    They
    fill
    newspapers
    between
    the
    layers
    of
    their
    clothed
    because
    _____.
    A.
    they
    are
    so
    poor
    B.
    they
    have
    no
    place
    to
    put
    them
    C.
    they
    want
    to
    hide
    them
    D.
    they
    have
    to
    use
    them
    to
    keep
    the
    cold
    out
    3.
    They
    fill
    newspapers
    between
    the
    layers
    of
    their
    clothes
    because
    _____.
    A.
    they
    are
    so
    poor
    B.
    they
    have
    no
    place
    to
    put
    them
    C.
    they
    want
    to
    hide
    them
    D.
    they
    have
    to
    use
    them
    to
    keep
    the
    cold
    out
    4.Which
    of
    the
    following
    statements
    is
    not
    true
    ?
    A.
    There
    are
    more
    and
    more
    shopping-bag
    ladies
    in
    the
    United
    States.
    B.
    Shopping-bag
    ladies
    appears
    only
    in
    New
    York.
    C.
    Some
    people
    are
    helping
    shopping-bag
    ladies.
    D.
    Some
    people
    are
    engaged
    in
    their
    research
    on
    these
    shopping-bag
    ladies.
    Keys:
    1-4
    ADDB
    高考英语阅读练习(095)
    No
    one
    could
    have
    failed
    to
    be
    moved
    had
    he
    watched
    the
    live
    televised
    volleyball
    game
    between
    the
    Chinese
    and
    Cuban
    women’s
    teams.
    As
    we
    sat
    before
    the
    television
    set,
    with
    our
    eyes
    fixed
    on
    the
    screen,
    we
    experienced
    every
    kind
    of
    feeling.
    When
    the
    two
    teams
    played
    neck
    and
    neck,
    we
    were
    on
    pins
    and
    needles,
    anxious
    as
    to
    what
    would
    come
    next,
    and
    when
    our
    team
    fell
    behind
    our
    hearts
    were
    in
    our
    mouths.
    Watching
    the
    game
    between
    those
    two
    teams
    is
    not
    only
    a
    matter
    of
    great
    joy.
    For
    more
    than
    that
    it
    provides
    food
    for
    thought.
    Just
    see
    how
    the
    Chinese
    women
    won
    the
    game
    ──by
    their
    co
    ──operation
    (合作),
    by
    their
    excellent
    skill,
    their
    effort
    and
    strong
    will.
    A
    Chinese
    saying
    goes,
    “When
    two
    competent
    opponents
    (比赛的双方)
    meet,
    the
    strong
    ──minded
    one
    will
    win.
    “This
    is
    the
    spirit
    of
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team.
    If
    every
    Chinese
    showed
    some
    of
    the
    spirit,
    never
    losing
    heart
    in
    times
    of
    difficulty
    and
    remaining
    clear
    ──minded
    in
    times
    of
    advantage
    (优势),
    then
    our
    nation
    would
    stand
    in
    the
    vanguard
    (前列)
    of
    the
    world
    family
    of
    nations,
    just
    as
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    has
    done,
    is
    doing
    and
    will
    do.
    1.
    While
    watching
    the
    game,
    we
    _____.
    A.
    had
    feelings
    of
    different
    kind
    B.
    enjoyed
    a
    friendly
    and
    wonderful
    game
    C.
    clapped
    and
    cheered
    only
    for
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    D.
    were
    eager
    to
    know
    what
    would
    happen
    later
    on
    2.
    The
    wonderful
    game
    _____.
    A.
    brought
    us
    great
    joy
    B.
    provided
    us
    with
    food
    for
    our
    thoughts
    C.
    gave
    us
    not
    only
    great
    joy
    but
    also
    food
    for
    thoughts
    D.
    give
    us
    a
    valuable
    amusement
    3.
    The
    author
    believed
    that
    _____.
    A.
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    was
    the
    strongest
    B.
    China
    was
    sure
    to
    become
    stronger
    and
    stronger
    if
    only
    we
    have
    that
    spirit
    of
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    C.
    The
    Chinese
    must
    remain
    clear-minded
    in
    time
    of
    advantage
    D.
    The
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    never
    lost
    heart
    in
    times
    of
    difficulty
    4.
    The
    best
    title
    of
    the
    passage
    might
    be
    _____.
    A.
    Watching
    a
    Close
    Volleyball
    Game
    B.
    The
    Spirit
    of
    the
    Chinese
    Women’s
    Volleyball
    Team
    C.
    Learn
    from
    the
    Members
    of
    the
    Volleyball
    Team
    D.
    The
    Strong
    ──Minded
    Are
    the
    Winners
    B)
    Keys:
    1-4
    ACBD
    高考英语阅读练习(096)
    George
    Banks
    was
    a
    clever
    journalist.
    He
    worked
    for
    a
    good
    newspaper,
    and
    he
    liked
    arguing
    very
    much.
    He
    argued
    with
    anybody,
    and
    about
    anything.
    Sometimes
    the
    people
    whom
    he
    argued
    with
    were
    as
    clever
    as
    he
    was,
    but
    often
    they
    were
    not.
    He
    did
    not
    mind
    arguing
    with
    stupid
    people
    at
    all:
    he
    knew
    that
    he
    could
    never
    persuade
    them
    to
    agree,
    because
    they
    could
    never
    really
    understand
    what
    he
    was
    saying,
    and
    the
    stupider
    they
    were,
    the
    surer
    they
    were
    that
    they
    were
    right;
    but
    he
    often
    found
    that
    stupid
    people
    said
    very
    amusing
    things.
    At
    the
    end
    of
    one
    argument
    which
    George
    had
    with
    one
    of
    these
    less
    clever
    people,
    the
    man
    said
    something
    which
    George
    has
    always
    remembered
    and
    which
    has
    always
    amused
    him.
    It
    was,
    “Well,
    Sir,
    you
    should
    never
    forget
    this:
    there
    are
    always
    three
    answers
    to
    every
    question:
    you
    answer,
    my
    answer,
    and
    the
    correct
    answer.”
    1.
    It
    seemed
    to
    George
    as
    if
    ________.
    A.
    it
    was
    more
    interesting
    to
    argue
    with
    as
    clever
    people
    as
    he
    was
    B.
    it
    was
    more
    interesting
    to
    argue
    with
    clever
    people
    than
    with
    stupid
    ones
    C.
    it
    was
    more
    interesting
    to
    argue
    with
    stupid
    people
    than
    with
    clever
    ones
    D.
    it
    was
    no
    good
    arguing
    with
    stupid
    people 
    2.
    From
    the
    passage
    we
    can
    conclude
    that________.
    A.
    George
    did
    nothing
    but
    argue
    with
    others
    B.
    George
    was
    a
    man
    full
    of
    sense
    of
    humour
    C.
    George
    always
    won
    the
    arguments
    D.
    What
    George
    said
    was
    difficult
    to
    understand 
    3.
    Why
    didn’t
    George
    mind
    arguing
    with
    stupid
    people?
    Because
    ________
    A.
    he
    wanted
    to
    win
    the
    arguments
    B.
    he
    wanted
    to
    make
    the
    arguments
    more
    heated
    C.
    stupid
    people
    could
    be
    easily
    fooled
    D.
    what
    stupid
    people
    said
    could
    often
    give
    him
    greater
    pleasure 
    4.
    What
    one
    of
    the
    stupid
    people
    said
    at
    the
    end
    of
    one
    argument
    could
    be
    considered
    very________.
    A.
    clever
    B.
    stupid
    C.
    strange
    D.
    special
    Keys:
    1.
    C
    2.
    B
    3.
    D
    4.
    A
    高考英语阅读练习(097)
    There
    were
    many
    beautiful
    buildings
    in
    ancient
    Rome,
    but
    the
    living
    conditions
    for
    ordinary
    people
    were
    bad.
    Most
    of
    their
    homes
    were
    so
    poorly
    made
    that
    they
    fell
    down
    or
    were
    fire
    hazards
    (=danger)
    with
    their
    steep,
    narrow
    wooden
    stairways.
    Most
    people
    were
    packed
    into
    apartment
    buildings
    that
    rose
    shakily
    (=unsafely)
    six
    to
    twelve
    floors
    above
    the
    ground.
    The
    apartments
    were
    rooms
    about
    three
    metres
    square,
    and
    each
    building
    housed
    about
    five
    hundred
    people.
    These
    tall
    buildings
    faced
    each
    other
    across
    streets
    only
    three
    metres
    wide,
    so
    no
    sunlight
    reached
    the
    ground.
    Even
    so,
    apartments
    were
    costly,
    though
    cheaper
    places
    could
    be
    had
    outside
    Rome.
    But
    people
    wanted
    to
    be
    near
    their
    work
    and
    entertainment.
    So
    the
    streets
    became
    crowded
    and
    it
    was
    hard
    to
    move
    quickly.
    At
    night,
    the
    streets
    were
    filled
    with
    noise
    as
    food
    and
    supplies
    were
    brought
    into
    the
    city
    on
    wagons
    and
    carts.
    1.
    In
    ancient
    Rome,
    most
    people
    lived
    in
    ________
    apartments.
    A.
    small
    and
    crowded
    B.
    clean
    and
    tidy
    C.
    spacious
    and
    sunny
    D.
    tall
    and
    big 
    2.
    The
    streets
    in
    ancient
    Rome
    were
    ________.
    A.
    crowded
    and
    noisy
    B.
    wide
    and
    bright
    C.
    narrow
    and
    dark
    D.
    both
    A
    and
    C 
    3.
    People
    liked
    to
    live
    in
    Rome
    Because________.
    A.
    the
    apartments
    were
    comfortable
    B.
    the
    living
    expenses
    were
    low
    C.
    they
    have
    no
    money
    to
    build
    houses
    outside
    the
    city
    D.
    they
    wanted
    to
    enjoy
    the
    conveniences
    of
    the
    city 
    3.
    This
    passage
    is
    mainly
    about
    ________
    in
    ancient
    Rome.
    A.
    the
    beautiful
    buildings
    B.
    the
    living
    conditions
    of
    ordinary
    people
    C.
    the
    streets
    and
    transportation
    D.
    the
    food
    and
    daily
    supplies
    Keys:
    1.
    A
    2.
    D
    3.
    D
    4.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(098)
    If
    you
    wish
    to
    become
    a
    better
    reader,
    here
    are
    four
    important
    points
    to
    remember
    about
    rate,
    or
    speed,
    of
    reading:
    1.
    Knowing
    why
    you
    are
    reading—what
    you
    are
    reading
    to
    find
    out—will
    often
    help
    you
    to
    know
    whether
    to
    read
    rapidly
    or
    slowly.
    2.
    Some
    things
    should
    be
    read
    slowly
    throughout.
    Examples
    are
    directions
    for
    making
    or
    doing
    something,
    arithmetic
    problems,
    science
    and
    history
    books,
    which
    are
    full
    of
    important
    information.
    You
    must
    read
    such
    things
    slowly
    to
    remember
    each
    important
    step
    and
    understand
    each
    important
    idea.
    3.
    Some
    things
    should
    be
    read
    rapidly
    throughout.
    Examples
    are
    simple
    stories
    meant
    for
    enjoyment,
    news,
    letters
    from
    friends,
    items,
    or
    bits
    of
    news
    from
    local,
    or
    hometown,
    paper,
    telling
    what
    is
    happening
    to
    friends
    and
    neighbours.
    4.
    In
    some
    of
    your
    readings,
    you
    must
    change
    your
    speed
    from
    fast
    to
    slow
    to
    fast,
    as
    you
    go
    along.
    You
    need
    to
    read
    certain
    pages
    rapidly
    and
    then
    slow
    down
    and
    do
    more
    careful
    readings
    when
    you
    come
    to
    important
    ideas
    which
    must
    be
    remembered.
    1.
    According
    to
    the
    passage,
    your
    reading
    speed
    depends
    on
    ________.
    A.
    whether
    the
    reading
    material
    is
    easy
    or
    difficult
    B.
    what
    you
    are
    reading
    C.
    what
    your
    purpose
    in
    reading
    something
    is
    D.
    both
    B
    and
    C 
    2.
    If
    one
    wants
    to
    be
    relaxed
    by
    reading,
    one
    should
    take
    up
    ________.
    A.
    a
    story
    book
    B.
    a
    book
    on
    science
    and
    technology
    C.
    news,
    letters
    from
    friends
    D.
    some
    material
    full
    of
    information 
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    readings
    should
    you
    read
    slowly
    and
    carefully?
    A.
    Fairy
    tales.
    B.
    Aesop’s
    Fables.
    C.
    Directions
    for
    use
    of
    a
    machine
    D.
    An
    evening
    paper. 
    4.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    can
    best
    express
    the
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.
    How
    to
    decide
    your
    reading
    speed.
    B.
    How
    to
    raise
    your
    reading
    speed.
    C.
    How
    to
    improve
    your
    reading
    skills.
    D.
    How
    to
    choose
    your
    reading
    materials.
    Keys:
    1.
    D
    2.
    A
    3.
    C
    4.
    A
    高考英语阅读练习(099)
    Mr.
    Fitzpatrick
    has
    given
    much
    attention
    to
    his
    “Weight
    reduction”(减轻体重)
    programs.
    Just
    last
    year,
    for
    example,
    when
    he
    was
    the
    main
    speaker
    at
    the
    company
    dinner,
    he
    said
    he
    put
    on
    twenty
    pounds
    instead
    of
    losing
    thirty
    he
    promised
    he
    would.
    The
    year
    before
    that,
    he
    joined
    a
    health
    club.
    He
    exercised
    every
    day
    and
    ate
    less
    food.
    At
    the
    end
    of
    three
    months,
    however,
    he
    began
    making
    excuses
    about
    why
    he
    couldn’t
    go
    there
    more
    often.
    After
    the
    health
    club
    failed
    to
    work,
    he
    joined
    Weight
    Watchers
    but
    stopped
    going
    because
    he
    was
    the
    only
    man
    there.
    And
    he
    hated
    following
    any
    of
    the
    diet
    programs.
    Fitz’s
    latest
    idea
    is
    to
    join
    a
    walking
    club
    to
    “walk
    off”
    the
    weight.
    1.
    Mr.
    Fitzpatrick
    was
    ________
    when
    spoke
    at
    the
    company
    dinner
    last
    year.
    A.
    lighter
    than
    the
    year
    before
    B.
    planning
    to
    go
    on
    a
    diet
    C.
    heavier
    than
    the
    year
    before
    D.
    with
    the
    Weight
    Watchers 
    2.
    He
    did
    not
    stay
    with
    Weight
    Watchers
    because
    ________.
    A.
    he
    couldn’t
    do
    as
    the
    diet
    programs
    required
    him
    B.
    he
    felt
    uncomfortable
    being
    watched
    by
    women
    C.
    the
    members
    of
    Weight
    Watchers
    were
    all
    women
    but
    him
    D.
    both
    A
    and
    C 
    3.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    can
    best
    explain
    the
    main
    idea
    of
    the
    passage?
    A.
    There
    is
    no
    good
    way
    to
    lose
    weight.
    B.
    One
    can
    do
    nothing
    without
    a
    strong
    will.
    C.
    There
    are
    different
    ways
    to
    lose
    weight.
    D.
    Walking
    is
    the
    best
    way
    of
    losing
    weight.
    Keys:
    1.
    C
    2.
    D
    3.
    B
    高考英语阅读练习(100)
    What
    makes
    one
    person
    more
    intelligent
    than
    another?
    What
    makes
    one
    person
    a
    genius,
    like
    the
    brilliant
    Albert
    Einstein,
    and
    another
    person
    a
    fool?
    Are
    people
    born
    intelligent
    or
    stupid,
    or
    is
    intelligence
    the
    result
    of
    where
    and
    how
    you
    live?
    These
    are
    very
    old
    questions
    and
    the
    answers
    to
    them
    are
    still
    not
    clear.
    We
    know,
    however,
    that
    just
    being
    born
    with
    a
    good
    mind
    is
    not
    enough.
    In
    some
    ways,
    the
    mind
    is
    like
    a
    leg
    or
    an
    arm
    muscle.
    It
    needs
    exercise.
    Mental
    (done
    with
    the
    mind)
    exercise
    is
    particularly
    important
    for
    young
    children.
    Many
    child
    psychologists
    (心理学家)
    think
    that
    parents
    should
    play
    with
    their
    children
    more
    often
    and
    give
    them
    problems
    to
    think
    about.
    The
    children
    are
    then
    more
    likely
    to
    grow
    up
    bright
    and
    intelligent.
    If,
    on
    the
    other
    hand,
    children
    are
    left
    alone
    a
    great
    deal
    with
    nothing
    to
    do,
    they
    are
    more
    likely
    to
    become
    dull
    and
    unintelligent.
    Parents
    should
    also
    be
    careful
    with
    what
    they
    say
    to
    young
    children.
    According
    to
    some
    psychologists,
    if
    parents
    are
    always
    telling
    a
    child
    that
    he
    or
    she
    is
    a
    fool
    or
    an
    idiot,
    then
    the
    child
    is
    more
    likely
    to
    keep
    doing
    silly
    and
    foolish
    things.
    So
    it
    is
    probably
    better
    for
    parents
    to
    say
    very
    positive
    (helpful)
    things
    to
    their
    children,
    such
    as
    “That
    was
    a
    very
    clever
    thing
    you
    did.”
    or
    “You
    are
    such
    a
    smart
    child.”
    1.
    The
    words
    “intelligent”
    and
    “brilliant”
    in
    the
    first
    paragraph
    probably
    mean
    _______
    while
    “dull”
    in
    the
    second
    paragraph
    means
    ________.
    A.
    bright
    and
    splendid;
    slow
    in
    thinking
    and
    understanding
    B.
    pretty
    and
    handsome;
    ordinary-looking
    C.
    great
    and
    important;
    common
    D.
    hopeful
    and
    helpful;
    careless 
    2.
    According
    to
    the
    context
    we
    can
    guess
    that
    a
    genius
    is
    ________
    while
    an
    idiot
    is
    ________.
    A.
    a
    normal
    person;
    a
    funny
    person
    B.
    a
    strong
    person;
    a
    weak
    person
    C.
    a
    highly
    intelligent
    person;
    a
    foolish
    or
    weak-minded
    person
    D.
    a
    famous
    person;
    an
    ordinary
    person 
    3.
    A
    person
    ________
    is
    more
    likely
    to
    become
    a
    genius.
    A.
    whose
    parents
    are
    clever
    B.
    often
    thinking
    about
    difficult
    problems
    C.
    often
    helped
    by
    his
    parents
    and
    teachers
    D.
    born
    with
    a
    good
    brain
    and
    putting
    it
    into
    active
    use 
    4.
    It
    is
    better
    for
    parents
    ________.
    A.
    to
    praise
    and
    encourage
    their
    children
    more
    often
    B.
    to
    be
    hard
    on
    their
    children
    C.
    to
    leave
    their
    children
    alone
    with
    nothing
    to
    do
    D.
    to
    give
    their
    children
    as
    much
    help
    as
    possible 
    5.
    Which
    of
    the
    following
    is
    NOT
    true
    according
    to
    the
    article?
    A.
    Parents
    play
    an
    important
    part
    in
    their
    children’s
    growth.
    B.
    The
    less
    you
    use
    your
    mind
    the
    duller
    you
    may
    become.
    C.
    Intelligence
    is
    obviously
    the
    result
    of
    where
    and
    how
    you
    live.
    D.
    What
    makes
    a
    person
    bright
    or
    stupid
    is
    still
    under
    discussion.
    Keys:
    1.
    A
    2.
    C
    3.
    D
    4.
    A
    5.
    C

    选校网
    高考频道
    专业大全
    历年分数线
    上万张大学图片
    大学视频
    院校库
    (按ctrl
    点击打开)

    最新高考英语阅读理解练习题 本文关键词:练习题,阅读理解,高考英语,最新

    最新高考英语阅读理解练习题  来源:网络整理

      免责声明:本文仅限学习分享,如产生版权问题,请联系我们及时删除。


    最新高考英语阅读理解练习题》由:卡耐基范文网整理
    链接地址:http://www.gjknj.com/duwu/348107.html
    转载请保留,谢谢!
  • 下一篇:最后一页